TEACHING IN NURSING AND ROLE OF THE EDUCATOR, [THIRD ed.] 9780826152626, 0826152627

Table of contents :
Cover
Title
Contents
Contributors
Contributors to Earlier Editions
Preface
Instructor Resources
Third Edition and COVID-19
Section I: Nursing Education: Roles of Teacher and Learner
Chapter 1: Role of the Nurse Educator
Objectives
Introduction
Trends Supporting Careers in Nursing Education
Role Preparation
Nurse Educator Competencies
Responsibilities of Nurse Educators
Balancing Role Responsibilities
Faculty Development
Certification
Summary
References
Chapter 2: The Transition From Clinician to Educator
Objectives
Introduction
Historical Perspectives
Transition to the Educator Role
Barriers and Facilitators to a Successful Transition
New Faculty Orientation
Components of New Faculty Orientation
Choosing the Right Work Setting
Summary
References
Chapter 3: Learning Theories
Objectives
Introduction
The Beginning of Learning Theories
What is Learning?
Theories of Learning
Summary
References
Chapter 4: Understanding the Learner
Objectives
Introduction
Learner Attributes
Motivation and Academic Self-Regulation
Teacher–Student Relationships
Students With Disabilities
Summary
References
Section II: Teaching in Nursing
Chapter 5: Learning Environment and Teaching Methods
Objectives
Introduction
Developing a Learning Environment
Selecting Teaching Methods
Resources
Planning for Active Learning
Action and Reflection
Developing Higher Level Thinking
Teaching Methods to Promote Critical Thinking
Teaching Methods
Independent Learning Methods
Small-Group Methods
Large-Class Methods
Summary
References
Chapter 6: Integrating Technology in Education
Objectives
Introduction
Background
The Internet and the Web
Technology Tools: Present and Future
Rethinking the Education Paradigm
Developing Faculty Competencies and Mentoring
Challenges and Opportunities
Summary
References
Chapter 7: Teaching in Online Learning Environments
Objectives
Introduction
Definitions
Advantages and Disadvantages of Online Learning
Prevalence of Online Courses
Successful Online Courses
Successful Online Students
Successful Online Facilitators
Learning Theory
Technology Reports
Overview of Accessible Technology
How to Create Online Learning Environments
How to Teach and Manage Online Learning Environments
Assessment and Evaluation
Summary
References
Chapter 8: Simulations in Nursing Education: Overview, Essentials, and the Evidence
Objectives
Introduction
Different Types of Simulation
Manikin-Based Simulation
Standardized Patients
Augmented Reality, Virtual Reality, and Screen-Based Simulation
Integration of Simulation into Curriculum
Implementation of Simulations
Debriefing
Simulation Evaluation
Developments in Simulation Practices, Research, and Credentialing
Summary
References
Chapter 9: Weaving Interprofessional Education into Nursing Curricula
Objectives
Introduction
Foundational Frameworks
Theoretical Frameworks to Support Interprofessional Education
Curricular Considerations
Learner Considerations
Faculty Role
Didactic Learning
Simulation Learning
Clinical Learning
Evaluation of Interprofessional Education
Summary
References
Section III: Teaching in Learning Laboratory and Clinical Setting
Chapter 10: Learning Laboratories as a Foundation for Nursing Excellence
Objectives
Introduction
Skill Development: Essential Concepts
Phases of Skill Development
Deliberate Practice
Development of Professional Confidence
Role of Faculty, Staff, Teaching Assistants, and Peer Mentors
Expectations for Learners in Laboratory
Integration of Laboratories into Curricula
Types of Learning Laboratories
Laboratory Organization
Learning Modules
Learning Laboratory Sessions
Realism
Supply Bags
Practice Laboratories
Individual Deliberate Practice
Competency Evaluations
Logistics
External Clients
Summary
References
Chapter 11: Clinical Teaching in Nursing
Objectives
Introduction
The Importance of Effective Clinical Teaching
Research Related to Clinical Teaching
Relationships with Students and Staff
Process of Clinical Teaching
Clinical Conferences and Seminars
Cases
Nursing Rounds
Student Presentations
Lab Blitzes
Written Clinical Assignments
Use of Feedback in the Clinical Setting
Summary
References
Chapter 12: Partnerships With Clinical Settings: Roles and Responsibilities of Nurse Educators
Objectives
Introduction
Evolution of Academic–Practice Partnerships
Current Status of Academic–Practice Partnerships
Establishing Meaningful Partnerships
Structural Foundations of Academic–Service Partnerships
Alliance for Clinical Education
Models of Clinical Education
Transition into Practice
Roles of Participants in Partnerships
Sustaining Partnerships
Future of Academic–Practice Partnerhsips
Summary
References
Section IV: Assessment and Evaluation
Chapter 13: Assessment Methods
Objectives
Introduction
Assessment
Evaluation
Grading
Norm- and Criterion-Referenced Interpretation
Outcomes for Assessment
Assessment Methods
Tests
Papers and Other Written Assignments
Writing-To-Learn Activities
Other Written Assignments
Assessment of Papers and Other Written Assignments
Cases
Multimedia for Assessment
Electronic Portfolio
Discussions and Conferences
Group Projects
Simulations
Standardized Patients
Objective Structured Clinical Examination
Self-Evaluation
Summary
References
Chapter 14: Developing and Using Tests
Objectives
Introduction
Assessment Quality of Tests
Test Planning
Test Blueprint
Writing the Test Items
Item-Writing Principles for Specific Item Formats
Assembling the Test
Prepare an Answer Key
Preparing Students to Take Tests
Test Administration
Test and Item Analysis
Summary
References
Chapter 15: Clinical Evaluation
Objectives
Introduction
What Outcomes and Competencies Should be Evaluated?
Clinical Evaluation Process
Selection of Clinical Evaluation Methods
Clinical Evaluation Methods
Other Clinical Evaluation Methods
Grading Clinical Courses
Summary
References
Section V: Curriculum Development and Evaluation of Nursing Program
Chapter 16: Curriculum Development in Nursing
Objectives
Introduction
Needs Assessment
External Frame Factors
Internal Frame Factors
Components of the Curriculum
Mission and Vision Statements
Philosophy and Values
Overall Program Goals and Purpose
Organizational/Conceptual Framework
Implementation Plan
Budget Considerations
Summary
References
Chapter 17: Curriculum Models and Course Development
Objectives
Introduction
Curriculum Models
Curriculum Organization
Interrelation Among Curriculum Components
Course Syllabus: A Tool to Enhance Student Learning
Context in Which the Curriculum Exists
Summary
References
Chapter 18: Program Evaluation and Accreditation
Objectives
Introduction
Program Evaluation Models
Accreditation of Nursing Programs
Regulation of Nursing Programs
Systematic Program Evaluation Plan
Curriculum Evaluation
Evaluation of Teaching
Summary
References
Section VI: Role of Nurse Educator as Scholar
Chapter 19: Evidence-Based Teaching in Nursing
Objectives
Introduction
Evidence-Based Teaching in Nursing: What is it?
Nursing Education Research and Evidence-Based Teaching
Phases of Evidence-Based Teaching
Summary
References
Chapter 20: Becoming a Scholar in Nursing Education
Objectives
Scholarship of Teaching in Nursing
Boyer’s Forms of Scholarship
Conceptualizations of Scholarship of Teaching in Nursing
Scholarship of Teaching: Criteria to be Met
Becoming a Scholar in Nursing Education
Disseminating Your Scholarship
Planning Phase of Writing for Publication
Writing Phase of Writing for Publication
Peer Review Phase of Writing for Publication
Presentations at Conferences and Other Dissemination Methods
Assessment of Scholarship
Teaching Portfolio
Career Development
Summary
References
Section VII: Role of the Educator in Professional Development and Global Education
Chapter 21: Nursing Professional Development Practitioner in a Clinical Practice Setting
Objectives
Introduction
Nursing Professional Development as a Nursing Practice Specialty
Nursing Professional Development Practitioner’s Roles and Responsibilities
Relevance of the Nursing Professional Development Practitioner Role in Healthcare Settings
Developing the Nursing Professional Development Practitioner Role
Summary
References
Chapter 22: Preparing Students for Interprofessional Work in the Global Village: The Role of Nurse Educators
Objectives
Introduction
Major Global Health Challenges
Impact of Globalization on Nursing Practice
Incorporating Global Health in Nursing Programs
Strategies to Integrate Global Health Competencies in Nursing Programs
Promoting a Global Health Focus in Research Initiatives
Summary
References
Appendices
Appendix A: Nursing and Higher Education Organizations
Appendix B: Debriefing Interprofessionally: Recognition and Reflection (DIPRR)
DIPRR I: Values/Ethics for Interprofessional Practice
DIPRR II: Roles and Responsibilities
DIPRR III: Interprofessional Communication
DIPRR IV: Teams and Teamwork
Appendix C: Selected Organizations, Journals, and Educational Conferences of Interest for Nursing Professional Development Practitioners
C.1 Organizations
C.2 Journals
C.3 Education Conferences
Appendix D: Global Health Educational Resources
D.1 Sample Listing of Free Online Global Health Courses or Modules
D.2 Sample Listing of Websites with Global Health Teaching Resources
D.3 Selected Organizations that Provide Resources on Global Health or Global Nursing
Index

Citation preview

Marilyn H. Oermann Jennie C. De Gagne Beth Cusatis Phillips EDITORS

TEACHING in NURSING and ROLE of the EDUCATOR The Complete Guide to Best Practice in Teaching, Evaluation, and Curriculum Development THIRD EDITION

See Code Inside

Teaching in Nursing and Role of the Educator

Marilyn H. Oermann, PhD, RN, ANEF, FAAN, is the Thelma M. Ingles Professor of Nursing at Duke University School of Nursing, Durham, North Carolina. She is the author/coauthor of 23 nursing education books and many articles on teaching and evaluation in nursing, and on writing for publication. She is the Editor-in-Chief of Nurse Educator and the Journal of Nursing Care Quality and is past editor of the Annual Review of Nursing Education. Dr. Oermann received the National League for Nursing Award for Excellence in Nursing Education Research, Sigma Theta Tau International Elizabeth Russell Belford Award for Excellence in Education, American Association of Colleges of Nursing Scholarship of Teaching and Learning Excellence Award, and Margaret Comerford Freda Award for Editorial Leadership in Nursing from the International Academy of Nursing Editors. Jennie C. De Gagne, PhD, DNP, RN, NPD-BC, CNE, ANEF, FAAN, is a professor at Duke University School of Nursing, Durham, North Carolina. She has provided ­consultation to a variety of nursing schools, including in South Korea, Ghana, South Africa, India, Saudi Arabia, and Oman, on program development, continuing educa­tion, and faculty development. As an expert in educational technology and online education, Dr. De Gagne has focused her research on effective use of instructional technology as well as cybercivility in nursing education across the curriculum and guidelines. Her scholarly work includes nearly 150 authored or coauthored publications, 75 of them in peer-reviewed journals, and more than 100 national and international presentations. Beth Cusatis Phillips, PhD, RN, CNE, CHSE, is an associate professor and the Director of the Institute for Educational Excellence at Duke University School of Nursing. She has 25 years of teaching experience at the undergraduate level and also teaches at the master’s level in nursing education. Dr. Phillips is a proponent for innovation in teaching and preparing the new generation of nurses for the future. Dr.  Phillips presents nationally and internationally on nursing education topics including faculty development, new faculty onboarding, and curricular innovations. She is actively engaged in the International Society for Professional Identity in Nursing and serves on several national advisory boards and committees on ­nursing education.

Teaching in Nursing and Role of the Educator The Complete Guide to Best Practice in Teaching, Evaluation, and Curriculum Development Third Edition Marilyn H. Oermann, PhD, RN, ANEF, FAAN Jennie C. De Gagne, PhD, DNP, RN, NPD-BC, CNE, ANEF, FAAN

Beth Cusatis Phillips, PhD, RN, CNE, CHSE Editors

Copyright © 2022 Springer Publishing Company, LLC All rights reserved. First Springer Publishing edition 2015; subsequent edition 2018 No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior permission of Springer Publishing Company, LLC, or authorization through payment of the appropriate fees to the Copyright Clearance Center, Inc., 222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, 978-750-8400, fax 978-646-8600, [email protected] or on the Web at www.copyright.com. Springer Publishing Company, LLC 11 West 42nd Street, New York, NY 10036 www.springerpub.com connect.springerpub.com/ Acquisitions Editor: Joseph Morita Compositor: Diacritech ISBN: 978-0-8261-5262-6 ebook ISBN: 978-0-8261-5263-3 DOI: 10.1891/9780826152633 Qualified instructors may request Instructor Resources by emailing [email protected] Instructor’s PowerPoints ISBN: 978-0-8261-5265-7 Instructor’s Manual ISBN: 978-0-8261-5264-0 21 22 23 24 / 5 4 3 2 1 The author and the publisher of this Work have made every effort to use sources believed to be reliable to provide information that is accurate and compatible with the standards generally accepted at the time of publication. The author and publisher shall not be liable for any special, consequential, or exemplary damages resulting, in whole or in part, from the readers’ use of, or reliance on, the information contained in this book. The publisher has no responsibility for the persistence or accuracy of URLs for external or third-party Internet websites referred to in this publication and does not guarantee that any content on such websites is, or will remain, accurate or appropriate. Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Marilyn H. Oermann: 0000-0002-4534-8962 Jennie C. De Gagne: 0000-0001-9814-5942 Publisher’s Note: New and used products purchased from third-party sellers are not guaranteed for quality, authenticity, or access to any included digital components. Printed in the United States of America.

Contents Contributors  ix Contributors to Earlier Editions   xi Preface  xiii Instructor Resources  xix Third Edition and COVID-19   xxi

SECTION I: NURSING EDUCATION: ROLES OF TEACHER AND LEARNER 1. Role of the Nurse Educator   3 Marilyn H. Oermann 2. The Transition From Clinician to Educator   17 Anne M. Schoening 3. Learning Theories   31 Beth Cusatis Phillips 4. Understanding the Learner   43 Beth Cusatis Phillips

SECTION II: TEACHING IN NURSING 5. Learning Environment and Teaching Methods   63 Debra Hagler and Brenda Morris 6. Integrating Technology in Education   93 Jennie C. De Gagne 7. Teaching in Online Learning Environments   113 Jennie C. De Gagne 8. Simulations in Nursing Education: Overview, Essentials, and the Evidence  133 Pamela R. Jeffries, Kristina T. Dreifuerst, and Katie A. Haerling 9. Weaving Interprofessional Education into Nursing Curricula   159 Karen T. Pardue, Shelley Cohen Konrad, and Dawne-Marie Dunbar

vi

■

Contents

SECTION III: TEACHING IN A LEARNING LABORATORY AND CLINICAL SETTING 10. Learning Laboratories as a Foundation for Nursing Excellence   183 Carol F. Durham and Darlene E. Baker 11. Clinical Teaching in Nursing   209 Lisa K. Woodley and JoAn M. Stanek 12. Partnerships with Clinical Settings: Roles and Responsibilities of Nurse Educators  231 Karen L. Gorton

SECTION IV: ASSESSMENT AND EVALUATION 13. Assessment Methods  Marilyn H. Oermann

 

257

14. Developing and Using Tests   281 Kathleen B. Gaberson 15. Clinical Evaluation   305 Marilyn H. Oermann

SECTION V: CURRICULUM DEVELOPMENT AND EVALUATION OF NURSING PROGRAM 16. Curriculum Development in Nursing   321 Stephanie Stimac DeBoor 17. Curriculum Models and Course Development   343 Theresa M. “Terry” Valiga 18. Program Evaluation and Accreditation   357 Marilyn H. Oermann

SECTION VI: ROLE OF NURSE EDUCATOR AS SCHOLAR 19. Evidence-Based Teaching in Nursing   377 Marilyn H. Oermann 20. Becoming a Scholar in Nursing Education   395 Marilyn H. Oermann

Contents

■

vii

SECTION VII: ROLE OF THE EDUCATOR IN PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT AND GLOBAL EDUCATION 21. Nursing Professional Development Practitioner in a Clinical Practice Setting  411 Joan Such Lockhart and Denise M. Petras 22. Preparing Students for Interprofessional Work in the Global Village: The Role of Nurse Educators   433 C. Ann Gakumo, Sabreen A. Darwish, and Martha A. Dawson

APPENDICES Appendix A: Nursing and Higher Education Organizations   453 Appendix B: Debriefing Interprofessionally: Recognition and Reflection (DIPRR)   459 Appendix C: Selected Organizations, Journals, and Educational Conferences of Interest for Nursing Professional Development Practitioners   469 Appendix D: Global Health Educational Resources    473 Index  477

Contributors Darlene E. Baker, MSN, RN, CNE, CHSE  Assistant Director, ­EducationInnovation-Simulation Learning Environment, School of Nursing, University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, Chapel Hill, North Carolina Sabreen A. Darwish, PhD, MSN, RN  Research Assistant, College of Nursing and Health Sciences, University of Massachusetts Boston, Boston, Massachusetts Martha A. Dawson, DNP, RN, FACHE  Associate Professor, University of Alabama at Birmingham School of Nursing, Birmingham, Alabama Jennie C. De Gagne, PhD, DNP, RN, NPD-BC, CNE, ANEF, FAAN  Professor, Duke University School of Nursing, Durham, North Carolina Stephanie Stimac DeBoor, PhD, APRN, ACNS-BC, CCRN  Associate Professor and Associate Dean of Graduate Programs, Orvis School of Nursing, University of Nevada, Reno, Reno, Nevada Kristina T. Dreifuerst, PhD, RN, CNE, ANEF, FAAN  Associate Professor and Director PhD Program, College of Nursing, Marquette University, Milwaukee, Wisconsin Dawne-Marie Dunbar, MSN/Ed, RN, CNE, CHSE  Clinical Professor of Nursing, Director of Clinical Simulation, Westbrook College of Health Professions, University of New England, Portland, Maine Carol F. Durham, EdD, RN, ANEF, FAAN  Professor, Director, EducationInnovation-Simulation Learning Environment, School of Nursing, University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, Chapel Hill, North Carolina Kathleen B. Gaberson, PhD, RN, CNOR, CNE, ANEF  Owner and Nursing Education Consultant, OWK Consulting, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania C. Ann Gakumo, PhD, RN  Associate Professor and Department Chair of Nursing, University of Massachusetts Boston, Boston, Massachusetts Karen L. Gorton, PhD, MS, FNP, RN  Associate Professor, School of Nursing and Health Studies, University of Missouri–Kansas City, Kansas City, Missouri

x

■

Contributors

Katie A. Haerling, PhD, RN  Associate Professor, School of Nursing and Healthcare Leadership, University of Washington Tacoma, Tacoma, Washington Debra Hagler, PhD, RN, ACNS-BC, CNE, CHSE, ANEF, FAAN  Clinical Professor, Edson College of Nursing and Health Innovation, Arizona State University, Phoenix, Arizona Pamela R. Jeffries, PhD, RN, ANEF, FAAN  Professor, Dean, School of Nursing, George Washington University, Washington, DC Shelley Cohen Konrad, PhD, LCSW, FANP  Professor and Director, School of Social Work, Director, Center for Excellence in Collaborative Education, University of New England, Portland, Maine Joan Such Lockhart, PhD, RN, CNE, ANEF, FAAN  Professor and Director, MSN Nursing Education Program, Duquesne University School of Nursing, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania Brenda Morris, EdD, MS, RN, CNE  Clinical Professor, Edson College of Nursing and Health Innovation, Arizona State University, Phoenix, Arizona Marilyn H. Oermann, PhD, RN, ANEF, FAAN  Thelma M. Ingles Professor of Nursing, Duke University School of Nursing, Durham, North Carolina Karen T. Pardue, PhD, RN, CNE, FNAP, ANEF  Professor of Nursing, Dean, Westbrook College of Health Professions, University of New England, Portland, Maine Denise M. Petras, DNP, RN, NPD-BC  Director, Professional Practice and Education and Magnet®, Allegheny General Hospital, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania Beth Cusatis Phillips, PhD, RN, CNE, CHSE  Associate Professor, Duke University School of Nursing, Durham, North Carolina Anne M. Schoening, PhD, RN, CNE  Associate Professor, Assistant Dean for Faculty Development, Creighton University College of Nursing, Omaha, Nebraska JoAn M. Stanek, DNP, RN, ANP  Assistant Professor, School of Nursing, University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, Chapel Hill, North Carolina Theresa M. “Terry” Valiga, EdD, RN, CNE, ANEF, FAAN  Professor Emerita, Duke University School of Nursing, Durham, North Carolina Lisa K. Woodley, PhD, MSN, RN, CNE, CHPN  Associate Professor, School of Nursing, University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, Chapel Hill, North Carolina

Contributors to Earlier Editions Donna L. Boland, PhD, RN, ANEF Jamie L. Conklin, MSLIS Helen B. Connors, PhD, RN, FAAN, ANEF Katherine Foss, MSN, RN Betsy Frank, PhD, RN, ANEF Amy C. Pettigrew, PhD, RN, CNE, ANEF Sarah B. Keating, EdD, RN, FAAN Kathy Tally, MS Lynda Wilson, PhD, RN

Preface There is a critical need to prepare nurses for roles as educators in schools of nursing and healthcare settings. This book, in its third edition, is written to meet that need: It is a comprehensive text that provides, under one cover, essential concepts for effective teaching in nursing and carrying out other dimensions of the educator role. The book begins with a description of the role of a faculty member in a school of nursing and nurse educator in other settings. A new chapter examines the transition from clinician to educator, barriers and facilitators to the transition process, and strategies to facilitate this transition. Other chapters describe theories of learning; teaching methods, including integrating technology in teaching; teaching in online environments, simulation, learning laboratories, and clinical settings; interprofessional education; developing partnerships with clinical agencies; and preparing graduates to contribute to global health. Nurse educators also need to assess learning and performance, and for this reason the book includes chapters on assessment, testing, and clinical evaluation. Teachers in nursing should understand the curriculum and how it is developed and evaluated, also explained in this book. There is a new chapter in this edition on program evaluation and accreditation of nursing programs. Another new chapter describes the roles and responsibilities of Nursing Professional Development (NPD) practitioners in healthcare settings; these nurse educators help employees to become and remain competent in their roles. It is important in nursing education that teachers use evidence to guide their educational practices and develop their scholarship; those areas are addressed in the last section of the book. Chapters are written by leading experts who integrate research findings and other evidence in their chapters. The book was written for students in master’s, doctor of nursing practice (DNP), and PhD nursing programs who are preparing themselves for a teaching role; nurses in clinical settings who are transitioning into nurse educator roles or are teaching students in addition to their practice positions; students and nurses learning about nursing education through continuing education and certificate programs; and novice and experienced teachers who want to expand their knowledge about teaching and gain new ideas for their courses. If students are taking only one or two nursing education courses in their graduate program, this book will be of particular value because of its comprehensiveness. Chapters provide the background and understanding needed for certification as a Certified Nurse Educator (CNE®). One of the goals was to prepare a scholarly book on teaching in nursing that is also practical, and the chapters are written with that goal in mind. Nurse educators are employed in academic institutions and in healthcare and other types of settings. They educate nursing students at all levels, and in healthcare

xiv

■

Preface

settings they are responsible for providing continuing education and training. Many clinicians also teach nursing students in the clinical setting as part of their role, serving as preceptors and clinical nurse educators. Chapter 1 discusses trends supporting careers in nursing education, role of the nurse educator in a school of nursing, and the educational preparation needed for a faculty role and for educator roles in healthcare settings. A later chapter (21) examines the role and responsibilities of educators in NPD. Competencies and responsibilities of nurse educators and certification are examined in the chapter. The transition from clinician to nurse educator is rarely easy. Most novice educators assume an academic or a professional development role without formal preparation in nursing education. Chapter 2 examines the transition from clinician to educator, barriers and facilitators to the transition process, and strategies to facilitate this transition. The Nurse Educator Transition Model and core competencies of nurse educators provide a framework for understanding the process that occurs during the role transition from nurse to nurse educator. The chapter includes resources to help novice educators gain competence in their new role. Understanding how students learn is essential for effective teaching. Chapter 3 describes theories of learning: behaviorism, cognitivism, social cognitivism, humanism, constructivism, brain-based learning, and technology-mediated learning. For each of these theories, related teaching methods are identified. Understanding learners is an important component of quality teaching. Nurse educators need an understanding of the varied attributes of students, which can affect their learning process and outcomes; students’ culture; and their learning style preferences—the way in which students approach a particular learning situation. Chapter 4 examines varied attributes of nursing students, learner differences that can influence what and how we teach, and multiple strategies nurse educators can use that take into consideration these different characteristics. Chapter 5 describes the teacher’s role in developing a supportive learning environment and using a variety of teaching methods, with guidance for selecting methods to fit the intended learning outcomes, learner characteristics, and available resources. This chapter describes teaching methods for use in nursing education. Teaching methods are considered in relation to supporting learner development in the cognitive, affective, and psychomotor learning domains. Strategies are described for incorporating active learning and for promoting critical thinking. The rapid advances and constant pace of change in technology create challenges and opportunities for teaching and learning. Successful integration of technology in the nursing curriculum requires new competencies for the teacher as the technology continues to evolve. Chapter 6 focuses on technology integration that supports achievement of learning outcomes with attention to curriculum and classroom alignment. The chapter guides nurse educators in exploring and embracing technology tools that support good teaching practices. Teaching online is not the same as teaching in a classroom. Chapter 7 focuses on the differences between teaching in the traditional classroom and teaching online. The roles of the facilitator and the student are discussed in relation to pedagogy, course content, teaching strategies, reconceptualizing and designing online learning environments, interacting online, and using technology to teach and learn. Traditionally, simulations have been used to provide opportunities for students to practice patient care in a safe environment before going into the clinical setting. However, in the current environment of increasing patient acuity and limited clinical

Preface

■

xv

placements, simulation serves a broader role as an adjunct or replacement for traditional clinical experiences. Chapter 8 provides an overview of types of simulations in nursing and how to integrate them into a nursing curriculum. Debriefing approaches, evaluation processes to use when developing and implementing clinical simulations, and evidence on the use of clinical simulations are discussed in this chapter. The transformation of healthcare, coupled with alarming patient care outcome data, is heralding a new mandate to prepare nurses for collaborative team-based models of care. This educational reform presents a challenge, as the configuration of most nursing, medicine, and allied health programs reflects singular siloed programs of study. Such design results in nursing and healthcare profession graduates who have limited knowledge of what their respective colleagues do and insufficient skill and experience in interprofessional communication and working together on teams. Chapter 9 examines the content and processes for weaving interprofessional education into nursing curricula. Foundational frameworks are provided, along with examples of didactic, simulation, and clinical learning experiences that promote collaborative practice capabilities. Skills acquisition is an important component of nursing education, beginning early in the curriculum and continuing throughout the nursing program. Learning laboratories provide a safe environment for initial psychomotor skills acquisition while offering opportunities to socialize students into the professional role of a nurse. Chapter 10 examines phases of skill development, deliberate practice, and development of professional confidence; roles of the teacher, staff, mentors, and others in the learning laboratory; expectations for learners; types of learning laboratories and their integration into the curriculum; competency evaluations; and other important topics. The chapter is comprehensive and also describes laboratory organization and management. The clinical teacher plays a pivotal role in shaping learning for nursing students in the clinical setting. Because of this, it is essential that clinical teachers exhibit effective teaching behaviors, use best practices in teaching, and inspire students. Chapter 11 explains why effective clinical teaching is so critical and the process of clinical teaching. The chapter includes how to create a learning climate that is supportive to students, how to foster effective relationships in the clinical setting, how to design an effective clinical orientation, and how to choose clinical assignments for students. Academic–practice partnerships exist at several levels for the purpose of preparing the nursing workforce to meet nursing practice realities and contemporary healthcare challenges. Chapter 12 provides guidelines for establishing and sustaining meaningful partnerships between education and practice to stimulate collaborative models of clinical nursing education. The chapter includes a discussion of the importance of academic–practice partnerships, characteristics of meaningful partnerships, roles and responsibilities of the nurse educator and collaborating practice partners, and developing and evaluating partnerships. Models of clinical education including interprofessional education partnerships, peer teaching, service learning, the clinical scholar model, and dedicated education units are also described in the chapter. Through the process of assessment, the teacher collects information about student learning and performance. With this information, the teacher can determine further learning needs, plan learning activities to meet those needs, and confirm the outcomes and competencies met by the students. Chapter 13 explains assessment,

xvi

■

Preface

evaluation, and grading in nursing education. Methods are described for assessing learning, with examples of these methods. Tests are a common assessment method used in nursing education, and varied types of test items are described in Chapter 14. A test must produce relevant and consistent results to form the basis for sound inferences about what learners know and can do. Good planning, careful test construction, proper administration, accurate scoring, and sound interpretation of scores are essential for producing useful test results. This chapter describes the process of planning, constructing, administering, scoring, and analyzing tests. Various types of test items are presented with examples of each item. As students learn about nursing, they develop their knowledge base, higher level thinking skills, and a wide range of clinical competencies essential for patient care. Learning concepts in a classroom or an online environment is not sufficient: Students need to apply those concepts and other knowledge to clinical situations and be proficient in carrying out care. Teachers guide student learning in the clinical setting and evaluate their performance in practice. Chapter 15 describes the clinical evaluation process, the importance of giving prompt, specific, and instructional feedback to students as they are learning, principles that are important when observing and rating performance, and grading clinical practice. It is vital that nurse educators take into account the context in which teaching takes place. Often, both new and experienced teachers focus on the specific content of the classes they teach and lose sight of the outcomes and how they relate to the overall program. Chapter 16 describes the processes for curriculum development or revision in schools of nursing and educational programs in healthcare settings. The chapter reviews the factors that influence nursing education programs and curricula and provides guidelines for collecting and analyzing data to make informed decisions about revising or developing curricula. Nurse educators are expected to implement the approved curriculum. The curriculum enables students to meet the program outcomes, but to achieve that goal, the curriculum has to be internally consistent for students and implemented as designed. Chapter 17, which builds on the prior chapter, examines various models for curriculum design, components of the curriculum, and their relationship to one another. The chapter also includes a discussion of the course syllabus, its development, and why the syllabus is important in teaching. Through program evaluation, faculty, administrators, and others involved in the evaluation process collect the data needed to make informed decisions and determine the effectiveness of the program in meeting its goals and achieving important outcomes. Chapter 18 explains program evaluation in nursing and the development of a systematic program evaluation plan for a school of nursing. Discussion is included on accreditation of nursing programs, types of and standards for accreditation, differences between regulation and accreditation, and curriculum and teacher evaluation. Evidence-based teaching is the use of research findings and other evidence to guide educational decisions and practices. Available evidence should be used when developing the curriculum and courses, selecting teaching methods and approaches to use with students, and planning learning activities for students. Chapter 19 describes evidence-based teaching in nursing, phases of evidence-based teaching, evaluating nursing education research, and a process for evidence-based teaching. The role of the nurse educator includes more than teaching, assessing learning, and developing courses: It also includes scholarship and contributing to the

Preface

■

xvii

development of nursing education as a science. Scholars in nursing education question and search for new ideas; they debate and think beyond how it has always been done. For the teacher’s work to be considered as scholarship, it needs to be public, peer-reviewed, and critiqued, and shared with others so they can build on that work. Chapter 20 examines scholarship in nursing education and developing one’s role as a scholar. Because of the importance of dissemination to scholarship, the chapter includes a description of the process of writing for publication and other strategies for dissemination. In most settings in which nurse educators work, the quality of their teaching, scholarship, service, and clinical practice, if relevant, is assessed by students, peers, administrators, and formal committees. This evaluation, including the use of teaching portfolios, is discussed in the chapter. Nurse educators employed in clinical practice settings, such as hospitals and healthcare systems, are referred to as NPD practitioners or by similar titles. These nurse educators are charged with helping employees to become and remain competent in their roles. Similar to academic educators, NPD practitioners follow a set of core competencies. Their targeted learners vary depending on their role, but most often are nursing professionals. A new chapter (21) describes the role and responsibilities of NPD practitioners, their scope and standards of practice, the importance of their role in clinical practice settings, and suggested pathways to prepare for, transition to, and develop in the NPD practitioner role. In today’s increasingly globalized and complex world, nurse educators are in unique positions to prepare students as global citizens who can contribute to global health. Accordingly, schools of nursing should be involved in curriculum changes and pedagogical approaches that support students and faculty and integrate global perspectives across the curriculum. Focusing on the role of nurse educators in global education and preparing nurses for interprofessional work in the globalized world, this last chapter in the book, Chapter 22, examines major global health challenges and the impact of globalization on nursing and provides recommendations for incorporating global health in nursing education programs. The chapter also describes strategies for integrating global health competencies in nursing programs that educators can use to ensure that graduates are prepared to contribute to global health. In addition to this book, we have provided Instructor Resources that include a sample course syllabus; chapter-based PowerPoint presentations; and readyto-use modules for an online course (with chapter summaries, student learning ­activities, discussion forum questions, online resources, and assessment strategies). The ­editors at Springer Publishing, Adrianne Brigido and Joseph Morita, deserve a ­special acknowledgment for their continued support, enthusiasm, and commitment to nursing education. Marilyn H. Oermann Jennie C. De Gagne Beth Cusatis Phillips

Instructor Resources Teaching in Nursing and Role of the Educator, Third Edition, includes quality resources for the instructor. Faculty who have adopted the text may gain access to these resources by emailing [email protected]. Instructor resources include: ■

Sample Course Syllabus

■

Online Course with 22 Modules

■

Each Module Includes:

■

■

Chapter Summaries

■

Student Learning Activities

■

Discussion Questions

■

Online Resources

■

Assessment Strategies

PowerPoint Presentations for Lecture

Third Edition and COVID-19 The global pandemic has had an enormous impact on the world, and this is especially true in nursing education. Nursing faculty and students had to adapt to a completely online environment, which brought up challenges and frustrations. The following information in this third edition is particularly apt for issues that have been first and forefront during this pandemic.

LEARNING ENVIRONMENT AND TEACHING METHODS Chapter 5: This chapter on teaching methods explains how to use these methods in an online environment as well as in the classroom.

TEACHING ONLINE These two chapters focus on online teaching and the use of technology in the most efficient, student-friendly way: Chapter 6: Integrating Technology in Education Chapter 7: Teaching in Online Learning Environments

SIMULATIONS IN NURSING EDUCATION Chapter 8: This chapter includes content on augmented reality, virtual reality, and screen-based simulations that provide seemingly endless possibilities for innovative teaching and learning online.

I Nursing Education: Roles of Teacher and Learner

1 Role of the Nurse Educator Marilyn H. Oermann

OBJECTIVES 1. Describe the roles and responsibilities of nurse educators in academic and healthcare settings 2. Compare educational requirements for nurse educators in different employment settings 3. Describe the competencies of nurse educators for effective teaching

INTRODUCTION Several recent reports have highlighted the need for more nurse educators. Nurse educators teach in academic institutions and in a variety of healthcare agencies. They educate nursing students at all levels, from certified nursing assistants (CNAs) to doctorally prepared current and future nurse educators, clinicians, and researchers. Nursing professional development practitioners teach in healthcare settings and are responsible for providing nurses and other healthcare professionals with orientation and continuing education and training. This chapter describes the role of the nurse educator, educational preparation, nurse educator competencies and responsibilities, and certification.

TRENDS SUPPORTING CAREERS IN NURSING EDUCATION Nursing shortages are cyclical and affected by economic conditions, population growth, the aging of the population, changes in healthcare financing, and other factors. In some healthcare settings and geographic regions, there is a high turnover of nurses, which adds to the shortage. The U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics (2020) projects a 12% growth of RNs through 2028 but not enough of a growth to meet the need for nurses, particularly with older nurses retiring. Though the number of nurses younger than 30 has increased due to an upsurge in persons choosing careers in nursing, the average age of nearly half (47.5%) of all RNs is 50 years or older (U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Health Resources and Services Administration, National Center for Health Workforce Analysis, 2019). The retirement of these nurses will not only result in the loss of experienced RNs in the workforce but also will have an impact on the supply of nurses in future years.

4  ■ I. Nursing Education: Roles of Teacher and Learner

Many factors will continue to affect the demand and supply of the nursing workforce, including the impact of a nurse educator shortage on ­student enrollment in nursing education programs. Despite an increase in students enrolling in and graduating from nursing programs in the United States, greater demand for healthcare will require even more nurses to deliver those needed services. As a result, more faculty in academic and service settings will be needed to educate nursing personnel to fulfill current and future roles within the healthcare system. To maintain an adequate supply of nurses, schools of nursing need qualified faculty to teach those students. One current issue, which is projected to worsen in future years, is the aging of the nursing faculty workforce. The percentage of fulltime nursing faculty who are 60 years and older has continued to increase. Fang and Kesten (2017) projected that the total retirements of nursing faculty through 2025 would represent one third of faculty currently teaching in schools of nursing in 2015. These retirements are having and will continue to have a significant impact on schools because generally these faculty are doctorally prepared and at a senior rank. Not only are nursing faculty aging, with many projected to retire in upcoming years, but a nursing faculty shortage exists. In 2019, the American Association of Colleges of Nursing (AACN) reported that 1,715 faculty positions were vacant in colleges and universities offering baccalaureate and graduate degrees in nursing. Barriers to hiring more full-time faculty included insufficient funds (62.1%), inability to recruit faculty because of competition (30.0%), and lack of qualified nurse educators in the geographic region (25.0%). Academic nurse educators are not the only educators needed to meet the needs of the healthcare delivery system. Nursing professional development generalists and specialists in healthcare settings are also vital. A rapidly changing healthcare delivery system requires those in the workforce to keep abreast of new knowledge and skills, changing standards of practice, technologies, and regulatory requirements. Educators in healthcare settings play a key role in helping nursing and other staff members keep up-to-date with these changes. These educators may need to innovate as organizations merge, creating challenges in merging cultures and practices (Harper & Bindon, 2020). Chapter 21 explores the role of the nurse educator in professional development. Prospects of long-term employment for nurse educators across all education and practice settings are excellent. By choosing a career as a nurse educator, one has the opportunity to teach learners across varied types of nursing programs from shortterm training for nursing assistants to teaching students at the doctoral level, orienting and onboarding new nurses, and keeping nurses and other healthcare providers up-to-date and competent for care of patients.

ROLE PREPARATION Educational Preparation for Academic Employment Nursing education occurs across the spectrum of educational settings. In the United States, preparation for the NCLEX-RN® occurs in community colleges at the associate degree level, at the diploma level in hospital schools of nursing, and in colleges and universities that award bachelor’s, master’s, and doctoral degrees. The RNs

1. Role of the Nurse Educator  ■ 5

from these programs work across a range of healthcare institutions. Increasingly, however, healthcare agencies are requiring their staff to be baccalaureate prepared or working on a BSN degree. The Institute of Medicine’s Future of Nursing report called for 80% of the nursing workforce to be prepared at the baccalaureate degree level or higher by the year 2020 (Institute of Medicine, 2011). Although this goal has not yet been met, barriers for achieving a BSN are being removed, and nurses with associate degrees are returning to school in greater numbers than in years past. Most practical nursing programs, referred to as vocational nursing programs in a few states, and some CNA programs also take place in community college settings. Many of these occur in career ladder education programs leading to an associate degree in nursing. Academic credentials for nurse educators employed in postsecondary institutions are set by state Boards of Nursing and accreditation agencies. For example, the Commission on Collegiate Nursing Education (CCNE), an agency that accredits baccalaureate and higher degree nursing programs, requires that faculty are academically prepared for the courses and areas in which they teach and have a graduate degree (CCNE, 2018). The Accreditation Commission for Education in Nursing (ACEN) provides accreditation for all levels of nursing education programs, including doctor of nursing practice (DNP), master’s/postmaster’s certificate, baccalaureate, associate, diploma, and practical nursing programs. The 2017 accreditation standards indicate that nursing faculty should have the educational qualifications and experience required by the school of nursing and its governing organization, and the state in which the nursing program is located. Nursing faculty need to be qualified to teach the assigned courses (ACEN, 2017). The ACEN also accredits practical nursing programs and has the same standard for nurse faculty. The National League for Nursing (NLN) Commission for Nursing Education Accreditation (CNEA), the third accrediting agency in nursing education, indicates that nurse faculty at all program levels should be qualified by education, professional credentials, and experience for their assigned teaching responsibilities. They also should meet state and other agency qualifications. The goal is for schools of nursing to employ full- and part-time faculty with a graduate degree in nursing or a relevant field that relates to their teaching role and responsibilities (NLN CNEA, 2016). The educational path one chooses depends on the type of nursing program in which one desires to teach. Community colleges, colleges, and universities often have specific degree requirements for employment. For example, colleges and universities in which nursing faculty are expected to conduct research and produce scholarship typically require a PhD degree for tenure track positions, which have some guarantee of permanency once the faculty member meets certain requirements. Tenure track faculty in these institutions conduct research and engage in scholarship, teach students, and participate in service. PhD programs prepare nurses as scientists with the knowledge and competencies to conduct research. Many colleges and universities also have clinical or teaching tracks, which are nontenure tracks and have different requirements for faculty. With nontenure tracks, faculty may have yearly or multiyear contracts for employment versus a permanent position that accompanies tenure. Typically, their role focuses on teaching, clinical practice, and service, with some scholarship. Full-time clinical and teaching appointments may require a PhD, DNP, or MSN.

6  ■ I. Nursing Education: Roles of Teacher and Learner

Universities that do not have high research missions may have tenure track appointments for faculty with DNPs, EdD, and other degrees. When making a decision about a doctoral program, it is critical to think carefully about the focus of one’s career. If the goal is to conduct research, and the activities associated with that such as submitting grants and manuscripts, then a PhD in nursing is the most appropriate educational program. If the goal is to focus more on clinical practice, then a DNP program might be a better choice since these programs prepare nurses for advanced practice roles and as clinical scholars. Full- or part-time clinical teaching positions require a master’s degree, although in associate degree and LPN programs, only a BSN may be needed. The type of degree required for a faculty position varies across schools of nursing because of differences in the missions of the schools and requirements for faculty positions. The decision as to which educational path to take is an important one. When interviewing for employment in an academic institution, it is important to clarify what the job description is and what the expectations are for role performance (Halstead & Frank, 2018). By clarifying these criteria, one can better match career goals to institutional expectations. For example, if a prospective faculty member has expertise in nursing education research, that person should know whether the institution values this type of research when considering promotion and tenure. Table 1.1 summarizes the types of academic appointments and the educational preparation required.

Educational Preparation for Employment in Healthcare Settings Educators in nursing professional development teach in acute care, long-term care, and community settings. Their role is to facilitate the professional development and growth of nurses and other healthcare personnel (Harper & Maloney, 2016). Most of TABLE 1.1  SUMMARY OF EDUCATIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR NURSE EDUCATOR EMPLOYMENT Employment Setting

Education Required

Hospitals and other healthcare agencies

BSN or MSN

Community colleges: CNA and practical nursing programs

BSN or MSN

Community colleges: Associate degree programs

BSN or MSN for clinical teaching MSN for teaching in the classroom, online (doctoral degree may be preferred in some schools)

Colleges and universities: Baccalaureate and master’s programs

MSN for clinical teaching Doctoral for classroom, online

Colleges and universities: Doctoral programs

Doctoral degree

CNA, certified nursing assistant.

1. Role of the Nurse Educator  ■ 7

these positions require a master’s degree. Educators who practice in nursing professional development can be generalists or specialists. The generalist is a bachelor’s prepared RN, whereas the specialist has both a graduate degree and certification in nursing professional development (Harper & Maloney, 2016). The broad term for both of these roles is nursing professional development practitioner.

Preparation for Teaching Regardless of the type of program in which teaching, nurses need to be prepared for their role as an educator (Oermann et al., 2016; Oermann, 2017b; Oermann & Kardong-Edgren, 2018). This preparation can be gained by completing a master’s program or track in nursing education, a postmaster’s certificate program in nursing education, education courses, or through continuing education. In some DNP and PhD programs, students have an option to take nursing education courses as electives. There are varied strategies to gain essential knowledge and competencies to transition into a faculty role, but some type of preparation is essential.

NURSE EDUCATOR COMPETENCIES The Scope of Practice for Academic Nurse Educators and Academic Clinical Nurse Educators, developed by the NLN, identifies the core competencies and provides task statements for nurse educators in the faculty role and for academic clinical nurse educators who teach in the clinical setting (Christensen & Simmons, 2020). An earlier document served as the guiding force in setting the expectations for the NLN certification as a nurse educator. The NLN competencies for nurse educators are: ■

■

■

■

■

■

■

■

Facilitate learning (ensure a positive learning environment in the classroom, laboratories, and clinical settings to facilitate student learning and development of outcomes) Facilitate learner development and socialization (support students in developing as nurses with essential values and behaviors) Use assessment and evaluation strategies (use multiple strategies to assess and evaluate learning) Participate in curriculum design and evaluation of program outcomes (develop program outcomes and curricula that are current and prepare graduates to function effectively) Function as a change agent and leader (be a change agent and leader in nursing education) Pursue continuous quality improvement in the nurse educator role (be committed to developing and maintaining competence as an educator) Engage in scholarship (engage in scholarship as an integral part of the faculty role) Function within the educational environment (function effectively in the educational environment considering multiple forces that influence the education of students) (NLN, 2020)

8  ■ I. Nursing Education: Roles of Teacher and Learner

RESPONSIBILITIES OF NURSE EDUCATORS Academic Nurse Educators Responsibilities of nurse educators differ according to institutional type and whether one teaches primarily at the prelicensure or graduate level. Prior to deciding on a career in nursing education, job shadowing a nurse faculty member or an educator in a clinical setting can provide a realistic view of the role and responsibilities. In academic institutions, faculty teach, conduct research (depending on the mission of the school) or have some form of scholarly activity, and perform service to the institution and the profession. How one’s overall duties are allotted depends on the institutional type. Those who are employed in community colleges will spend most of their time teaching in the classroom, simulation and skills laboratories, and clinical setting, with some time allotted for service and scholarship. Those who teach in undergraduate and graduate programs in colleges and universities will also teach, but will have greater expectations for scholarly productivity, including supporting research through funded grants if in a tenure track position in a school with a research mission. Faculty with doctoral degrees (DNP and PhD) even in nontenure-track positions in most universities will be expected to engage in scholarly activities and publish. Across all schools of nursing, an expectation of nurse faculty is that they participate in service—for example, as a member of committees—to the school of nursing, college or university, and nursing profession. When considering employment in an academic setting, one should be clear about the job expectations. Is the position tenure track, or with a renewable yearly or multiyear contract? If the position is tenure track, what are the responsibilities for research and scholarship, teaching, and service? If the position is full-time, but on the clinical or teaching track, what kind of scholarship is expected? What are the teaching and service expectations?

Teaching Responsibilities Teaching involves more than transmitting knowledge through lectures and guiding students in clinical practice. Faculty must have evidence-based knowledge of student learning styles, teaching methods, and methods for evaluating student learning. Facilitating students’ assimilation of theory into practice is key. Oermann et al. (2018) have recommended a closer integration of the clinical, simulation, and classroom components of a student’s education. Some nursing education programs employ full-time clinical faculty, whose primary role is teaching in the clinical setting and sometimes also in the simulation and skills laboratories. All full- and parttime nurse educators teaching in the clinical setting need to have knowledge of the curriculum and expected learning outcomes. This knowledge helps them facilitate the students’ integration of theory with clinical practice. Aside from the actual classroom, online, and clinical teaching, faculty also have the responsibility of formulating the curriculum that not only meets contemporary standards of practice, but also prepares students for future nursing roles. Curriculum is not static, but constantly needs revision to meet the needs of patients and populations, and changes in healthcare. Faculty in schools of nursing need to develop curricula that will prepare nurses for a changing healthcare environment and new models of healthcare delivery (Hendricks et  al., 2016). Providing leadership and

1. Role of the Nurse Educator  ■ 9

promoting curriculum change involves ensuring that the curriculum is based on the most current educational standards and competencies, including the core competencies needed by all healthcare professionals: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Patient-centered care Teamwork and collaboration Evidence-based practice Quality improvement Safety Informatics (Quality and Safety Education for Nurses [QSEN] Institute, 2020)

Committee work is essential to the process, including leading committees and task forces in the nursing program and sometimes in the larger institution to develop and shepherd the revised curriculum through the approval process. Nurse educators have an important role in curriculum development and revision in the school of nursing and carrying out other activities to provide a quality education for students. They develop innovative learning activities for students, assessment strategies, and tests in their courses; serve on committees to make decisions about admissions and progression in the nursing program; evaluate their courses and nursing program; advise students and support them in their education; and serve in other roles that are essential to offering a quality educational experience for students.

Scholarship Responsibilities Scholarship includes research, obtaining grant funding, publishing in peer-reviewed journals, and presenting at professional conferences, but scholarship is more than these traditional research activities. Evaluations of educational innovations and programs and their impact on student learning, reviews of research to provide evidence to guide teaching, application of theories to generate new approaches to teaching, development and evaluation of educational innovations and new initiatives, and implementation of educational evidence and studies of the implementation process are all forms of scholarship in nursing education (Oermann, 2017a). For these types of activities to be considered as scholarship, however, they need to be disseminated for others to critique. This dissemination also is critical because sharing innovations and outcomes spreads new ideas and builds evidence for teaching in nursing. Scholarship is a “spirit of inquiry”—reflecting on teaching practices, asking if there are better ways of helping students learn, and searching for evidence to improve teaching. A spirit of inquiry involves the ability to search the literature for evidence and working with colleagues to understand their educational practices in the classroom, online environment, and clinical setting. Boyer’s seminal work, Scholarship Reconsidered: Priorities of the Professoriate, broadened the definition of scholarship from only viewing scholarship as generating new knowledge to also include the scholarship of teaching (Boyer, 1990). This original work included the scholarship of discovery, integration, application, and teaching. Later, Boyer added the scholarship of engagement, which includes the work of nursing faculty in solving community-based problems, engaging with the community, and developing partnerships that lead to improved health (Beaulieu et al., 2018; Boyer, 1996). Table 1.2 lists the forms of scholarship and their definitions, with examples of each form of scholarship.

10  ■ I. Nursing Education: Roles of Teacher and Learner

TABLE 1.2  SUMMARY OF BOYER’S CATEGORIES OF SCHOLARSHIP Type of Scholarship

Definition

Evidence

Scholarship of Discovery

Conducting original research to gain knowledge about nursing

Grants, peer-reviewed publications, presentations

Scholarship of Integration

Syntheses of research done by others, making connections across disciplines

Systematic, integrative, literature, and other types of reviews of research; peer-reviewed publications of those reviews; articles, books, other products resulting from interdisciplinary activities

Scholarship of Application

Development of clinical knowledge, applying evidence to practice to solve clinical problems, service to profession, and scholarship of engagement

Consultations, outcomes of clinical practice, presentations and publications about practice, partnerships with the community

Scholarship of Teaching

Inquiry that focuses on learning and teaching, developing and evaluating educational innovations, new approaches to teaching, and nursing programs

Peer-reviewed publications, presentations about educational innovations, chapters, books

Source: Boyer, E. L. (1990). Scholarship reconsidered: Priorities of the professoriate. The Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching; Oermann, M. H. (2014). Defining and assessing the scholarship of teaching in nursing. Journal of Professional Nursing, 30(5), 370–375. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.profnurs.2014.03.001.

Service Responsibilities The role of nurse educators in providing service to the school of nursing is critical to the work and functioning of the school. Full-time nursing faculty are expected to participate in committees in the nursing program and the larger institution. Committees include those concerned with faculty issues; student admission, progression, and retention issues; curriculum development; and program evaluation, among others. Professional service includes leadership in professional nursing and nursing education organizations and other activities such as reviewing manuscripts for journals. Other forms of professional service may include partnerships with healthcare settings and in the community. Faculty may be called on to participate in research and quality improvement studies in the healthcare system. One of the competencies of nurse educators is functioning as a change agent and leader. Educators often need to take risks and suggest bold innovative actions to

1. Role of the Nurse Educator  ■ 11

lead change in schools of nursing (Pardue et al., 2018). This leadership role is critical to improve quality and advance nursing and nursing education. Through their leadership, nurse educators also contribute to shaping policies and legislation that affect nurses and patient care. As leaders, nurse educators motivate and support others to achieve common goals. Leaders in academic settings are role models for students and colleagues. They strive to promote a positive and supportive work environment in the school— a healthy work environment for faculty, students, staff, and others. A healthy work environment supports and empowers others; is characterized by collaborative and collegial relationships and respect for others and their ideas; and is a caring environment, leading to higher levels of satisfaction among faculty and others in the school (Clark, 2017; Clark & Ritter, 2018; Saunders et al., 2020).

Professional Development Practitioners Educators in nursing professional development also have teaching, scholarship, and service responsibilities. Although typically the curriculum process is thought of as occurring in the academic setting, educators in healthcare settings formulate, implement, and evaluate various curricula. For example, these educators design and evaluate nurse residency and orientation programs, as well as programs for ensuring continuing competency of staff. The educator in this setting has an important role in providing interprofessional education. Knowledge of standards of practice, healthcare trends, and competencies to be developed by staff are critical for practice in nursing professional development. For example, patient-centered care, a core competency to be developed by all healthcare providers, can be promoted through educational programs. These educators also have an important role in promoting evidence-based practice in their setting and preparing nurses to access and use evidence in their patient care. Although scholarship and research in nursing are often thought of as responsibilities of only nursing faculty, educators in nursing professional development also participate in and facilitate scholarly activities. These include conducting clinical research and other studies that generate new knowledge, developing and evaluating practice and educational innovations, and promoting evidence-based practice and quality improvement. Nursing professional development practitioners play a key role in creating programs that help nurses and others to engage in these scholarly activities. In the revised Nursing Professional Development: Scope and Standards (Harper & Maloney, 2016), the specialist role, for nurses with graduate degrees and certification, is to develop knowledge and tools to improve care and have a leadership role in promoting evidence-based practice and scholarship in the healthcare setting. Educators in nursing professional development are change agents and leaders in their clinical setting and the larger healthcare delivery system. Through their education of nurses and other healthcare providers and their leadership, they work toward improving the quality and safety of care. Nurses in professional development may provide education for the community and promote increased access to healthcare through their community and professional service efforts. They also may assume a leadership role in a professional organization. Nursing professional development practitioners are guided by their standards for practice (Harper & Maloney, 2016). The role of the educator in nursing professional development is discussed later in the book in Chapter 21.

12  ■ I. Nursing Education: Roles of Teacher and Learner

BALANCING ROLE RESPONSIBILITIES Satisfaction in one’s role as a faculty member and nurse educator in other settings depends on balancing all dimensions of the role. Whereas nursing professional development practitioners have some autonomy in how to organize responsibilities, they generally have more regular work hours as compared to faculty. Aside from assigned times for teaching and posted office hours, most nurse educators in schools of nursing can decide when and where work is done. They can typically prepare classes, evaluate assignments, and complete scholarship activities from home. Many nursing faculty teach online courses, which provides for flexibility in preparing classes and interacting with students. Clinical expertise is essential for teaching clinical courses in nursing programs, and educators need to be up-to-date on technologies, new medications and treatments, and changes in practice. For faculty teaching in nurse practitioner and other advanced practice nursing programs, maintaining clinical expertise is critical for effectiveness as an educator. In some schools of nursing, faculty practice as part of their faculty role; in other schools they might maintain a clinical practice in addition to their role as a full-time faculty member. When faculty teach full time in a school of nursing and in addition practice as a clinician, even if part time, they are at risk for burnout. As new nurse educators plan their career trajectory, they should consider the dimensions of their role and priorities. Securing a faculty position in which clinical practice can be part of that full-time role might be preferable to teaching full time and practicing on a part time basis. Similarly, Woodworth (2017) found that adjunct clinical nurse educators who were employed full time as a clinician in addition to teaching as an adjunct faculty member predicted intent to leave their educator role. Not taking on too many role responsibilities is true not only for faculty but also for clinicians who teach in addition to their clinical practice.

FACULTY DEVELOPMENT As clinicians transition to the nurse educator role, they need to be well oriented to the position and supported as they move into their new role. Chapter 2 examines this transition process from clinician to educator. All full- and part-time faculty and nurse educators in other settings need continuing education to maintain their competency as educators and keep up-to-date with research findings and other evidence to guide their teaching. Although continuing education related to one’s clinical specialty is important, so too is continuing education related to the educator competencies. Organizations such as the NLN, AACN, Organization for Associate Degree Nursing, and Association for Nursing Professional Development offer conferences and webinars for faculty and educators in other settings. Like any specialty, nursing education changes, and attending professional meetings and reading the literature help educators stay abreast of new trends and best practices. Appendix A provides a list of nursing and higher education organizations that provide continuing education and offer other resources for nurse educators to keep current in their role.

CERTIFICATION As nurse educators develop their knowledge and expertise, they can pursue certification as an academic nurse educator. This certification, offered by the NLN, provides a way for nurse educators to demonstrate their specialized knowledge,

1. Role of the Nurse Educator  ■ 13

skills, and expertise and also contributes to their professional and career development (NLN, 2017). Eligibility for initial certification as a Certified Nurse Educator (CNE®) includes two options. In addition to licensure, one option requires the educator to have a master’s or doctoral degree in nursing with a major emphasis in nursing education, a postmaster’s certificate in nursing education, or nine or more credits of graduate-level education courses. The second option is for nurse educators who have a master’s or doctoral degree in nursing in a role other than nursing education and at least 2 years of employment in an academic nursing program within the last 5 years (NLN, 2019b). Certification is also available for clinical nurse educators who teach nursing students as part of an academic program and are guided by faculty from the program. Eligibility for certification as an Academic Clinical Nurse Educator, CNE®cl, is (a) licensure, a graduate degree with a focus in nursing education, and 3 years of practice experience, or (2) licensure, a baccalaureate degree in nursing or higher, 3 years of practice experience, and 2 years of teaching experience in a nursing program within the last 5 years (NLN, 2019a). For both certifications, nurse educators need to pass an examination validating their knowledge. Exhibit 1.1 lists the percent of items on the test for each of the competency areas assessed on the CNE and the CNE®cl examinations. Nurse educators in professional development also can be certified. For this certification, through the American Nurses Credentialing Center (ANCC), nurses need licensure, to have a bachelor’s or higher degree in nursing, to have at least 2 years full-time practice as a RN, to have a minimum of 2,000 hours of practice in nursing professional development within the last 3 years, and to complete 30 hours of continuing education in nursing professional development within the last 3 years (ANCC, n.d.). EXHIBIT 1.1 Competency Areas and Percent of Test Items CERTIFIED NURSE EDUCATOR Learning, 22% Learner Development and Socialization, 15% Assessment and Evaluation, 19% Curriculum Development and Evaluation, 17% Continuous Quality Improvement in Educator Role, 12% Scholarship, Service, and Leadership, 15% CERTIFIED ACADEMIC CLINICAL NURSE EDUCATOR Education and Healthcare Environments, 19% Learning, 19% Interpersonal Communication and Collaboration, 15% Clinical Expertise, 15% Learner Development and Socialization, 15% Clinical Assessment and Evaluation, 17% Source: National League for Nursing. (2019a). Certified academic clinical nurse educator (CNE®cl) 2019 candidate handbook. Retrieved March 15, 2020, from http://www.nln.org/docs/default-source/default-document-library/cneclhandbook-july-2019.pdf?Sfvrsn=0; National League for Nursing. (2019b). Certified nurse educator (CNE®) 2019 candidate handbook. Retrieved from March 15, 2020, http://www.nln.org/docs/default-source/default-documentlibrary/cne-handbook-july-2019-rev.pdf?Sfvrsn=0.

14  ■ I. Nursing Education: Roles of Teacher and Learner

SUMMARY Choosing a career as a nurse educator provides many rewards. Nurse educators in academic and healthcare settings can have a profound influence on how the current and next generation of nurses function within the healthcare system. Through their research, educators advance the science of nursing education and build evidence for teaching. Across settings, nurse educators function as change agents and leaders. Balancing one’s responsibilities is a challenge, especially in a new role. One particular challenge for those teaching in schools of nursing is salary levels. Generally, nurses in practice have higher salaries than faculty in schools of nursing. Some faculty members who teach 9 or 10 months during the academic year practice over the summer to keep current in their clinical skills and earn extra income. Finally, making decisions about further education can be daunting. The type of doctorate chosen, research (PhD) or practice (DNP), depends on one’s career goals, the type of scholarly trajectory desired, and the type of doctorate accepted for a tenure track position if that is part of one’s career goal. Nurse educators prepared at the DNP level are uniquely equipped to make the connection between education and practice through their clinical expertise. These educators have strong clinical skills, which can be used to teach at the prelicensure level and in graduate programs that prepare advanced practice nurses. Those prepared at the PhD level have knowledge and skills in generating new knowledge through more traditional forms of research. These nurse faculty may teach at the prelicensure level and in graduate programs. The nurse educator role is complex. Each succeeding chapter in this book presents an in-depth discussion of the specific role competencies that are necessary for functioning as a nurse educator across many settings. Understanding all the dimensions of the role will foster the all-important transition from clinician to nurse educator.

REFERENCES Accreditation Commission for Education in Nursing. (2017). Accreditation manual: Section III. 2017 standards and criteria. Author. American Association of Colleges of Nursing. (2019). Special survey on vacant faculty positions for academic year 2018–2019. Retrieved from https://www.aacnnursing.org/ Portals/42/News/Surveys-Data/Vacancy18.pdf American Nurses Credentialing Center. (n.d.). Nursing professional development certification (NPD-BC). Retrieved from https://www.nursingworld.org/our-certifications/ nursing-professional-development/ Beaulieu, M., Breton, M., & Brousselle, A. (2018). Conceptualizing 20 years of engaged scholarship: A scoping review. PLOS ONE, 13(2), e0193201. https://doi.org/10.1371/ journal.pone.0193201 Boyer, E. L. (1990). Scholarship reconsidered: Priorities of the professoriate. The Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching. Boyer, E. L. (1996). The scholarship of engagement. Journal of Public Service and Outreach, 1(1), 11–20. Christensen, L. S., & Simmons, L. E. (2020). The scope of practice for academic nurse educators and academic clinical nurse educators (3rd ed.). National League for Nursing. Clark, C. M. (2017). Creating and sustaining civility in nursing education (2nd ed.). Sigma Theta Tau International Publishing.

1. Role of the Nurse Educator  ■ 15

Clark, C. M., & Ritter, K. (2018). Policy to foster civility and support a healthy academic work environment. Journal of Nursing Education, 57(6), 325–331. https://doi.org/ 10.3928/0148483420180522-02 Commission on Collegiate Nursing Education. (2018). Standards for accreditation of baccalaureate and graduate degree nursing programs. https://www.aacnnursing.org/ Portals/42/CCNE/PDF/Standards-Final-2018.pdf Fang, D., & Kesten, K. (2017). Retirements and succession of nursing faculty in 2016-2025. Nursing Outlook, 65(5), 633–642. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.outlook.2017.03.003 Halstead, J. A., & Frank, B. (2018). Pathways to a nursing education career: Transitioning from practice to academia (2nd ed.). Springer Publishing Company. Harper, M. G., & Bindon, S. L. (2020). Envisioning the future of nursing professional development. Journal for Nurses in Professional Development, 36(1), 39–40. https://doi. org/10.1097/NND.0000000000000591 Harper, M. G., & Maloney, P. (Eds.). (2016). Nursing professional development: Scope and standards of practice (3rd ed.). Association for Nursing Professional Development. Hendricks, S. M., Taylor, C., Walker, M., & Welch, J. A. (2016). Triangulating competencies, concepts, and professional development in curriculum revisions. Nurse Educator, 41(1), 33–36. https://doi.org/10.1097/NNE.0000000000000198 Institute of Medicine. (2011). The future of nursing: Leading change, advancing health. National Academies Press. National League for Nursing. (2017). Certified nurse educator (CNE®). Retrieved from http://www.nln.org/Certification-for-Nurse-Educators/cne National League for Nursing. (2019a). Certified academic clinical nurse educator (CNE®cl) 2019 candidate handbook. Retrieved from http://www.nln.org/docs/default-source/defaultdocument-library/cnecl-handbook-july-2019.pdf?Sfvrsn=0 National League for Nursing. (2019b). Certified nurse educator (CNE®) 2019 candidate handbook. Retrieved from http://www.nln.org/docs/default-source/default-documentlibrary/cne-handbook-july-2019-rev.pdf?Sfvrsn=0 National League for Nursing. (2020). Nurse educator core competency. Retrieved from http:// www.nln.org/professional-development-programs/competencies-for-nursingeducation/nurse-educator-core-competency National League for Nursing, Commission for Nursing Education Accreditation. (2016). Accreditation standards for nursing education programs. Author. Oermann, M. H. (2014). Defining and assessing the scholarship of teaching in nursing. Journal of Professional Nursing, 30(5), 370–375. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.profnurs. 2014.03.001 Oermann, M. H. (2017a). Building your scholarship from your teaching: Plan now. Nurse Educator, 42(5), 217. https://doi.org/10.1097/NNE.0000000000000417 Oermann, M. H. (2017b). Preparing nurse faculty: It’s for everyone. Nurse Educator, 42(1), 1. https://doi.org/10.1097/NNE.0000000000000345 Oermann, M. H., & Kardong-Edgren, S. K. (2018). Changing the conversation about doctoral education in nursing: What about research in nursing education? Nursing Outlook, 66(6), 523–525. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.outlook.2018.10.001 Oermann, M. H., Lynn, M., & Agger, C. A. (2016). Hiring intentions of directors of nursing programs related to DNP- and PhD-prepared faculty and roles of faculty. Journal of Professional Nursing, 32(3), 173–179. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.profnurs.2015.06.010 Oermann, M. H., Shellenbarger, T., & Gaberson, K. B. (2018). Clinical teaching strategies in nursing (5th ed.). Springer Publishing Company. Pardue, K. T., Young, P. K., Horton-Deutsch, S., Halstead, J., & Pearsall, C. (2018). Becoming a nurse faculty leader: Taking risks by being willing to fail. Nursing Forum, 53(2), 204–212. https://doi.org/10.1111/nuf.12244 Quality and Safety Education for Nurses Institute. (2020). Competencies. Retrieved from https://qsen.org/competencies/

16  ■ I. Nursing Education: Roles of Teacher and Learner

Saunders, J., Sridaromont, K., & Gallegos, B. (2020). Steps to establish a healthy work environment in an academic nursing setting. Nurse Educator. https://doi.org/10.1097/ NNE.0000000000000829 U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics. (2020). Occupational outlook handbook. Registered nurses. Retrieved from https://www.bls.gov/ooh/healthcare/registered-nurses.htm U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Health Resources and Services Administration, National Center for Health Workforce Analysis. (2019). 2018 national sample survey of registered nurses. Brief summary of results. Author. Woodworth, J. A. (2017). Adjunct nurse faculty demographics and intent to stay teaching. Nurse Educator, 42(6), 295–298. https://doi.org/10.1097/NNE.0000000000000376

2 The Transition From Clinician to Educator Anne M. Schoening

OBJECTIVES 1. Describe the role transition from clinician to novice nurse educator 2. Examine barriers and facilitators in the transition from clinician to educator 3. Identify elements of a new faculty orientation program that assist in the transition from clinician to educator 4. Identify resources available for clinicians making the transition from clinician to educator

INTRODUCTION The transition from bedside to classroom is rarely easy. Most novice nurse educators assume an academic or professional development role without formal preparation in nursing education. While they may be expert clinicians, they often lack the foundational knowledge necessary for success in the nurse educator role today. This chapter examines barriers and facilitators to the transition process and provides resources to help novice educators gain competence in their new role.

HISTORICAL PERSPECTIVES Decades ago, graduate nursing programs focused heavily on role preparation in nursing education or nursing administration; however, in the early 1970s, there was a call for graduate programs to focus on clinical specialization and advanced nursing practice (American Nurses’ Association Commission on Nursing Education, 1969). This resulted in decreased enrollment in graduate programs preparing nurse educators. By the 1990s, only 4% of nurses enrolled in master’s programs were pursuing degrees specifically preparing them for a nursing faculty role (National League for Nursing [NLN], 2002). This trend continues today. Though doctoral preparation for advanced practice nurses is critical, it rarely prepares graduates for a career in academia. Over the past 10 years, doctor of nursing practice (DNP) programs, which are generally focused on clinical nursing roles, have expanded so rapidly that they now outnumber nursing

18  ■ I. NURSING EDUCATION: ROLES OF TEACHER AND LEARNER

PhD programs (American Association of Colleges of Nursing, 2019). A 2014 survey of nursing deans and department heads revealed that few newly hired DNP- and PhD-prepared faculty were adequately prepared for teaching in an academic setting (Agger et al., 2014). Later work by Dreifurst et al. (2016) and McNelis et al. (2019) revealed that doctorally prepared nurse educators feel unprepared to teach and are dissatisfied with how their doctoral programs prepared them for the faculty role. Although a degree in nursing education is not required to teach in a nursing program or to work in professional development, knowledge related to principles of teaching and learning, assessment, curriculum design, and administrative issues is necessary for success in the role. In the absence of formal preparation for teaching, novice educators face challenges as they enter the academic work setting. Since 2002, the NLN has advocated for specialized preparation at the graduate level for the nurse educator role (NLN, 2017). The NLN’s recommendation was reaffirmed by the groundbreaking work from the Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching, which suggested that graduate level preparation is imperative to “better prepare future nursing faculty for teaching” (Benner et al., 2010, p. 224). In addition to clinical and research expertise, skill in the specialty of academic nursing is critical to ensure the development of new pedagogical strategies to prepare the future nursing workforce to provide safe, quality care (NLN, 2017).

TRANSITION TO THE EDUCATOR ROLE As nurses make the transition into an educator role, not only must they learn skills related to classroom and clinical teaching, but they must also learn how to function within an academic setting, be it a community college, college, or university. If teaching in nursing professional development, they need to learn how to function within that setting. Included in this transition is learning how to balance the requirements of the position and navigate a professional environment that is significantly different than clinical practice. The transition experience of novice nurse educators has been examined by numerous authors over the past four decades. As early as 1989, Locasto and Kochanek (1989) used the theory of reality shock to describe the role transition experienced by those entering the academic work setting. Throughout the early 21st century, research into the transition experience described it as a time of role confusion and ambiguity. Common themes among authors during this time period are a lack of formal preparation for the role and a lack of formal orientation, mentorship, and guidance. Scanlan (2001) described the novice period of a nurse educators’ career as a time of learning by trial and error. Anderson (2009) depicted the work-role transition in the form of a metaphor, describing it as “treading water” in a vast sea (p. 206). More recent inquiries into the transition experience note similar challenges. In a qualitative study of nurse faculty, Hoffman (2019) found that one of the most consistent struggles faced by new faculty was feeling like a perpetual novice from constantly starting over when assigned to new courses or clinical rotations. In this study, in the absence of formal preparation and structured orientation, inexperienced faculty relied on their past nursing experience to guide them through unfamiliar situations with students, often considering “student as patient” (p.  263). Shapiro (2018) found similar results when examining the transition of novice

2. The Transition From Clinician to Educator  ■ 19

faculty teaching in associate degree programs. Participants described the transition as “chaotic, ­challenging, emotional” and “overwhelming” (p. 217). They were also unprepared for the complexity and workload of the academic educator role.

The Nurse Educator Transition Model The Nurse Educator Transition (NET) Model provides a framework for understanding the social process that occurs during the role transition from nurse to nurse educator (Schoening, 2013). Although this model was developed through grounded theory research with nurse educators in baccalaureate nursing programs, it can be applied to educators in a variety of roles. Since its publication, it has been validated in small studies of part-time clinical faculty, and faculty teaching in associate degree programs and community college settings (Shapiro, 2018; Wenner et al., 2020). The NET model describes the transition from nurse to nurse educator as a fourphase process (Figure 2.1). The first phase is one of anticipation/expectation and begins once a decision is made to enter academia. This is a generally positive time in which the nurse educator looks forward to the benefits of their new career choice, such as a more flexible schedule and advancing scholarly endeavors. There is also the hope of making a difference in the lives of students and having a positive influence on the future of the profession.

Nurse Educator Teacher/student boundaries Comfort with ambiguity Learner-focused

Nurse Nurturing/caring Dependent on structure Content-focused

Identity Formation Phase • • • •

Anticipation/Expectation Phase • • • • •

Wanting to make a difference Flexible lifestayle Career progression Positive student encounters Scholarship

Disorientation Phase • • • • •

Role ambiguity Expert to novice Lack of mentorship Lack of structure Negative student encounters

Establishing boundaries Keeping a foot in the door Gradually accepting new responsibility Making it your own

Information-Seeking Phase • • • • •

Fact-finding Peer mentoring Faculty development Over-preparing Applying past nursing knowledge

FIGURE 2.1 The nurse educator transition model. Source: Copyright by Schoening, A. M. (2013). From bedside to classroom: The nurse educator transition model. Nursing Education Perspectives, 34(3), 167–172. https://doi.org/10.5480/1536-5026-34.3.167; Reprinted with p­ ermission of Schoening (2020).

20  ■ I. NURSING EDUCATION: ROLES OF TEACHER AND LEARNER

The second phase of the transition is a period of disorientation that starts when the nurse begins work in the educational setting. This stage is characterized by an absence of structure and mentorship. Because there is often inadequate orientation and socialization to the role, the novice educator may feel confused over role expectations and may lack an understanding of the organizational structure in their new workplace. Nurse educators experiencing this transitional phase often refer to it as being left to “sink or swim” and “flying by the seat of my pants” (Schoening, 2013, p. 169). Disorientation also results from becoming a novice after having previously been an expert in another nursing role. Those without formal preparation for the educator role may find this phase particularly challenging. The disorientation phase is compounded by the realization that the student–teacher relationship is different from the nurse–patient relationship and not every encounter with students is positive. The third phase of transition is characterized by information seeking, as the novice educator actively works to fill gaps in their knowledge. This process is often selfdirected as the new educator takes an active role in learning how to teach. Strategies used during this phase include fact-finding, seeking out peer mentors, and taking part in faculty development activities. Because novice educators are often unsure of students’ current level of knowledge and skill, they tend to overprepare for student encounters and express fear of failing as a teacher. Because they lack experience in the educational role, novice educators tend to draw on their past experiences as nurses, which allows them to slowly acquire confidence in their new roles. The final phase of the NET model is a period of identity formation, in which a new professional identity as nurse educator emerges. Successful role transition is characterized by learning how to negotiate the differences in the nurse–patient and teacher–student relationship by establishing boundaries with students. The nurse educator also identifies strategies to maintain nursing knowledge and skills through clinical practice or research while continuing to develop their knowledge and skills as an educator. They develop their own teaching style and voice by individualizing learning experiences and making it “their own” (Schoening, 2013, p. 170). This final phase of development is facilitated if their employer allows gradual acceptance of responsibility during the first year of teaching.

BARRIERS AND FACILITATORS TO A SUCCESSFUL TRANSITION Both the NET model and the nursing education literature identify several common barriers and facilitators to a successful transition experience in both academic and clinical practice settings. To retain novices during their early employment, administrators in schools of nursing should focus on strategies that target the disorientation phase of transition and support the information seeking phase. Nurses entering the field of professional development need similar support from their leadership.

Barriers to a Successful Transition Integrative literature reviews by Summers (2017) and Fritz (2018) identified several common barriers to a successful role transition. These include unrealistic or unclear expectations, role ambiguity, poor orientation, lack of mentoring, and inadequate knowledge of educator skills. Almost universally across all settings, participants

2. The Transition From Clinician to Educator  ■ 21

in the studies reviewed by both of these authors described orientation programs of inadequate length or missing essential information related to the nurse educator role. A lack of formal preparation for the educator role was also identified as a major barrier in both reviews. Fritz (2018) described several specific educational needs of novice educators, such as, knowledge of adult learning principles, learning styles, teaching techniques, learner evaluation, giving feedback, and professional communication with students. Summers (2017) reported similar needs for novices but added curriculum design and classroom management to the list of essential learning needs.

Facilitators for a Successful Transition Summers (2017) and Fritz (2018) also identified several facilitators for a successful role transition, including formal, structured orientation, effective mentoring, and development of educator skills. Fritz found these facilitators to be consistent across several different educational settings, including university and community college settings as well as clinical practice. An additional study by McPherson and Candela (2019) affirmed that novice educators with formal coursework in nursing education at the graduate level had a better understanding of the roles and responsibilities of the clinical educator role. They also found that a structured orientation, clear expectations, and frequent communication facilitated a successful role transition. These elements are critical not only for those serving as full-time faculty, but also for those working part-time in the clinical setting as well (McPherson, 2019). Hoffman (2019) suggested that consistent course assignment during the first years of employment is an additional strategy to building expertise and comfort during the time of transition. Although both Summers (2017) and Fritz (2018) identified mentorship as critical for attaining competence in the nurse educator role, there is a lack of consensus in the literature about the best model for new faculty mentorship (Nowell et al., 2017; Ross & Dunker, 2019). A study by Jeffers and Mariani (2017) revealed no significant differences in career satisfaction between faculty who were formally mentored and those who were not; however, participants reported that being assigned a mentor helped them feel more supported as they learned the complexity of the faculty role. They also pointed out that assigned mentors were not always helpful and, in some cases, even engaged in incivility and bullying. Nowell et al. (2017) recommends including mentors and mentees in the matching process due to the importance of the relationship on mentorship outcomes. In several studies, novice educators reported success when seeking out their own mentors among peers (Hoffman, 2019; Jeffers & Mariani, 2017; McPherson & Candela, 2019; Schoening, 2013; Shapiro, 2018). These findings suggest a combination of formal and informal mentoring or seeking more than one mentor may be an effective strategy. For example, a teaching mentor may be formally assigned to guide the novice through course planning, providing student feedback, and orienting to clinical teaching. A different mentor may be assigned to provide guidance on scholarship. Novices may self-select mentors to help them navigate the complexities of the political and social culture of the organization as well as learn to function in the education environment. Table 2.1 summarizes the barriers and facilitators for a successful role transition. These are applicable when transitioning to an educator role in an academic or a clinical practice setting.

22  ■ I. NURSING EDUCATION: ROLES OF TEACHER AND LEARNER

TABLE 2.1  BARRIERS AND FACILITATORS FOR A SUCCESSFUL ROLE TRANSITION Barriers

Facilitators

Unrealistic or unclear expectations (role ambiguity)

Clear expectations Consistency of assignment during early years of career

Lack of or inadequate orientation

Structured orientation over at least 1 year Gradual assignment of new responsibilities over first year (committee work, advising)

Lack of formal preparation for teaching

Graduate level coursework in preparation for teaching Faculty development

Lack of mentoring

Formal and informal mentoring Multiple mentors assigned based on purpose (teaching, scholarship)

Inadequate communication

Frequent communication

NEW FACULTY ORIENTATION The need for structured orientation has been identified as one of the most important facilitators of a successful transition to the nurse educator role; however, orientation programs are often inadequate to meet the needs of novices (Ross & Dunker, 2019). Both full-time and part-time educators should receive a comprehensive orientation to their roles and responsibilities. Part-time clinical educators may feel isolated from the larger academic program. Therefore, knowing expectations and how clinical experiences align with the curriculum can ease feelings of isolation (McPherson, 2019). Although formal preparation as a nurse educator has been identified as facilitating the transition, it should not be assumed that it leads to competency (Hoffman, 2019). Orientation time and activities therefore should not be shortened or abbreviated for those with degrees in nursing education. Orientation programs should be of sufficient length, with faculty mentors assigned for ongoing support as needed. An orientation period of 1 to 2 years has been suggested for full-time nursing faculty (Hoffman, 2019; Schoening, 2013). This is particularly important for those faculty members practicing in the full scope of the academic nurse educator role; however, the literature does not provide conclusive guidance on this. Orientation programs may be delivered in a face-to-face or a hybrid manner, combining online modules with in person meetings, but there is no consensus on the most effective model (Ross & Dunker, 2019). Due to the complex nature of the nurse educator role and the identified obstacles novices face during their transition period, administrators in schools of nursing should designate an individual to coordinate orientation activities and ongoing faculty development needs. This should be a formally appointed administrative role, with the appropriate workload to support all stages of career development for faculty.

2. The Transition From Clinician to Educator  ■ 23

The NLN’s Core Competencies for Academic Nurse Educators (Christensen & Simmons, 2020) as discussed in Chapter 1 provide a useful framework for planning a comprehensive new faculty orientation program. Nurses working in professional development also need structured orientation, mentorship, and guidance. The NLN Core Competencies for Academic Clinical Nurse Educators are a different (and new) set of competencies that may provide guidance, as some of these competencies focus on facilitating learning in the healthcare environment. Table 2.2 outlines key components of a new faculty orientation program that meets the NLN Core Competencies for Academic Nurse Educators. These areas of competencies are described in later chapters of the book.

TABLE 2.2  COMPONENTS OF A NEW FACULTY ORIENTATION PROGRAM NLN Core Competency

Key Components

Facilitate Learning

■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■ ■

Facilitate Learner Development and Socialization

■ ■ ■

■

Use Assessment and Evaluation Strategies

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Participate in Curriculum Design and Evaluation of Program Outcomes

■ ■

■

Function as Change Agent and Leader

■

■

Institutional mission, vision, and values Instructional objectives for assigned courses Education/coaching on active learning strategies Observation of experienced faculty in clinical and classroom Access to textbooks and course resources Clinical agency orientation Online teaching mentor if appropriate Demographics of learners Education on teaching-learning theories Americans with Disabilities Act and reasonable accommodations Referrals for students with mental health concerns Education on exam writing and item analysis Orientation to exam item banks and software Exam item writing mentor if appropriate Agency policies on exam administration and security Orientation to clinical evaluation instrument Education on providing objective feedback to students Course progression policies Curricular model Course alignment with program outcomes and institutional mission Systematic evaluation plan Service to school or department and college or university Development opportunities on evidence-based teaching (continued )

24  ■ I. NURSING EDUCATION: ROLES OF TEACHER AND LEARNER

TABLE 2.2  COMPONENTS OF A NEW FACULTY ORIENTATION PROGRAM (CONTINUED) NLN Core Competency Pursue Continuous Quality Improvement in the Role

Key Components ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Engage in Scholarship

■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Function Within the Educational Environment

■ ■ ■

Short-term and long-term career goals Expectations for scholarship, service, and teaching Rank and tenure procedures if on tenure track Mentor for tenure process; mid-tenure review Policies for conduct, attendance, and clinical incidents Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act and student information Scholarship expectations for current position Resources for scholarship Existing scholarship teams Mentor for scholarship Balancing teaching and service demands with scholarship Culture and work environment Service expectations at the college of university level Education on forces influencing higher education

COMPONENTS OF NEW FACULTY ORIENTATION Core Competency: Facilitate Learning All nurse educators should be provided with information on the institution’s mission, vision, and values and how these inform the educational philosophy of the school or clinical practice setting. Those teaching in the classroom or laboratory should be provided with instructional objectives for assigned course content and coached on using active learning strategies to engage students. If teaching in the clinical learning environment, new faculty should receive coaching on how to ask questions that promote the development of clinical judgment in learners and how to facilitate meaningful clinical conferences. Providing new faculty with the opportunity to observe experienced educators in the clinical and classroom setting as well as the opportunity to be observed themselves may help them develop skill as educators (Shapiro, 2018). All faculty should have access to textbooks, supplemental resources used to teach nursing skills, and online learning management systems. Faculty teaching in the clinical setting must be provided with adequate time to orient to their assigned clinical agency and to complete necessary compliance requirements. Gaining knowledge of an agency’s policies and procedures and building a trusting relationship with clinical partners is critical in facilitating student learning in the clinical environment. It is also necessary for the educator to develop confidence and skill within that setting; thus, it is recommended that novice educators be consistently assigned to a clinical unit or community agency throughout their early years in the role.

2. The Transition From Clinician to Educator  ■ 25

Faculty teaching online should be assigned a mentor for online course design to ensure that they follow best practices for engaging online learners and are able to navigate the learning management system. Novice educators teaching online may face a steep learning curve if they do not consider themselves adept with technology. Even if teaching in a face-to-face program, all nursing faculty should gain skills in navigating electronic platforms for virtual clinical experiences and learning management systems. Support from instructional designers, information technology departments, and a school’s teaching and learning center, if available, may facilitate development in this area.

Core Competency: Facilitate Learner Development and Socialization All educators must know their learners. It is important for novice educators to understand the characteristics of their learners with respect to cultural and spiritual diversity, age, gender, socio-economic background, and educational preparation. For example, teaching in a 4-year traditional university setting in which most of the students are 18 to 22 years old requires a different approach than teaching in a community college setting or accelerated nursing program in which the students are considered adult learners. Those without formal educational preparation may need development on teaching and learning theories and how these inform the choice of instructional strategies for diverse learners. Nurse educators will also encounter an increasing number of students with disabilities, so they should receive information on how qualified students with disabilities request and receive reasonable accommodations in a nursing program under the Americans with Disabilities Act. They should also be provided with information on how and where to refer students with mental health concerns.

Core Competency: Use Assessment and Evaluation Strategies If teaching in the classroom setting, novice nurse educators should receive instruction on assessment and methods used to evaluate student learning. Because nursing programs often evaluate achievement of outcomes through administration of tests, new faculty should have instruction on writing exam items, analyzing and interpreting test results, developing assessment strategies, and grading. New faculty should be assigned a mentor for test item selection and writing items, and for item analysis throughout their first semester of classroom instruction. Development in this area should also include information on agency policies related to exam administration, security, scheduling, and absences. Faculty teaching in the clinical setting should receive information on providing feedback in real-time to students at the point of care, as well as how to provide both formative and summative evaluation of clinical performance. This includes strategies for communicating learner strengths and areas for needed improvement. Faculty should be provided with one-to-one instruction on the use of clinical evaluation tools and how to provide objective feedback to students. The importance of timely feedback should be part of this discussion, as should strategies for providing feedback to students on clinical assignments that encourage growth of their clinical reasoning skills. All faculty should receive guidance and support if they are working with a student who is not meeting instructional objectives and is in danger of failing a course. McPherson and Candela (2019) suggest simulation as a tool to help new faculty learn to navigate difficult conversations with students.

26  ■ I. NURSING EDUCATION: ROLES OF TEACHER AND LEARNER

Core Competency: Participate in Curriculum Design and Evaluation of Program Outcomes Although new faculty will not immediately engage in curriculum planning and design, they should receive information on the structure and design of the curriculum, and how the course to which they are assigned fits within that structure. Novice educators without formal preparation for the role will also need additional information on how course objectives map to program objectives and how program objectives align with the institutional mission. Full-time faculty and those practicing in the full scope of the academic role should receive a brief overview of the unit’s systematic evaluation plan and how assessment data is gathered on the course level. If teaching in a concept or theoretically based curriculum model, additional information should be provided about how relevant concepts and theories are operationalized in course assignments and learning experiences.

Core Competency: Function as Change Agent and Leader It may be difficult at first for a novice nurse educator to view themselves as a leader. However, it is critical that those beginning their career understand how they can affect change within their workplace. For nurse educators in the academic setting, this can be accomplished through service on school, department, and eventually university or college level committees. Nurse educators working in professional development should understand their service role on educational, practice, and policy committees within their institution. Nurse educators in all settings should be encouraged to cultivate leadership roles within their community and professional organizations.

Core Competency: Pursue Continuous Quality Improvement in the Nurse Educator Role Even though they are just beginning their role as nurse educators, novices should be encouraged to develop short- and long-term career goals as part of a faculty development or career development plan. This is particularly important for academic nurse educators who are on a tenure track and must meet more rigorous expectations for teaching, scholarship, and service. New faculty should be oriented to the expectations for their rank at the time of initial employment as well as the standards for promotion to a higher rank. If not already in place at their institution, faculty on a tenure track should be assigned a mentor for this process and counseled yearly on their progress toward this goal. A mid-tenure review conducted half-way through the tenure timeline may also be helpful. Faculty also should understand the potential legal and ethical issues they may face as nurse educators in an academic setting. At the time of initial employment, new faculty should be provided with an orientation to relevant student policies, such as those related to conduct, attendance, grading, and course progression. Faculty teaching in the clinical setting should be aware of institutional policies related to student incidents, such as blood and body fluid exposure and student errors. They also should have access to the clinical partner’s policies on student practice, including any restrictions. It is important they receive information on faculty and student dress code in the clinical setting.

2. The Transition From Clinician to Educator  ■ 27

All faculty in the academic setting must receive instruction on the Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act (FERPA). This act ensures student privacy by providing students with the right to inspect their educational record and request corrections to inaccuracies. It also severely limits access to student records and assessment information to those who have a need to know (U.S. Department of Education, 2018). Faculty should understand how to manage student requests for job references and inquiries from parents regarding student performance, as these require the student’s written authorization. They should also be counseled on how to keep student work secure in both hard copy as well as in electronic form.

Core Competency: Engage in Scholarship Novice nurse educators in a university setting should receive clear guidance on performance standards related to scholarship, and how these impact contract renewal, promotion, and tenure. New faculty who are beginning a research trajectory should be assigned a mentor for research and scholarly work. It is also important that they are oriented to resources that are available for scholarship at their institution, such as grant-writing assistance and processes associated with the institutional review board. New faculty should be aware of any existing faculty research groups to identify potential areas for collaboration. An important part of new faculty mentorship in this area is guidance on how to balance one’s time so that scholarly goals can be achieved. Balancing teaching, scholarship, and service expectations may cause role stress if the scholarship expectations are higher than what was required in prior settings. Nurses in professional development roles should also be encouraged to pursue scholarly work, whether that includes collaboration on original research or leading quality improvement efforts. They should be aware of potential sources for mentorship and collaboration, such as joining a research committee within a hospital or working directly with an academic partner.

Core Competency: Function Within the Educational Environment Nurse educators in the academic setting need guidance on how to function as a “good citizen” of the academy (Christensen & Simmons, 2020). Although educators who have been full-time clinicians are familiar with a healthcare agency’s culture and role expectations, becoming socialized to higher education presents additional challenges. The academic work setting is vastly different from the clinical work setting, with far less structure and sometimes ambiguous expectations. This newfound autonomy may be unsettling to a clinician who is accustomed to rigid schedules, policies, and procedures, resulting in role confusion (Schoening, 2013). Nurse educators also need to understand current trends and issues in higher education and how those influence the academic workplace and their students. Functioning within the educational environment requires participation in service and leadership at the university or college level and developing relationships that advance the nursing department’s standing within the wider academic community (Christensen, & Simmons, 2020). Table 2.3 provides resources to facilitate the transition from clinician to educator. In addition to this table, many of the organizations in Appendix A provide continuing education and other resources for novice educators.

28  ■ I. NURSING EDUCATION: ROLES OF TEACHER AND LEARNER

TABLE 2.3 RESOURCES FOR NOVICE NURSE EDUCATORS Resource

Organization

Website

Toolkit: Transitioning From Clinical Nursing to Nurse Faculty Toolkit: Accommodating Students With Disabilities

American Association of Colleges of Nursing

https://www.aacnnursing.org/ Education-Resources/Tool-Kits

Vision Series: Graduate Preparation for Academic Nurse Educators

National League for Nursing

http://www.nln.org/newsroom/ nln-position-documents/ nln-living-documents

NLN Healthful Work Environment Toolkit

National League for Nursing

http://www.nln.org/docs/ default-source/professionaldevelopment-programs/healthfulwork-environment-toolkit. pdf?sfvrsn=20

FERPA

U.S. Department of Education

https://www2.ed.gov/policy/gen/ guid/fpco/ferpa/index.html

ADA

U.S. Department of Justice, Civil Rights Division

https://www.ada.gov/

ADA, Americans with Disabilities Act; FERPA, Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act.

CHOOSING THE RIGHT WORK SETTING Choosing the right work setting is critical in making the transition from clinician to educator. In deciding on the setting in which to teach, the goals and mission of the school should be examined in relation to one’s own career goals. Expectations vary by school and the type of institution. Schools with a research mission emphasize scholarship more so than schools with a mission that focuses only on education. Furthermore, understanding institutional culture is an important factor in acclimating to the values and norms of the academic setting. Exhibit 2.1 suggests some questions for reflection when considering full- or part-time employment as a nurse educator in an academic or health setting.

SUMMARY Although the transition from clinician to educator presents many challenges, there are several strategies that may facilitate this transition in the academic or professional development setting. These strategies include formal, structured orientation, effective mentoring, and development of instructional skills. Novice educators, particularly those practicing in the full scope of the academic nurse educator role, may need more than one mentor as they adjust to teaching, scholarship, and service expectations in their new role. They should also be encouraged to seek out their

2. The Transition From Clinician to Educator  ■ 29

EXHIBIT 2.1 Questions to Consider Prior to Seeking Employment as a Nurse Educator 1. Do I want to work in an academic environment or healthcare setting? 2. What are the academic credentials needed for employment? 3. What kind of flexibility do I want and need in setting my work hours? 4. Do I want to work full- or part-time as a nurse educator? 5. Do I want to combine academic and clinical practice responsibilities? 6. In my career, do I want to spend the majority of my time teaching or combining research and teaching? 7. What service activities are expected in the role as an educator? 8. If I seek employment in an academic setting, what level of students and types of courses do I want to teach? 9. If I work in an academic setting, do I want to maintain some practice as a staff nurse, nurse practitioner, or clinical specialist?

own informal mentors among their peers. Orientation programs for full-time faculty should be structured, robust, and last for at least 1 year. The NET model and NLN Core Competencies provide useful frameworks for designing a new faculty orientation program. A designated administrative position should be dedicated to faculty development. This individual will need to work collaboratively with other departments within the university to ensure novice faculty receive the necessary support and guidance they need for a successful transition from clinician to educator.

REFERENCES Agger, C., Oermann, M., & Lynn, M. (2014). Hiring and incorporating doctor of nursing practice-prepared nurse faculty into academic nursing programs. Journal of Nursing Education, 53(8), 439-446. doi: 10.3928/01484834-20140724-03 American Association of Colleges of Nursing. (2019). Fact sheet: The Doctor of Nursing Practice (DNP). https://www.aacnnursing.org/Portals/42/News/Factsheets/DNPFactsheet.pdf American Nurses’ Association Commission on Nursing Education. (1969). Statement on graduate education in nursing. American Nurses’ Association. Anderson, J. (2009). The work-role transition of expert clinician to novice academic educator. Journal of Nursing Education, 48(4), 203–208. https://doi.org/10.3928/01484 834-20090401-02 Benner, P., Sutphen, M., Leonard, V., & Day, L. (2010). Educating nurses: A call for radical transformation. Jossey-Bass. Christensen, L., & Simmons, L. E. (2020). The scope of practice for academic nurse educators and academic clinical nurse educators (3rd ed.). National League for Nursing. Dreifuerst, K., McNelis, A., Weaver, M., Broome, M., Draucker, C., & Fedko, A. (2016). Exploring the pursuit of doctoral education by nurses seeking or intending to stay in faculty roles. Journal of Professional Nursing, 32(3), 202–212. https://doi.org/10.1016/ j.profnurs.2016.01.014 Fritz, E. (2018). Transition from clinical to educator roles in nursing: An integrative review. Journal for Nurses in Professional Development, 34(2), 67–77. https://doi.org/10.1097/ NND.0000000000000436

30  ■ I. NURSING EDUCATION: ROLES OF TEACHER AND LEARNER

Hoffman, D. (2019). Transitional experiences: From clinical nurse to nurse faculty. Journal of Nursing Education, 58(5), 260–265. https://doi.org/10.3928/01484834-20190422-03 Jeffers, S., & Mariani, B. (2017). The effect of a formal mentoring program on career satisfaction and intent to stay in the faculty role for novice nurse faculty. Nursing Education Perspectives, 38(1), 18–22. https://doi.org/10.1097/01.NEP.0000000000000104 Locasto, L. W., & Kochanek, D. (1989). Reality shock in the nurse educator. Journal of Nursing Education, 28(2), 79–81. McNelis, A. M., Dreifuerst, K. T., & Schwindt, R. (2019). Doctoral education and preparation for nursing faculty roles. Nurse Educator, 44(4), 202–206. https://doi.org/ 10.1097/NNE.0000000000000597 McPherson, S. (2019). Part-time clinical nursing faculty needs: An integrated review. Journal of Nursing Education, 58(4), 201–206. https://doi.org/10.3928/01484834-20190321-03 McPherson, S., & Candela, L. (2019). A Delphi study to understand clinical nursing faculty preparation and support needs. Journal of Nursing Education, 58(10), 583–590. https:// doi.org/10.3928/01484834-20190923-05 National League for Nursing. (2002). Position statement: The preparation of nurse educators. http://www.nln.org/docs/default-source/advocacy-public-policy/the-preparation-ofnurse-faculty.pdf?sfvrsn=0 National League for Nursing. (2017). Graduate preparation for academic nurse educators: A living document from the National League for Nursing. http://www.nln.org/docs/defaultsource/about/nln-vision-series-(position-statements)/vision-graduate-preparation2. pdf?sfvrsn=8 Nowell, L., Norris, J. M., Mrklas, K., & White, D. E. (2017). A literature review of mentorship programs in academic nursing. Journal of Professional Nursing, 33(5), 334–344. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.profnurs.2017.02.007 Ross, J. G., & Dunker, K. S. (2019). New clinical nurse faculty orientation: A review of the literature. Nursing Education Perspectives, 40(4), 210–215. https://doi.org/10.1097.01. NEP.000000000000000470 Scanlan, J. M. (2001). Learning clinical teaching: Is it magic? Nursing & Healthcare Perspectives, 22(5), 241–246. Schoening, A. M. (2013). From bedside to classroom: The nurse educator transition model. Nursing Education Perspectives, 34(3), 167–172. https://doi.org/10.5480/1536-502634.3.167 Shapiro, S. (2018). An exploration of the transition to the full-time faculty role among associate degree nurse educators. Nursing Education Perspectives, 39(4), 215–220. https:// doi.org/10.1097/01.NEP.0000000000000306 Summers, J. (2017). Developing competencies in the novice nurse educator: An integrative review. Teaching and Learning in Nursing, 12(4), 263–276. https://doi.org/10.1016/ j.teln.2017.05.001 U.S. Department of Education. (2018). Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act. https:// www2.ed.gov/policy/gen/guid/fpco/ferpa/index.html Wenner, T. A., Hakim, A. C., & Schoening, A. M. (2020). The work-role transition of parttime clinical faculty: Seeking to validate the nurse educator transition model. Nurse Educator, 45(2), 102–105. https://doi.org/10.1097/NNE.0000000000000704

3 Learning Theories Beth Cusatis Phillips

OBJECTIVES 1. Describe selected theories of learning 2. Explore teaching strategies based on various learning theories

INTRODUCTION Nurse educators play a key role in the teaching and learning process. They not only need to be effective teachers in the classroom and online but also in the nursing skills laboratory, simulation, in the clinical area, and during student advising. Understanding how students learn in each of these settings is paramount to good instruction. Nurse educators need to create instruction that is based on the best evidence of teaching and learning. Theory can both guide the creation of learning activities as well as assist in the reflection of the teaching process. Examining the theories of learning is essential to providing quality education. This chapter examines selected learning theories and teaching strategies based on those theories.

THE BEGINNING OF LEARNING THEORIES The first known writing about teaching and learning dates to 2100 BCE, in the Babylonian Code of Hammurabi, which briefly addressed teaching as an apprenticeship model, where learning was by practical experience (King, n.d.). The Greeks were well known for using the question and answer method of teaching, primarily recognized as the Socratic method, which dates back to 300 BCE and is based on asking multiple questions to build students’ thoughts and ideas (Fabio, 2019). Over the past 150 years, scientists and philosophers developed theoretical and conceptual models that represented the learning process. They struggled to understand how learning occurred. Current neuroscience research has changed forever the theory and practice of education. Now, like no time in the past, we have the capability to see learning happen in the brain. Through the use of PET scans and now functional MRI, one can actually see the components of the brain in action as information is processed. From this research has emerged the concept of brain plasticity, the idea that experience can actually change both the brain’s anatomy and physiology (Boyle, 2010).

32  ■ I. NURSING EDUCATION: ROLES OF TEACHER AND LEARNER

Research related to neurotransmitters in the brain also contributes to insight into how to best structure learning processes. Pi et al. (2019) studied the changes in brain plasticity in relation to motor skills. They found that motor skill learning can improve the brain’s ability to control behavior, make decisions more effectively, and switch the focus of attention more accurately. This is significant to nursing education as decision-making and psychomotor skills are essential. In addition, learning through technology has increased exponentially in the last few years. Technology-mediated learning theory may more clearly expose the role of technology in the learning process when other learning theories are applied (Bower, 2019).

WHAT IS LEARNING? Learning is a core element of human existence, and teachers are needed for much of human learning. The puzzle of explaining how we learn, and therefore how to teach, has been in the forefront since the middle of the 19th century. While there are many definitions of learning, the following discussion of learning theories is based on Schunk’s definition: “Learning is an enduring change in behavior, or in the capacity to behave in a given fashion, which results from practice or other forms of experience” (Schunk, 2020, p. 3).

THEORIES OF LEARNING Any model of teaching and learning needs to include the teacher, student, personal attributes of each, learning environment, learning content, and teaching strategies (Utley, 2011). Because it has been less than 20 years that we have actually seen learning happen in the brain, scientists were left to hypothesize how learning worked, as a means of creating a rationale for an event (learning) that they could not otherwise explain. The major theories of learning can be categorized as: Behaviorism, Cognitivism, Cognitive Theory of Multimedia Learning, Social Cognitivism, Social Learning Theory, Situated Learning Theory, Humanism, Constructivism, Brain-Based Learning, and Technology-Mediated Learning. Early theories were based on direct observation and then elaborated on by further schools of thought. Table 3.1 provides a general overview of the schools of thought.

Behaviorism With no method to see inside the brain and watch learning happen, teachers and scientists were left to hypothesize how people learned. Beginning during the second half of the 19th century and continuing into the early 20th century, scientists looked for ways of changing basic behavior. Behavioral theories defined learning as change in the method or frequency of a behavior due to some interaction in the outer environment. The interaction with the environment is key to learning within these theories. Conditioning plays a role in Behaviorism. Three well-known scientists, Pavlov, Skinner, and Thorndike, examined learning using a behaviorist perspective. Their work focused on learning as behavior change developed by external conditioning and reinforcement (Schunk, 2020).

3. Learning Theories  ■ 33

TABLE 3.1  MAJOR LEARNING THEORIES Schools of Thought

Major Tenets

Major Theorists and Contributors

Behaviorism

Learning is a change in behavior, shaped by an external environment

Pavlov Skinner Thorndike

Cognitivism

Learning is an internal process

Brunner Piaget Gagne

Cognitive Theory of Multimedia Learning

Learning through dual channels with limited capacity and active processing

Mayer

Social Cognitivism

Role of social processes in addition to internal processes

Vygotsky

Social Learning Theory

Learning occurs through learning, observing, modeling, and imitation

Bandura

Situated Learning Theory

Learning takes place in the same situation or environment it is applied

Lave and Wenger

Humanism

People intentionally act based on perceived needs

Rogers Maslow

Constructivism

Learning is an internal process built on previous learning

Dewey Piaget Kolb Gardner

Brain-Based Learning

Cognitive neuroscience has identified actual neural processes of learning. Teaching methods should focus on how the brain learns.

Sousa Jensen

TechnologyMediated Learning

The technology has no purpose but to assist in conveying meaning to students. Educators maintain the control over the technology.

Bower

Ivan Pavlov (1839–1946) is known for his work with classical conditioning, a multistep process that entailed introducing an unconditioned stimulus, which brings about an unconditioned response. For Pavlov, this entailed presenting a dog with meat, which in turn resulted in salivation. While training the dog, a metronome would be ticking in the background. Over time the dog would become conditioned to the metronome and would start to salivate when the metronome ticked. “A stimulus that was neutral in and of itself had been superimposed upon the action of the inborn alimentary reflex,” Pavlov wrote of the results. “We observed that, after

34  ■ I. NURSING EDUCATION: ROLES OF TEACHER AND LEARNER

several repetitions of the combined stimulation, the sounds of the metronome had acquired the property of stimulating salivary secretion” (Pavlov, 1927). Edward Thorndike (1874–1949) is known for his work that focused on learning, individual differences, intelligence, and transfer of knowledge (Hilgard, 1996). Thorndike developed psychological connectionism. He hypothesized that learning is the formulation of connections between sensory stimuli and neural impulses that are identified through behavior. He also believed that learning occurred often by trial and error. Thorndike noted that teachers need to help students form good habits and that teaching should contextualize content for students to understand how to apply what they have learned. He also proposed that information should be presented when the student is ready to learn or just before the information can be used in a serviceable way (Thorndike & Gates, 1929). B.F. Skinner (1904–1990) formulated the theory of operant conditioning in the 1930s. Based on the work of Thorndike, Skinner believed that the best way to understand behavior was to examine the causes of an action and its consequences. Skinner created the term operant conditioning, which is changing behavior using reinforcement that follows the desired response. Skinner identified three types of responses that can follow behavior: neutral operants or responses from the environment that neither increase nor decrease the probability of a behavior being repeated; reinforcers, which are responses from the environment that increase the probability of a behavior being repeated; and punishers or responses from the environment that decrease the likelihood of a behavior being repeated. Positive reinforcement strengthens a behavior by providing a consequence an individual finds rewarding. The removal of an unpleasant reinforcer can also strengthen behavior. This is known as negative reinforcement because it is the removal of an adverse stimulus. Negative reinforcement strengthens behavior because it stops or removes an unpleasant experience (Skinner, 1953). Punishment inhibits behavior and is the opposite of reinforcement as it is designed to eliminate a response. Like reinforcement, punishment occurs by directly applying an unpleasant stimulus after a response or by removing a potentially rewarding stimulus (McLeod, 2018). While popular through much of the 20th century, behaviorism is no longer a predominant educational perspective. However, the concepts of positive and negative reinforcement retain their usefulness today. Behavioral objectives, learning contracts, and programmed learning are based on behaviorism. Examples of teaching methods with this educational perspective are listed in Exhibit 3.1.

EXHIBIT 3.1 Examples of Teaching Methods Based on Behaviorism Classroom norm-setting to ensure consistency Grades for class participation Guided practice Lecture without discussion Rewards for performance Repetition Reward systems Skill exercises

3. Learning Theories  ■ 35

Cognitivism Cognitivism theories are a group of theories that include the work of Brunner, Gagne, Vygotsky, and others. During the 1960s cognitive aspects of learning were recognized, primarily because the behaviourist perspective could not explain why people organize and make sense of the information they learn. Cognitive theory defines learning as a semipermanent change in mental processes or associations. Cognitivists do not require an outward demonstration of learning but focus more on the internal processes and connections that take place during learning. Cognitivists consider learning as mental structures that provide a base for organizing and building knowledge. Learning is not a change in behavior but a change in mental structures. Changes may be observed in behavior, but the behavior is due to a change in cognition. The locus of control for learning is in the learner, not the environment (Utley, 2011). Jerome Brunner (1915–2016) proposed the Cognitive Growth Theory to examine intellectual growth of children. He proposed that as children grow, they depend on a widening array of modes of understanding. Infants rely on enactive responses (action) to process and represent information, children 1 to 4 years of age rely on images to process information, and finally children over the age of 4 begin to use language to shape and augment information processing (Brunner, 1964). A primary focus of cognitive psychology is on memory, a subject that has been studied for thousands of years. Information Processing Theory explains acquisition of knowledge in a step-wise manner. Information processing theorists such as Robert Gagne (1919–2002) are less concerned with external factors and focus on mental processes that come between stimulus and response (Schunk, 2020). These theorists hypothesize that people selectively pay attention to environmental details, transform data into information, and rehearse the information, relating the new information to that already known (Mayer, 2011). Within the Information Processing model, Gagne (1985) described four processes: (a) encoding when environmental information is sensed or attended to (generation of neural impulses), (b) processing of information (filtering out of irrelevant information), (c) storage after encoding (may be short-term or long-term), and (d) retrieval, when the information is needed for a task (action). Examples of teaching methods based on cognitivism include use of problemsolving, reciprocal teaching (activities involving a dialogue between the teacher and students about segments of text to understand its meaning), and scaffolding (providing support such as resources and guides during the learning process to promote a deeper level of learning) (Crutchshank et al., 2011; Gagne et al., 2005).

Social Cognitivism Vygotsky (1896–1934) expanded Piaget’s basic developmental theory of cognitive abilities of the individual to include the concept of social-cultural cognition, the idea that all learning occurs in a cultural context and involves social interactions. He emphasized the role that culture and language play in developing students’ thinking and the ways in which teachers and peers assist learners in developing new ideas and skills. Vygotsky proposed the concept of the zone of proximal development, which suggested that students learn subjects best just beyond their range of existing experience with assistance from the teacher or another classmate. Assistance from

36  ■ I. NURSING EDUCATION: ROLES OF TEACHER AND LEARNER

others bridges the distance from what students know or can do independently to what they can know or do with assistance (Schunk, 2020).

Social Learning Theory Based on the work of Albert Bandura (1925–), this theory focuses on the concept that much of human learning occurs in the environment (Schunk, 2020). Social Learning Theory is built on the importance of observational learning, imitation, and modeling. Bandura’s theory hypothesizes that there is a continuous interaction among behaviors, cognitions, and the environment. The learner and environment are in a reciprocal relationship where one influences the other, and human behavior is learned visually through modeling from observing others (Bandura, 1977, 1986). For a student to learn, three internal processes must occur: attention or observation, retention or processing in memory, and motivation or having a reason to replicate another’s behavior.

Situated Learning Theory Lave and Wenger (1991) suggested that learning takes place in the same situation or environment in which it is applied. Their Situated Learning Theory proposes that learning is more than just a reception of knowledge. Rather, the knowledge is presented in as authentic context as is possible and social interaction and collaboration among community members is imperative to the learning. Apprenticeship experiences enable the learner to be in the real environment in order to learn. Because nursing education involves social interaction and collaboration, and emphasizes the real practice of nurses, an authentic context is critical. Therefore, selecting teaching strategies that best prepare learners to acquire and retain knowledge is important. Exhibit 3.2 provides examples of teaching methods based on social cognitivism theories.

Humanism Humanistic theory, largely constructivist, emphasizes both cognitive and affective learning. Within this paradigm learning is viewed as a personal act to fulfill one’s potential (Schunk, 2020). The five basic principles of humanistic education include the promotion of self-direction and independence; development of the ability to take responsibility for what is learned; development of creativity; curiosity; and an interest in the arts (Huitt, 2009).

EXHIBIT 3.2 Examples of Teaching Methods Based on Cognitivism Apprenticeships in authentic contexts (preceptorships) Demonstration/return demonstration Interprofessional groupwork Observational learning Role modeling Socratic questioning

3. Learning Theories  ■ 37

Hierarchy of Needs The Hierarchy of Needs theory, first discussed by Maslow in 1943, posits that all human actions are directed toward goal attainment. Most human actions are based on hierarchical needs, with lower order needs taking precedence over higher-order needs (Maslow, 1968). The lowest order need is physiological needs such as food, air, and water. Safety needs become predominant when there are environmental threats. Love and belonging needs become important once physiological and safety needs are met. Esteem needs are based on acceptance, achievement, and respect from others. The highest level is the need for self-actualization, which leads to selffulfillment and personal growth (Maslow, 1943). The first four needs are deficiency needs, which motivate people to resolve them (Maslow, 1968). Self-actualization is considered a growth or being needed and, according to Maslow (1943), can only be reached by those individuals who have satisfied all lower level needs and are then able to “become everything that one is capable of becoming” (Maslow, 1943, p. 382). In 1970, Maslow expanded the hierarchy to include cognitive, aesthetic (1970a), and transcendence needs (1970b). Encouraging learners to meet their deficiency needs will allow them to strive for all they are able to achieve (McLeod, 2020). In recent years, there has been discussion about the relevance of the order of Maslow’s needs. Tay and Diener (2011) found that the needs do not always occur in the order Maslow intended from lowest to highest level. This was based on socioeconomic status and ability to meet those lower level needs. Hopper (2020) noted, however, that many researchers build from Maslow’s theory and find relevance and use in it. Carl Rogers (1902–1987) concurred with Maslow and extended Maslow’s work by concluding that for people to grow they need an environment that provides genuineness, acceptance, and empathy. Rogers believed that every person could achieve their goals, wishes, and desires in life; self-actualization took place when, or if, they did (McLeod, 2014). Examples of teaching methods based on humanism include participatory and discovery methods, allowing students choices and opportunities for their learning, and providing resources and encouragement for learning (Schunk, 2020).

Constructivism A reaction to didactic approaches such as behaviorism and programmed instruction, constructivism states that learning is an active, contextualized process of constructing knowledge through experiencing and reflecting on the experience rather than acquiring it. Knowledge is constructed based on personal experiences and hypotheses. Learners continuously test these hypotheses through social interaction. Each person has a different interpretation and construction of knowledge process. The learner is not a “blank slate” but brings past experiences and cultural factors to a situation (Bruning et al., 2010). John Dewey (1859–1952) was one of the 20th century’s most influential educators. His ideas of experiential education placed an emphasis on meaningful activity in learning and participation in the classroom (Schunk, 2020). Unlike earlier models of teaching, which relied on a teacher-centered classroom and rote learning, Dewey’s idea of progressive education asserted that students must be invested in what they were learning. He proposed that curriculum should be relevant to

38  ■ I. NURSING EDUCATION: ROLES OF TEACHER AND LEARNER

students’ lives. He viewed experiential learning of practical life skills as crucial to education (Schunk, 2020). Jean Piaget (1896–1980) was the first to state that learning is a developmental process and that children create knowledge rather than learn from the teacher. He recognized that children construct knowledge based on practice, which is related to biological and developmental maturation. Piaget observed young children and mapped out four stages of growth: sensorimotor (birth to about 2 years), preoperational (ages 2–7), concrete operations (ages 7–14), and formal operations (beginning around ages 11–15 and extending into adulthood). His work recognized the ­importance of some rote learning while also hypothesizing that other activities that support students’ exploration are essential (Hilgard & Bower, 1975; Huitt & Hummel, 2003). In the early 1970s, David Kolb and Roger Fry (1975) developed the Experiential Learning Model composed of four elements: concrete experience, observation of and reflection on that experience, formation of abstract concepts based on the reflection, and testing the new concepts. These four elements are the basis of a cycle of learning that can begin with any one of the four elements, but typically begins with a concrete experience. He named his model to emphasize its links to ideas from John Dewey, Jean Piaget, and other writers of the cognitivist paradigm. His model was developed predominantly for use with adult education but has had widespread pedagogical implications in higher education. Kolb (1984) created a graphic representation of his model using two perpendicular continua, one related to process and the other related to perception. Howard Gardner (1943–present) argued that learning occurred in a variety of ways based on eight different intelligences. The Multiple Intelligences theory suggests that human beings have a number of relatively discrete intellectual capacities (Gardner, 2011). This theory postulates that all humans possess the capacity to develop several intelligences and each has a unique and distinct profile. From the educator’s perspective, this theory implies that all people are individuals and that each should be taught in a way that best fits their intellectual profile. In addition, this theory lends itself well to the idea that teaching should be done using multiple ways in order to reach more students. Gardner’s eight intelligences are Spatial, Bodily-Kinesthetic, Musical, Linguistic, Logical-Mathematical, Interpersonal, Intrapersonal, and Naturalistic. Some examples of teaching methods based on constructivism are in Exhibit 3.3.

Brain-Based Learning Based on the rapid influx of information from brain research over the past 20 years, a new paradigm that bridges research and education has emerged. Brain-based learning is “the active engagement of purposeful strategies based on principles derived from an understanding of the brain” (Jensen, 2008, p. 4). According to cognitive neuroscientists, learning literally changes our brain. An increased rate of signaling by cortical neurons generates an increased number of branches in the neo-cortex, which in turn increases the density of cellular material and enhances connections with other neurons (creating more synapses). The changes only happen in the areas of the brain that are stimulated. The synapses increase because of the repeated firing of the particular neurons engaged in learning in the presence of emotion chemicals such as adrenaline and serotonin around the neurons.

3. Learning Theories  ■ 39

EXHIBIT 3.3 Examples of Teaching Methods Based on Constructivism Case-based learning Class discussions and debates Collaborative learning Discovery learning Field trips Flipped classroom Guided experimentation Inquiry-based learning Mind mapping Peer tutoring Problem-based learning Project-based learning Research projects Scaffolded assignments Simulation

The longevity of learning is in proportion to the number of neocortical areas that are engaged (Sousa, 2011). Jensen (2013) established seven guiding principles for brain-based learning that are significant for nurse educators to understand (Exhibit 3.4). Exhibit 3.5 lists examples of teaching strategies based on concepts of brain-based learning.

Technology-Mediated Learning Theory As education opportunities turn to more virtual and distance-based options, it is important for educators to consider the relationship between the technology and the learning. Beetham and Sharpe (2019) explain that digital technologies have transformed education. They saturate educational organizations. In the same way, the lives of learners are surrounded by digital devices. The concern is no longer how to integrate digital technology into teaching, but rather how to have pedagogies that take the new technological and social contexts fully into account. Curriculum practices need to prepare learners for a world pervaded by information, networks, algorithms, and data. Bower (2019) proposed a theory of technology-mediated learning in which the educators still maintain the power and agency over the technology. The technology

EXHIBIT 3.4 Guiding Principles for Brain-Based Learning Brains are dynamic, not static. Human brains are unique. Brains use active construction of learning. Human brains are social brains. Physical and cognitive connectivity. Uniqueness is the rule, not the exception. Brains are designed for big picture, authentic processing.

40  ■ I. NURSING EDUCATION: ROLES OF TEACHER AND LEARNER

EXHIBIT 3.5 Examples of Teaching Methods Based on Brain-Based Learning Allow students time to practice prior to testing Celebrate successes Empower learners by providing choices Encourage peer support Engage students socially and kinesthetically Ensure the classroom is safe for risk-taking Maintain a variety of teaching methods that complement diverse learning styles Manage high levels of student stress Preexpose learners to content and context a week before the lesson Provide frequent, nonjudgmental feedback Provide some form of feedback to each student during the class Set high standards Teach less content and more in depth on important concepts Unfolding case studies Source: Jensen, E. (2008). Brain-based learning (2nd ed.). Corwin Press.

is there to assist in conveying meaning to the students in order to learn. Based on this assumption, and an integrated review of theory and research in the learning technology field, several premises of technology-mediated learning surfaced (Exhibit 3.6). Although new and not well tested yet, the premises address the importance of educators’ understanding, use, evaluation, and control over the technology instead of allowing the technology to guide the learning. Exhibit 3.7 provides examples of teaching methods consistent with technology-mediated learning theory.

EXHIBIT 3.6 Premises of Technology-Mediated Learning Premise 1: Digital technologies can perform a mediating role for participants in their attempts to achieve learning goals. Premise 2: In technology-mediated learning contexts, participant beliefs, knowledge, practices, and the environment all mutually influence one another. Premise 3: In technology-mediated learning settings, the role of teachers is to help optimize student learning outcomes and experiences through the purposeful deployment of learning technologies. Premise 4: The affordances of technologies, including their recognition and use, influences the sorts of representation, interaction, production, and learning that can take place. Premise 5: The way in which modalities are used and combined influences the way in which meaning is processed, interpreted, created, and interrelated. Premise 6: The way in which technology is used to mediate interaction patterns and possibilities between networks of participants influences the learning that takes place. Premise 7: Arrangements of technologies and the way they are used can influence the sense of presence and community that are experienced. Source: Bower, M. (2019). Technology‐mediated learning theory. British Journal of Educational Technology, 50(3), 1035–1048. https://doi.org/10.1111/bjet.12771 Reprinted with permission of John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

3. Learning Theories  ■ 41

EXHIBIT 3.7 Examples of Teaching Methods for Technology-Mediated Learning Augmented reality programs Immersive learning experiences Live video discussion/class/demonstration Participative learning online live forums, breakout groups Virtual reality programs

SUMMARY For many years, parents, educators, psychologists, and more recently cognitive neuroscientists have explored the concepts of teaching and learning. The science of teaching and learning, going back to Pavlov in the 19th century, has now evolved from theories based on observation to knowing which parts of the brain are activated by different stimuli. We now know that the brain is constantly learning by creating new connections. Many classrooms have become virtual. The question still remains, however, as to what is the ideal way to assist students in the learning process? Nursing faculty members also should be aware of the need to teach students how to learn, and how to be successful in their courses and programs of study. What are the best ways to motivate the students to learn? What are the best ways to engage students in the classroom and online environment to encourage the deep understanding of material? How can nursing faculty use learning theory to help students learn and develop? Developing an engaged educational environment, with students actively participating in the process of learning, remains a challenge. Nurse educators need to accept this challenge by finding new and different ways of teaching to reach all students and creating prepared and equipped nurses for the future.

REFERENCES Bandura, A. (1977). Social learning theory. General Learning Press. Bandura, A. (1986). Social foundations of thought and action: A social cognitive theory. Prentice Hall. Beetham, H., & Sharpe, R. (Eds.). (2019). Rethinking pedagogy for a digital age. Routledge. https://doi.org/10.4324/9781351252805 Bower, M. (2019). Technology‐mediated learning theory. British Journal of Educational Technology, 50(3), 1035–1048. https://doi.org/10.1111/bjet.12771 Boyle, T. (2010). The brain: Changing the adult mind through the power of plasticity. http:// www.brainhq.com/media/news/brain-changing-adult-mind-through-power-plasticity Bruning, R. H., Schraw, G. J., Norby, M. M., & Ronning, R. R. (2010). Cognitive psychology and instruction (5th ed.). Pearson. Brunner, J. (1964). The course of cognitive growth. American Psychologist, 19(1), 1–15. https://doi.org/10.1037/h0044160 Crutchshank, D., Metcalf, K., & Jenkins, D. (2011). The act of teaching. McGraw Hill: Higher Education.

42  ■ I. NURSING EDUCATION: ROLES OF TEACHER AND LEARNER

Fabio, M. (2019). How the Socratic method works and why is it used in law school. ThoughtCo. https://www.thoughtco.com/what-is-the-socratic-method-2154875 Gagne, R. M. (1985). The conditions of learning and theory of instruction (4th ed.). Holt, Rinehart, and Winston. Gagne, R. M., Wager, W. W., Golas, F. C., & Keller, J. M. (2005). Principles of instructional design (5th ed.). Thomas/Wadsworth Publishing. Gardner, H. (2011). Frames of mind: The theory of multiple intelligences. Basic Books. Hilgard, E. R. (1996). Perspectives on educational psychology. Educational Psychology Review, 8(4), 419–431. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01463942 Hilgard, E. R., & Bower, G. H. (1975). Theories of learning. Prentice-Hall. Hopper, E. (2020). Maslow’s hierarchy of needs explained. Retrieved from https://www .thoughtco.com/maslows-hierarchy-of-needs-4582571 Huitt, W. (2009). Humanism and open education. In Educational psychology interactive. Valdosta, GA: Valdosta State University. http://www.edpsycinteractive.org/topics/ affect/humed.html Huitt, W., & Hummel, J. (2003). Piaget’s theory of cognitive development. In Educational psychology interactive. Valdosta, GA: Valdosta State University. http://www.edpsycin teractive.org/topics/cognition/piaget.html Jensen, E. (2008). Brain-based learning (2nd ed.). Corwin Press. Jensen, E. (2013). Guiding principles for brain-based education: Building common ground between neuroscientists and educators. http://www.brainbasedlearning.net/blog/ King, L. (n.d.). Ancient history sourcebook: Code of Hammurabi. http://www.fordham.edu/ halsall/ancient/hamcode.asp Kolb, D. A. (1984). Experiential learning as the source of learning and development. Prentice Hall. Lave, J., & Wenger, E. (1991). Situated learning: Legitimate peripheral participation. Cambridge University Press. Maslow, A. (1943). A theory of human motivation. Psychological Review, 50(4), 370–396. https://doi.org/10.1037/h0054346 Maslow, A. H. (1968). Toward a psychology of being (2nd ed.). Van Nostrand Reinhold. Maslow, A. H. (1970a). Motivation and personality. Harper & Row. Maslow, A. H. (1970b). Religions, values, and peak experiences. Penguin. Mayer, R. E. (2011). Applying the science of learning. Pearson. McLeod, S. A. (2014). Carl Rogers. https://www.simplypsychology.org/carl-rogers.html McLeod, S. A. (2018). B.F. Skinner operant conditioning. http://www.simplypsychology.org/ operant-conditioning.html McLeod, S. A. (2020). Maslow’s hierarchy of needs. www.simplypsychology.org/maslow.html Pavlov, I. (1927). Conditioned reflexes. Oxford University Press. Pi, Y. L., Wu, X. H., Wang, F. J., Liu, K., Wu, Y., Zhu, H., & Zhang, J. (2019). Motor skill learning induces brain network plasticity: A diffusion-tensor imaging study. PLOS ONE, 14(2), e0210015. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0210015 Schunk, D. H. (2020). Learning theories: An educational perspective. Pearson. Skinner, B. F. (1953). Science and human behavior. Free Press. Sousa, D. (2011). How the brain learns (4th ed.). Corwin Press. Tay, L., & Diener, E. (2011). Needs and subjective well-being around the world. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 101(2), 354–365. https://doi.org/10.1037/a0023779 Thorndike, E. L., & Gates A. I. (1929). Elementary principles of education. MacMillan. Utley, R. (2011). Theory and research for academic nurse educators. Jones and Bartlett.

4 Understanding the Learner Beth Cusatis Phillips

OBJECTIVES 1. Describe the varied attributes that learners bring to the nursing program 2. Analyze learner differences that can influence teaching nursing students 3. Explore strategies nurse educators can use to enhance learning

INTRODUCTION Understanding learners is an important component of quality teaching. Ideally, nurse educators use a learner-centered approach when preparing lessons to teach; during class and when teaching in simulation, clinical practice, and other settings; and for assessment. Nurse educators need an understanding of the varied attributes of students, which can affect their learning process and outcomes; students’ culture and ethnicity; and their learning style preferences, the way in which students approach a particular learning situation. Students’ age, gender, motivation, abilities, and self-regulation are other characteristics that can influence their learning and our teaching approaches. This chapter examines varied attributes of nursing students, learner differences that can influence what and how we teach, and multiple strategies nurse educators can use that take into consideration these different characteristics.

LEARNER ATTRIBUTES Learners come to the nursing program from varied backgrounds and with different perspectives, life experiences, desires, and needs. They have different aspirations, preferences, and resources (Beetham & Sharpe, 2020). The way in which students learn varies as well; some are methodical, analytical learners, while others are more intuitive. Some students learn better by doing and some by seeing. Students vary in culture, ethnicity, abilities, learning preferences, age, gender, motivation, economic background, previous life experiences, and many other factors, which can have an influence on learning. Currently the majority of students in nursing education programs are white, non-Hispanic (about 59%), female (87%), and under the age of

44  ■ I. NURSING EDUCATION: ROLES OF TEACHER AND LEARNER

30 years (58%) (National League for Nursing [NLN], 2018). As the United States becomes more diverse, so must our nursing education programs.

Culture and Attributes Our increasingly global society brings with it diversity as never experienced in higher education. Understanding the culture and ethnicity of learners aids nurse educators in teaching them more effectively and appropriately. According to the U.S. Department of Education, National Center for Education Statistics (2019), the percentage of public school students who learned English as a second language was higher in 2016 (9.6%, or an estimated 4.9 million students) than 16 years earlier (8.1%, or an estimated 3.8 million students). The rising complexity of teaching a diverse class of nursing students requires that faculty members be attuned to the learning needs of each student, recognizing that effective teaching should incorporate multiple methods to meet the range of needs. In North America, we are immersed in a Western perspective of learning and knowing. Western perspectives value the individual learner over the collective, promote autonomy and independence of thought and action, and emphasize scientific research while the Eastern perspective values the communal connection (Cortina et al., 2017; Merriam & Bierema, 2014). However, nurse educators need to recognize this ethnocentrism and develop courses with multicultural perspectives. Valuable lessons in education come out of both Western and Eastern perspectives (Smith & Hu, 2013). Faculty members can no longer assume that they understand and know the students in their courses. One of the major cultural differences is communication (Svinicki & McKeachie, 2014). For example, looking away rather that establishing eye contact with a faculty member is indicative of careful attention rather than inattention or anger in Asian and Native American cultures (Akechi et  al., 2013). Nonparticipation, such as not answering questions to clarify a concept and not questioning the teacher, may be related to a cultural norm of showing respect to elders in certain cultures (Suinn, 2014). In a situation such as this, the teacher can use tools such as audience response system (clickers) or a one-minute paper, which may assist the students and give the faculty member more input as to student comprehension. Another important cultural difference is related to collectivism (the better good of the whole) or individualism (a focus on the individual). Western norms relate to individualism, but many cultures, such as Asian and certain African, Latin American, and Native American cultures, value the success of the whole more than individual success (Cortina et al., 2017). Small group activities in the classroom and projects may assist in deeper learning for these groups. Study groups also are helpful for this population of students. Students from other countries and cultures may have a lower level of verbal fluency (Suinn, 2014). Students whose native language is not English may have an easier time with reading and writing than with verbal communication. In this situation, having class sessions video and audio digitally archived and available to students out of class may be of help to students. Other strategies include having content available in written format and using activities such as simulation, which provide kinesthetic as well as auditory and visual cues. Examples of teaching strategies for use in multicultural classrooms are provided in Exhibit 4.1.

4. Understanding the Learner  ■ 45

EXHIBIT 4.1 Teaching Strategies for Inclusion in Multicultural Classrooms Become aware of your own cultural biases Treat each student as a unique individual Maintain a culturally neutral classroom Emphasize cooperation instead of competition Recognize the complexity of diversity Foster intergroup relations Be concrete and explicit Monitor your use of idioms, abbreviations, and slang Be accessible with clear times of availability Digitally archive videos or audio files of classes for students to review Use culturally integrated examples, pictures, case studies, etc. but not stereotypes Encourage sharing of culturally diverse life experiences Provide discussion questions in advance so students with English as second language have an opportunity to process before being called on

Learning Style Preferences The concept of learning styles or preferences has been studied for more than 50 years. In the literature, the verbiage used varies from learning style to learning preference. Anderson (2016) explained that “a learning style is a preference rather than something that is fixed and is influenced by previous learning experiences” (p. 55). A learning style preference is the preference for a particular style for learning; it is the manner in which an individual approaches a learning situation, which has implications for teaching. Do students learn and retain more when teaching methods match their learning style preference? Does purposeful matching of teaching to learning style preference improve learning outcomes? Learning style preference models were developed to guide students’ understanding of how they prefer to learn but preference is not the only way they can learn (Davis, 2009). Expanding one’s way of learning builds a stronger, more flexible learner by increasing the “cognitive repertoire and processes” (p. 273). Identification of learning style preferences has been a useful tool for students to examine their own preferences, develop better study methods, and identify particular ways to improve their learning outcomes. There are many models of learning style preferences. Popular theorists such as Kolb (1974, 1984) and Fleming and Mills (1992) have described learning styles and learner preferences, using different theoretical and physiological perspectives. Using the concepts of his Experiential Learning Model, Kolb hypothesized that each of the four quadrants of the perceiving and processing continua could be interpreted as four preferred learning preferences. Divergers (concrete and reflective) view concrete experiences from multiple perspectives and adapt by thinking rather than doing. Convergers (abstract and active) prefer the practical application of problem-solving and technical tasks over personal issues. Assimilators (abstract and reflective) focus more on ideas than people and integrate multiple ideas into a conceptual whole. Accommodators (concrete and active) are comfortable with people and tend to use trial and error in problem-­ solving (Kolb, 1984) (Figure 4.1).

46  ■ I. NURSING EDUCATION: ROLES OF TEACHER AND LEARNER

Active experimentation Doing

Concrete experience Feeling

Abstract conceptualization Thinking

Reflective observation Watching

FIGURE 4.1 Kolb’s learning cycle and learning styles Source: Adapted from Kolb, D. (1984). Experiential learning: Experience as the source of learning and development. Prentice-Hall.

In 1992, Fleming and Mills introduced the VARK learning preference model, which introduces four learning style preferences: Visual, Auditory, Read/Write, and Kinesthetic (VARK). They suggested that these learning style preferences relate to only one component of learning—how to take in and give out information. Each mode is measured using the VARK tool (Fleming, 2012). The four learning style preference modes are: ■

■

■ ■

A visual preference provides information in graphic formats such as maps, charts, and flow charts rather than in text format. An aural/auditory preference describes a preference for information that is language based (heard or spoken). A read/write preference indicates an inclination for information in text format. A kinesthetic learner prefers information that is concrete and experience-based.

Pashler et al. (2008) undertook a comprehensive meta-analysis of the research supporting the concept of learning style preferences and application of learning styles to improve instruction. Their review found evidence that individuals, if asked, will express preferences for how material is presented to therm. However, they also found that there was no evidence to support the hypothesis that matching teaching methods to learning style preferences will lead to improved learning outcomes. Leite et al. (2010) studied the VARK model and indicated there was validity in the measurement of learning preferences but recognized it was one of many ways to assess learning. Husmann and O’Loughlin (2019) found that aligning study habits to students’ learning style according to VARK did not make a difference in the outcomes of the course. No single assessment of learning style preference guarantees that a student’s learning needs will be satisfied. The teacher should create learning environments

4. Understanding the Learner  ■ 47

that address the content and concepts to be learned using a multitude of methods rather than trying to match instruction to each student’s learning style preference. Being aware of one’s own style preference can help guide the student in ways to study. In addition, when teachers use multiple approaches, students are challenged to learn in different ways that enhance their learning. The teacher’s own personal learning style preference does not change the use of multiple approaches but could be shared to role model ways to strengthen learning by using different modes. For example, teachers who are auditory learners could share that they challenge themselves by practicing kinesthetically to strengthen their knowledge base and skill. Students may comprehend better when they use a style that does not match with their strength (American Psychological Association, 2014). For example, if students are auditory learners, they may learn more if they engaged in some visual learning rather than only using auditory methods. Additionally, material presented with a variety of methods keeps students engaged with the content and learning. Nilson (2016) believes students should learn the same materials in different ways. Exhibit 4.2 provides examples of teaching strategies for diverse learning style preferences.

Age Over the years, the age makeup of the student population in higher education has changed significantly. Starting with the returning veterans of World War II, colleges have seen rapid increases in the number of adult learners. Adult learners are considered to be nontraditional college students. Nontraditional refers to any student who delays starting college for a year or more, attends college on a part-time basis, works full time, has dependents, is a single parent, is financially independent, or does not have a high school diploma (Pelletier, 2010). Nontraditional students are the majority on college campuses today (Center for Postsecondary and Economic Success, 2015; Taliaferro, 2017). Research on learners has shown that adults come from a wide variety of backgrounds and bring many different perspectives to the classroom (Wlodkowski & Ginsberg, 2017). While often adults as learners are classified into one group, adult learners today are comprised of Baby Boomers, Gen X, Millennials, and Gen Z (Table 4.1). The Millennials have recently taken over as the largest generation in America (Dimock, 2019; Fry, 2020). Much has been published about learning, values, motivation, and preferences for delivery methods for each

EXHIBIT 4.2 Examples of Teaching Strategies for Diverse Learning Style Preferences Vary teaching methods, assignments, and learning activities Include individual and group activities Use discussion in the classroom and/or online environment Use color, charts, and graphics in visual presentations Use role-play and simulations Provide opportunities to learn by doing Provide opportunities for the diverse learning style preferences in the class and laboratory Encourage learners to challenge self to use other preferences in learning Do not teach solely using your personal learning style preference

48  ■ I. NURSING EDUCATION: ROLES OF TEACHER AND LEARNER

TABLE 4.1  GENERATIONAL DIFFERENCES IN VALUES, LEARNING, AND TEACHING METHODS Generation and Ages

Values

Learning Motivation

Delivery Methods

Feedback

Baby Boomers 1946–1964

Optimistic, involved, hard workers

Public and peer recognition, relevance to career goals

Lecture, small group discussion

Welldocumented feedback all at once

Generation X 1965–1980

Informal, skeptical, self-reliant

Relevance to personal goals, recognition by faculty

On-the-job training, e-Learning, active learning

Regular ongoing feedback

Millennial/ Gen Y 1981–1996

Realists, confident, frequent use of social networking

Fast track to success, structured assignments with clear deadlines

e-Learning, blogs, wikis, podcasts, mobile apps, hands-on learning

Frequent feedback

Generation Z, iGen, Centennials 1997–present

Ethnically diverse, globally aware, conservative, volunteerism, environmental concerns

Digital natives, content abundance, technology dependent, collaborative

Dislike traditional classroom format, multitaskers, want learning to be fun

Instant feedback

of these generations. Determinations are made based on age, formative life experiences such as world events or major shifts, and the life cycle. These areas affect how one looks at learning and education. In nursing education, 36% of students in associate degree programs are over the age of 30 compared to 10% of baccalaureate students. Sixty-two percent of RN-BSN students, 44% of master’s nursing students, and 82% of doctoral nursing students are over the age of 30 (NLN, 2018). It is important to examine adult learners based on their unique learning needs. In 1973, Malcolm Knowles introduced the term “andragogy,” outlining differences between children and adult learners (Knowles, 1973). Andragogy focuses on learning needs of adult learners. Knowles identified six assumptions about adult learning: 1. Need to Know: Adults prefer to know why they are learning particular content at the outset of learning. Teachers should assist adults to contextualize the learning to recognize its importance. 2. Learner’s Self-Concept: Adult self-concept is dependent on progress toward self-direction. Adults need to be approached as capable and self-directed learners.

4. Understanding the Learner  ■ 49

3. Role of the Learner’s Experiences: Adults enter into education with prior experiences, which provide them with additional valuable resources. The richest resource for learning resides within; therefore, developing active learning strategies that build on adults’ experiences is beneficial (Svinicki & McKeachie, 2014). 4. Readiness to Learn: Adults become ready to learn when they can use their learning to deal with real-life situations or perform a task. They want to learn what they can apply to current situations. 5. Orientation to Learning: Adults are life-centered (task-centered, problem-­ centered) in their orientation to learning. They want to learn what will help them perform tasks or deal with problems they confront in everyday situations and those presented in the context of application to real-life. 6. Motivation: Adults are responsive to some external motivators (e.g., a better job and higher salaries), but the most potent motivators are internal (e.g., desire for increased job satisfaction and self-esteem. (Knowles et al., 2015). Nursing faculty members are faced with intergenerational classrooms and concurrently the needs of traditional and adult learners. Well-organized classes, with introductions that contextualize the content, relate it to clinical practice, and contain active learning exercises address the needs of both traditional and adult students. The use of technology also should be considered as the Millennial and Gen Z students have grown up using the internet and receiving immediate answers to questions. In clinical situations, it is important to assist the nursing staff and preceptors to understand the difference in generational learners. In 2017, the average age of RNs was 51 years old (National Council of State Boards of Nursing, 2017). That means that Baby Boomers are working with Gen X and Millennial nurses. For example, students may be embracing technology with nursing reference books accessible on cell phones, a behavior that some older nursing staff may interpret as texting and indifference on the part of the student. Exhibit 4.3 lists teaching strategies for use in multigenerational classrooms.

Gender Nationally, 9.1% of the RN workforce is male (National Council State Boards of Nursing, 2017). Only 5% of full-time faculty teaching in baccalaureate and higher degree programs are men (Robert Wood Johnson Foundation, 2012). In nursing EXHIBIT 4.3 Examples of Teaching Strategies for Multigenerational Classrooms Assess student characteristics and needs early Avoid assumptions about learners State course expectations clearly related to technological abilities for class Provide resources for learners Provide alternative activities if possible Provide creative, individualized assignments when possible Remain flexible and attentive to diverse students Source: Lowell, V. L., and Morris, J. M. (2018). Multigenerational classrooms in higher education: Equity and learning with technology. International Journal of Information and Learning Technology, 36(2), 78–93. http://dx.doi.org/10.1108/ IJILT-06-2018-0068

50  ■ I. NURSING EDUCATION: ROLES OF TEACHER AND LEARNER

programs, 15% of students enrolled in associate degree and BSN programs are male, 13% are male in RN-BSN, 14% in master’s, and 12% in doctoral nursing programs (NLN, 2018). As more men enter nursing education programs, faculty members need to take into account gender differences in learning, expectations, and perspectives. Throughout recent history, nursing has been a career that is undertaken primarily by females. Our classrooms have been filled with female students with female faculty members. The word “nurse” often has a female connotation. However, over the past 15 years the number of men in nursing education programs has increased, and creating a safe space for men to feel welcome is imperative. Through the 1990s, there was a flurry of research investigating how male and female students differed in the college classroom. Rocca (2010) conducted an analysis of literature on student participation in the general college classroom and found continued subtle gender biases. Male college students tended to participate and be more engaged in the classroom, especially when the faculty member was male, and female students were more likely to participate with a female faculty member. Faculty members tended to ask male students more abstract questions and female students more factual questions. Even today, more male students in higher education feel more comfortable speaking up in class than females, specifically if their opinion is not in the majority (Bauer-Wolf, 2019). It is important for educators to create inclusive classroom environments where all students feel safe and welcome to share (Donahoe, 2019). Morgan et al. (2019) found incivility is present toward men in nursing programs. In the classroom, clinical practice, and even online courses, there were incidences of uncivil behavior and verbiage toward male students. To create a nursing workforce that “looks like” the patient population, the profession needs men. Strategies to combat this incivility must be implemented to encourage and welcome men into the profession. To promote a gender-neutral classroom, nursing faculty members should assess their own gender biases and create a classroom that addresses males and females equally. Language needs to remain gender neutral, not assuming that every nurse is a female, including on examinations. Another way to promote a gender-neutral classroom and bring inclusivity into the setting is to be open and accepting of differences in people. As the numbers of LGBTQ and nonbinary people increase on college campuses (Solomon, 2018), these students are reporting that they are not always welcomed. One visible way of acceptance is the use of the preferred pronouns or names, regardless of a­ ppearance. Students and faculty alike may not realize how it feels when one’s preferred pronoun is not used. MacNamara et al. (2017) created a teaching exercise that showed the impact of pronoun use or misuse. In addition, having course content inclusive of all types of people increases the inclusivity for students (Slesaransky-Poe, 2018). This requires education, open-mindedness, and clear communication among students, staff, and faculty. This also takes time to establish new routines such as asking for preferred pronouns. Exhibit 4.4 provides some strategies for nurse educators to use to create a gender-neutral teaching situation.

Social Determinants of Health Students’ inherent genetic makeup defines a component of their ability to learn and acquire knowledge. The environment in which they were raised, including the way they were taught; the games they played as children and their support systems

4. Understanding the Learner  ■ 51

EXHIBIT 4.4 Teaching Strategies to Create a Gender-Neutral Learning Environment Treat all students equally, making no assumptions with regard to gender Get to know the names of all students and pronounce them correctly Set ground rules for discussions in class, lab, and online Encourage sharing of personal pronouns when doing introductions, if desired Use gender-neutral language in case studies, examples, and exam questions Ask questions of all students Give students time to answer questions Do not allow a few students to dominate discussion Assess how you respond to students Avoid interrupting student responses Do not allow students to interrupt or intimidate each other Use group activities to foster student confidence and inclusivity Provide all students with feedback and encouragement Promote a respectful climate in the classroom and online environment with acceptance of differences Use diverse examples rather than ones that assume a certain background or experience Be sure examples include both male, female, and nonbinary references Be consistent in addressing all students either by first or last names Ensure that all students are held to the same academic standards Be aware of the type of humor used in teaching to ensure it is not offensive

affect their ability to learn (Dewar, 2014). In higher education, minorities and the poor fare worse than their peers, reinforcing inequality, and college is unaffordable for too many (Bowen & McPherson, 2016). Learning is influenced by the resources learners have available to aid them not only from a technological perspective, but also from the perspective of physical and social determinants of health (Healthy People 2020). A nursing student who is hungry and tired from not getting adequate nutrition and housing may not process information as quickly or as well as others. Similar to Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs, discussed in Chapter  3, basic need attainment allows for increased cognitive processing and achievement of growth and development. Understanding the importance of basic need fulfilment by nurse educators may assist students in attaining their goals through successful education. The social determinants of health can affect students’ access to and quality of education. Exhibit 4.5 lists the determinants of health according to Healthy People 2020 (2017).

MOTIVATION AND ACADEMIC SELF-REGULATION The interaction of evidence-based teaching strategies and students’ strategic use of learning methods, motivation, and self-regulation leads to good learning outcomes (Weinstein et al., 2014). Many students begin higher education without the specific skills needed to study a particular discipline. As students learn content, they also need to learn the skills to be successful in studying the discipline (Weinstein et al., 2014). Strategic learners are active learners and are persistent in reaching learning goals. They know when they do not understand content and seek out resources to

52  ■ I. NURSING EDUCATION: ROLES OF TEACHER AND LEARNER

EXHIBIT 4.5 Social Determinants of Health Five areas that reflect critical components of social determinants of health ■

Economic Stability Poverty ■ Employment ■ Food security ■ Housing stability ■

■

Education High school graduation ■ Enrollment in higher education ■ Language and literacy ■ Early childhood education and development ■

■

Social and Community Context Social cohesion ■ Civic participation ■ Discrimination ■ Incarceration ■

■

Health and Healthcare Access to healthcare ■ Access to primary care ■ Health literacy ■

■

Neighborhood and Built Environment Access to healthy foods ■ Quality of housing ■ Crime and violence ■ Environmental conditions ■

Source: Healthy People 2020. (2020). Social determinants of health. https://www.healthypeople.gov/2020/ topics-objectives/topic/social-determinants-of-health

help them understand it. They recognize that learning is under their own control (Schunk, 2020). Strategic learners are effective learners who set reasonable and attainable goals for learning, which motivate them to continue studying (Schunk, 2020). Students who consciously set learning goals tend to be self-reflective and strategic in their learning (White & DiBenedetto, 2018). They attribute success to effort, time management, and learning skills rather than luck (Weinstein et  al., 2014). A final key component needed for strategic learning is self-regulation, the use of executive control functions (Schunk, 2020; Weinstein et al., 2014).

Motivation Motivation is a key dimension of self-regulated learning and a prerequisite for meaningful learning (Mayer, 2011; Schunk, 2020). Motivation as a biological phenomenon is a process that mediates how much energy and attention the brain allocates to a

4. Understanding the Learner  ■ 53

given stimulus. Motivation as a social science phenomenon is an internal state that begins and sustains goal-directed behavior. Motivation is based on multiple factors, which include goal orientation, interest, self-efficacy, and causal attribution (Mayer, 2011; Schunk, 2020). Goal orientation can be learning- or performance-based. Research has shown that students with stronger learning goals use deep learning skills more frequently. They also recover from a poor grade and improve performance to a higher degree than students with a performance goal orientation (Schunk, 2020). Interest is another contributor to motivation and is a precursor to learning. Students will work harder to learn when the content is of interest or related to their career plans (individual) or of high personal value at the time (situational) (Mayer, 2011; Schunk, 2020). Self-efficacy, the individual’s self-assessed ability to complete tasks needed to achieve goals, is believed to be a strong element of motivation (Wlodkowski & Ginsberg, 2017). Self-efficacy is generally situation-based and future oriented, but based on previous experiences. Causal attributions are a student’s beliefs about the causation of academic outcomes. These are students’ perceptions rather than actual causes. Attributions are influenced by preexisting factors such as self-efficacy and by external environmental factors such as rewards (Schunk, 2020). Students who make effort-based attributions are likely to put forth effort during learning to be successful (Mayer, 2011). A number of strategies to increase motivation are presented in Exhibit 4.6.

EXHIBIT 4.6 Teaching Strategies to Increase Student Motivation Role model a learning orientation and encourage it over a performance orientation Maintain a high level of enthusiasm and energy for the content Create a safe learning environment Make the course personal Get to know your students and let them get to know you Keep content relevant to the intended outcome Maintain a positive learning environment Foster good lines of communication Maintain classroom order and civility Assist students to transfer previously achieved skills Connect learning to the real world Give frequent positive feedback Use lots of examples Use active learning strategies Hold students to high expectations Use appropriate assessment tools Focus class and assessments on conceptual understanding Design authentic, useful assignments and activities Evaluate student-constructed work by an explicit rubric Source: Nilson, L. (2016). Teaching at its best (4th ed.). Jossey-Bass.

54  ■ I. NURSING EDUCATION: ROLES OF TEACHER AND LEARNER

Self-Regulation Self-regulation is one’s thinking, feeling, and acting in order to achieve one’s goals (Schunk, 2020). Self-regulation is employed as students recognize that there might be improved ways to accomplish a goal and change their learning strategies (Winne, 2018). With self-regulated learning, students are motivated to learn and can transform their cognitive abilities into improved academic performance. Litchtinger and Kaplan (2011) suggested that self-regulation was essential for success in higher education and that motivation was a key component of the first component of self-regulation, forethought. When students set mastery goals, they are more likely to engage in self-regulation than if they set performance goals. Selfawareness and motivation begin the process of self-regulation. Literature supports a model of self-regulated learning that has three main phases: planning, monitoring performance, and reflection (Kirk, 2017). More recent work has explored six models and found that self-regulation is much broader and calls for different interventions depending on the environment and circumstances (Panadero, 2017). Persistence, effort, self-efficacy, emotions, self-control, and goal setting are all important factors of one’s self-regulation. The level of the learner as well as the preparation and teaching of the faculty affect the learner’s ability to learn through self-regulation.

TEACHER–STUDENT RELATIONSHIPS Student engagement is a strong predictor of success in higher education. The National Survey of Student Engagement (NSSE) reported that students are engaged more in their education in the following areas: student interaction with educators in the academic advising and career planning role, time spent by students in academic preparation, and in the supportive aspects of college life like extracurricular activities and jobs (NSSE, 2020). These findings are important to nursing education in that nursing students spend a great deal of time in academic preparation. Also, the advisor–advisee role is part of the faculty role and helps to guide students in their development and for their career success. The NSSE survey also indicated that students were more engaged at schools that provided interactions with other students of diverse backgrounds. Students viewed this as a supportive environment for learning. In addition, students were more engaged when they received help from faculty on nonacademic issues such ones related to work and family. Nurse educators need to understand that one of the major hallmarks of the supportive learning environment is student–faculty interaction. Interaction includes discussing ideas from class, clinical practice, and other environments of learning with students both in and out of those settings; giving prompt feedback on student work; discussing grades; talking about career plans with students; working with students on activities other than coursework; and engaging students in research projects outside of course requirements (NSSE, 2020). Academic advising and the relationship built between a learner and advisor plays a key role in student retention, satisfaction, and overall influence on future career goals (Vianden, 2016). In addition, satisfied students promote their school of nursing to others and bind the students to the school as alumni. Creasey et al. (2009) reported that students who had a strong sense of connection and nonthreatening associations with faculty members had less anxiety than their peers who felt less connected.

4. Understanding the Learner  ■ 55

Students who spend more time in studying, reading, writing, practicing skills, doing homework, and other areas will likely learn the material better. This, in turn, engages them with the content and concepts, leading to positive outcomes, higher program completion rates, and higher quality experiences. Smyth (2011) found that respect was the most important attribute students wanted and the factor that encouraged them to learn. Respect goes both ways, and faculty can role model and demonstrate how to maintain a respectful classroom and atmosphere, even in stressful situations. Student stress can be distracting and take away from their learning. Helping students cope with the stressors in a healthy way, with mutual respect for each other, will aid in learning. To understand the learner, faculty should know what students want and need from them. Exhibit 4.7 provides strategies to promote student engagement.

STUDENTS WITH DISABILITIES More and more, students with disabilities are entering college. Nineteen percent of undergraduate college students who enrolled in the 2015 to 2016 school year reported having a disability (U.S. Department of Education, National Center for Education Statistics, 2019). This is up 8% since 2013. Disabilities vary from physical limitations to emotional and psychological problems. The U.S. Department of Education Office for Civil Rights (2016) defined a student with a disability as “a person who has a physical or mental impairment that substantially limits a major life activity; has a record of such an impairment; or is regarded as having such an impairment” (p. 3). Faculty should be educated on their responsibilities in teaching this population. Once a student receives accommodations for their disability, it is up to the faculty member to ensure their course and teaching are consistent with the requirements. Marks and McCulloh (2016) present a call to action for nurse

EXHIBIT 4.7 Teaching Strategies to Promote Student Engagement Create an environment that is primed for student participation Use varied teaching methods and types of assessments Provide visual, auditory, and kinesthetic opportunities to learn when possible Flip the classroom to ensure student-centered learning while together Find appropriate ways to use technology in classroom (e.g., polling, audience-response systems) Include writing exercises such as 1-minute papers, muddiest points, best part of class Set expectations and norms for class early Integrate curricular topics with other connected disciplines when possible Use real-world examples and stories that are relevant to the topic Establish work teams and partners to work toward achieving learning goals Incorporate appropriate use of social media Use preclass assignments/quizzes to increase familiarity with the material Add more frequent, formative assessment instead of heavily weighted summative assessments only Include simulations that are realistic Source: Himmelsbach, V. (2019). 19 student engagement strategies to start with in your course. Top Hat Blog. https:// tophat.com/blog/student-engagement-strategies/

56  ■ I. NURSING EDUCATION: ROLES OF TEACHER AND LEARNER

educators to establish best practices to support nursing students with disabilities. Students should not have to constantly remind faculty members of their needs. For example, a hearing-impaired student whose accommodations require closed captioning of all video recordings should not have to ask for transcripts or closed captioning. However, students share the responsibility of ensuring their needs are met. According to the U.S. Department of Education, National Center for Education Statistics (2016), the attitudes and self-advocacy skills of students with disabilities play an important role in the success or failure of their education. This, as well as other learner attributes that contribute to diverse student cohorts, lends support to the prospect of holistic admissions. Holistic admissions take into consideration a potential student’s life experiences and personal qualities as well as grade point average, prerequisites, and other admission criteria (Glazer et  al., 2015). Nontraditional students and those with potentially lower metrics but valuable life experiences and diversity are provided opportunities that they otherwise would not be. This leads to a more inclusive cohort of students and allows for economically and racially disadvantaged students to enter nursing programs. Wros and Noone (2018) shared one school’s journal to holistic admissions. They described valuable lessons learned and the core principles used to make the change, based on the American Association of Colleges of Nursing and Medicine’s work. Exhibit 4.8 describes the four core principles for establishing holistic admissions.

SUMMARY Nurse educators are in an ideal position to have a significant impact on students’ learning. The diversity of our classrooms no longer allows a “one-size-fits-all” approach to teaching. To effectively engage students in the learning process, nurse educators need to understand multiple factors. First, the teacher should assess the diversity of the students and consider striving for a holistic admissions process. Cultural heritage and ethnicity, age, gender, learning preference, motivation, disabilities, and ability to self-regulate are only a few of the significant differences among students. The teacher also should assess the content of the course and outcomes to be met. What is the goal of the learning? How best will most students in the course learn the concepts and other types of material? What do the students already know about the subject? How can the teacher best connect the new content to the material the students have already learned? Understanding the learner encourages growth and learning by all and creates an open and welcoming environment to learn. EXHIBIT 4.8 Core Principles for Establishing Holistic Admissions 1. Maintain broad-based selection criteria that clearly matches school mission and goals 2. Seek out a balanced pool of applicants based on experiences, attributes, and academic metrics 3. Admissions committee consider how each individual applicant may contribute to the cohort and school 4. Consider race and ethnicity as factors along with personal attributes, experiential factors, demographics, and so on.

4. Understanding the Learner  ■ 57

REFERENCES Akechi, H., Senju, A., Uibo, H., Kikuchi, Y., Hasegawa, T., & Hietanen, J. (2013). Attention to eye contact in the west and east: Autonomic responses and evaluative ratings. PLOS ONE, 8(3), e59312. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0059312 American Psychological Association. (2014). APA journals article spotlight: Learning styles. https://www.apa.org/pubs/highlights/spotlight/issue-22 Anderson, I. (2016). Identifying different learning styles to enhance the learning experience. Nursing Standard, 31(7), 53–63. https://doi.org/10.7748/ns.2016.e10407 Bauer-Wolf, J. (2019). Speaking out in the classroom. Inside Higher Education. https:// www.insidehighered.com/news/2019/06/03/new-survey-shows-fewer-femalestudents-male-are-ease-sharing-uncomfortable-views. Beetham, H., & Sharpe, R. (Eds.). (2020). Rethinking pedagogy for a digital age. Routledge. https://doi.org/10.4324/9781351252805 Bowen, W. G., & McPherson, M. S. (2016). Lesson plan: An agenda for change in American higher education. Princeton University Press. Center for Postsecondary and Economic Success. (2015). Yesterday’s non-traditional student is today’s traditional student. http://www.clasp.org/resources-andpublications/publication-1/CPES-Nontraditional-students-pdf.pdf Cortina, K. S., Arel, S., & Smith-Darden, J. P. (2017). School belonging in different cultures: The effects of individualism and power distance. Frontiers in Education, 2, 56. https:// doi.org/10.3389/feduc.2017.00056 Creasey, G., Jarvis, P., & Knapcik, E. (2009). A measure to assess student-instructor relationships. International Journal for the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning, 3(2), 14. https://doi.org/10.20429/ijsotl.2009.030214 Davis, B. (2009). Tools for teaching. San Francisco, CA: Jossey Bass. Dewar, G. (2014). The cognitive benefits of play: Effects on the learning brain. Parenting Science. Retrieved from http://www.parentingscience.com/benefits-of-play.html. Accessed May 20, 2020. Dimock, M. (2019, January 17). Defining generations: Where Millennials end and Generation Z begins. Retrieved May 23, 2020, from https://pewrsr.ch/2szqtJz Donahoe, E. (2019). Facilitating class discussion. Notes on teaching and learning blogpost. University of Notre Dame. https://sites.nd.edu/kaneb/2019/09/03/facilitatingclass-discussion/ Fleming, N. (2012). VARK: A guide to learning styles. http://www.vark-learn.com/21nglish/ index.asp. Fleming, N., & Mills, C. (1992). Not another inventory, rather a catalyst for reflection. To Improve the Academy, 11(1), 137. https://onlinelibrary.wiley.com/doi/ abs/10.1002/j.2334-4822.1992.tb00213.x Fry, R. (2020). Millennials overtake baby boomers as America’s largest generation. Pew Research Center. http://pewrsr.ch/2FgVPwv Glazer, G., Clark, A., & Bankston, K. (2015). Legislative: From policy to practice: A case for holistic review diversifying the nursing workforce. Online Journal of Issues in Nursing, 20(3), 1. http://dx.doi.org/10.3912/OJIN.Vol20No03LegCol01 Healthy People 2020. (2020). Social determinants of health. https://www.healthypeople. gov/2020/topics-objectives/topic/social-determinants-of-health Himmelsbach, V. (2019). 19 student engagement strategies to start with in your course. Top Hat Blog. https://tophat.com/blog/student-engagement-strategies/ Husmann, P. R., & O’Loughlin, V. D. (2019). Another nail in the coffin for learning styles? Disparities among undergraduate anatomy students’ study strategies, class performance, and reported VARK learning styles. Anatomical Sciences Education, 12(1–2), 6–19. https://doi.org/10.1002/ase.1777 Kirk, K. (2017, June 08). SAGE 2YC. Retrieved May 24, 2020, from https://serc.carleton. edu/sage2yc/self_regulated/index.html

58  ■ I. NURSING EDUCATION: ROLES OF TEACHER AND LEARNER

Knowles, M.S. (1973). The adult learner: A neglected species. Gulf Publishing Company. Knowles, M. S., Holton, E. F., & Swanson, R. A. (2015). The adult learner: The definitive classic in adult education and human resource development (8th ed.). Routledge. Kolb, D. (1984). Experiential learning: Experience as the source of learning and development. Prentice-Hall. Kolb, D. A., & Fry, R. (1975). Toward an applied theory of experiential learning. In C. Cooper (Ed.), Theories of group process. John Wiley. Leite, W. L., Svinicki, M., & Shi, Y. (2010). Attempted validation of the scores of the VARK: Learning styles inventory with multitrait-multimethod confirmatory factor analysis models. Educational and Psychological Measurement, 70(2), 323–339. https://doi. org/10.1177/0013164409344507 Litchtinger, E., & Kaplan, A. (2011). Purposes of engagement in academic self-regulation. In H. Bembenutty (Ed.), Self-regulated learning. New directions for teaching and learning, 126(summer), 9–17. https://doi.org/10.1002/tl.440 Lowell, V. L., & Morris, J. M. (2018). Multigenerational classrooms in higher education: Equity and learning with technology. International Journal of Information and Learning Technology, 36(2), 78–93. http://dx.doi.org/10.1108/IJILT-06-2018-0068 MacNamara, J., Glann, S., & Durlak, P. (2017). Experiencing misgendered pronouns: A classroom activity to encourage empathy. Teaching Sociology, 45(3), 269–278. https:// doi.org/10.1177/0092055X17708603 Marks, B., & McCulloh, K. (2016). Success for students and nurses with disabilities: A call to action for nurse educators. Nurse Educator, 41(1), 9–12. https://doi.org/10.1097/ NNE.0000000000000212 Mayer, R. E. (2011). Applying the science of learning. Pearson. Merriam, S. B., & Bierema, L. L. (2014). Adult learning: Linking theory and practice. Wiley & Sons. Morgan, B., Smallheer, B., Gordon, H., & Molloy, M. (2019). Starting the conversation: Gender and incivility in nursing education. Reflections on Nursing Leadership. https:// www.reflectionsonnursingleadership.org/features/more-features/starting-theconversation-gender-and-incivility-in-nursing-education National Council State Boards of Nursing. (2017). NCSBN & the forum of state nursing workforce centers 2017 national workforce survey of RNs. https://www.ncsbn.org/ workforce.htm National League for Nursing. (2018). Nursing student demographics. http://www.nln.org/ newsroom/nursing-education-statistics/biennial-survey-of-schools-of-nursingacademic-year-2017-2018. National Survey of Student Engagement. (2020). Engagement insights: Survey findings on the quality of undergraduate education–annual results 2019. Indiana University Center for Postsecondary Research. https://nsse.indiana.edu/NSSE_2019_Results/pdf/ NSSE_2019_Annual_Results.pdf Nilson, L. (2016). Teaching at its best (4th ed.). Jossey-Bass. Panadero, E. (2017). A review of self-regulated learning: Six models and four directions for research. Frontiers in Psychology, 8, 422. https://doi.org/10.3389/fpsyg.2017.00422 Pashler, H., McDaniel, M., Rohrer, D., & Bjork, R. (2008). Learning styles: Concepts and evidence. Psychological Science in the Public Interest, 9(3), 106–119. https://doi. org/10.1111%2Fj.1539-6053.2009.01038.x Pelletier, S. (2010). Success for adult students. Public Purpose. http://www.aascu.org/ uploadedFiles/AASCU/Content/Root/MediaAndPublications/PublicPurpose Magazines/Issue/10fall_adultstudents.pdf Robert Wood Johnson Foundation (2012, April 30). Men Slowly Change the Face of Nursing Education. Retrieved May 23, 2020, from https://www.rwjf.org/en/library/articlesand-news/2012/04/men-slowly-change-the-face-of-nursing-education.html Rocca, K. (2010). Student participation in the college classroom: An extended multidisciplinary literature review. Communication Education, 59(2), 185–213. https://doi.org/10.1080/03634520903505936

4. Understanding the Learner  ■ 59

Schunk, D. H. (2020). Learning theories: An educational perspective. Pearson. Slesaransky-Poe, G. (2018). Helpful tips for creating transgender inclusive and affirming spaces. New connections: Increasing diversity of RWJF programming. http://rwjf-new connections.org/helpful-tips-for-creating-transgender-inclusive-and-affirming-spaces/ Smith, J., & Hu, R. (2013). Rethinking teacher education: Synchronizing eastern and western views of teaching and learning to promote 21st century skills and global perspective. Education Research and Perspectives, 40(1), 86–108. https://eric.ed.gov/ ?id=EJ1007188 Smyth, E. (2011). What students want: Characteristics of effective teachers from the students’ perspective. Faculty Focus. http://www.facultyfocus.com/articles/ philosophy-of-teaching/what-students-want-characteristics-of-effective-teachersfrom-the-students-perspective/ Solomon, J. D. (2018). Accommodating transgender students on college campuses: How university can provide a safe and welcoming environment. University Business. https:// universitybusiness.com/accommodating-transgender-students-on-collegecampuses/ Suinn, R. (2014). Teaching culturally diverse students. In M. Svinicki & W. McKeachie (Eds.), McKeachie’s teaching tips: Strategies, research, and theory for college and university teachers (14th ed., pp. 150–171). Wadsworth. Svinicki, M., & McKeachie, W. (2014). McKeachie’s teaching tips: Strategies, research, and theory for college and university teachers (14th ed.). Wadsworth. Taliaferro, W. (2017). Today’s students, yesterday’s financial aid policies. http://www.clasp. org/issues/postsecondary/in-focus/todays-students-yesterdays-financial-aid-policies U.S. Department of Education, Office for Civil Rights. (2016). Parent and educator resource guide to section 504 in public elementary and secondary schools. https://www2.ed.gov/ about/offices/list/ocr/docs/504-resource-guide-201612.pdf U.S. Department of Education, National Center for Education Statistics. (2016). The Condition of education 2016. English language learners in public schools. https://nces. ed.gov/programs/coe/indicator_cgf.asp U.S. Department of Education, National Center for Education Statistics. (2019). Digest of Education Statistics, 2017 (2018-070). Chapter 3. https://nces.ed.gov/fastfacts/display. asp?id=60 Vianden, J. (2016). Ties that bind: Academic advisors as agents of student relationship management. NACADA Journal, 36(1), 19–29. https://doi.org/10.12930/NACADA15-026a Weinstein, C. E., Acee, T., Stano, N., Meyer, D., Husman, J., McKeachie, W., . . . King, C. (2014). Teaching students how to become more strategic and self-regulated learners. In M. Svinicki & W. McKeachie (Eds.), McKeachie’s teaching tips: Strategies, research, and theory for college and university teachers (14th ed., pp. 291–304). Wadsworth. White, M. C., & DiBenedetto, M. K. (2018). Self-regulation: An integral part of standardsbased education. In D. H. Schunk & J. A. Greene (Eds.), Handbook of self-regulation of learning and performance (pp. 208–222). Taylor & Francis. Winne, P. H. (2018). Cognition and metacognition within self-regulated learning. In D. Schunk & J. A. Greene (Eds.), Motivation and self-regulated learning: Theory, research, and implications (pp. 36–48). Routledge. Wlodkowski, R., & Ginsberg, M. B. (2017). Enhancing adult motivation to learn: A comprehensive guide for teaching all adults (4th ed.). Jossey-Bass. Wros, P., & Noone, J. (2018). Holistic admissions in undergraduate nursing: One school’s journey and lessons learned. Journal of Professional Nursing, 34(3), 211–216. https://doi. org/10.1016/j.profnurs.2017.08.005

II Teaching in Nursing

5 Learning Environment and Teaching Methods Debra Hagler and Brenda Morris

OBJECTIVES 1. Describe characteristics of a supportive learning environment 2. Select teaching/learning activities to support cognitive, affective, and psychomotor learning 3. Describe a variety of teaching methods suitable for nursing education

INTRODUCTION Chapter 5 describes the teacher’s role in developing a supportive learning environment and using a variety of teaching methods, with guidance for selecting methods to fit the intended outcomes, learner characteristics, and available resources. Teaching methods are considered in relation to supporting learner development in the cognitive, affective, and psychomotor learning domains. Strategies are described for incorporating active learning and for promoting critical thinking. Expanded information on the use of educational technology is presented in Chapter  6 and on teaching through simulation in Chapter 8. Teaching methods for specific settings are described in later chapters as well: teaching in online environments in Chapter 7, teaching in the learning laboratory in Chapter 10, and clinical teaching in Chapter 11.

DEVELOPING A LEARNING ENVIRONMENT Teaching takes place in formal and informal settings as part of personal and professional roles. A teacher may be working alongside a student caring for a patient in a health setting, organizing group work in a classroom, facilitating a reflection session after a high-fidelity simulation, leading a discussion via webinar, or responding to learners asynchronously. Innovations such as distance technologies provide more flexible options for both learners and teachers. Teachers may not be physically present in the same location as their students, and learners may be reviewing lessons long after the teacher developed the instructional content. Regardless of the

64  ■ II. Teaching in Nursing

geographical distance and time separation, teachers need to demonstrate a supportive presence and help their learners construct knowledge. Recent changes in educational policy, progressing from emphasis on the teacher’s actions to focusing more on students’ learning outcomes, mirror healthcare systems’ progress from emphasizing care provision to a focus on patient outcomes. In education and healthcare, there is still much work to be done in prioritizing learner and patient outcomes. Students face significant stresses in their personal and academic roles, but teachers can make a positive difference by establishing a supportive learning environment. Prelicensure nursing students have identified aspects of supportive student–faculty relationships to include building connections inside and outside of the classroom, modeling attributes of caring, practicing mutual respect, and viewing diversity in broad terms (Ingraham et al., 2018). The connections that students make with other students can also support learning outcomes. While the teacher may role-model and encourage respectful communication, the support and validation of peers are additional powerful sources of motivation for learners to participate in in-class activities and accept the risks of contributing diverse viewpoints (Barr, 2016). Establishing shared expectations for respectful civil interaction from the beginning helps a group of learners focus on learning together. Research-based strategies such as those in Exhibit 5.1 are useful in facilitating a productive classroom climate for learning.

EXHIBIT 5.1 Strategies That Promote Student Development and a Productive Climate Make uncertainty safe Resist a single right answer Incorporate evidence into performance and grading criteria Examine your assumptions about students Be mindful of low-ability cues Do not ask individuals to speak for an entire group Reduce anonymity Model inclusive language, behavior, and attitudes Use multiple and diverse examples Establish and reinforce ground rules for interaction Make sure course content does not marginalize students Use the syllabus and first day of class to establish the course climate Set up processes to get feedback on the climate Anticipate and prepare for potentially sensitive issues Address tensions early Turn discord and tension into a learning opportunity Facilitate active learning Source: Ambrose, S., Bridges, M., DiPietro, M., Lovett, M., & Norman, M. (2010). How learning works: Seven researchbased principles for smart teaching. Jossey-Bass. Reprinted with permission of John Wiley and Sons.

5. Learning Environment and Teaching Methods  ■ 65

SELECTING TEACHING METHODS It is unreasonable to expect that a teacher will become skilled in using every teaching method. The teacher’s own comfort level with teaching methods is important to consider so that the focus of attention stays on learners and the learning process. However, reflecting on assumptions about learning can lead to becoming more comfortable in trying out new teaching methods. There is more than one way to teach any topic. The most important question to ask about a teaching method is whether it is a good fit for the specific learning objectives, learners, teachers, and available resources. If the goal is to support students in mastering key course concepts and developing learning-related attitudes, values, and skills, then the same teaching method will not work equally well for all situations. Nurse educators who would be appalled at the idea of treating each patient with identical interventions regardless of patients’ individual needs might not appear as concerned about using identical teaching methods for all learners and instructional purposes. Yet, choosing teaching methods congruent with specific learner needs and desired educational outcomes is critical to effective instruction. The single most important factor in choosing a teaching method is whether that method will help students meet the intended learning outcomes or objectives.

Domains of Learning Learning can be described as development in one or more of three different domains: cognitive, affective, and psychomotor. Cognitive development, which involves thinking, cannot be directly observed but is seen through the behaviors or products of thinking. Affective development, which involves values and beliefs, cannot be directly observed either, so it is seen through attitudes, behaviors, and choices that express values. Psychomotor development, which involves skilled movement, is directly observable in physical action. Program outcomes, course objectives (also referred to as expected learning outcomes), and module or daily objectives are written to reflect expected development across the three domains of learning. Nurses in practice rely on all three domains to provide care, so nurse educators need to design instruction, teach, and assess for student development in all three domains (Oermann & Gaberson, 2021). Patients see the physical care that nurses provide (psychomotor knowledge) and recognize that nurses have high ethical standards (Gallup, 2019) reflecting nursing values and beliefs (affective knowledge). Patients, however, may not be aware of the intense thinking and planning that nurses engage in to promote health and prevent harm (cognitive knowledge). Despite the hidden nature of the thinking process in our observable work, the cognitive domain is often the easiest domain to address in writing objectives and in choosing teaching methods. In some teaching/ learning situations, the affective and psychomotor aspects of learning are ignored or expected to develop without much attention, but educators who plan only for cognitive development should not be surprised when learners’ beliefs and physical skills do not change with accumulation of information alone. Development in affective values and physical skills is needed in concert with cognition in order to change behavior.

66  ■ II. Teaching in Nursing

Some teaching strategies support learning in all three domains, whereas other strategies are more specific to learning in only one or two of the domains. Strategies chosen for a single class meeting do not need to represent each of the domains, but all domains should be included regularly for integrative experiences. It is important to note the hierarchical nature of each domain and to align the levels of learning objectives, teaching strategies, and evaluation methods. Descriptions of the levels within each learning domain and examples of activities that might be used for teaching in that domain are in Tables 5.1 to 5.3. Coaching students practicing tracheal suctioning on task trainer manikins in the learning laboratory might support psychomotor skill development, but the activity lacks the context of care for a valued individual. Listening to an audio-recorded interview with a patient who has a debilitating disease with ineffective airway clearance might work well for supporting the affective objectives of valuing the patient perspective and cognitive objectives related to disease management, but not for psychomotor skill development. However, a carefully planned experience of providing care for an authentic patient in the clinical environment, a standardized patient in the clinical laboratory, or a simulated patient in the simulation laboratory can support development across all three domains.

TABLE 5.1  ACTIVITIES TO SUPPORT LEARNING IN THE COGNITIVE DOMAIN Examples of Teaching Strategies/Learning Activities

Level

Definition

Remembering

Recall previous information.

Practice definitions with flash cards, matching games.

Understanding

Comprehend the meaning.

Complete a crossword puzzle, represent images with words, or words with images.

Applying

Use a concept in a new situation, carry out a procedure.

Interpret an equianalgesic chart to compare doses of two different narcotics.

Analyzing

Distinguish between facts and inferences.

Discuss what is known versus what can be inferred about a patient’s health situation.

Evaluating

Make judgments about the value of ideas or materials.

Compare a patient’s activity plan with the collaborative goals set by the patient and health team.

Creating

Build a structure or pattern from diverse elements.

Develop self-care learning materials for a patient or group of patients.

Source: Anderson, L. W., Krathwohl, D. R., Airasian, P., Cruikshank, K. A., Mayer, R. E., Pintrich, P., . . . Wittrock, M. (2001). A taxonomy for learning, teaching, and assessing: A revision of Bloom’s taxonomy of educational objectives. Longman.

5. Learning Environment and Teaching Methods  ■ 67

TABLE 5.2  ACTIVITIES TO SUPPORT LEARNING IN THE AFFECTIVE DOMAIN Level

Definition

Examples of Teaching Strategies/ Learning Activities

Receiving

Open to experience, willing to hear.

Listen to a lecture or story, watch a film.

Responding

React and participate actively.

Participate in discussions, ask questions, suggest interpretations.

Valuing

Attach values and express personal opinions.

Write a plan for personal health improvement.

Organization or creation of value system

Reconcile internal conflicts; develop value system.

Explain your philosophy of nursing including examples of your current behaviors that reflect your philosophy.

Internalization of or characterized by values

Adopt belief system and philosophy.

Carry out a plan for personal health improvement.

Source: Krathwohl, D. R., Bloom, B. S., & Masia, B. B. (1964). Taxonomy of educational objectives: The classification of educational goals. Handbook II: Affective domain. David McKay.

TABLE 5.3  ACTIVITIES TO SUPPORT LEARNING IN THE PSYCHOMOTOR DOMAIN Examples of Teaching Strategies/ Learning Activities

Level

Definition

Imitation

Copy action of another; observe and replicate.

Watch a demonstration of how to safely position a patient and repeat the action.

Manipulation

Reproduce activity from instruction or memory.

Practice positioning a patient with verbal coaching or written instructions for reference.

Precision

Execute skill reliably, independent of help.

Practice using a walker independently.

Articulation

Adapt and integrate expertise to satisfy a nonstandard objective.

Practice transferring patients from beds to chairs in a variety of situations.

Naturalization

Automated, unconscious mastery of activity and related skills at strategic level.

Practice taking blood pressures until able to accurately hear the pulse, watch the dial, and manipulate the equipment simultaneously.

Source: Dave, R. H. (1970). Developing and writing educational objectives (psychomotor levels). In R. J. Armstrong (Ed.), Developing and writing behavioral objectives. Educational Innovators Press.

68  ■ II. Teaching in Nursing

Learner Characteristics The characteristics of the intended learners, including their social and cognitive cultures, are important to consider in choosing teaching methods. Students who are not comfortable interacting with peers or learning in cooperation with peers need support to develop knowledge, skills, and attitudes for professional-level communication and collaboration. Disagreeing in a way that remains respectful and still furthers the discussion is a complex communication skill to develop, yet planning for that development may be ignored, based on an assumption that students enter higher education with such skills. Beginning clinical students often express levels of anxiety that require enormous skill, time, and effort to manage (Turner & McCarthy, 2017). Teachers can anticipate and plan for additional attention on helping students learn to manage their anxiety, rather than being surprised when the learner’s anxieties overtake the scheduled learning session. When teaching strategies do not fit well with the characteristics of the learners, there is a greater need for resources to help students reach learning goals. When learners have not developed the prerequisite knowledge and skills to support them toward a later learning goal, the need for other resources, such as instructional time, increases. For example, if students admitted to an online program are familiar and comfortable with online technology, then orientation and learning related to the technology do not require as much instructional time or focused attention. However, when students admitted to an online program have little previous experience with online learning, teachers need to plan for extra time and effort to support the learners in developing skills as new technologies are introduced.

RESOURCES Teaching method choices are sustainable when they are realistic for the reasonably available resources. Resources to consider in choosing teaching methods include time, space, support staff, technology, and materials. Time is a most precious resource—for both teachers and learners. The teacher’s time plan for using a particular teaching method should include the time in preparation, direct instruction, and providing formative feedback/coaching students. The students’ time to be considered includes accessing the materials needed, preparatory assignments, instructional time, and any follow-up assignments. An experience that requires extensive instructional time should be planned only to meet the most important course and program goals. Physical spaces and course enrollment can facilitate interaction or constrain teaching methods and activities. Large-class sections and lecture rooms make group interaction challenging, but not impossible. Even in lecture halls with unmovable desks, students can interact in pairs or clusters. Availability and access to support staff can make the difference in the outcomes of some learning activities. Librarians can be amazing resource persons for students and faculty struggling to search for clinical evidence. Writing center staff can be helpful for students learning to write in the discipline of nursing and for faculty developing writing assignments. Technology experts can help assure that classroom plans for new software use or online resources go smoothly. In settings without support staff, the teacher should plan learning activities with the understanding that troubleshooting library database searches, coaching students to use software, or managing other technical challenges will add to the teacher’s responsibilities.

5. Learning Environment and Teaching Methods  ■ 69

Technology is a resource and a means to an end. When students are learning to manipulate a stethoscope, it is reasonable to focus both on developing auscultation skills and on the stethoscope as a tool, because nurses can expect to use stethoscopes throughout their careers for obtaining assessment data that will support clinical decisions. At times, however, technology that is not the direct focus of a learning objective becomes the focus of a misguided instructional effort. For example, leadership students learning the important skill of realistically budgeting for a clinical project might be directed to use a specific format or software for an assignment. If the format or software that learners are directed to use will require live instruction or tutorials and extensive practice, the teacher must consider whether learning to use the tool is a reasonable investment of student time. A larger investment in time and effort might be appropriate when learners will use the software program or other technology in the future workplace; however, that high level of investment is generally not worthwhile for a single assignment. Availability of materials for learning may impact decisions about instructional methods. Attention to the physical realism of the learning situation is important, but simple and inexpensive materials may be sufficient for supporting achievement of a particular objective. When students are practicing integrating their assessments, judgments, and interventions in complex situations, interacting with a simulated patient may add a level of realism that engages the student and improves the overall learning experience.

PLANNING FOR ACTIVE LEARNING Higher education has often been associated with a type of lecture learning where students passively listen to their teachers’ wise thoughts. Promoting more active learning requires student engagement far beyond mere attendance. A focus on learner engagement and active learning is aligned with a general trend away from teacher-centered strategies and toward strategies focused on what helps students learn. Lecture, a frequently used teaching method in higher education, may call to mind an image of a teacher on the auditorium stage talking at an audience of students while the students doze off to sleep. Educators may assert that they do not rely on lecture. However, many nurse educators rely on lecture quite heavily. Bristol et al. (2019) surveyed 438 nurse educators teaching in prelicensure programs. Over 60% of those educators reported using lecture in the classroom for 26% to 75% of the classroom time, while 19% of the educators reported lecturing for over 75% of the class time. Lecture can be insidious in settings outside the classroom as well: When the postclinical conference, the laboratory session, or the simulation debriefing time involves the teacher doing most of the talking, those sessions have been subtly converted to extra lectures. The students have slipped from their intended roles as active participants back to being more passive recipients. When teaching consists only of delivering a lecture or assigning readings from a textbook, educators seem to expect that students can transform the words directly into the students’ authentic nursing actions. However, telling a student to remember a list of airway clearance measures is very different from asking the student to actively determine what types of airway clearance measures might be suitable for a specific elderly patient with an abdominal incision who is unable to sit up or walk. Applying principles and concepts to new situations requires practice and coaching.

70  ■ II. Teaching in Nursing

ACTION AND REFLECTION Two processes are important for active learning: action and reflection. Taking part in meaningful activity followed by reflecting on the learning processes and outcomes transforms the learner from a passive recipient of someone else’s thoughts to an active constructor of knowledge and meaning. This does not mean that all passive strategies should be abandoned. Interposing active and passive strategies together can create a rich opportunity for students to actively participate in learning and practice doing what they are expected to learn. For instance, a class session on substance abuse might be changed from continuous lecture to a series of activities: students completing a classroom survey of attitudes, pairing for brief discussion, participating in a large group discussion, viewing a related film clip, analyzing a short case study in a small group, synthesizing recommendations from the case analysis, and summarizing key learning points. The passive activities of reading textbook chapters or watching a film can be shifted to more active learning by pairing those activities with specific reflection activities and expectations. Simple instructions can help the student become an active participant: “While you read this passage (or watch this film clip) about a recent news event, identify at least three specific opportunities for health promotion at the individual, family, and community level. Bring your list for discussion to the next class session.” Rather than the teacher identifying extensive lists of examples for new concepts, asking the learners to identify and share additional examples of the concept in the environment tests their understanding of the concept and helps them find individual meanings for a concept. Professional nursing organizations have recently emphasized the importance of planning reflection activities after many types of learning activities (National League for Nursing [NLN], 2015). Debriefing has gained recent attention because of its use in educational simulation, but debriefing also is effective in the classroom and during postclinical conferences. After a complex experience such as service learning, the strategy of guided reflection helps learners construct knowledge and establish meaning for the experience (Elverson & Klawiter, 2019).

DEVELOPING HIGHER LEVEL THINKING Educators aim to foster the development of critical thinking abilities among their graduates. Critical thinking has been defined as “the process of analyzing and assessing thinking with a view to improving it” (Foundation for Critical Thinking, 2019). Terms that have similar meanings to critical thinking and are occasionally used interchangeably include higher order or higher level thinking, metacognition, critical reflection, and reflective thinking. There are two aspects of critical thinking: ability and disposition. Critical thinking ability involves using higher level thinking skills such as conceptualizing, applying, analyzing, interpreting, inferring, explaining, evaluating, and synthesizing. Critical thinking disposition defines the characteristics of the ideal critical thinker: being habitually inquisitive, open-minded, mindful of alternatives, well-informed, fair-minded, and honest in facing personal biases. Critical thinking incorporates the elements of thought and applies the universal intellectual standards. The ability to think critically is discipline neutral; however, the context in which critical thinking is applied may be discipline specific. For example, how a nursing

5. Learning Environment and Teaching Methods  ■ 71

graduate applies critical thinking to nursing practice is very different from how an engineering graduate applies critical thinking to engineering practice. Both of these graduates may use similar higher order thinking skills; however, the context in which these thinking skills are applied will be different.

TEACHING METHODS TO PROMOTE CRITICAL THINKING There are many teaching methods that promote the development of critical thinking, including case studies, concept mapping, collaborative learning, problembased learning (PBL), service learning, and gaming. Teachers can structure learning activities to develop critical thinking by focusing attention on reflection, providing reasons, and developing alternatives. Frerejean et al. (2018) reported that university students who watched a recorded example of an expert’s problem-solving process increased their test scores more than a comparison group of students who worked on a practice task related to the same problem. The expert modeling provided for the experimental group included think aloud comments throughout the problemsolving process and use of cognitive prompts. Questioning is a key strategy for facilitating critical thinking. Teachers may support learners by posing questions or structuring a written assignment to include reflection. Posing questions such as “How do you know?” and “What are the reasons?” help learners identify the reasons for their views and remind them to seek reasons for others’ views. To encourage learners to develop alternative hypotheses and evaluate alternate points of view, the teacher can prompt the learner to explain from a different perspective. Learners who are becoming critical thinkers will ask difficult questions of their teachers. Egan (2019) suggests that educators reflect on the circumstances in which teachers welcome or respond negatively to their students’ questions. In which contexts do we consider questions to be reasonable? Are there situations where educators tend to receive questions more irritably than generously, and why is that? Are there changes in teacher responses to questions that might promote a more thoughtful discourse?

TEACHING METHODS Nursing programs are most often organized using curriculum models including a traditional model organized by care of specific populations (pediatrics, behavioral health); a concept-based model organized by categories of information (grief, tissue perfusion); a competency-based model organized around achievement of specific behaviors; or a combination of the previous models (Ignatavicius, 2019). The educator’s choices of teaching methods are not dependent on the curricular model. The same teaching/learning method may be used across each of the models as long as the method is aligned with the expected learning outcomes or objectives. In the next section, a variety of teaching methods are described in categories such as independent learning methods, small-group methods, and large-class methods. However, each of the methods can be used in more than one way. For instance, reading is described as an independent learning activity, but there may be times that reading aloud in the classroom suits the instructional purpose. Discussion can take place in pairs, small groups of three to four, or with the entire class.

72  ■ II. Teaching in Nursing

INDEPENDENT LEARNING METHODS Reading Assigning passages for students to read in a textbook or scholarly journal is a simple instructional plan, but many students find that reading is a difficult way to learn. Learning through reading requires understanding, then interpreting and synthesizing the text into useful application. Students often report that they begin the assigned reading for the week, completing part of the assignment each day, but never finishing one week’s reading before the next week’s assigned chapters are due. By default, the chapters at the end of each week’s list are the least likely to have been read. Two simple instructional strategies can improve the reading-to-learn experience: limiting the assignment to the most pertinent readings, and identifying the recommended sections by priority order rather than sequential order. Rather than assigning 10 chapters totaling 800 pages each week, assigning only the most important passages from each chapter or the most important chapters improves the possibility that students might be able to finish a week’s reading assignment. Prioritizing the passages among the assigned readings that are required versus those recommended for enrichment or review helps students make informed choices and use their time efficiently. Teachers also help students improve reading comprehension by suggesting specific comprehension strategies along with reading assignments. Levels of support for comprehension increase as the teacher introduces reading strategies, provides the rationale for a particular strategy, and even models the strategy. Recommendations that students may find useful include reading slowly and carefully, taking notes while reading, paraphrasing/summarizing text, and attending to the purpose and context for the reading. The increasing availability of electronic books (e-books) that are read on a screen may offer students savings over traditional textbooks. Students are able to access e-books rapidly, rent them short-term, and return them without the loss of quality that would be expected from handling and making notes in a printed book. However, students adjusting to the transition from printed books to e-books may need assistance to develop or adapt previously effective reading strategies. Educators can incorporate intentional strategies to help students take advantage of the ability to bookmark, search, and make extensive notes in e-books. Incorporating modeling and practice with critical reading during the transition can improve students’ attitudes about reading text on the screen (Jensen & Scharff, 2019). Strategies that teachers can recommend or model for improving reading comprehension beyond the freshman year are listed in Table 5.4. Many of the strategies can be incorporated in both classroom and online activities.

Writing Clear writing is important for communicating with patients and colleagues in many nursing roles and settings. Writing effectively is also a means for healthcare career progression, as crystallizing complex ideas into a coherent written message is a critical leadership skill (Johnson & Rulo, 2019). The task of writing requires a number of core competencies including organizing a logical argument, addressing a specific audience, conceptualizing and critiquing ideas, and ethically citing sources.

5. Learning Environment and Teaching Methods  ■ 73

TABLE 5.4  TEACHING STRATEGIES FOR IMPROVING READING COMPREHENSION Activities to Recommend and Model

Strategy

Rationale

Develop and activate prior knowledge

Connecting learners’ existing information and experiences to a new topic improves understanding and memory.

Provide experiential learning activities. Preview headings or key concepts, make predictions.

Use graphic organizers

Using visual representations helps students identify, organize, and remember important ideas.

Create timelines, framed outlines, concept maps, story maps, and Venn diagrams.

Teach comprehension monitoring strategies

Students keeping track of their understanding as they read and implementing “fix-up” strategies when identifying breakdown.

Keeping track: Note confusing or difficult words and concepts, create images, stop after each paragraph to summarize, and generate questions. When understanding breaks down: reread, re-state, use context to figure out unknown words or ideas.

Teach note-taking and summarization skills

Consolidating large amounts of information (several paragraphs or passages) into key ideas.

Identify topic sentences, identify words or concepts that represent a list of related terms, practice summarizing, and use graphic organizers to summarize.

Teach students to ask and answer questions

Asking questions before, during, and after reading supports engagement and understanding.

Ask explicit and inferential questions, identify whether the answers to the teacher’s questions are likely to be found in text or require an inference.

Model multicomponent comprehension strategies

Combining several comprehension strategies into an organizational system for reading.

Teach students to independently use strategies. Support students in generalizing strategy use across contexts and courses. Actively engage students in using comprehension strategies through cooperative learning, group discussions, and other interactions.

Source: Boardman, A., Roberts, G., Vaughn, S., Wexler, J., Murray, C., & Kosanovich, M. (2008). Effective instruction for adolescent struggling readers: A practice brief. RMC Research Corporation, Center on Instruction; Fisher, D., & Frey, N. (2019). Best practices in adolescent literacy instruction. In L. Morrow, L. Gambrell, & H. Casey (Ed.), Best practices in literacy instruction (6th ed.). Guilford Publications.

74  ■ II. Teaching in Nursing

However, communicating effectively in writing is not easy. The basic writing skills that students attain in secondary schools do not extend to the types of writing needed for professionals. Even students with strong basic writing skills need instruction and practice to develop as skilled writers in the context of nursing or healthcare. Examples of common writing assignments used in higher education to prepare nurses for professional writing are provided in Exhibit 5.2. Students are admitted to nursing programs with a wide range of writing skills. Nursing faculty members can expect to teach students how to write using vocabulary and formatting requirements specific to health professions as well as to support students in remediating basic writing skills. Many schools have student support services available for writing development and remediation, but those services do not take the place of nursing faculty emphasizing written communication consistently throughout the curriculum. There are a number of strategies for helping students develop effective writing skills, including the use of assignment rubrics, successive drafts, and feedback from peers and instructors. Table 5.5 indicates teaching strategies that support students’ writing skills development.

Reflection Benner et al. (2010) describe the process of helping students learn to identify what is important in a given situation as teaching for salience. One of the key strategies they describe as an exemplar of good teaching is that of helping learners reflect on practice. Reflecting on clinical practice allows students to examine clinical experiences and determine which actions were effective and were not effective. The process of reflection facilitates increased self-awareness and enhances learning (Wanda et al., 2016). Coaching for reflection requires active engagement of the teacher, whereas reflecting requires active engagement of the learner. Strategies such as incorporating regular opportunities for reflective discussion, using structured reflection, providing individual student feedback on the reflection, and providing clear guidelines on the reflective activity will assist students to engage in reflective learning practices (Wanda et al., 2016). Exhibit 5.3 provides suggested questions to frame reflection in a dialogue or in a writing activity such as journaling or blogging. EXHIBIT 5.2 Types of Writing Assignments Appraisal Book report Blog Care plan Case analysis Critique Evidence synthesis Film report Journal Letter Memo Narrative

Pamphlet Patient instructions Poetry Policy/Procedure Process reflection Project proposal Research paper Summary Technical description Tweet Wiki

5. Learning Environment and Teaching Methods  ■ 75

TABLE 5.5  STRATEGIES FOR IMPROVING WRITING AND STRUCTURING WRITING ASSIGNMENTS Strategy

Teacher’s Action

Rationale

Detailed rubrics

Provide specific criteria for content and quality.

Communicate expectations.

Exemplar papers in the discipline

Share excellent papers written by previous students (with their permission) as examples. Share well-written papers addressing a range of nursing audiences.

Clarify intended level and scope of assignment. Promote awareness of the publication genres and different audiences for scholarly writing in nursing.

Drafts with feedback

Provide feedback on successive versions of the work.

Expect revision of the initial draft.

Sequential section writing

Provide feedback and guidance on one section or aspect of a larger project before the next section is written.

Redirect efforts early.

Peer coaching

Facilitate student peers in providing feedback to one another and revising their own work before they submit for teacher feedback.

Learn from how others conceptualize. Learn to give and receive effective feedback about writing.

Source: Driscoll, D., Paszek, J., Gorzelsky, G., Hayes, C., & Jones, E. (2020). Genre knowledge and writing development: Results from the writing transfer project. Written Communication, 37(1), 69–103. https://doi .org/10.1177/0741088319882313; Peinhardt, R. D., & Hagler, D. (2013). Peer coaching to support writing development. Journal of Nursing Education, 52(1), 24–28. https://doi.org/10.3928/01484834-20121121-02; Sallee, M., Hallett, R., & Tierney, W. (2011). Teaching writing in graduate school. College Teaching, 59(2), 66–72. https://doi.org/10.1080/875675 55.2010.511315; Troxler, H., Vann, J. C., & Oermann, M. H. (2011). How baccalaureate nursing programs teach writing. Nursing Forum, 46(4), 280–288. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1744-6198.2011.00242.x.

EXHIBIT 5.3 Questions to Frame Reflection What about this information is new to you? How does this information confirm or contradict what you already knew or believed? What evidence is presented? How credible is the evidence or reasoning? What seems confusing? What questions remain in your mind? Source: Nilson, L. B. (2016). Teaching at its best: A research-based resource for college instructors (4th ed.). Jossey-Bass.

76  ■ II. Teaching in Nursing

Contract Learning There are several variations to contract learning, depending on the format of the course, the level of learners, and the purpose. These include a team learning contract, a course learning contract, a competency-based learning contract, or an individual learning contract with a student. Team Learning Contract. Teachers may use a team learning contract to specify performance behaviors for members completing a group assignment. A team learning contract is helpful because the learners define what behaviors and outcomes are acceptable to the team, and the team is accountable for enforcing the contract standards among members (Nilson, 2016). For example, a team learning contract may identify assignments, responsibilities, and due dates for team members. This type of approach is useful with adult learners who want to set performance parameters and team behavior expectations. Course Learning Contract. Educators may use a contract learning approach to managing a course. Using this approach, the teacher provides the learner with a menu of options available to demonstrate course learning outcomes, and establishes the minimum standards for satisfactory performance. The learner contracts with the teacher for the number and types of learning assignments that will be completed to achieve the desired level of performance. This approach allows the motivated, self-directed learner the ability to contract with the teacher to complete a series of learning assignments that demonstrate a high level of course performance (Nilson, 2016). One drawback to this approach is that it may be challenging for learners who are less motivated, not self-directed, or unable to articulate learning needs. Competency-Based Learning Contract. A competency-based learning contract may be used to provide a structured approach for field or practicum experiences where a Precepted Clinical Education Model is used. The purpose of the competencybased learning contract is to provide a consistent framework for the application of didactic content with practice experiences. The competency-based learning contract allows for the faculty, preceptor, and learner to establish mutually agreed upon learning outcomes that facilitate the transfer of didactic knowledge to the practice setting. Additionally, the competency-based learning contract facilitates evaluation of learning and attainment of competencies by defining the learning objectives and the evaluation parameters for the student’s field experience (Molina et al., 2018). Individual Learning Contract. A learning contract specifies what the learner must accomplish to meet the course outcomes. The learning contract will specify individual student learning objectives, learning assignments, evaluation methods, and deadlines. The teacher may initiate the learning contract, or the learner may initiate it, depending on the structure of the course and the purpose of the learning contract. Teachers may initiate the learning contract as a tool to clarify requirements with a student who is not meeting course expectations. In contrast, a student-­initiated learning contract allows the self-directed student to individualize a learning experience. Learning contracts are frequently used to guide directed or independent study courses, graduate courses, and fieldwork. Oh et al. (2019) found that the use of learning contracts with undergraduate nursing students in the clinical setting increased problem-solving skills, self-directed learning capabilities, and communication self-efficacy. The principles of andragogy support the use of learning contracts to help facilitate adult learning. A well-written learning contract includes the following items: measurable learning objectives; learning activities and resources required to meet

5. Learning Environment and Teaching Methods  ■ 77

the objectives; deliverables or evidence to demonstrate that the outcomes have been met; and the specific criteria for evaluation.

Concept Mapping Concept mapping is commonly used as an instructional method to facilitate the development of critical thinking by allowing the learner to integrate new concepts into an existing cognitive structure, fostering meaningful learning. A concept map provides a visual representation of a concept and the interrelationships between the central concept and sub concepts. A commonly used structure for concept mapping involves placing the major concept in the center of the map and locating the sub concepts around the major concept, then connecting the sub concepts and major concept to show interrelationships. Figure 13.1 in Chapter 13 is an example of a concept map. Concept mapping encourages learners to build upon previous knowledge, integrate new concepts, and explore the interconnections between concepts (Alfayoumi, 2019). It is important to note that each learner’s concept map will be different because learners construct knowledge based upon their previous knowledge. Concept maps may be unstructured or highly structured. The educator should match the amount of structure for the concept map to the purpose of the concept map. In some circumstances, it may be desirable to use a highly structured approach to concept mapping, whereas it may be preferable to use an unstructured approach when the goal of the teaching method is for the learners to construct their own knowledge. The concept map helps the educator assess a student’s understanding of the concept and the connections among sub concepts. Concept mapping is an appropriate teaching strategy when the faculty member is teaching cognitive information and wants to facilitate active learner participation. In nursing education, concept mapping may be used to help students organize assessment data, integrate interventions and the nursing process, and understand the interrelationships among data. Some advantages of concept mapping are that it helps students who are visual learners see inter-relationships between concepts and sub concepts, and it allows students to build on prior knowledge and assimilate new information in a way that is meaningful to the student. Other advantages include facilitation of active engagement with content, the development of deductive and inductive reasoning, and the ability to cluster information. Aliyari et al. (2019) found that concept mapping increases the level of knowledge and practice in undergraduate nursing students. Variations of concept mapping include mind mapping and argument mapping. Mind maps use a high level of abstraction and use lines and associative words to link pictures, words, and diagrams to form a map of the connections between ideas (Gargouri & Naatus, 2017). Argument maps have a low level of abstraction and use boxes, lines, and linking words to show the inferences between claims and supporting evidence, helping students develop reasoning skills (Gargouri & Naatus, 2017). These different forms of knowledge mapping help foster meaningful learning, allow learners to scaffold or build upon previous learning, and facilitate critical thinking.

Self-Paced Modules/Reusable Learning Objects A reusable learning object (RLO) is a small, self-contained educational unit that may include objectives, content, interactive learning activities, animations, narrated text,

78  ■ II. Teaching in Nursing

visual images, self-assessments, and feedback tools. RLOs may be used to introduce new content, reinforce or clarify existing content, or provide demonstrations (Redmond et al., 2018). They may be used independently or combined with other RLOs to teach larger content areas. Some teachers use RLOs when they “flip” the classroom by having the learners review the RLO prior to coming to class, then use class time for more active learning activities. When developing and designing an RLO, it is important for the teacher to keep the RLO focused on a small area of content, clearly define the scope of the RLO, and incorporate strategies that facilitate ease of navigation and interactivity. Some teachers use a storyboard approach to help facilitate the development of RLOs. Most RLOs are between 2 and 15 minutes in length. RLOs developed by publishing companies are available for purchase or may be included when students purchase textbook packages. The role of the teacher in using RLOs developed by others is to assure that the RLO is congruent with the course objectives, is of sufficient quality to meet student learning needs, and is used in compliance with copyright restrictions. The benefits of RLOs include the ability of the student to engage in self-paced learning, actively engage with content, review content, and perform self-assessment to identify learning needs. RLOs promote knowledge-based and performance-based learning (Redmond et al., 2018). For these reasons, RLOs can be more effective than traditional lecture.

SMALL-GROUP METHODS Discussion A good discussion is engaging, explores diverse ideas, and helps participants clarify their own thinking in the face of colleagues’ alternative ideas. However, poorly planned discussions can take up a large amount of time with little learning impact. Even after a well-focused discussion, students may not understand what points in the discussion are important to remember or apply in future work. Periodic restatements and summaries by group members can help everyone stay on track and remember key points. During discussion, students may focus on the comments their instructor makes, but not the comments that their peers make, which detracts from students learning from each other (Gravett, 2018). A strategy to address this occurrence is to implement a postdiscussion reflection assignment where students are asked to respond to questions to help them identify what they learned from the discussion and the significant contributions of their peers (Gravett, 2018). To facilitate effective discussion, clear learning objectives and agreed-upon ground rules are essential. For example, clarify how students will participate in the discussion. Will students raise their hands, speak out at will, or indicate in some other way that they would like to have the floor? Is participation required or optional? It’s also important to clarify how the group will manage those who dominate the discussion, avoid participation, move off topic, or show disrespectful behavior to other group members. The process of setting group discussion norms collaboratively creates a good starting point for a respectful and scholarly discussion. Examples of teacher responses that enhance discussion are in Table 5.6.

5. Learning Environment and Teaching Methods  ■ 79

TABLE 5.6  TEACHER RESPONSES THAT FACILITATE DISCUSSION If Student Contribution Is . . .

Possible Teacher’s Response to Facilitate Discussion

Accurate

Provide some reinforcement or praise such as a nod or brief affirming statement.

Correct but only one of many

Ask another student to extend or add to the response; avoid early closure.

Incomplete

Follow-up with a question that directs the student to include more information.

Unclear

Ask the student to rephrase it, or try to rephrase the response and ask if this is what the student means.

Seemingly wrong

Follow-up with one or more gentle Socratic questions designed to lead the student to discover the error. Invite the student to explain, clarify, or elaborate.

Source: Adapted from Nilson, L. B. (2016). Teaching at its best: A research-based resource for college instructors (4th ed., p. 214). Jossey-Bass. Reprinted with permission of John Wiley and Sons.

Experiential Learning Activities that engage the senses help learners understand and recall concepts. Trying to breathe through a straw for several minutes evokes both physical sensations to remember and a beginning sense of understanding how arduous and frightening it can be to feel short of breath. Taking part in a group exercise such as building a bridge with dry spaghetti or assembling a puzzle can open frank discussion about the dynamics of working in groups to complete tasks. Sorting a collection of items in three different ways helps promote understanding of competing classification systems or nomenclatures. Although doing kinesthetic activities in class takes time, the additional understanding that learners develop through the activity and facilitated reflection promotes lasting learning.

Case Study A case study is a description of a person, event, or situation. Case studies are often created or adapted based upon life experiences. Case studies may be included in a lecture, discussion, or small group learning activity in classroom or online environments. Case studies actively engage learners by providing opportunities to apply concepts or content to real or simulated scenarios, facilitating the development of critical thinking skills and empathy (Heiney et al., 2019). Effective case studies are relevant, are realistic, promote student engagement, and provide a cognitive challenge for the learners. Case studies may present a one-time snapshot of the situation or a continuous, unfolding story over time. Some case studies use a sequential-interactive approach where the learners move through the case study by making decisions or narrowing

80  ■ II. Teaching in Nursing

down solutions and requesting additional information from the teacher to ultimately solve the case (Nilson, 2016). Whatever approach is used for the case study, it is important for the teacher to debrief the learners by discussing the problems and solutions identified through the case study with the learners. In larger classes, educators can use an audience response system to engage learners and increase interaction around case decisions. In nursing education, case studies can provide practice opportunities in assessing situations and making decisions. Case studies vary in length from short two to three sentence descriptions of a situation to extensive multipage cases. The length of the case study is determined by the educational purpose for using the approach. Teachers may purchase or create the case studies; frequently, nurse educators develop their own case studies based on prior clinical practice experiences. When creating a case study, the teacher develops objectives and questions that correspond with the case study to engage the learner and foster the development of higher level thinking abilities (analysis, synthesis, evaluation).

Collaborative Learning The terms cooperative learning and collaborative learning are frequently used interchangeably. However, collaborative learning is the broader term, which is inclusive of cooperative learning. Collaborative learning encourages students to work interdependently to answer questions or solve problems, while still maintaining individual accountability for learning. Collaborative learning increases knowledge retention, engages learners, facilitates problem-solving, and promotes deeper learning (Männistö et al., 2019; Zhang & Cui, 2018). Collaborative learning strategies may be used in multiple settings, including classroom, clinical, and online learning environments. Teachers create a collaborative learning environment by providing opportunities for learner interaction and group collaboration by creating assignments that cannot be completed alone and require small groups of students to work together (Zhang & Cui, 2018). Educators build individual accountability into collaborative learning activities by having learners complete self, peer, and group evaluation of contributions to the group’s project and functioning. Learners who participate in collaborative learning activities learn group processing skills such as managing group dynamics, ensuring participation by all group members, treating each group member’s contributions with respect, and arriving at group consensus. The teacher’s role in collaborative learning is to provide a structure that facilitates problem-solving, assists learners in managing group process, and helps learners to synthesize and apply their learning (Zhang & Cui, 2018). It is important for the teacher to clearly articulate the purpose of the collaborative learning activity, help the learners understand the value of the learning activity, provide clear instructions, and facilitate closure on completion of the learning activity. Ideally, small groups of two to four students work best for collaborative learning activities. It is important for the teacher to intentionally incorporate heterogeneity into collaborative learning by forming groups with diversity in characteristics such as individual ability, perspective, gender, academic major, or age. Group heterogeneity provides the opportunity to work with and learn from others who are different. Team learning agreements may be used to define how the collaborative learning group will work together, thereby encouraging students to be more responsible for their own learning and to actively engage in the learning process because they

5. Learning Environment and Teaching Methods  ■ 81

participated in the creation of the learning environment structure. Collaborative learning groups also need to work together long enough to form effective working relationships. Teaching methods that promote collaborative learning can be used in traditional classroom or online learning environments, including think-write-pairshare, group investigations, three-step interviews, wikis, blogs, threaded discussions, and the use of clickers for interactive academic gaming.

Team-Based Learning Team-based learning (TBL) is a form of collaborative learning, that is, an instructorled, learner-centered approach to teaching that facilitates active learning (Dearnley et al., 2018). It is comprised of three phases: preparation, readiness assurance, and application of concepts. During the first phase, preparation, students are assigned to review course materials prior to class. In the second phase, assessment of individual and group readiness to participate in the TBL activities is completed. This is frequently accomplished through the use of multiple-choice questions directed toward assessing student readiness. During the third phase, the learners work together to apply course concepts to case-based scenarios and respond to questions as a team. The teams then share their answers and discuss how they reached their conclusions with the whole class. TBL has been found to improve academic performance, increase problem-solving, increase active participation in learning, and enhanced student satisfaction (Dearnley et al., 2018). Additionally, TBL facilitates the development of communities of practice, which enhances student engagement in learning (Burgess et al., 2019).

Problem-Based Learning PBL is a student-centered learning method that allows learners to be actively engaged in their learning, acquire new information in the context for their use, and create a link between theory and practice. Benefits of PBL include development of critical thinking, teamwork, and self-directed learning skills (Pu et al., 2019; Wosinski et al., 2018)). Some programs use PBL as a learning method to deliver the entire curriculum, whereas other programs use PBL techniques to deliver selected learning experiences. PBL has been used as a teaching–learning method in traditional theory-based, online, and clinical practice courses. The many different approaches to PBL share common attributes, including that (a) problems are used as the central focus to initiate or motivate learning, (b) students collaborate in small groups and work over a period of time to solve problems, (c) the teacher serves as a facilitator of learning instead of a disseminator of content, (d) the teacher coaches teams for managing group processes, and (e) students initiate and direct learning. There are four basic stages in implementing a PBL method. The first stage is problem analysis, where introductory information is given to the students, and the group identifies what is known and unknown about the situation. The second stage is brainstorming, where the group identifies resources to meet learning needs. During this stage, the group may also pose questions to the facilitator or their peers to clarify the situation. The third stage is self-directed learning, where each group member researches and gathers information to share. The final stage is solution testing, which is an iterative process where group members share resources and information to test solutions by applying new knowledge to solve the situation.

82  ■ II. Teaching in Nursing

PBL requires the teacher to actively facilitate group learning rather than deliver content. Because PBL relies on students building upon prior content knowledge, PBL may not be the most effective teaching method for entirely new content. It can take students time to adapt to active teaching methods, such as PBL, if they have been previously socialized to more passive teaching methods. To help students transition, the teacher can introduce PBL gradually and explain how the roles of educator and student are different in PBL.

Simulation, Standardized Patients, Role-Play, and Drama “Simulation is a technique—not a technology—to replace or amplify real experiences with guided experiences that evoke or replicate substantial aspects of the real world in a fully interactive manner” (Gaba, 2007, p. 126). Simulation-based education is based on the learning theories of Constructivism, Kolb’s Experiential Learning Theory, and the NLN/Jeffries Simulation Theory (Aebersold, 2018). The range of fidelity, or faithfulness, to reality in simulation is wide. At the low-fidelity end, learners practice injecting a medication into a practice pad or even a piece of fruit to feel the sense of puncturing through a barrier, while at the high end of simulation fidelity, learners provide care to standardized patients enacting health conditions or manikins programmed with realistic physiologic responses. Simulation can support learning in the cognitive, affective, and psychomotor domains. Simulation is a powerful teaching method and is usually integrated throughout most undergraduate nursing curricula. The use of simulation may increase clinical nursing judgment, deductive reasoning, critical thinking, and student self-confidence (Aebersold, 2018). Teaching with clinical simulation is described in detail in Chapter 8. Standardized patients are used in nursing education to provide students with simulated patient experiences to practice skills such as performing assessments, communicating with families, interviewing patients, and teaching patients (Aebersold, 2018; Coleman & McLaughlin, 2019). The use of clinical experiences with standardized patients provides the faculty with an opportunity to assess student learning and evaluate student preparation for live clinical patient encounters. Formative and summative evaluation of student clinical performance may also be conducted with the assistance of standardized patients. Many advanced practice nursing programs use objective structured clinical examinations (OSCEs) staffed with standardized patients to evaluate learner competencies. Role-play is a teaching method that allows the learner to portray the role of another individual, anticipating how that individual will respond in a given situation. In nursing education, role-play may be used to teach therapeutic communication, conflict resolution skills, and other competencies. It is important for the teacher to create a safe environment to help learners feel comfortable engaging in role-play. Role-play helps the learner train for specific roles by learning to anticipate what an individual might say or do in a situation and preparing how to respond to that individual (Delnavaz et al., 2018; Ronning & Bjorkly, 2019). Role-playing promotes the development of empathy, reflection, and self-efficacy (Ronning & Bjorkly, 2019). It is challenging to use role-play as a teaching method in large enrollment classes, because only a few learners will have the opportunity to actively participate in the role-play activity, whereas the majority of learners may observe as members of the audience.

5. Learning Environment and Teaching Methods  ■ 83

Participating in a scripted drama or theatrical presentation is a specific type of role-play that has been used to help nursing students learn about communication, conflict management, end-of-life care, and ethical or legal issues. Students may participate in the drama as actors or they may watch the drama as observers. The use of drama as a teaching method allows the learner to acquire new knowledge by engaging in “the fictional and real worlds at the same time” (Arveklev et al., 2018). Role-playing and drama are most effective for learning experiences when followed by thoughtful debriefing and reflection. The use of drama as a teaching method is a cost-effective alternative for providing experiential learning around situations that are difficult to arrange in the clinical environment (Arveklev et al., 2015, 2018).

Teaching Others and Making Presentations There is nothing like developing a presentation to encourage immersion in a topic. Through preparing and giving presentations, students have the opportunity to learn the same way that many teachers have learned unfamiliar content. Organizing a presentation forces thinking about what information is needed, what the audience already knows, and how to explain a complex topic. Presentations focus on information in a chosen or assigned content area but have the additional advantage of providing real practice in the authentic workplace skill of teaching or explaining a concept to others. Although the student presenter has an active role in learning through the preparation and delivery of a presentation, the other students observing the presentation stay in the positions of passive learners unless their roles are restructured. Assigning the audience members to some of the roles traditionally held by the teacher, such as moderator, timekeeper, provider of positive feedback, and provider of suggestions for further improvement changes the experience of the audience members to active participants in the learning. Engaging each of the students in some role helps adjust the experience to be more collegial and improves the learning potential for both the student presenter and the student audience. Recording their presentations provides students the opportunity to see how they look and sound as presenters, and it allows for repeated or asynchronous viewing. Class members can provide feedback live or through online interactive video software programs.

Service Learning Service learning is a form of experiential education, which provides students with the opportunity to apply theory to practice while meeting an identified community or organization need (Currie-Mueller & Littlefield, 2018). The evidence suggests that student participation in service learning increases engagement in learning, promotes a positive attitude toward civic involvement, enhances cultural competence, and improves students abilities to apply course concepts to the real world (CurrieMueller & Littlefield, 2018). Service learning is distinguished from volunteer work by the primary goal of learning through providing service. To effectively implement service learning, the teacher facilitates discovery learning and critical reflection to ensure that new knowledge, concepts, and skills are meaningfully linked to the learner’s personal experiences. Characteristics of

84  ■ II. Teaching in Nursing

effective service-learning experiences include joint planning between the academic institution and community partner, reciprocity between partners, clearly defined roles and responsibilities, effective communication among all parties, and a comprehensive student orientation to the service-learning project.

LARGE-CLASS METHODS Lecture A well-organized and enthusiastic lecture can be an inspiring event, while a lecture in which the presenter reads the slides aloud can lead to learners daydreaming. Some advantages of lecturing include that it is an efficient method for delivering content to large groups of students and that students receive the same information. Additionally, lecturing provides the teacher with a sense of control over the learning environment. Lectures may also be used to supplement other learning materials. Teachers organizing and preparing lectures may learn about the intended content through their own active engagement in the process; however, the students attending a lecture often remain passive. Teachers who are afraid they might not know the answers to student questions might be relieved to read from slides or notes without much interaction. Learners who are uncomfortable with communication might be relieved to listen to a lecture and avoid interacting with peers or teachers. However, unless students are engaged, they are unlikely to remain attentive and retain information from the lecture. The key to keeping students engaged is to divide a longer lecture into several minilectures and stop talking every few minutes while students participate in active thinking tasks. Tasks that help students understand what they are hearing might be generating examples of the concept under discussion, taking part in a kinesthetic activity related to the concept, or applying the concept to solve a problem. For lecture to be effective, it is important to integrate active learning techniques and to summarize critical information. Exhibit 5.4 describes teacher actions that improve the effectiveness of lectures.

Questioning Questions are a powerful tool for understanding what learners are thinking and helping learners organize and expand their thinking. However, a teacher’s question can strike fear into the heart of a learner who is overly worried about what answer

EXHIBIT 5.4 Suggestions for an Effective Lecture Determine intended learning outcomes Budget extra time for questions and interaction Subdivide content in 15-minute or shorter segments of content Intersperse lecture with learning activities Use attention grabbers to engage learners Incorporate visuals, examples, and restatements Engage students in recapping and summarizing key points. Source: Nilson, L. B. (2016). Teaching at its best: A research-based resource for college instructors (4th ed.). Jossey-Bass.

5. Learning Environment and Teaching Methods  ■ 85

the teacher expects. It is important for the teacher to create a safe learning environment built on mutual respect between the teacher and students, and to convey a nonjudgmental, supportive attitude to effectively use questioning strategies as a teaching/learning method (Makhene, 2019). Brookfield (2012) describes supporting development of critical thinking through asking learners first about the general ideas or concepts being presented, then later asking more direct questions about the learner’s own ideas. He suggests a process of asking learners questions related to identifying their assumptions, checking their assumptions, seeing multiple viewpoints, and taking informed actions. A Socratic inquiry approach may be used across educational settings (didactic, clinical, experiential, and online). The purpose of Socratic inquiry is to help the student or group uncover their knowledge, make connections among concepts, evaluate assumptions, appraise evidence, and reflect upon their thinking through a series of exploratory questions. When using this approach, the teacher asks the learner different types of questions to clarify, conclude, connect, define, explore, justify, or probe (Dinkins & Cangelosi, 2019; Makhene, 2019). It can be intimidating for learners to be asked a series of direct questions, thus, the teacher can ask some questions indirectly in the form of a request that begins with “please share” or “tell me more.” Socratic questioning increases critical thinking, enhances moral reasoning, develops problem-solving, and promotes self-reflection (Dinkins & Cangelosi, 2019; Makhene, 2019; Torabizadeh et al., 2018). Table 5.7 lists types of questions and sample Socratic questions for each type.

TABLE 5.7  SAMPLE SOCRATIC QUESTIONS Type of Question

Purpose

Sample questions/probes

Analogy

Help learner draw comparisons between concepts

How is concept “x” similar to concept “y”? How is concept “x” different than concept “y”? What are the similarities between “x” concept and “y” concept? What are the differences between “x” concept and “y” concept?

Clarifying

Help learner refine beliefs

What is your belief about “x”? Tell me why you believe that. Share the information you have that supports your belief. What information do you have that does not support your belief?

Connecting

Help learner discuss connections or relationships between concepts

How are these concepts connected? How is concept “x” related to concept “y”? (continued )

86  ■ II. Teaching in Nursing

TABLE 5.7  SAMPLE SOCRATIC QUESTIONS (CONTINUED) Type of Question

Purpose

Sample questions/probes

Concluding

Help learner arrive at conclusions or judgments

How did you arrive at this conclusion? Share the evidence you used to reach this conclusion. What evidence supports this conclusion? What evidence does not support this conclusion?

Defining

Help learner define concepts or foundational knowledge

Share your understanding of “x” concept. Tell me why “x” situation/problem is occurring.

Probing

Help learner develop a deeper understanding

Tell me more about. . . What other information do you know about . . ., that you have not already shared? Is there any additional information that you’d like to gather to help you understand this concept?

Source: Dinkins, C., & Cangelosi, P. (2019). Putting Socrates back in Socratic method: Theory-based debriefing in the nursing classroom. Nursing Philosophy, 20(2), e12240. https://doi.org/10.1111/nup.12240 Makhene, A. (2019). The use of the Socratic inquiry to facilitate critical thinking in nursing education. Health SA Gesondheid, 24, a1224. https://doi .org/10.4102/hsag. v24i0.1224

Demonstration/Return Demonstration Demonstration, a teaching method frequently used in clinical practice and laboratory settings, may be incorporated into classroom sessions through display of experiments or problem-solving techniques (Nilson, 2016). Demonstration facilitates learning for students who learn through assimilation or convergence, or who consider themselves visual learners. A return demonstration by the learner supports a kinesthetic preference in learning. Demonstration is discussed more fully in Chapter 10.

Educational Games Educational games are effective in reinforcing knowledge, motivating effort, engaging learners, enhancing collaboration, improving communication, developing teamwork, and creating a relaxed atmosphere that facilitates comprehension of content (Friedrich et al., 2020; Kinder & Kurz, 2018). Many students perceive games as positive and motivational; however, some learners experience anxiety, embarrassment, and intimidation with the peer competition aspect of gaming (Kinder & Kurz, 2018;

5. Learning Environment and Teaching Methods  ■ 87

McEnroe-Petitte & Farris, 2020). Educational games provide immediate formative feedback to the learners and allow the teacher to assess the amount of learning that has occurred (Kinder & Kurz, 2018; McEnroe-Petitte & Farris, 2020). Educational games can be high or low technology and are classified by genre such as adventure, music, puzzle, racing, role-play, simulation, sports, and strategy. Learners playing high-tech simulation or strategy games may use virtual reality or interactive video gaming to experience real-life situations or events that facilitate learning and decision making. Low-tech games such as question-and-answer board games, team quizzes, card games, and tossing the ball to answer the question onthe-spot are effective in reinforcing learning. The teacher should assess and match the fit between the goal for the education session (i.e., delivering new content or reinforcing information) and the readiness of the learners to participate in the game. To effectively use gaming, teachers should be confident in their ability to lead the gaming session and be able to adjust it, dependent on the learners’ responses. Logistical factors such as the amount of time, class size, and the teaching environment might be constraints to implementing gaming.

Film Cinemeducation or digital storytelling is the use of movies or film clips to teach concepts, facilitate discussion, encourage affective learning, and foster critical deeper thinking (Coon, 2018; Ogston-Tuck et al., 2016; Yocom et al., 2020). Movies create a controlled learning environment to facilitate learning and an opportunity to experience some situations firsthand (Coon, 2018; Ogston-Tuck et al., 2016; Yocom et al., 2020). One drawback of using movies is that learners may make unsupported inferences about what they observe, and they may not have the opportunity to ask questions as they would in a live practice situation. The teacher can ask specific questions to guide learners in identifying inferences from the movie and considering additional information they would obtain if they could interact with the characters. The teacher should preview the film and ensure that it supports the desired concept, then provide learners with objectives to guide the experience and reflective questions to stimulate critical thinking. The students might submit responses to the teacher for evaluation or discuss responses with peers. Another approach is to have them write about specific concepts seen in the movie. Coon (2018) used this type of approach to teach human development. Learners completed a formal assessment of development based on data presented in the film.

Debate Debate helps learners develop communication skills, structure logical arguments, and engage in rebuttals. Teachers can use debate with small or large groups of learners. A common format for debate involves assigning groups of learners opposing positions on a controversial topic. The teacher provides the structure, facilitates learners’ argument development, poses logical questions, manages group dynamics and interpersonal communications, and facilitates learners’ reflection. Nurse educators frequently use debate to facilitate thinking about ethical issues. Debate encourages learners to develop logical arguments and impromptu fact-based responses about controversial issues.

88  ■ II. Teaching in Nursing

Narrative Pedagogy/Storytelling The use of stories for teaching and learning is naturally engaging and highly flexible. Storytelling formats can range from a simple face-to-face verbal or audio recording recounting an experience to a polished multimedia production. “Narrative requires readers to produce rich and complex mental representations. It offers one of the major means through which the experiences of other people, different cultures, and distant times may be conveyed, and it expands our virtual experience of the world. Typically, narratives manipulate not only our knowledge of things, but also our impressions of how people feel, judge, and react in a multitude of situations” (Sanford & Emmott, 2012, p. xi). The same experience can be told as a story from different perspectives and with different themes in mind. For example, stories told on a nursing unit to newly hired staff may have the purpose of a cautionary tale, an orientation to the unit culture, establishment of a hierarchy, or providing other information. Exhibit 5.5 describes features common to narratives and stories used to teach. Although storytelling is common to many purposes, educators have systematically investigated the use of narrative in nursing. Narrative pedagogy is a unique approach that calls upon teachers to “create opportunities to talk with students about their thinking, how they understand (interpret) the situations they encounter, and what this means to their emerging nursing practice” (Ironside, 2015, p. 85). The wide availability of digital media has provided many options for narratives, including videos and podcasts. A simple recording of a story in the patient’s own voice could provide the prompt for an engaging class discussion or other assignment. Teachers need to obtain written permission from the storyteller before recording and sharing narratives.

SUMMARY Teachers can make a significant difference in outcomes for learners by establishing a supportive learning environment. Encouraging a positive class climate and respectful interactions among peers promotes the development of an effective environment for learning. The educator selecting a teaching method should consider the fit of that method with the learning objectives, learner and teacher characteristics, and available resources. Of these factors, the single most critical aspect in choosing a teaching method is judging the fit of that method with the intended learning outcomes or objectives.

EXHIBIT 5.5 Typical Features of Narrative/Stories Specific rather than generic events Specific time and place settings People are involved in the events Include moment-by-moment thoughts, feelings, and sensory perceptions Include a setting, theme, plot, and resolution Audience members feel as if they have entered a different world. Source: Sanford, A. J., & Emmott, C. (2012). Mind, brain and narrative. Cambridge University Press.

5. Learning Environment and Teaching Methods  ■ 89

Learning can be described as development in one or more of three different domains: cognitive, affective, and psychomotor. Some teaching strategies support learning in all three domains, whereas other strategies are more specific to learning in only one or two of the domains. The characteristics of the intended learners, including their social and cognitive cultures, are important to consider in choosing teaching methods. A teacher does not have to be skilled in using every method. It is important for the teacher to be comfortable with the methods chosen so that the focus of attention stays on learners and the learning process. Choices of teaching method are sustainable when they are realistic for the reasonably available resources. Resources to consider in choosing teaching methods include time, space, support staff, technology, and materials. A focus on learner engagement and active learning is aligned with a general trend away from teacher-centered strategies and toward strategies focused on what students learn. Two processes are important for active learning: action and reflection. Taking part in some meaningful activity followed by reflecting on the learning processes and outcomes transforms the learner from a passive recipient of someone else’s thoughts to a constructor of knowledge and meaning. There are many teaching methods for active learning that promote the development of critical thinking. These include case studies, concept mapping, collaborative or team learning, PBL, service learning, and gaming. Teaching methods were categorized in this chapter as independent learning, small-group, and large-class methods. However, each of the methods can be used in more than one way. Independent learning methods include reading; writing; reflection; contract learning (including a team learning contract, contract learning approach to a course, and an individual learning contract); concept mapping; and RLOs. Small-group methods presented in the chapter were discussion; experiential methods; case study; collaborative learning; PBL; simulation (including standardized patients, role-play, imagined script writing, and drama); presentations; and service learning. Large-class methods include lecture, questioning, demonstration, educational games, film (and other media), debate, and narrative pedagogy/storytelling. Each of these teaching methods was discussed in the chapter.

REFERENCES Aebersold, M. (2018). Simulation-based learning: No longer a novelty in undergraduate education. OJIN: The Online Journal of Issues in Nursing, 23(2), 1-1. https://doi.org/ 10.3912/OJIN.Vol23No02PPT39 Alfayoumi, I. (2019). The impact of combining concept-based learning and conceptmapping pedagogies on nursing students’ clinical reasoning abilities. Nurse Education Today, 72, 40–46. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.nedt.2018.10.009 Aliyari, S. (2019). Comparing two teaching methods based on concept map and lecture on the level of learning in basic life support. Nurse Education in Practice, 38(7), 40–45. https://doi.org/:10.1016/j.nepr.2019.05.008 Ambrose, S., Bridges, M., DiPietro, M., Lovett, M., & Norman, M. (2010). How learning works: Seven research-based principles for smart teaching. Jossey-Bass. Anderson, L. W., Krathwohl, D. R., Airasian, P., Cruikshank, K. A., Mayer, R. E., Pintrich, P., . . . Wittrock, M. (2001). A taxonomy for learning, teaching, and assessing: A revision of Bloom’s taxonomy of educational objectives. Longman. Arveklev, S., Berg, L., Wigert, H., Morrison-Helme, M., & Lepp, M. (2018). Learning about conflict and conflict management through drama in nursing education. Journal of Nursing Education, 57(4), 209–216. https://https://doi.org/10.3928/01484834-20180322-04

90  ■ II. Teaching in Nursing

Arveklev, S., Wigert, H., Berg, L., Burton, B., & Lepp, M. (2015). The use and application of drama in nursing education—An integrative review of the literature. Nurse Education Today, 35(7), e12–e17. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.nedt.2015.02.025 Barr, J. J. (2016). Developing a positive classroom climate. IDEA Paper #61. The IDEA Center. http://www.ideaedu.org/Research/IDEA-Paper-Series Benner, P., Sutphen, M., Leonard, V., & Day, L. (2010). Educating nurses: A call for radical transformation. Jossey-Bass. Boardman, A., Roberts, G., Vaughn, S., Wexler, J., Murray, C., & Kosanovich, M. (2008). Effective instruction for adolescent struggling readers: A practice brief. RMC Research Corporation, Center on Instruction. Bristol, T., Hagler,D., McMillian-Bohler, J., Wermers, R., Hatch, D., & Oermann, M.H. (2019). Nurse educators’ use of lecture and active learning. Teaching and Learning in Nursing, 14(2), 94–96. DOI:10.1016/j.teln.2018.12.003 Brookfield, S. (2012). Teaching for critical thinking: Tools and techniques to help students question their assumptions. Jossey-Bass. Burgess, A., Haq, I., Bleasel, J., Roberts, C., Garsia, R., Nicholas, R., . . . Mellis, C. (2019). Team-based learning (TBL): A community of practice. BMC Medical Education, 19(1), 369. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12909-019-1795-4 Coleman, D., & McLaughlin, D. (2019). Using simulated patients as a learning strategy to support undergraduate nurses to develop patient-teaching skills. British Journal of Nursing, 28(20), 1300–1307. https://doi.org/10.12968/bjon.2019.28.20.1300 Coon, R. (2018). Cinema in nursing education: Tapping into the affective domain. Journal of Nursing Education, 57(3), 188–189. https://doi.org/10.3928/01484834-20180221-13 Currie-Mueller, J., & Littlefield, R. (2018). Embracing service-learning opportunities: Student perceptions of service-learning as an aid to effectively learn course material. Journal of the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning, 18(1), 25–42. https://doi.org/10.14434/ josotl.v18il.21356 Dave, R. H. (1970). Developing and writing educational objectives (psychomotor levels). In R. J. Armstrong (Ed.), Developing and writing behavioral objectives. Educational Innovators Press. Dearnley, C., Rhodes, C., Roberts, P., Williams, P., & Prenton, S. (2018). Team based learning in nursing and midwifery higher education; A systematic review of the evidence for change. Nurse Education Today, 60(1), 75–83. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.nedt.2017.09.012 Delnavaz, S., Hassankhani, H., Roshangar, F., D22adashzadeh, A., Sarbakhsh, P., Ghafourifard, M., . . . Fathiazar, E. (2018). Comparison of scenario based triage education by lecture and role playing on knowledge and practice of nursing students. Nurse Education Today, 70(11), 54–59. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.nedt.2018.08.006 Dinkins, C., & Cangelosi, P. (2019). Putting socrates back in Socratic method: Theory-based debriefing in the nursing classroom. Nursing Philosophy, 20(2), e12240. https://doi .org/10.1111/nup.12240 Driscoll, D., Paszek, J., Gorzelsky, G., Hayes, C., & Jones, E. (2020). Genre knowledge and writing development: Results from the writing transfer project. Written Communication, 37(1), 69–103. Egan, A. (2019). Confidence in critical thinking: Developing learners in higher education. Routledge Elverson, C., & Klawiter, R. (2019). Using guided reflection to link cultural and service learning in a study abroad course. Journal of Professional Nursing, 35(3), 181–186. Fisher, D., & Frey, N. (2019). Best practices in adolescent literacy instruction. In L. Morrow, L. Gambrell, & H. Casey (Ed.), Best practices in literacy instruction (6th ed.). Guilford Publications. Foundation for Critical Thinking. (2019). Learn the elements and standards. http://www .criticalthinking.org/ctmodel/logic-model1.htm

5. Learning Environment and Teaching Methods  ■ 91

Frerejean, J., van Strien, J., Kirschner, P., & Brand-Gruwel, S. (2018). Effects of a modelling example for teaching information problem solving skills. Journal of Computer Assisted Learning, 34/6), 688–700. https://doi.org/10.1111/jcal.12276 Friedrich, C., Teaford, H., Taubenheim, A., & Sick, B. (2020). Interprofessional health care escape room for advanced learners. Journal of Nursing Education, 59(1), 46–50. https:// doi.org/10.3928/01484834-20191223-11 Gaba, D. M. (2007). The future vision of simulation in healthcare. Simulation in Healthcare, 2(2), 126–135. https://doi.org/10.1097/01.sih.0000258411.38212.32 Gallup. (2019). Honesty/ethics in professions. http://www.gallup.com/poll/1654/-honestyethics-professions.aspx Gargouri, C., & Naatus, M. (2017). An experiment in mind-mapping and argumentmapping: Tools for assessing outcomes in the business curriculum. E-Journal of Business Education & Scholarship of Teaching, 11(2), 39–78. Gravett, E. (2018). Note-taking during discussion: Using a weekly reflection assignment to motivate students to learn from their peers. College Teaching, 66(2), 75–83. https://doi .org/10.1080/87567555.2017.1394258 Heiney, S., Polyakova-Norwood, V., & DeGregory, C. (2019). Using a continuing multimedia case study to develop critical thinking and empathy. Journal of Nursing Education, 58(3), 169–172. https://doi.org/10.3928/01484834-20190221-08 Ignatavicius, D. (2019). Teaching and learning in a concept-based nursing curriculum: A how-to best practice approach. Jones & Bartlett. Ingraham, K., Davidson, S., & Yonge, O. (2018). Student-faculty relationships and its impact on academic outcomes. Nurse Education Today, 71(12), 17–21. https://doi.org/10.1016/ j.nedt.2018.08.021 Ironside, P. (2015). Narrative pedagogy: Transforming nursing education through 15 years of research in nursing education. Nursing Education Perspectives, 38(2), 83–88. https:// doi.org/10.5480/13-1102 Jensen, M. N., & Scharff, L. F. V. (2019). Improving critical reading with E-texts: A controlled study in a collegiate philosophy course. Journal of the Scholarship of Teaching and Learning, 19(3), 49. Johnson, J., & Rulo, K. (2019). Problem in the profession: How and why writing skills in nursing must be improved. Journal of Professional Nursing, 35(1), 57–64. https://doi .org/10.1016/j.profnurs.2018.05.005 Kinder, F., & Kurz, J. (2018). Gaming strategies in nursing education. Teaching and Learning in Nursing, 13(4), 212–214. https://doi.org/:10.1016/j.teln.2018.05.001 Krathwohl, D. R., Bloom, B. S., & Masia, B. B. (1964). Taxonomy of educational objectives: The classification of educational goals. Handbook II: Affective domain. David McKay. Makhene, A. (2019). The use of the Socratic inquiry to facilitate critical thinking in nursing education. Health SA Gesondheid, 24(0), a1224. https://doi.org/10.4102/ hsag.v24i0.1224 Männistö, M., Mikkonen, K., Kuivila, H., Virtanen, M., Kyngäs, H., & Kääriäinen, M. (2019). Digital collaborative learning in nursing education: A systematic review. Scandinavian Journal of Caring Sciences, 34(2), 280–292. https://doi.org/10.1111/scs.12743 Mcenroe-Petitte, D., & Farris, C. (2020). Using gaming as an active teaching strategy in nursing education. Teaching and Learning in Nursing, 15(1), 61–65. https://doi .org/:10.1016/j.teln.2019.09.002 Molina, V., Molina-Moore, T., Smith, M. G., & Pratt, F. E. (2018). Bridging education and practice with a competency-based learning contract. Journal of Teaching in Social Work, 38(1), 18–27. https://doi.org/10.1080/08841233.2017.1407387 National League for Nursing. (2015). NLN vision series: Debriefing across the curriculum. http://www.nln.org/docs/default-source/about/nln-vision-series-(position-state ments)/nln-vision-debriefing-across-the-curriculum.pdf?sfvrsn=0

92  ■ II. Teaching in Nursing

Nilson, L. B. (2016). Teaching at its best: A research-based resource for college instructors (4th ed.). Jossey-Bass. Oermann, M. H., & Gaberson, K. B. (2021). Evaluation and testing in nursing education (6th ed.). Springer Publishing. Ogston-Tuck, S., Baume, K., Clarke, C., & Heng, S. (2016). Understanding the patient experience through the power of film: A mixed method qualitative research study. Nurse Education Today, 46, 69–74. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.nedt.2016.08.025 Oh, J., Huh, B., & Kim, M. (2019). Effect of learning contracts in clinical pediatric nursing education on students’ outcomes: A research article. Nurse Education Today, 83(12), 104191. https://doi.org/:10.1016/j.nedt.2019.08.009 Peinhardt, R. D., & Hagler, D. (2013). Peer coaching to support writing development. Journal of Nursing Education, 52(1), 24–28. https://doi.org/10.3928/01484834-20121121-02 Pu, D., Ni, J., Song, D., Zhang, W., Wang, Y., Wu, L., . . . Wang, X. (2019). Influence of critical thinking disposition on the learning efficiency of problem-based learning in undergraduate medical students. BMC Medical Education, 19(1), 1. https://doi .org/:10.1186/s12909-018-1418-5 Redmond, C., Davies, C., Cornally, D., Adam, E., Daly, O., Fegan, M., & O’Toole, M. (2018). Using reusable learning objects (RLOs) in wound care education: Undergraduate student nurse’s evaluation of their learning gain. Nurse Education Today, 60(1), 3–10. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.nedt.2017.09.014 Ronning, S., & Bjorkly, S. (2019). The use of clinical role-play and reflection in learning therapeutic communication skills in mental health education: An integrative review. Advances in Medical Education and Practice, 10(6), 415–425. https://doi.org/10.2147/ AMEP.S202115 Sallee, M., Hallett, R., & Tierney, W. (2011). Teaching writing in graduate school. College Teaching, 59(2), 66–72. Sanford, A. J., & Emmott, C. (2012). Mind, brain and narrative. Cambridge University Press. Torabizadeh, C., Homayuni, L., Moattari, M., Monteverde, S., & Defilippis, T. (2018). Impacts of Socratic questioning on moral reasoning of nursing students. Nursing Ethics, 25(2), 174–185. https://doi.org/10.1177/0969733016667775 Troxler, H., Vann, J. C., & Oermann, M. H. (2011). How baccalaureate nursing programs teach writing. Nursing Forum, 46(4), 280–288. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1744-6198 .2011.00242.x Turner, K., & McCarthy, V. (2017). Stress and anxiety among nursing students: A review of intervention strategies in literature between 2009 and 2015. Nurse Education in Practice, 22(1), 21–29. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.nepr.2016.11.002 Wanda, D., Fowler, C., & Wilson, V. (2016). Using flash cards to engage Indonesian nursing students in reflection on their practice. Nurse Education Today, 38, 132–137. https://doi .org/10.1016/j.nedt.2015.11.029 Wosinski, J., Belcher, A., Dürrenberger, Y., Allin, A., Stormacq, C., & Gerson, L. (2018). Facilitating problem-based learning among undergraduate nursing students: A qualitative systematic review. Nurse Education Today, 60(1), 67–74. https://doi.org/ 10.1016/j.nedt.2017.08.015 Yocom, D., Bashaw, C., & Price, D. (2020). Perceptions of digital storytelling in the classroom. Teaching and Learning in Nursing, 15(3), 164–167. https://doi.org/10.1016/ j.teln.2020.01.010 Zhang, J., & Cui, Q. (2018). Collaborative learning in higher nursing education: A systematic review. Journal of Professional Nursing, 34(5), 378–388. https://doi.org/ 10.1016/j.profnurs.2018.07.007Contributors

6 Integrating Technology in Education Jennie C. De Gagne

OBJECTIVES 1. Examine the integration of emerging technology tools to support teaching and learning 2. Overview selected instructional technologies and their application to nursing education 3. Evaluate the infrastructure and classroom alignment required for integrating technology into the teaching-learning process

INTRODUCTION Technology permeates every aspect of our lives, including education. Rapid advances in technology create both challenges and opportunities for teachers and students. In countries around the world, education leaders, policy makers, parents, teachers, and students are recognizing that technology plays a valuable, transformative role in promoting student achievement, career development, and lifelong learning skills. By integrating existing and emerging technological tools into their teaching methods, educators can help students to develop essential 21st-century skills such as critical thinking, creativity, and information literacy. In fact, teachers and students become collaborators in learning as technology evolves. Pedagogical technology is constantly introducing new models and resources to expand linear, text-based learning and engage students with a variety of learning preferences and experiences. As technology continues to evolve, however, educators who wish to integrate it must acquire updated competencies and learning strategies. The ability to use and evaluate innovative technologies is a critical competency for nurse educators. Technology is increasingly being integrated into nursing classrooms, laboratories, and clinical sites in an effort to enhance learning outcomes, promote safe patient care, and incorporate evidence-based practice. Nurse educators need a framework for selecting and incorporating relevant technologies into instruction so that students can be proficient users of technology as practicing nurses. This chapter (1) focuses on the integration of technology into nursing curriculum and relevant aspects of classroom alignment, (2) provides an overview of a wide range of instructional technologies useful in nursing education and explains

94  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

their application in a teaching-learning environment, and (3) discusses the evaluation and selection of technologies to support course processes such as tracking student assignments, evaluating participation, assessing outcomes, and grading.

BACKGROUND For most educators, technology for the classroom involves the rapidly expanding use of electronic equipment such as computers, peripheral devices, and software. The development and expansion of the internet in the 1980s laid the foundation for networking capabilities. The availability of the web in the 1990s, followed by Web 2.0 tools in the early 2000s, led to an explosion of digitalized communication and networking in education that has taken many forms. The emergence of ubiquitous technology, such as laptops, smartphones, and wearable devices, has revolutionized methods of teaching and learning, and has challenged educators to consider new paradigms. Faculty, administrators, and policy makers face challenging questions regarding how to assess quality, evaluate outcomes, and establish standards and best practices for technology-enhanced education. Emerging technological innovations have changed the marketplace over the past decade, pushing the boundaries in education and providing new pathways for higher education. This is particularly true for nursing schools, where educational innovations have not only created greater market competition but have placed a stronger emphasis on the development of quality programs and standards that reflect current changes in technology-enhanced education.

THE INTERNET AND THE WEB The terms internet and the web are frequently used interchangeably, but they are not the same. The internet refers to the hardware required for communication (i.e., a collection of computer networks that are connected through copper wires, fiber optic cables, or without wires). The web refers to the software (i.e., a collection of web pages connected to specific locations through hyperlinks and universal resource locators [URLs], or addresses). The web depends on the internet to make it work. The web is a complex and highly organized set of electronic pathways that allow people to search for information. A request for information uses the internet’s networks to find resources located at various sites on the web. Once those resources are located, the requested information, which may include files or media, is sent to the requesting computer or end user. Educators using technology to teach must have a basic understanding of how information travels along these pathways, particularly as they explore more robust teaching technologies including virtual worlds (VWs), web-conferencing, and content delivery of different types of media such as animation, computer graphics, podcasts (audio files), and vodcasts (video files). Text-based information transfers to the requesting computer/user at a much faster rate than audio and video files or the rich media found in VWs, which are larger files. Information travels in packets; the larger the file, the greater number of packets required for travel from one location to another. Students must have the appropriate internet connection and hardware to access the content used in media-rich, online learning environments. It is recommended that the teacher include internet connection requirements in the course syllabus and program description. The statement in Exhibit 6.1 is an example

6. Integrating Technology in Education  ■ 95

EXHIBIT 6.1 Sample Statement on Internet Connection General technology requirements include the use of a broadband internet ­connection for all online or hybrid courses. The most reliable broadband connections are fiber optic, cable, and DSL. Although satellite, which is often used in rural areas where fiber optic, cable, or DSL are not available, and wireless cards purchased through mobile internet providers are also broadband connections, these two broadband connections can be less reliable, producing intermittent connections and slower internet speed. That can interfere with successful web-conferencing sessions, robust information transfer of course content, and connections during online assessments delivered via a learning management system. Additionally, we recommend that you do not use a wireless connection when taking online assessments or participating in high-stakes web-conferencing events such as applied demonstrations. Instead, connect your computer directly to the router with an Ethernet (internet connection) cable. DSL, digital subscriber line.

of information that could be included in a syllabus; it can be modified to reflect specific teaching technologies. The web is considered one of several services provided by the internet. Other services offered over the internet include email, chat, file transfer, and cloud storage. These services are readily available to consumers and can be used by businesses, educational institutions, governments, and individuals to create networks or platforms. The internet is a huge network that is available to anyone almost anywhere around the world. The education community has been working with Web 2.0 technologies for several decades. Web 2.0 is an umbrella term for a host of recent internet applications such as social networking, wikis, folksonomies (or social tagging), virtual societies, blogging, and multiplayer online gaming. These applications differ in form and function; however, all share a common characteristic of supporting internet-based interactions between and within groups. The term “social software,” also known as “social apps,” is therefore often used to describe Web 2.0 tools and services. In addition to the internet, many other technologies, such as simulation and VWs, iPads and tablet devices, smartphones, gaming, and learner response systems, among others, are transforming education. These technologies are evolving quickly, and the pace of change seems to increase each year. Educators need to stay currently informed about emerging instructional technologies in order to adopt the best tools for supporting active learning, using student and faculty time productively, improving learning outcomes, and preparing students for lifelong learning and successful careers. Technology implementation in schools and classrooms of all sizes will benefit from thoughtful strategic planning and evaluation.

TECHNOLOGY TOOLS: PRESENT AND FUTURE Learning Management Systems One of the most common methods of supporting technology integration in education is the use of a learning management system (LMS), a collection of networks and tools integrated to support online learning via a shared interface (Goyal & Purohit,

96  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

2011). LMSs vary from simple to complex according to their use and the tools necessary to support and deliver online content. LMSs have been adopted widely by educational institutions across the globe to meet specific needs and increasing demand. Educators and instructional designers working together can effectively use LMS tools to develop and deliver online course components that maximize the technology inherent in most LMSs. The outcome can result in high-quality online or blended (integrating face-to-face and online activities) courses that provide students with information and learning tools to facilitate the highest levels of learning. A few examples of proprietary LMSs include Blackboard, Desire2Learn (D2L), and Canvas. Examples of open source systems available include Sakai and Moodle. New systems are being developed as the demand for online course offerings and programs continues to increase.

Web 2.0 Tools Web 2.0 is a second generation of the web that allows users an opportunity to interact and collaborate with one another rather than limiting them to viewing content passively. Web 2.0 and similar emerging technologies provide new ways to create, collaborate, edit, and share user-generated content online. Some basic examples of Web 2.0 tools are weblogs, wikis, video casting, social bookmarking, social networking, podcasts, and picture sharing tools. There is a growing abundance of readily available Web 2.0 applications, making technology easier to use and more accessible to faculty and students. Many Web 2.0 applications are free and can be integrated into a course to support all levels of Bloom’s digital taxonomy (Churches, 2016). Bloom’s digital taxonomy follows the learning process on a continuum from lower order thinking skills (LOTS) to higher order thinking skills (HOTS). Its focus is not on tools but rather on the integration of tools to engage students and enhance learning outcomes. Over the years, Bloom’s taxonomy of educational objectives has been revised to address behaviors and learning opportunities enriched by new technologies (Churches, 2016). Examples of Bloom’s and Churches’s digital taxonomy and potential technologies to support desired learning outcomes are available at edorigami.wikispaces. com, and an infographic of the digital taxonomy verbs is downloadable at globaldigitalcitizen.org/blooms-digital-taxonomy-verbs.

Web 3.0 We can imagine what will happen as the web “gets smarter” and is able to assist in organizing, integrating, and evaluating the information it provides. This potential ability is currently referred to as the semantic web or Web 3.0 (World Wide Web Consortium, 2015). Internet experts believe that using the next generation of the web will feel similar to having a personal assistant—as one uses the web, the browser will learn their interests and preferences, and will become adept at offering specific information from a variety of sources to meet the user’s needs. It will personalize learning and provide richer and more significant information based on each individual user’s profile. The semantic web will have profound implications for nursing education. When a user searches the semantic web, it will provide that learner with more than a list

6. Integrating Technology in Education  ■ 97

of websites to explore for information; it will provide a multimedia report that integrates many sources including websites, scientific repositories, textbook chapters, blogs, speeches, videos, and more. Currently, faculty must spend classroom time teaching students to identify legitimate information, organize and synthesize it, and integrate it with information from multiple sources to produce new knowledge. This process is the essence of critical thinking; however, when technology does much of this work for students, they can concentrate their efforts on synthesizing information, creating new knowledge, and applying that knowledge to real-world situations. The shift to Web 3.0 in the near future will demand that teachers learn new skills.

Cloud Computing Advances in hardware, software, and networking have pushed academic institutions to seek out alternative sources of information technology (IT) services such as cloud computing. Although there are many definitions of cloud computing, the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) defines it as “a model for enabling ubiquitous, convenient, on-demand network access to a shared pool of configurable computing resources (e.g., networks, servers, storage, applications, and services) that can be rapidly provisioned and released with minimal management effort or service provider interaction” (Mell & Grance, 2011, p. 2). These evolving cloud-based services are purported to increase institutional flexibility and to reduce operating costs, thus offering attractive alternatives to traditional IT services on campus (Attaran et al., 2017). Institutions have benefited from moving email, LMS, and customer relationship management operations to the cloud. Examples of cloud-based services include Box, Dropbox, Flickr, Google Drive, OneDrive, and Skype. Although there are performance benefits and cost savings to be realized by migrating to the cloud, academic institutions face some challenges related to risk, trust, and control. The cloud computing space is an emerging paradigm with many promising opportunities, however, so developing a campus-wide cloud strategy will continue to be important for academic institutions (Attaran et al., 2017).

Simulation, Virtual Worlds, and Gaming The use of simulators as teaching tools in health professions education has grown rapidly; these mechanisms improve the quality and safety of healthcare in the same way that airline simulators have improved the safety of air travel. As with other teaching tools, simulation to improve patient safety requires a full integration of its applications into the routine structure of the curriculum. The best outcomes occur when simulation is integrated across the curriculum rather than added to an already overcrowded curriculum. Integrating simulation into the curriculum successfully begins with creating a roadmap that involves all faculty teaching across the curriculum. Simulation exercises should be embedded where they appropriately match learning objectives rather than presented as independent learning experiences. The process of mapping simulation to the curriculum allows educators to develop unfolding cases in which each successive simulation builds on preceding ones. As the curriculum

98  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

progresses, the learner is expected to demonstrate increased knowledge and competencies. Mapping simulation to the curriculum creates efficiencies and develops an evidence-based simulation curriculum that engages both students and faculty across the academic program or programs. The word “simulator” in nursing and health professions education generally refers to the widely used human patient simulator (HPS); however, use of the HPS is only one aspect of recreating a realistic clinical environment for teaching patient care skills without harming patients. Healthcare delivery is being changed by emerging information and communication technologies such as electronic health records (EHRs), health information exchanges, patient portals, telemedicine, social media, mobile devices, personal health records (PHRs), geographical positioning systems, and wearable sensors and monitors (Mamlin & Tierney, 2016). These technologies need to be reflected in education practices in order to prepare students with the health IT competencies needed for practice. The clinical simulation environment provides an excellent opportunity to integrate health IT competencies with the curriculum. Merging EHR technology with laboratory simulation provides students with virtual clinical experiences that closely represent increasingly automated practice environments (Mohan et al., 2017). Just as the HPS can be programmed to simulate patient care experiences, a simulated EHR can simulate patient data and clinical decision-making scenarios to accompany the virtual case studies enacted with the HPS. In other words, the simulated patients have their own EHR-like environments that include access to clinical data, which enables students to develop critical thinking skills and make data-driven decisions in a safe environment. VWs, such as Second Life© (secondlife.com), There (there.com), ActiveWorlds (activeworlds.com), and Twinity (twinity.com) add another dimension to simulation. VWs are part of Web 2.0 and the future Web 3.0. Hundreds of colleges and universities across the globe use Second Life© to provide supplemental learning experiences in health-related disciplines such as nursing, medicine, and allied health (Irwin & Coutts, 2015). In a VW, existing educational tools such as PowerPoint presentations, images, links to websites, course material, and 3D objects can be aggregated into a dynamic learning hub. VWs can provide a safe and controlled environment for nursing students to test their learning in new situations. After a concept has been taught, this highly useful platform reinforces the newly presented knowledge and applies it to a variety of scenarios. It has the ability to manipulate patient responses and scenarios, so it can allow for circumstances that students might otherwise never experience as students. The uses of VWs can be adapted to meet differing needs. Exhibit 6.2 displays some common applications for VWs. Game-based learning (GBL) is an innovation that is being used increasingly in schools of nursing, medicine, pharmacy, and other health disciplines. Playing serious games or applied games designed for education or learning purposes rather than for entertainment allows learners to practice and apply knowledge and skills in a safe environment. Serious games have been developed to enhance learning across multiple health disciplines; for example, a game developed to promote the safe administration of blood transfusions was found to improve the knowledge and confidence of nursing students during blood transfusion practice (Tan & Lee, 2017), and an escape room game was developed and evaluated on third-year pharmacy students (Eukel et al., 2017). Serious games have improved the knowledge of diabetes management in medical students (Diehl et al., 2015). These games, coupled with classroom and simulation laboratories, are another valuable tool to better equip

6. Integrating Technology in Education  ■ 99

EXHIBIT 6.2 Common Applications for Virtual Worlds Communication Scenarios. VWs are being used to teach specific communication skills and for working together as a team. For example, a health informatics class may meet virtually with different key individuals from a health facility to negotiate the terms and conditions for developing a database for the facility. Collaboration. Second Life© gives students a common place to interact regardless of their physical location. Staging an Exhibit. Students can present their final course projects in a virtual auditorium or exhibit hall created in Second Life© to display their projects to faculty and peers. Virtual Campuses. Many colleges and universities are building a virtual presence to focus on learning resources, student centers, and marketing efforts. Virtual Classrooms. Some nursing faculty are using the VW platform to deliver lectures embedded with PowerPoint, videos, links to websites and other virtual spaces, e-books and 3D models to create a dynamic learning hub. Virtual Centers. Several research laboratories and centers such as the Ames Research Center, the Jet Propulsion Lab, and NASA have partnered to create a virtual presence in Second Life© to provide a space to try out new ideas and host meetings and talks. Conference Facilities. Second Life© can be used to offer conferences, for example, to host seminars on health problems and treatments. Technical Training. Nurse anesthesia faculty have developed a VW operating room simulation to assist first-year students with learning the basic induction procedure. This activity builds confidence and emphasizes important safety techniques. Virtual Field Trip. These can provide experiences for learning to navigate VWs or as a final project. For example, a nursing student might visit the Virtual Ability Island to learn more about living with a disability or to address a problem area. Simulated Experiences. Simulated experiences provide occupational, physical therapy, and nursing students with a series of virtual home environments so they can develop skills in home assessment and in recommendation of modifications to the home. Research Studies. VWs are the subject of much academic research. Researchers are exploring how VWs can help students to practice and promote healthy behaviors such as activities involved in weight loss programs or managing posttraumatic stress disorders. VWs, virtual worlds.

future nursing and health professionals. Serious gaming in education is gaining support among researchers and educators who recognize that GBL engages students and stimulates critical inquiry. Examples of universities exploring GBL are in Table 6.1.

Clickers and Polling Audience response systems (ARS) are technological tools that utilize two-way communication to promote active learning in the classroom setting or online platform. They are referred to in the literature by a variety of names, including classroom response systems, personal response systems, electronic feedback systems,

100  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

TABLE 6.1  UNIVERSITY RESEARCH CENTERS EXPLORING GAME-BASED LEARNING Research Center

Website

The Education Arcade at Massachusetts Institute of Technology

www.educationarcade.org

Games + Learning + Society at University of Wisconsin-Madison

www.gameslearningsociety.org

Center for Game Science at University of Washington

http://centerforgamescience.org

American University Game Lab (Washington, DC)

https://www.american.edu/gamelab

Institute for Simulation & Training at University of Central Florida

www.ist.ucf.edu

Center for Transformational Media at Parsons The New School for Design

http://ctm.parsons.edu

Interactive Communications & Simulations at University of Michigan

https://icsmich.org

3-D Game Lab at Boise State University

http://edtech2.boisestate.edu/haskellc/ gamelab.html

Serious Games Center at Purdue University

https://www.education.purdue.edu/ research-and-engagement/centersand-institutes/serious-gaming-center

immediate response systems, and most commonly, clickers. As students input answers on a personal transmitter device, the software receives their responses and presents the data on screen for real-time use (Hunsu et al., 2016). Recent advances in web-based ARS allow students to use personal mobile devices or laptops instead of ­ personal transmitters. Examples of online ARS (online polls) include Poll Everywhere, TurningPoint, Kahoot!, and Socrative. Although ARS have been used in nursing education for some time, continued and more expansive use can promote active learning and critical thinking in a nursing curriculum tailored to the changing needs of students. The usefulness of ARS for student engagement and active learning has been demonstrated, and there is no evidence that ARS negatively impact student performance. Further research is needed to examine (a) how ARS directly impact cognitive learner outcomes, and (b) how learner characteristics, such as generational differences, impact ARS success in learner ­outcomes. Educators who are interested in enhancing student engagement in an innovative way should consider the integration of ARS to supplement future learning in the classroom or online.

Microlearning and Social Media Microlearning teaches a small learning unit in a step-by-step approach. Referred to as micro- or bite-sized content, micro-courses, or just-enough information,

6. Integrating Technology in Education  ■ 101

microlearning harnesses Web 2.0 technologies such as social media to engage students and to promote self-determined learning, also known as heutagogy (Blaschke et  al., 2014). The ubiquitous Web 2.0 has fueled interest in heutagogy, a learnercentric approach that enables students to access smaller, targeted, and manageable chunks of information available on the web at their convenience (Narayan et  al., 2019). Clinical studies targeting health professionals have reported the effectiveness of microlearning as (a) a mobile application for recording learning experiences in nursing practice (Becker et al., 2015); (b) a mobile gaming device that promotes nursing research knowledge, attitudes, and practice (Lane et  al., 2016); and (c) a streaming video system with point-of-view camera transmission of surgeries to student smartphones and tablets (Chaves et al., 2017). A recent scoping review on microlearning in health professions education reveals the variety of technology platforms and applications being utilized, including podcasts, short messaging service, microblogging, social networking service, and internet-based applications (De Gagne et al., 2019). Microlearning relies on having network connectivity and interactivity, but students do not necessarily have equal access to technology. Nurse educators must ensure adequate access and support before implementing microlearning and social media into their curriculum. Some subject areas may be too complicated for the use of microlearning strategies, and faculty and student privacy may be a concern when social media is adopted in the classroom. Microlearning is a relatively new educational paradigm that has potential for both educators and students. As learners assume the role of prosumers, their active engagement in classroom interactions, combined with Web 2.0 and mobile technology, will allow educators to provide more meaningful outcomes. A summary of the 17 studies reviewed on microlearning can be found at mededu.jmir.org/2019/2/e13997.

Mobile Devices Devices such as smartphones, tablets, iPads, e-book readers, and other pervasive emerging mobile technologies used in everyday personal and work life are ­making their way into the classroom. Many students, faculty, and staff members arrive on campus with one or more mobile devices and expect to use these ­personal devices to access the network and its resources. They expect institutions to provide r­ eliable wireless connectivity. This trend is known as the “Bring Your Own Device” (BYOD) or, more recently, the “Bring Your Own Everything” (BYOE) phenomena. The move to mobile computing on campus coincides with a push among e­ ducational publishers toward digital content such as electronic textbooks, multimedia-rich applications, online videos, and other online tools for faculty and students. Colleges and universities are struggling to meet these expectations and are finding that they must rethink their IT strategies in order to enhance learning. To successfully implement a campus-wide mobile computing initiative, there needs to be an institutional commitment to support these devices through the campus infrastructure as well as through pedagogical approaches in the classroom. Many institutions need to increase bandwidth, add access points and sufficient power, boost their network management capabilities, address security concerns, and hire or develop IT personnel who are familiar with a variety of mobile device operating systems. The meaningful use of mobile devices and applications in the curriculum gives users instant access to information and encourages student

102  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

engagement, participation, and collaboration while fostering a personal learning network. As nursing faculty members integrate technology into the curriculum more fully, learning outcomes may be substantially improved. A survey by the Pew Research Center explored learning and technology in the United States and found that 82% of individuals surveyed (a) had smartphones and home internet service, and (b) had engaged in a personal learning activity in the past year; these results indicate that technology assets are strongly related to the likelihood that adults will engage in personal learning (Horrigan, 2016). The rapid expansion of BYOD complements other trends in higher education such as virtualization and technology-enriched classrooms. Faculty buy-in and support for these trends is critical to their successful implementation. Inside Higher Ed’s Survey of Faculty Attitudes on Technology (2017) found that although 35% of faculty surveyed characterized themselves as early adopters of new education technologies, and 55 % said that they had tried to adopt new technologies after seeing an effective use by their colleagues, faculty remained skeptical about the value of technologies in their teaching. This survey also reported that only 25 % of faculty had worked with an instructional designer to develop or revise an online course. Greater assistance from instructional designers and more data and feedback on teaching may be an important strategy for preparing nurse educators.

Learning Analytics Learning analytics refers to the collection and analysis of data about learners to better understand and optimize learning (Society for Learning Analytics Research, 2020). The Horizon Report (Educause, 2020) indicated that learning analytics was associated with deciphering trends and patterns from educational large datasets (such as huge sets of student-related data) to further the advancement of a personalized, supportive system of higher education. Learning has traditionally been measured by student evaluation, analysis of grades, and attrition rates, as well as by faculty members’ perceptions of students. As more educational activities move online, an extraordinary amount of data about these learning activities is becoming captured and available. Recent interest in how this unique information can be used to improve teaching and learning has emerged as the field of learning analytics. Uses of student data were initially focused on at-risk students to improve outcomes; however, with advances in technology and its powerful tools, it is possible to use data to personalize learning and provide student-specific coaching to foster more productive learning habits and improved outcomes. By using data to examine how people learn and create learning systems, educators can support best practices. As the field of learning analytics develops over the next few years, nursing educators can use the data and tools to gain a better understanding of learning outcomes and assessment in higher education.

Open Educational Resources Open Educational Resources (OERs) are teaching and learning materials that faculty may use and reuse at no cost and without obtaining permission (Open Educational Resources Commons, 2020). The OER movement emerged in the late

6. Integrating Technology in Education  ■ 103

20th century, and the development and evolution of OERs is making a significant impact on higher education (Weisser, 2017). A universal concept of OER is that educational resources are freely available with open licensing for public use. Materials are available for adoption, adaption, and distribution within courses (Reed & Jahre, 2019). Although the cost of higher education continues to rise, OERs can decrease costs to students by eliminating the need to buy expensive textbooks and other required course materials (Vo & Sharp, 2019). OERs are technologybased resources that provide access to interactive tools to facilitate a learner-centered environment through student engagement (Verkuyl et  al., 2018); as such, their use in education has been multifaceted. One example involves nurse educators who worked with nursing students to create a digital OER textbook focused on measuring vital signs (Verkuyl et al., 2018). Faculty and students collaborated on this project to offer a learner-­centered approach to nursing students. The experience offered the students a unique perspective into socialization in nursing as well as a valuable learning opportunity (Verkuyl et al., 2018). Universities have recognized the benefits of using digital textbooks as a less expensive alternative to traditional textbooks. Librarians are knowledgeable resources for educators and can identify appropriate OER resources that could be incorporated into courses (Reed & Jahre, 2019). As with any new technology, there are drawbacks to using OERs. Many faculty members are not aware that this technology exists (Hilton, 2016), and lack of awareness contributes to inadequate maintenance. It is common to find outdated content on websites where materials have not been updated: animations may no longer run due to web-based software that had been discontinued, and links to sources cited may cease to exist (Faggioni et  al., 2019). These limitations require educators to scrutinize the materials in OERs carefully prior to incorporating information into curriculum to ensure that content is current and meets learning objectives. Free digital textbooks and websites such as BCcampus (open.bccampus.ca), OER Commons (www.oercommons.org), MERLOT (www. merlot.org), Khan Academy (www.khanacademy.org), OpenStax (openstax.org), UNESCO OERs (en.unesco.org/themes/building-knowledge-societies/oer), and MIT OpenCourseWare (ocw.mit.edu) are examples of OERs. As more resources are created, adopted, and adapted by educators, the use of OERs in courses will continue to expand.

RETHINKING THE EDUCATION PARADIGM Technology enhances active learning, accommodates a variety of learning preferences, and allows for communication, collaboration, and sharing among students. A technology-enhanced strategy should support and facilitate learning, including critical thinking, problem-solving, creativity, and innovation. A specific technology should be chosen not because it is available and exciting but because it corresponds with the learning pedagogy and goals of the nursing course or program. Pedagogical goals provide the framework for nurse educators to decide on the best technology for their courses. When a school of nursing decides to offer establishing the necessary infrastructure, resources, and support. Lack of attention to any of these requirements will result in foreseeable and preventable challenges (Inside Higher Ed, 2017).

104  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

Infrastructure Investment in infrastructure is essential to successfully integrate technology into teaching and learning. Schools must support their evolving technological demands. The infrastructure must be secure, available 24/7, able to handle a wide range of applications, and adaptable to new technologies. To accomplish these goals, campuses must develop and implement strategic technology plans that align with the institution’s mission and goals. These plans should not be static because new technologies are competing for infrastructure resources on an almost daily basis. The key to success is a commitment from institutional and nursing program leadership to support IT and to use technology to improve and maintain institutional performance.

Alignment with Institution and School of Nursing Mission and Goals Over the past decades, colleges and universities have made substantial investments in technological infrastructure such as course management systems, wireless networks, multimedia classrooms, and a wide array of technology tools to transform teaching and learning. There are many technologies available and ways to implement them, making it difficult for faculty members, including nurse educators, to keep pace and to evaluate whether the use of the technology is having an impact on learning outcomes. Questions about technology integration persist, even after more than half a century of research documenting the use of technologies ranging from television to mobile devices and their benefits for learning. Reviews of the literature reveal that studies of teaching and learning with technology have focused on the technology itself; however, technology alone does not transform education. In fact, a large body of research has demonstrated no significant difference in satisfaction and learning in webinar and control conditions (faceto-face and asynchronous online) (Ebner & Gegenfurtner, 2019). Because faculty members with diverse pedagogical approaches have so many technologies from which to choose and multiple ways to use them, institutions should determine on an enterprise level whether the introduction of technologies is having a positive impact on student learning outcomes. This approach to evaluation is also recommended for schools of nursing or nursing departments. An evaluation of the success of teaching and learning with technology requires an institutional approach to determine efficiency, effectiveness, sustainability, and quality. A systematic approach may not be appropriate for all technology but is ideal for examining the impact of technologies with broad applicability across the institution. A more individualized approach may be appropriate for specific technologies or for use in a specialized area of study such as nursing. For technology integration to transform education to its greatest potential, it cannot be used arbitrarily by a few educators only, but must be incorporated into the institution’s mission and goals. Unless the culture and structure of a school is compatible with and supportive of specific uses of technology, technology integration is not likely to succeed. When technology-enhanced education is part of the mission and goals of an institution, its effect becomes evident in all aspects of the school’s programs and fosters an innovative culture that transforms education. Innovation is frequently thought of as the introduction of a new idea, method, or device, but it can also be viewed as a transformation that improves productivity

6. Integrating Technology in Education  ■ 105

and quality. An innovative culture establishes innovation as a central theme in the organization’s vision and purpose. An institution that makes innovation an integral part of its framework not only embraces creative thinking, teaching, and learning beyond traditional processes, but also encourages and supports creativity through established practices such as hiring, coaching, mentoring, and rewarding faculty and staff.

Pedagogy Pedagogy is the study of the art and science of teaching and includes multiple theories of behavior based on observations and scientific studies of how individuals learn. The teacher-centered model of instruction, once considered standard, emphasizes the presentation of knowledge or skills that the teacher believes students need to learn. This pedagogical model posits teachers as active providers and students as passive recipients of knowledge. The emergence of pedagogical theories such as social constructivism has supported new paradigms for student-centered learning practices. These theories maintain that to best prepare 21st-century learners to live and work in an increasingly complex and interconnected global society, teachers must implement practices that involve interactive, problem-based, and technologyenriched teaching and learning. Constructivism is a theory founded on the premise that learners actively promote and create their own learning as they interact with others and with the environment. Students construct their understanding of the world through experiential learning and reflect on their past experiences to build new knowledge (Bruner, 1966). Bruner’s The Culture of Education (1996) expanded his theoretical framework to include the social and cultural aspects of learning. Today’s instructional technologies tend to promote constructivist principles of learning by creating learning environments that challenge students (a) to work collaboratively, and (b) to become actively engaged, self-directed, lifelong learners within and beyond formal learning spaces. A goal for nurse educators should be to use learning theory and best practice teaching strategies to guide technology integration and derive quality outcomes. Although technology has expanded the educational paradigm, the importance of good teaching has not changed; only the availability of new technologies to support good teaching has changed. Curriculum and pedagogy continue to undergo reassessment, as do teaching and learning strategies. For example, Chickering and Gamson’s Seven Principles for Good Practice in Undergraduate Education (1987) continues to be applicable in digitally enabled classrooms and web-based learning environments; Chickering and Ehrmann (1996) provided early evidence that technology integration encourages and supports each of the seven principles. Exhibit 6.3 displays the Seven Principles as applied to teaching and learning with technology.

Decision-Making Framework for Technology Selection Successful use of technology is closely related to the selection and utilization of appropriate tools. Educators who are examining the use of various tools to achieve desired learning outcomes must consider content, format, interface design, and completeness of application (Smaldino et al., 2018). The SECTIONS model is designed to provide educators with technology to integrate into their courses. SECTIONS

106  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

EXHIBIT 6.3 Seven Principles for Good Practice in Education Applied to Teaching with Technology 1. Encourages contact between student and faculty (before, during, and after class) 2. Develops reciprocity and cooperation among students (team-based learning in web-enabled collaboration rooms via web conferencing, Skype, Zoom, and social media outlets) 3. Uses active learning techniques (simulation, VWs, student applied demonstrations, and standardized patient interviews, all conducted in a virtual environment) 4. Gives prompt feedback (using LMSs for formative evaluations via quizzes that provide immediate feedback and multiple learning opportunities) 5. Emphasizes time on task (knowledge and comprehension tasks that are done as preparatory work to allow time on tasks to be directed to higher order learning, such as application and creation). 6. Communicates high expectations (knowledge acquisition occurs first in self-directed learning with high expectations for student–student and faculty–student interactions that are rich and engaging). 7. Respects diverse talent and ways of learning (teaching technology tools provide multiple modalities for the learner and allows rehearsal and repetition of content for all learning paces and learning preferences) LMS, learning management system; VWs, virtual worlds. Sources: Data from: Chickering, A. W., & Ehrmann, S. C. (1996). Implementing the seven principles: Technology as lever. AAHE Bulletin, pp. 3–6. http://www.tltgroup.org/programs/seven; Chickering, A. W., & Gamson, Z. F. (1987). Seven principles for good practice in undergraduate education. AAHE Bulletin, 39(7), 3–6.

is an acronym for Students, Ease of use, Cost, Teaching functions, Interaction, Organizational issues, Networking, and Security and privacy. It allows teachers to answer a series of questions systematically when choosing technologies for their teaching (Bates, 2019). The SECTIONS model can be used to select media for use in campus-based as well as distance education. More information can be found at opentextbc.ca/teachinginadigitalage/part/9-pedagogical-differences-between-media. Technology can provide expanded educational offerings to a broader range of the population, including individuals having less access to higher education or living with disabilities. As there is no single technology that suits all educational environments, experienced educators and skilled developers must plan carefully and choose instructional and delivery media components strategically. It is also critical to match the mechanisms of education technology with appropriate learning environments.

Classroom Redesign As technology and learning theories change, so do the designs of classrooms. The recent widespread adoption of technology and its tools, along with the availability of wireless access, has challenged nurse educators to change pedagogical approaches to learning, which in turn has brought about a revisioning of classroom space. As educational institutions and schools of nursing renovate existing learning space or construct new learning environments, a key impetus of space renovation or construction should be the need to accommodate new technologies and teaching strategies. Technology-enhanced education calls for a redesign of traditional learning spaces to accommodate new pedagogical approaches to learning.

6. Integrating Technology in Education  ■ 107

New learning spaces such as the active learning classroom are designed to facilitate a more active, student-centered pedagogy and take advantage of the room’s potential. Typically, students bring their own computers to class and use the building’s wireless capability to collaborate with peers in small groups to build new ideas and applications. The faculty member becomes a facilitator of learning by answering questions and making suggestions. Active learning classrooms are designed to facilitate hands-on activities and to require students to interact with each other to reach a solution to a problem. Students can display their work on large LCD screens set up around the room to promote small- and large-group discussions. A clear goal in the redesign of learning spaces is to promote a change in pedagogy; therefore, the nurse educator’s interest and motivation for making change in the curriculum and pedagogy through the use of technology must be taken into consideration during the redesign phase or the active learning classroom may not be successful. Figure 6.1 is a photograph of an active learning classroom. Although the literature on learning spaces suggests that design features have an impact on learning outcomes, there is little evidence-based research to support this assertion. Chiu and Cheng (2017) found that students attending classes in active learning classrooms had significantly positive perceptions of the space being creative or innovative, but was no statistically significant interaction was identified between their perception and their academic performance. Further research is needed to explore the connections between learning spaces, pedagogical approaches, and student learning outcomes. As active learning classroom environments become more common in nursing education, it will be possible to conduct longitudinal studies of the impact of offering multiple courses in new learning spaces on broad strategic outcomes such as student enrollment, retention, and failure rates.

FIGURE 6.1 Active learning classroom. Source: Reprinted by the permission of Duke University School of Nursing. (2020).

108  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

Flipping the Classroom A recent teaching revolution referred to as “flipping the classroom” is a good example of the use of technology and redesigned learning space to structure learning. Flipping the classroom is a pedagogical approach that entails using technology integration to provide students with knowledge and comprehension-based learning activities via the web, after which students attend class in either a face-to-face, blended, or virtual learning environment. Flipping the classroom involves swapping lecture time for active or applied classroom learning. This technique engages students in a more active learning process and allows for more focused learning to take place in the classroom (Honeycutt, 2019). Because content delivery is accomplished efficiently outside of class, valuable class time is freed for students to engage with the material during class with the benefit of the faculty member’s expertise. In a flipped classroom, students are expected to complete prelearning activities outside of class in order to prepare them to discuss, apply, and assimilate what they have learned. The classroom environment (traditional or virtual) is where they share and collaborate with their peers and work in teams to expand and reflect on their knowledge. The teacher guides and facilitates higher learning, remediating, and scaffolding (providing instructional support to promote learning when a new concept is introduced). Flipping the classroom requires flipping the minds of students and faculty. The concept of flipping the classroom is not new, but innovative ways of applying the concept using assistive technology are gaining attention. Flipping uses technology to replace passive learning formats such as lectures with active teacher–learner, student-centered engagement in the classroom. Flipping the classroom, however, does not guarantee student success. The nurse educator must embrace the concept and use effective teaching strategies to guide learning. Some examples of a flipped classroom model are included in Exhibit 6.4.

EXHIBIT 6.4 Examples of Flipping the Classroom 1. Students assume the teaching role via applied demonstrations of knowledge and assignments and make presentations during face-to-face or synchronous online web-conferencing sessions. The faculty member becomes the facilitator; the student becomes the educator. 2. Team-based learning approaches ensure students come to class prepared for learning include the use of individual quizzes with immediate feedback via an LMS assessment. In class, students are placed in teams, retake the quiz as a group, and discuss and collaborate to arrive at correct answers. 3. Case studies are embedded in the academic EHR and can be reviewed by students prior to class, then presented in class. Students can be placed in teams to navigate the EHR and problem-solve the case. 4. Educational games (e.g., Jeopardy, Who Wants to be a Millionaire, Family Feud, etc.) can be used to review content and create a collaborative and competitive learning atmosphere. Examples of nursing games can be found at https://www.merlot.org/merlot/viewMaterial .htm?id=1280129 5. Chat rooms can be used in large classrooms to solicit feedback after mini-lectures or group discussion, allowing all students to have a voice. 6. Role-playing scenarios, with preassigned roles, can be performed during class. 7. Individual students or teams can be assigned research in preparation for in-class debates on healthcare, healthcare reform, patient safety, or other topics.

6. Integrating Technology in Education  ■ 109

DEVELOPING FACULTY COMPETENCIES AND MENTORING Many faculty members feel overwhelmed by emerging technologies and challenged by the need to stay informed of ever-changing LMSs, Web 2.0 technologies, and various software applications for classroom and clinical teaching. The aim of faculty development should be to help faculty understand how desired learning outcomes can be achieved using innovative technology and to suggest effective strategies for reaching those outcomes. For example, in 2018, the American Association of Colleges of Nursing (AACN) launched a Digital Innovation Bootcamp to provide opportunities for nursing faculty to leverage the latest technologies to enhance teaching in classroom, laboratory, and clinical settings. The overall aim of this program was to educate and enable a cadre of well-informed nursing faculty to adapt real-world applications of technologies into their education practices. Faculty who applied for the program identified a project that they intended to implement at their respective institutions. The faculty scholars engaged in active learning strategies by discussing their projects within groups and receiving feedback from peers as well as mentors. This faculty development program successfully targeted learning to nurse educators’ specific needs, thus (a) ensuring intrinsic motivation and personal relevance, (b) using the skills of faculty experts and instructional designers to model pedagogies associated with new technologies, (c) providing sustained mentorship and peer support through the group-mentoring process, and (d) fostering collaborations among faculty and institutions which continued, for many participants, well after the faculty development program.

CHALLENGES AND OPPORTUNITIES Creating effective learning environments with technology poses ongoing challenges as technology and infrastructure requirements continue to evolve. When thinking about the next level of teaching with technology, academic leaders of nursing programs and nurse educators should reflect on how their students currently use technology and how increased use of social media, mobile applications, and emerging technologies might influence the classroom of the future. Nursing faculty need to stay abreast of current technology trends to ensure that well-educated graduates are prepared to be successful in a rapidly-changing technological world. According to the 2019 Campus Computing™ Project, the top four campus IT priorities for the next 2 years are: (a) IT data security (83%), (b) hiring/retaining IT talent (77%), (c) leveraging IT resources to support student success (73%), and (d) providing adequate faculty and student support (71%) (Green, 2019). Assisting nursing and other faculty in higher education with the instructional integration of IT continues to be a top priority.

SUMMARY The constant advances and rapid pace of change in technology create both challenges and opportunities in nursing education. The more nurse educators use technology, the more they are recognizing its positive effects on student learning and engagement, and its connection to 21st-century skills. Nurse educators need to be prepared to adopt existing technologies and to explore emerging technology tools.

110  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

Technology is helping teachers to expand beyond linear, text-based learning and to engage students who have a variety of learning preferences. Technology in nursing education has evolved from its role in contained “computer classes” to a wealth of versatile learning tools that are changing how faculty demonstrate concepts, guide students’ learning, assess progress, and increase access to nursing education. Nurse educators should not use technology in courses merely for the sake of innovation, but rather should integrate appropriate technology based on pedagogical approaches that support best practices and improve students’ ability to learn. This chapter explored technology integration and technology tools such as LMS, Web 2.0, Web 3.0, VWs, and gaming to support student achievement of learning outcomes. Classroom redesign, including flipping the classroom, was also discussed in this chapter. When a nursing program and its faculty decide to offer technologyenhanced courses or programs, a significant amount of attention should focus on the required infrastructure, resources, and support. Technology is a tool for enhancing pedagogy and quality in nursing education. Technology will continue to impact nursing education, and the extent of its impact will change as technology evolves over time. Exploring and embracing technology tools can only promote the goal of practicing good teaching.

REFERENCES Attaran, M., Attaran, S., & Celik, B. G. (2017). Promises and challenges of cloud computing in higher education: A practical guide for implementation. Journal of Higher Education Theory & Practice, 17(6), 20–38. Bates, A. W. (2019). Teaching in a digital age: Guidelines for designing teaching and learning (2nd ed.). https://pressbooks.bccampus.ca/teachinginadigitalagev2 Becker, M. B., Behrends, M., Barthel, C., Kupka, T., Schmeer, R., Meyenburg-Altwarg, I., & Marschollek, M. (2015). Developing a mobile application for recording learning experiences in nursing practice. Studies in Health Technology & Informatics, 210, 899–903. Blaschke, L. M., Kenyon, C., & Hase, S. (Eds.). (2014). Experiences in self-determined learning. CreateSpace Independent Publishing Platform. Bruner, J. (1966). Towards a theory of instruction. Harvard University Press. Bruner, J. (1996). The culture of education. Harvard University Press. Chaves, R. O., de Oliveira, P. A. V., Rocha, L. C., David, J. P. F., Ferreira, S. C., Santos, A. D. A. S. D., & Brito, M. V. H. (2017). An innovative streaming video system with a point-ofview head camera transmission of surgeries to smartphones and tablets: An educational utility. Surgical Innovation, 24(5), 462–470. https://doi.org/10.1177/1553350617715162 Chickering, A. W., & Ehrmann, S. C. (1996). Implementing the seven principles: Technology as lever. AAHE Bulletin, 49, pp. 3–6. http://www.tltgroup.org/programs/seven Chickering, A. W., & Gamson, Z. F. (1987). Seven principles for good practice in undergraduate education. AAHE Bulletin, 39(7), 3–6. Chiu, P. H. P., & Cheng, S. H. (2017). Effects of active learning classrooms on student learning: A two-year empirical investigation on student perceptions and academic performance. Higher Education Research & Development, 36(2), 269–279. https://doi.org/ 10.1080/07294360.2016.1196475 Churches, A. (2016). Bloom’s digital taxonomy. https://www.educatorstechnology.com/ 2016/11/an-awesome-infographic-on-blooms.html De Gagne, J. C., Park, H., Hall, K., Woodward, A., Yamane, S. S., & Kim, S-S. (2019). Microlearning in health professions education: Scoping review. JMIR Medical Education, 5(2), e13997. https://doi.org/10.2196/13997

6. Integrating Technology in Education  ■ 111

Diehl, L. A., Gordan, P. A., Esteves, R. Z., & Coelho, I. C. (2015). Effectiveness of a serious game for medical education on insulin therapy: A pilot study. Archives of Endocrinology & Metabolism, 59(5), 470–473. https://doi.org/10.1590/2359-3997000000118 Ebner, C., & Gegenfurtner, A. (2019). Learning and satisfaction in webinar, online, and face-to-face instruction: A meta-analysis. In Frontiers in education (Vol. 4, p. 92). Frontiers. https://doi.org/10.3389/feduc.2019.00092 Educause. (2020). 2020 horizon report: Teaching and learning edition. https://library.educause .edu/resources/2020/3/2020-educause-horizon-report-teaching-and-learning-edition Eukel, H. N., Fenzel, J. E., & Cernusca, D. (2017). Educational gaming for pharmacy students-design and evaluation of a diabetes-themed escape room. American Journal of Pharmaceutical Education, 87(7), 1–5. https://doi.org/10.5688/ajpe8176265 Faggioni, T., da Silva Ferreira, N. C., Lopes, R. M., Fidalgo-Neto, A. A., Cotta-de-Almeida, V., & Alves, L. A. (2019). Open educational resources in immunology education. Advances in Physiology Education, 43, 103–109. https://doi.org/10.1152/advan.00116.2018 Goyal, E., & Purohit, S. (2011, July). Using Moodle to enhance student satisfaction from ICT. In 2011 IEEE International Conference on Technology for Education (pp. 191–198). IEEE. Green, K. (2019). The 2019 campus computing™ survey. https://kenneth-green-pln7 .squarespace.com/content/2019/10/15/the-2019-campus-computing-survey Hilton, J. (2016). Open educational resources and college textbook choices: A review of research on efficacy and perceptions. Education Technology Research & Development, 64(4), 573–590. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11423-016-9434-9 Honeycutt, B. (2019). What are your students going to do today?: A collection of teaching strategies you can easily integrate into your lessons to engage students and improve learning (Kindle ed.). Barbi Honeycutt, Ph.D. & FLIP It Consulting, LLC. Horrigan, J. B. (2016). Lifelong learning and technology, Pew Research Center. http://www .pewinternet.org/2016/03/22/lifelong-learning-and-technology Hunsu, N. J., Adesope, O., & Bayly, D. J. (2016). A meta-analysis of the effects of audience response systems (clicker-based technologies) on cognition and affect. Computers & Education, 94, 102–119. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.compedu.2015.11.013 Inside Higher Ed. (2017). 2017 survey of faculty attitudes on technology. https://www .insidehighered.com/audio/2017/10/19/2017-survey-faculty-attitudes-technology Irwin, P., & Coutts, R. (2015). A systematic review of the experience of using Second Life in the education of undergraduate nurses. Journal of Nursing Education, 54(10), 572–577. https://doi.org/10.1097/01.NEP.0000000000000621 Lane, S. H., Serafica, R., Huffman, C., & Cuddy, A. (2016). Making research delicious: An evaluation of nurses’ knowledge, attitudes, and practice using the great American cookie experiment with mobile device gaming. Journal for Nurses in Professional Development, 32(5), 256–261. https://doi.org/10.1097/nnd.0000000000000292 Mamlin, B. W., & Tierney, W. M. (2016). The promise of information and communication technology in healthcare: Extracting value from the chaos. American Journal of the Medical Sciences, 351(1), 59–68. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.amjms.2015.10.015 Mell, P., & Grance, T. (2011). The NIST definition of cloud computing. The National Institute of Standards and Technology, United States Department of Commerce. Special Publication 800–145. National Institute of Standards and Technology. Mohan, V., Woodcock, D., McGrath, K., Scholl, G., Pranaat, R., Doberne, J. W., & Ash, J. S. (2017). Using simulations to improve electronic health record use, Clinician training and patient safety: Recommendations from a consensus conference. AMIA . . . Annual Symposium proceedings. AMIA Symposium, 2016, 904–913. Narayan, V., Herrington, J., & Cochrane, T. (2019). Design principles for heutagogical learning: Implementing student-determined learning with mobile and social media tools. Australasian Journal of Educational Technology, 35(3), 86–101. https://doi.org/ 10.14742/ajet.3941 Open Educational Resources Commons. (2020). Getting started with OER. https://www .oercommons.org

112  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

Reed, J. B., & Jahre, B. (2019). Reviewing the current state of library support for open educational resources. Collection Management, 44(2–4), 232–243. https://doi.org/ 10.1080/01462679.2019.1588181 Smaldino, S. E., Lowther, D. L., Mims, C., & Russell, J. D. (2018). Instructional technology and media for learning (12th ed.). Pearson. Society for Learning Analytics Research. (2020). What is learning analytics? https://www .solaresearch.org/about/what-is-learning-analytics Tan, A., & Lee, C. (2017). Designing and evaluating the effectiveness of a serious game for safe administration of blood transfusion: A randomized controlled trial. Nurse Education Today, 55, 38–44. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.nedt.2017.04.027 Verkuyl, M., Lapum, J., St-Amant, O., Tam, A., & Garcia, W. (2018). Engaging nursing students in the production of open educational resources, Nursing Education Today, 71, 75–77. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.nedt.2018.09.012. Vo, M. K., & Sharp, J. C. (2019). Design, development, and content creation for an open education physics website for MRT education. Journal of Medical Imaging & Radiation Sciences, 50(2), 212–219. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jmir.2019.03.180 Weisser, R. (2017). The origins and development of open educational resources. https:// apasseducation.com/wp-content/uploads/2017/06/The_Origins_and_Development_ of_Open_Educational_Resources-1.pdf World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). (2015). Semantic web. https://www.w3.org/ standards/semanticweb

7 Teaching in Online Learning Environments Jennie C. De Gagne

OBJECTIVES 1. Describe the roles and responsibilities of educators as facilitators in the online learning environment. 2. Examine instructional technologies and resources that can help nurse educators to select and incorporate new strategies into their online teaching. 3. Evaluate the process of reconceptualizing in order to design and evaluate online courses and modules.

INTRODUCTION Teaching online is not the same as teaching in a classroom. The original purpose of the web was to communicate and share information, so its use as a teaching tool is a natural progression of its original purpose. Web-based, or online education uses the web to impart and attain knowledge. When effectively used, the web can reduce time and space barriers to learning and can reach individuals who lack access to traditional systems due to geographical distance or personal and professional obstacles. Online education continues to grow in popularity and to evolve at a rapid pace because it offers solutions to a wide range of challenges affecting students. Many higher education institutions and nursing schools now offer hybrid or all-online courses and programs. This chapter focuses on differences between online and traditional classroom teaching related to the facilitator and student role, course content, teaching strategies, reconceptualization and design of online learning environments, online interaction, technology use in online teaching, and methods of evaluating online courses and programs.

DEFINITIONS Instructors considering online teaching may encounter several unfamiliar terms needing definition or clarification. Distance learning refers to a learning environment in which the teacher and student are separated by time and geography, and

114  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

the pedagogical material is planned and delivered through a third-party platform (Kaplan & Haenlein, 2016). Distance learning is not new; it has been used in some fashion for at least 300 years (Kentnor, 2015). Correspondence courses delivered by mail for independent study were an early example of distance learning. Since its inception, correspondence education has gained popularity and fostered numerous innovations such as electronic learning (e-learning). E-learning refers to a combination of content and instructional methods delivered via words, sound, and video on a computer or mobile device (Clark & Mayer, 2016). Online learning (also called webbased learning) takes place over the internet, or web. When online and face-to-face learning are combined, the process is called hybrid or blended learning. Content material can be presented in a variety of media including text, images, audio, video, films, links to websites (hyperlinks), charts, graphs, statistics data, and virtual case studies. Online interaction can take place in three ways: (a) between the instructor and students, (b) between students, and (c) between students and content. Interaction can be synchronous (taking place in real time or at a scheduled time) or asynchronous (offered at a delayed time or at a time of the student’s choosing). Allowing students to complete their work at their own pace, asynchronous interaction entails leaving messages at a specific posting site; others in the learning environment can read, view, and respond to these messages at their convenience. By contrast, synchronous interaction requires students to participate in learning activities at a predetermined time.

ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF ONLINE LEARNING Use of the internet allows access to resources and links on the World Wide Web. An advantage of online learning is that students can access course materials and activities 24 hours a day and 7 days a week, from any place where the internet is available. Online learning is student centered and provides opportunities for highquality dialogue; however, it is important to consider that online learners must be computer literate, their hardware and software must be compatible with the online learning system being used, and the system may experience failures that prevent it from functioning properly (Table 7.1).

PREVALENCE OF ONLINE COURSES Enrollment in online courses and online degree programs has been increasing yearly. The 2017 Distance Education Enrollment Report (Allen & Seaman, 2017) showed that the number of students taking at least one distance education course had increased 3.9% over the previous year and had grown by 11.0% over TABLE 7.1  ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF ONLINE LEARNING Advantages ■ ■ ■

■

Time barrier is reduced Space barriers are reduced Learning takes place at any time and at any location having internet access Learning is flexible

Disadvantages ■

■

■

Computer literacy is required, including word-processing and file management Students need to be motivated and self-disciplined Students may have limited face-to-face time with peers and the instructor

7. Teaching in Online Learning Environments  ■ 115

3 years since 2012. Additionally, more than 6 million students had taken at least one online course during the fall 2015 term. Other key findings included: ■

■

■

While public institutions continued to educate the largest proportion of students (67.8%), new enrollment in private nonprofit institutions had passed the private for-profit sector for the first time. The pattern of change over time of students enrolled exclusively in distance education differed between for-profit institutions and public or private nonprofit institutions: enrollment decreased at for-profit institutions but increased at public and private nonprofit institutions for each time period examined. Despite the increase in the proportion of institutions that considered online education as critical for their long-term strategy, the lack of faulty acceptance of the value and legitimacy of online education showed no change (Allen & Seaman, 2017).

Online courses and programs are widely offered by colleges and universities as part of their curriculum. There are fully online universities such as Penn State Online (www.worldcampus.psu.edu); virtual universities such as the California Virtual Campus (cvc.edu); and online professional organizations and journals such as EDUCAUSE® (www.educause.edu), The Online Learning Consortium (OLC; onlinelearningconsortium.org), and MERLOT (www.merlot.org). Faculty can learn best practices in teaching online through courses, certificates, and programs offered through these organizations and others. Massive Open Online Courses (MOOCs) are bringing another layer of complexity to online education: internet access, Web 2.0 technologies, open-access (­unrestricted access to scholarly publications), and cloud-based services have introduced substantial innovations in higher education over the past decade. MOOCs originally took the form of noncredit web courses developed by experts in a specific field that could be accessed for free by people from all over the world. Some MOOCs, however, have a fee and can be taken for credit, certification, and micro-credentials or badges. Most MOOCs typically have massive enrollments and have evolved at an unprecedented pace, placing them at the center of a national discussion the future of higher education. MOOCs have allowed millions of learners from all over the world to access teaching by top professors at elite universities. They are offered by more than 900 universities around the world and have served more than 100 million students (ICEF Monitor, 2019). Courses can be found at Coursera® (www.coursera.org), edX (www.edx.org), Khan Academy (www.khanacademy.org), and Udemy (www. udemy.com) websites, among others. A recent online learning report card conducted by the Babson Survey Research Group, however, showed only a small segment of higher education institutions experimenting with MOOCs while most institutions studied were against a MOOC or remained undecided (Allen & Seaman, 2017). The impact of MOOCs on teaching and learning remains unclear and debatable in many universities and colleges.

SUCCESSFUL ONLINE COURSES The American Association for Higher Education (AAHE) created the Principles of Good Practice in Undergraduate Education for teaching in the classroom in 1987. Chickering and Ehrmann (1996) used the AAHE principles to develop a new set

116  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

of principles for incorporating technology into teaching. Their principles for good online teaching practice are listed in Exhibit 7.1. The following are examples: 1. Good practice encourages contact between students and faculty. Teachers can contact students before the course starts with a text or video greeting sent by email to each student in order to begin the course with a warm welcome. Teachers as facilitators conference with students via media chat or Skype and by asynchronous communication in a discussion board. Having a question-and-answer forum allows for student interaction with faculty and fellow students. 2. Good practice develops reciprocity and cooperation among students. Students interact with one another via postings on the discussion board. Students who enter a course are directed to a forum to introduce themselves. They are assigned to small group rooms where they can complete assignments in discussion groups and have asynchronous or synchronous discussions with their teacher and peers. 3. Good practice uses active learning techniques. Teachers must keep students actively involved in their learning through the use of active teaching strategies. Strategies that can be used online include discussions, debates, concept maps, case studies, and group work using a collaborative learning tool such as Wikis. Using these strategies, the instructor can assist students in developing ideas and learning how to link theory and practice. 4. Good practice gives prompt feedback. Timely, meaningful, and detailed feedback is an important element of effective online teaching. Feedback provides students with specific information about their progress and success in the course. The teacher develops a schedule for feedback, communicates it to the students, and follows it. Feedback should be clear and standardized, and this can be accomplished by using rubrics. Quizzes or educational games can help students identify how well they are mastering the content and expected learning objectives. 5. Good practice emphasizes time on task. Taking a course online does not necessarily mean more or less work. Coursework in an online class should be comparable to that assigned in a traditional class: an estimated minimum of 3 hours per week for a traditional 14-week course, or 6 hours per week for a 7-week course (i.e., 42 hours per credit). In a three-credit course, therefore, students should spend a minimum of 9 hours weekly on coursework. Sharing this rule with students should help them to plan and organize their coursework load. 6. Good practice communicates high expectations. At the beginning of the course, teachers should provide students with a list of rules and policies for online learning.

EXHIBIT 7.1 Principles of Good Practice in Online Teaching 1. Good practice encourages contact between students and teachers. 2. Good practice develops reciprocity and cooperation among students. 3. Good practice uses active learning techniques. 4. Good practice gives prompt feedback. 5. Good practice emphasizes time on task. 6. Good practice communicates high expectations. 7. Good practice respects diverse talents and ways of learning. Source: Chickering, A. W., and Ehrmann, S. C. (1996). Implementing the seven principles: Technology as lever. AAHE Bulletin, pp. 3–6. http://www.tltgroup.org/programs/seven

7. Teaching in Online Learning Environments  ■ 117

This information is usually found in the course syllabus. For courses with faceto-face and online sections, and for which the syllabus cannot be changed, the teacher should create a manual for the online section of the course that includes its policies. For example, the manual might include (a) a definition and description of the items on menus or tools, (b) netiquette, (c) the day of the week that the modules start, and (d) expectations for the student and teacher. Expectations for participation and posts should be clearly delineated, and students should be held accountable for following the policies. If they are not followed, the student should obtain feedback detailing expected changes in behavior. 7. Good practice respects diverse talents and ways of learning. Teachers should include design strategies to engage all students in their course by (a) using broad and open-ended questions to encourage critical thinking and open feedback; (b) basing evaluations on a variety of assignment formats such as a papers, videos, or presentations; and designing group assignments with multiple components so that students can choose to complete components suited to their individual learning style.

SUCCESSFUL ONLINE STUDENTS There are many assessment tools (e.g., online.missouri.edu/assessment-quiz/ assessment.aspx) available online to guide students in deciding if online learning is a good option given their schedule, learning preferences, degree of self-motivation, and experience with technologies. Results of self-assessment should indicate if online education will be helpful for a student and whether changes in schedule and study habits may be needed for success. Another resource is YouTube, which has videos available to help students decide whether online courses are appropriate for them, considering their learning preferences and circumstances. The Illinois Online Network (ION) identified strategies for successful online learning aimed at students (ION, 2020b). These are described in Exhibit 7.2.

EXHIBIT 7.2 Strategies for Students’ Success When Learning Online 1. Online students should be open minded about sharing life, work, and educational experiences as part of the learning process. 2. Online students should be able to communicate through writing. 3. Online students should be self-motivated and self-disciplined. 4. Online students should be willing to “speak up” if problems arise. 5. Online students should be willing and able to commit to 4–15 hours per week per course. 6. Online students should be able to meet the requirements for the program. 7. Online students should accept critical thinking and decision-making as part of the learning process. 8. Online students should have practically unlimited access to a computer and internet service. 9. Online students should be able to think ideas through before responding. 10. Online students should feel that high-quality learning can take place without going to a traditional classroom. Source: Illinois Online Network. (2020b). Pedagogy and learning: What makes a successful online student? University of Illinois website: https://www.uis.edu/ion/resources/tutorials/pedagogy/successful-online-student

118  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

Personal circumstances often play a role in the decision to learn online. Compared with traditional students who generally enroll in higher education directly after high school, online students typically work full time and have families. They must plan a learning environment compatible with their domestic and work responsibilities. Online learners should be ready, however, to commit some time each day to their online coursework and additional study offline. It is important for students to keep track of assignments and complete them on time. Knowing how to access journal databases for articles and how to distinguish academically credible websites are important skills for success in learning. Students should understand that their participation and contributions online are vital to the learning success of their peers. For students to learn collaboratively, the group must create a supportive environment. Comments, personal anecdotes, and information should be communicated respectfully to create a motivational sense of group belonging; this is important because emotional support plays a major role in distance learning by undermining the isolation of online education. Students should understand that although they may not be visible to one another, they must be sensitive to their peers’ feelings whenever sending emails, chatting, or making comments about assignments to avoid alienating their peers or instructor. The more the group strives to establish an effective learning environment, the more comfortable, secure, and supportive its members will become.

SUCCESSFUL ONLINE FACILITATORS The ION describes the teacher in an online course as an educator who facilitates student learning (ION, 2020a). Educators must consider how their interactions with students affect their teaching process and student learning. It is critical for the teacher to gain knowledge of effective online teaching strategies. The teacher must understand the nature and philosophy of online pedagogy and be able to organize instructional resources suitable to students’ learning needs. Unlike traditional education, online learning casts the teacher in the role of resource person rather than as a dispenser of knowledge. This role requires a unique set of characteristics, including the need for: ■ ■ ■ ■

■

■

a broad base of life experiences in addition to appropriate credentials, an online presence characterized by “openness, concern, flexibility, and sincerity,” clear written communications, advocacy of online, facilitated learning as a method equal to the traditional model, an ability to guide students in the critical thinking process so they can relate knowledge to real world experiences, and an expertise in the subject matter as well as in online teaching.

Table 7.2 summarizes the characteristics of successful online students and teachers.

Effective Facilitation of Online Forum Facilitation of discussion can be an art: where to add input, what input to add, and how to direct the discussion are decisions that facilitators approach in

7. Teaching in Online Learning Environments  ■ 119

TABLE 7.2  CHARACTERISTICS OF SUCCESSFUL ONLINE STUDENTS AND FACULTY Characteristics of Successful Online Students ■ ■

■ ■

■

■

■ ■

Is open-minded Feels comfortable expressing ideas and thoughts in writing Is self-motivated and self-disciplined Is willing to “speak up” if problems arise Commits to minimum online requirements Accepts critical thinking and decision-making Has access to the necessary technology Accepts the value of online learning

Characteristics of Successful Online Faculty ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

■

■

Is a facilitator of learning Communicates clearly in writing Has a broad knowledge base Has appropriate credentials Has an area of clinical expertise (in a practice-related course) Is experienced and well-trained in teaching online Values online, facilitated learning as equal to the traditional model

different ways. Some approaches will work better than others, and facilitators may often need to refine their practices over time. Good facilitation posts should identify a relevant idea or question from a participant and add ideas or perspectives to help “flesh out” the topic and examine it more critically. Including follow-up questions at the end of a facilitation post is helpful for stimulating additional discussion. Online teachers should actively interact with their students in the discussion and consistently guide them toward learning objectives. They facilitate discussion by highlighting and building upon ideas from the week’s topics and learning objectives. As facilitators and guides, teachers can encourage students to consider readings more critically, delve into topics they have not explored, and consult sources they may have overlooked. They can ask follow-up questions that entice critical thinking. The following A-B-C approach is a tool to facilitate effective online discussions: ■ ■

■

Acknowledge the student’s input Build on the input by adding relevant thoughts and integrating the text and/or alternate perspectives Conclude the message with a pointed follow-up question to move the discussion forward

When facilitating online discussions, it is important for a teacher to create a warm tone yet maintain a professional approach, thus “leading by example.” By exerting a careful and positive attitude in their writing, teachers not only set the tone for students, but they also improve their own practice. Student interactions on the discussion forum create a record of participation and engagement. Although learning outcomes for the course dictate whether online discussions are graded, students need timely and constructive evaluation of their work. If students’ online discussion posts are graded, the teacher should offer constructive critiques and suggestions for improvement. Using a predesigned rubric allows the teacher to clarify how student work will be assessed and graded. The use of a rubric is especially helpful to teaching assistants employed for large

120  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

online courses. Examples of online discussion rubrics can be found at topr.online. ucf.edu/discussion-rubrics.

Cybercivility and Cyberincivility Evidence has shown that the online environment is vulnerable to incivility (De Gagne et al., 2016, 2018). Defined as the disrespectful, insensitive, or disruptive behavior of a user in cyberspace, cyberincivility is a pervasive issue that negatively affects personal, professional, and social well-being, as well as learning outcomes (De Gagne et al., 2016). This phenomenon is evident in email, texts, instant messages, and on social networking sites as well as online discussion boards (De Gagne et al., 2016, 2018). When interacting in the online learning environment, all participants are expected to be as civil as they would be in a face-to-face classroom setting, so the role of online facilitators as gatekeepers is essential to creating and maintaining a safe learning environment. If a student’s tone seems to be uncivil in an online discussion, the teacher should send a private email as soon as possible. In the message, the teacher should acknowledge the student’s experience of frustration in the online discussion while explaining that the code of conduct must be observed to ensure that every member of the learning community feels respected and valued. Students who fear becoming the target of negative attention or do not feel safe online may participate less, lose interest, or even withdraw from the course. Teachers and students must feel comfortable enough to identify problems, talk about their feelings, and brainstorm and implement potential solutions. Solutions for maintaining civility that have been suggested by students tend to be better accepted and to have more positive outcomes. A key factor of successful online teaching is the effective utilization of communication technology to build trusting classroom relationships. When used appropriately, students and teachers can create a constructivist environment in which educational opportunities are facilitated and enhanced.

LEARNING THEORY The pedagogy associated with online learning is social learning theory related to constructivism. Constructivism allows for the construction of meaning by using a process of action and reflection in which new knowledge is built on past experiences, allowing learning to be authentic and representative of real life. This type of learning is both active and interactive: the active component is enhanced with technology, and the interactive component is enhanced by the use of discussion boards and videoconferencing. Figure 7.1 provides a model of the stages and process of creating an online learning environment in which learning theory and technology are components.

Technology in Online Learning Technology supports learning through active strategies, such as simulations and virtual case studies, so students can encounter real world problems in a safe and supportive environment (O’Neil et al., 2019). Content is delivered to students through course management systems such as Blackboard® (2020) and Moodle™ (2020), among others. A course management system has management capabilities

7. Teaching in Online Learning Environments  ■ 121

• Identify goals of learning experience • Choose an organizing theory • Identify technology congruous with theory • Identify appropriate teaching strategies

• Precourse assessment skills and readiness • Feedback during course • Course design rubric and standards • Grading rubric • Student and course evaluations

Theory and Technology

Reconceptualize and Design

Assessment and Evaluation

Teach and Manage Learning

• • • • •

Consider target population Consider purpose Consider organization Consider layout Consider interaction

• Clarify comments, directions, and ideas • Use questioning • Establish presence

FIGURE 7.1 Stages and process of creating an online learning environment.

to monitor student enrollment, analyze skill gaps, and track student progress over time. In addition, it has a set of tools that can be used to create and manage the course, including discussion boards, announcements, quizzes and tests, videoconferencing, and learning modules. An online learning environment needs a set of specific components such as (a) places for the syllabus and course content, (b) the ability to submit and retrieve assignments, and (c) the ability to share ideas about the content in synchronous or asynchronous ways. These are organized to form a course learning platform. One example of a course management system is Blackboard (2020), which has an assortment of software within its package from which the school or teacher can choose. Because the software is within the package, Blackboard is called a closedsource system. Some of the features of Blackboard include tools for course management, assessment and grading, collaboration, and student engagement. Moodle (2020) is another example of a course management system; Moodle can be accessed online for free. It is modular, allowing the faculty member to add to and modify the software. When using Moodle, the teacher may need assistance with instructional design and technology. Moodle has an open advocacy forum where its comparisons with other learning management systems are available to assist the instructor in making a decision about which course management system to use. There are many other course management systems (e.g., Canvas, Desire2Learn, and Sakai) that can be used in nursing education programs.

TECHNOLOGY REPORTS There have been two important reports on the use of technology in teaching. The first is the Campus Computing Survey, which is conducted annually. This survey and others are part of the Campus Computing Project™, a continuing study of the role

122  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

of information technology in American higher education (www.campuscomputing. net). The second is the Horizon Report, an annual report about emerging technologies most likely to have an impact on teaching (Educause, 2020). The 2020 Horizon Report explored the following six areas of technologies: (a) adaptive learning (i.e., applying learning analytics through software and online platforms while adjusting to individual students’ needs), (b) machine learning (i.e., giving computers the ability to learn without being explicitly programmed, such as Duolingo’s language lessons), (c) learning analytics (i.e., gathering and analyzing details of individual student interactions), (d) use of instructional designers’ expertise for user experience (UX) design, (e) institutional adoption of open educational resources (OERs), and extended reality (XR), which blends physical with virtual or fully immersive virtual experiences (Educause, 2020). The 2020 Horizon Report suggests that (a) online education will continue to grow as a scalable means of meeting nontraditional student learning needs, and (b) faculty must be prepared to teach online (Educause, 2020).

OVERVIEW OF ACCESSIBLE TECHNOLOGY Online learning technology should actively involve students in the learning process. When determining whether to adopt certain instructional technologies, faculty need to weigh the benefits and risks while keeping in mind that not all students have similar technological preferences. Technologies have the potential to improve learning and teaching, but they depend on implementation of appropriate pedagogy and instructional design. Among the tools that enhance active learning in the online learning environment are blogs, wikis, podcasts, and videocasts. A weblog or digital blog is an online journal that can be accessed by students. Blogs can be public or private. Entries are saved in reverse chronological order, and students can view their peers’ entries. Interaction can be enhanced by using the blog for case study discussions or answering discussion questions. When video content is involved, a weblog becomes a vlog, a form of web television. Examples of weblog platforms are WordPress (wordpress.com), Blogger (www.blogger.com), and Edublog (edublogs.org). Unlike a blog, which allows an individual voice, a wiki overwrites individuality. A wiki is a space on the web that allows individuals to share and collaborate as they collect and expand on ideas. New ideas are added, and old ideas are saved. In a study of technology-enhanced teaching methods, Vogt and Schaffner (2016) evaluated learning and satisfaction of nursing students assigned to a blogging group, wiki group, or webinar group. Although students’ comments were positive for use of the wiki, their individual assignment grades and final course grades did not demonstrate significant differences in knowledge acquisition and learning outcomes. The authors concluded that although these technologies were useful for enhancing active and collaborative learning online, faculty needed to evaluate workload demands, time needed to learn and use the technology, and required technical support. Podcasting refers to the process of capturing audio sounds and posting their digital files on a website; the term is derived by combining the words iPod and broadcasting. Vodcasting also delivers or displays content, but it does so in video rather than audio format. Podcasting and videocasting are most frequently used by faculty members to record and publish lectures that students may view repeatedly at their convenience.

7. Teaching in Online Learning Environments  ■ 123

Disseminating lectures through podcasting or vodcasting can be an effective instructional option, especially for independent and highly motivated students. Communication enhanced by technology is a primary component of online courses. Interaction between teachers and students can be enhanced with email, online office hours via videoconferencing, and question-and-answer forums on the discussion board; student-to-student interaction can be facilitated with blogs and wikis; and student-to-content interaction can be enhanced with podcasting and videocasting.

HOW TO CREATE ONLINE LEARNING ENVIRONMENTS Teachers must follow specific steps in order to transform a traditional classroom course into an online course. Classroom material cannot simply be placed online; the course must be reconceptualized so that its content is compatible with a different learning environment.

Reconceptualization To reconceptualize means that content is reviewed in accordance with the goals of the institution, available technology, and expertise of the faculty and students. The end products of a reconceptualization process are decisions about how the course and modules (or units) will be organized and how its content will be presented. The projected reach of the course is a primary factor to be considered. Geographical spread can be addressed by placing content online. For example, a statewide program can easily serve students who live at a great distance from the school through online offerings. Another consideration is the length of time that information can be offered. Online access permits long-term access to information. A statewide program repeated throughout the year, for example, would be best provided online. Many schools of nursing offer large classroom courses with 100 or more students. Online courses typically have fewer students enrolled than large lecturetype courses (Burch, 2019) and are most successful with a small number of students enrolled. Administrators must decide whether online learning environments fit into the mission and vision of the school and can be supported by institutional resources. Nursing faculty considering online courses should assess the school’s resources and support. Important resources might include a course management system such as Blackboard, technical support, instructional designers, faculty who are technologically competent, and the school’s ability to successfully market online courses and programs. It is important for nursing faculty to ensure the availability of resources before developing online courses. A second factor to consider when reconceptualizing a course is the availability of technology. Teachers must determine what hardware and software are available and how an online course will be maintained. Appropriate technology and support are essential for successful online teaching. The effective use of technology in academia involves considerable investments in hardware, software, infrastructure, and support services; therefore, researchers and educators should be prepared to justify the efficacy and cost-effectiveness of these investments. The third factor to consider is whether faculty members need to learn how to teach online. Preparing educators to become online facilitators is essential for the

124  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

creation of successful online learning communities. Faculty should be mentored and provided with the instruction they need to become successful. They should understand online pedagogy, online course management, student and course evaluation, and the ethical and legal issues surrounding online education. One method of faculty development is to place materials and learning activities online to provide a faculty orientation comparable to the orientation provided for students. As part of faculty development, teachers should be trained in teaching methods such as PowerPoint with voiceover narration, video clips, and various forms of online group work. Faculty should be given an opportunity to (a) discuss potential advantages and disadvantages of incorporating online components in their courses, (b) participate in synchronous and asynchronous learning activities, and (c) practice assessing and grading assignments in an online environment. For ongoing development, faculty members who are teaching online can meet regularly to discuss issues and explore alternate approaches to current practices. A final consideration is whether students (a) have the hardware and software essential for online learning, and (b) have the support needed to take a course online. Students should receive guidance to determine if an online course is best for them, as well as an orientation to online learning and support services. Ongoing technical support for students is necessary, but it is particularly important during the first week of class. Librarians should be accessible for students needing additional resources to complete their assignments. Online tutoring for certain subjects, such as writing and statistics, should be made available for all online students. Exhibit 7.3 provides the ABCs of successful online learning. Reconceptualizing means making decisions about the type and structure of the course as well as about the models that connect the course and modules. EXHIBIT 7.3 The ABCs of Successful Online Learning

A: Avoid self-doubt. Negative thoughts and feelings such as, “I don’t belong here,” “I am too old to learn new technology,” or “I will never succeed,” increase anxiety and fear of failure. Self-doubt interferes with motivation, confidence in learning, positive morale, and the learning progress. Think positively. B: Be self-disciplined. The flexibility and convenience of online learning comes with responsibilities. Set a plan for work time and rigorously follow it. Self-discipline is needed to access your course regularly and invest in offline reading and writing. C: Communicate effectively. Replacing face-to-face encounters with distance learning methods can lead to misinterpretation without effective e-communication skills. Communicate competently in writing and be vigilant of tone to avoid creating misunderstanding or distrust. D: Develop time management skills. Procrastination hinders productivity. Manage time skillfully by prioritizing tasks to avoid distraction and by making surroundings conducive to good work habits. E: Engage in the learning process. Engagement is the heart of online learning. Fully participate and contribute to ensure success in any online course. F: Find practical support. Seek out needed assistance and support from all available sources, including designated academic counselors, advisors, technical concierges, peers, colleagues, and family members. Find support from experienced peers with online learning if possible.

7. Teaching in Online Learning Environments  ■ 125

Reconceptualizing results in a course that the learner finds organized and logical because the objectives, content, interaction, and assessments work well together. Once reconceptualizing has been accomplished, further decisions must be made related to course organization. The course design must be compatible with the teacher’s skills and the learners’ needs (O’Neil et al., 2019).

How to Design Online Courses and Modules Design refers to the teacher’s development of the course and its components to achieve its objectives or outcomes. The components of an online course are: (a) target population, (b) purpose and objectives, (c) course organization, (d) navigation, (e) page layout, and (f) interaction (O’Neil et al., 2019). The target population is the learner. The teacher should assess students’ knowledge of the topic and learning preferences, and consider multiple strategies when designing a module. Students may differ in age and interests, computer experience, socioeconomic status, motivation, and other characteristics. The teacher should plan to use appropriate technology to meet student needs as comprehensively as possible. The purpose and objectives of the course must be considered in the design. For example, a didactic learning environment would be designed differently than a seminar course, and a skills workshop might require a laboratory experience to be arranged differently from a traditional classroom experience. Clinical components of a course may need to be organized differently than traditional laboratory experiments. The organization of the course is its flow. Students must be able to move from one section of the online course to another with ease, and should be able to locate needed material with no more than three clicks of the mouse. Each module should appear similar in structure so students can locate information easily in successive modules. Page layout should be designed with clean, crisp lines. Font size should be based on the needs of the target population. Headers that divide material should use fonts and colors that differ from those used for general content. The teacher should choose colors that facilitate reading and are pleasing to look at. The Big 4 (CRAP), a principle well known to graphic designers, can be usefully applied to create an appealing layout. CRAP stands for Contrast, Repetition, Alignment, and Proximity (Williams, 2014). More information about the use of the CRAP principle in online learning can be found at elearningindustry.com/using-crap-web-design-for-elearning. Online interactions can be designed to be either asynchronous or synchronous. The purpose of asynchronous interaction strategies such as the discussion board, blogs, and wikis is to share ideas and provide feedback, either in open or closed discussions, for individual students or groups. Synchronous interaction such as videoconferencing can be used for office hours, student conferences, student group or individual projects, and seminars. As this type of interaction is live, the date and time needs to be scheduled so students can attend. There should be a purpose for face-to-face communication and an agenda for each session. Synchronous interaction can be used for sharing, teaching, or evaluation. Good practice can make videoconferencing efficient and engaging, and a general guide should be provided to participants and discussed. Best practices for hosts and participants in a live lecture or videoconferencing is illustrated in Exhibit 7.4.

126  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

EXHIBIT 7.4 Live Lecture or Video Conferencing Etiquette Best Practices for All Participants ■

■ ■

Sit facing a light source so you do not appear back-lit; a lamp or window behind your monitor will work well. Make sure your name is displayed in the participants list instead of your ID or phone number. Show your shoulders and head as if you were sitting in a conference room.

Best Practices for Meeting Hosts (Presenters, Teachers) ■

■ ■

■ ■

When scheduling a virtual meeting, provide complete connection information in your course management system. Arrive early; start the meeting 10 minutes early if possible Clarify meeting expectations. Students need to know: a. Should everyone to turn on their cameras or not? b. How will questions be handled? Open mic or chat? A list of meeting expectations makes a good first slide for attendees to view as they arrive Stop every four or five slides to check for comments or questions.

Best Practices for Attendees (Students, Guest Audience) ■

■ ■

■

Arrive on time. If you arrive late do not announce it. The class has already started, so just mute and settle in. Stay muted unless you are speaking; before you speak, make sure you are unmuted. When you have a question, unmute your microphone, turn on your camera, and say “Question” at an appropriate pause. After you ask a question or make a comment, mute your microphone; muting when you are not speaking is the best way to be respectful in a live lecture or videoconferencing.

Source: Adapted from Glenn Setliff, Duke University School of Nursing, Tech Tips: Your Guide to Video Conferencing Etiquette, 2020. Reprinted with permission.

Quality First Any nursing program, school of nursing, or institution that incorporates online pedagogy should maintain standards of quality equivalent to those for traditional educational approaches. Several comprehensive approaches to evaluating quality have been established. These approaches use differing terminologies to present evaluation criteria, such as benchmarks, pillars, indicators, dimensions, best practices, and paradigms. Examples of frameworks that are designed to assess online programs for quality indicators include the OLC Scorecard and Quality Matters (QM). These frameworks focus on indicators based on best practice standards for teaching and learning, sound instructional design principles, and research findings. They also include tools to evaluate, create, and improve student learning environments through a continuous improvement process model.

The Online Learning Consortium Quality Scorecard The OLC’s OSCQR (Open SUNY Course Quality Review) scorecard provides a course-level quality rubric for reviewing and improving the instructional design

7. Teaching in Online Learning Environments  ■ 127

and accessibility of online courses (Online Learning Consortium, 2020). The scorecard for online programs includes 50 indicators in six categories: 1. Course Overview and Information 2. Course Technology and Tools 3. Design and Layout 4. Content and Activities 5. Interaction 6. Assessment and Feedback The strength of these scorecards is that the QSCQR rubric is free and openly licensed, and can be customized to meet user needs. Institutions can use the results of the scorecard to identify areas for improvement (Online Learning Consortium, 2020).

Quality Matters Rubric QM is a faculty-centered, peer-reviewed process designed to assess and certify the quality of online and blended courses (MarylandOnline, 2020). QM provides different types of memberships. Members are offered course review tools, opportunities for professional development, access to a large community of online teaching and learning, and the QM Rubric, which has eight general standards: 1. Course Overview and Introduction 2. Learning Objectives (Competencies) 3. Assessment and Measurement 4. Instructional Materials 5. Learning Activities and Learner Interaction 6. Course Technology 7. Learner Support 8. Accessibility and Usability Schools can join the QM organization and learn how to use the QM rubric and evaluate their courses. For example, the first standard in the QM rubric addresses clear instructions, how to get started, and where to locate course components. One way of accomplishing clarity is to include a welcome message for students as they enter the course. A sample welcome message is shown in Exhibit 7.5. EXHIBIT 7.5 Sample Welcome for Students in an Online Course Welcome to the course introduction. I am glad that you found us. This is the place to start, and your beginning steps will be outlined here. Go to the Course Information section and find the course syllabus and online material. Open and read them. The syllabus will tell you about the content, and the online material will tell you about the technology. Remember to print both because if there is a power outage and a paper is due, it will be too late to look for my phone number. After completing this task, go to the discussion board and type “I did it” in the “I did it” forum. Then go to the Introduction section and tell us about yourself.

128  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

HOW TO TEACH AND MANAGE ONLINE LEARNING ENVIRONMENTS As facilitators of online learning, faculty members must guide students to achieve learning objectives. Prior to beginning a course, the teacher should make the syllabus and online expectations available to students, so they can familiarize themselves with expectations and requirements. One strategy is to make the course available to students, or “open the course,” a few days before the first module begins. A scavenger hunt for information can be an interesting and enjoyable method of encouraging students to access and become familiar with various parts of the course. For example, the teacher might ask how many students are enrolled in the course, and students would navigate to the roster to locate this information. Orientation to the course management system should be included as a reference for students who may be taking an online course in the nursing program for the first time. Netiquette should be discussed, and acceptable online behavior should be stated clearly for students. Darby (2019) identified 10 essential principles and practices for online teachers. These include: 1. Show up to class (provide a meaningful teaching-learning experience and interact with students through the learning process) 2. Be yourself (use communication skills to infuse your own online persona and share your passion for a subject) 3. Put yourself in students’ shoes (intentionally design a course with clarity to overcome potential confusion arising from a lack of nonverbal cues and verbal explanations) 4. Organize course content intuitively (have structural support methods to help students move through content and activities seamlessly) 5. Add visual appeal (use visually appealing and interactive activities to engage students) 6. Explain your expectations (provide a rubric and share an example of student work) 7. Scaffold learning activities (establish strategies to break down complex tasks) 8. Provide examples (employ a variety of examples and explanations to help learners grasp the content) 9. Make class an inviting, pleasant place to be (convey positivity and optimism that students can succeed) 10. Commit to continuous improvement (participate in workshops for professional development and explore best practices for addressing the quality of the online course) The online teacher has several functions during the course, the first and foremost being to correct errors. For example, when the discussion board opens, the teacher should enter the course and review what is posted because if the first student to post a comment has not understood the assignment, other students might continue to make the same error. Similarly, a student may provide inaccurate information on a discussion board which the teacher must correct immediately. Students need to know that faculty members are reading the postings and assessing the accuracy of information posted. A second function of the online teacher is to clarify the points a student makes and relate them to the module objectives or outcomes. To do this, the teacher can

7. Teaching in Online Learning Environments  ■ 129

start a reply with the phrase, “I think you are saying that . . . ” and then summarize the key points in the post. Students can provide examples from clinical practice, or the teacher can include scenarios that apply concepts learned in the module to practice. Questioning is an effective technique to raise the level of student thinking. One example of this technique, called the “sandwich,” involves providing positive reinforcement of the student’s answer followed by a question to extend thinking. For example, a teacher might pose this series of questions using the “sandwich” approach: “You have made some valid and important points. What might be the impact of this idea on the budget? I appreciate your rethinking this.” Asking “what if” questions is yet another strategy for encouraging higher-level thinking among students. The term presence refers to the students’ realization that the instructor is in the course and actively involved in their learning. Faculty can make students aware of their presence through posting to the discussion board, making announcements, adding humorous comments related to the content, or making changes in the order of the modules on the course site. For example, if students are working on Module 8, the teacher might move Modules 1 to 7 to the bottom of the list, indicating the instructor is present. Telling a story is another strategy for enhancing the instructor’s online personality. The instructor can create a folder for the course with stories that relate to modules; the instructor can copy and paste stories into applicable module discussions.

ASSESSMENT AND EVALUATION Traditional classroom evaluation measures are neither comprehensive nor appropriate for online learning for several reasons: ■

■

■

■

Students need to assess their skills and determine their desire to enroll in an online course. Students need continued feedback about how they are progressing through the course. An online course should be created and ready to be implemented before students enter. An online course must reviewed before it goes live, and links must to be tested and updated.

To accommodate the differences in evaluation, O’Neil et al. (2019) developed a model of evaluation for online courses. The model is based on student assessment and course evaluation, each conducted in three phases: students should be assessed before the course begins, during the learning experience, and at the end of the learning experience; and the course should be evaluated before it goes live, during the learning experience, and at the end of the learning experience. Methods of student assessment before the course begins include surveys of computer skills, pretests, and readiness surveys. During the learning experience, students can keep logs or journals, take formative quizzes, and post answers to the discussion board. Student learning at the end of selected modules and at the course can be assessed by examinations, presentations, or papers.

130  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

Similar to traditional courses, online courses should use grading rubrics for the assessment and grading of students’ assignments to provide them with a clear understanding of expectations. Nursing faculty members can create their own rubrics or can use rubrics posted in a public gallery (Rcampus™, 2020). In the Rubric Gallery, faculty can develop, assess, and share rubrics with others. Further discussion and examples of rubrics for assessment in nursing courses are in Chapter 13. Courses should be evaluated before they go live, allowing the teacher to resolve any problems or issues with the course before the students begin. Continuous feedback is also necessary throughout the course because, as with most online courses, the teacher does not “see students” and take attendance. One example of formative evaluation is the “pulse check.” Several times during the course, the teacher can ask students in an announcement to “Stop a moment and take your pulse. Is it strong and bounding, weak and thready, or another combination? E-mail me your assessment and tell me what I can do to help you be successful.” The teacher can post a summary announcement if the feedback will assist the group (O’Neil et al., 2019). Summative evaluation refers to assessment of the modules and course, typically at the end. Surveys may be sent to students and faculty members, asking questions about topics pertinent to course evaluation such as student satisfaction with the course content, instructional methods, assignments, and other areas (O’Neil et al., 2019). Strategies for evaluation of the process and outcomes of online learning should be discussed with course leadership and program teams in order to follow up and ensure quality online education. The Kirkpatrick’s four levels of evaluation has been widely used for analyzing the results of online programs and outcomes (Kirkpatrick & Kirkpatrick, 2016). For example, using the New World Kirkpatrick Model (NWKM), Walker et al. (2019) evaluated health professionals’ learning outcomes of an online continuing professional development program regarding maternal weight management. Level 1 of the NWKM is reaction (i.e., learners react to the learning event with a positive attitude such as satisfaction or engagement). Level 2 is learning (i.e., learners obtain knowledge, skills, confidence, and commitment by engaging in the learning event). Level 3 is behavior (i.e., learners apply their acquired knowledge, skills, confidence, and commitment to real tasks such as practical examinations or final course grades). Level 4 is results (i.e., learners provide benefit to the patients or practice, such as patient safety or quality of care, utilizing their acquired knowledge, skills, confidence, or commitment) (Kirkpatrick Partners, 2020). The NWKM are simple and easy to understand, and its levels provide online educators with a variety of formative ways to evaluate outcomes throughout the teaching-learning process.

SUMMARY Online teaching, a vehicle that uses technology to enhance a traditional approach to learning, has attracted tremendous interest and is gaining popularity in nursing education; however, teaching online is different from teaching in a classroom because students cannot be seen and nontraditional technologies are used. Learning online offers the advantage of flexibility as learning can take place at any time and in any location having internet access. Disadvantages include the potential sense of student isolation and the demands of obtaining, mastering, and supporting the technology. The pedagogy differs in that students learn from one another.

7. Teaching in Online Learning Environments  ■ 131

Interaction with the teacher as facilitator, with the content, and with other students is essential. Learning in an online environment is both reflective and active. Online learning requires administrative support for the technology, and choices need to be made about course management systems. After the students begin learning online, the role of the teacher is to guide them through the learning experience, assess the outcomes of student learning, and evaluate the course. Learning in online environments plays an important role in nursing education, and the learning environment must be of high quality. Technology continues to influence online courses and programs, and teaching online will continue to evolve and improve over time.

REFERENCES Allen, E., & Seaman, J. (2017). Digital learning compass: Distance education enrollment report 2017. https://onlinelearningsurvey.com/reports/digtiallearningcompassenrollment 2017.pdf Blackboard Inc. (2020). Blackboard. http://www.blackboard.com Burch, B. (2019). Class size in online courses: What the research says. https://www.quality matters.org/qa-resources/resource-center/articles-resources/research-on-class-size Chickering, A. W., & Ehrmann, S. C. (1996). Implementing the seven principles: Technology as lever. AAHE Bulletin, pp. 3–6. http://www.tltgroup.org/programs/seven Clark, R. C., & Mayer, R. E. (2016). E-learning and the science of instruction: Proven guidelines for consumers and designers of multimedia learning (4th ed.). Pfeiffer. Darby, F. (2019). How to be a better online teacher: Advice guide. Chronicle of Higher Education. https://www.chronicle.com/interactives/advice-online-teaching De Gagne, J. C., Choi, M., Ledbetter, L., Kang, H., & Clark, C. M. (2016). An integrative review of cybercivility in health professions education. Nurse Educator, 41(5), 239–245. https://doi.org/10.1097/NNE.0000000000000264 De Gagne, J. C, Manturuk, K., Park, H. K., Hook, B., Conklin, J. L, Wyman Roth, N., & Kulka, J. (2018). Cyberincivility in the massive open online course learning environment: Data-mining study. JMIR Medical Education, 4(2), e12152. https://doi.org/10.2196/12152 Duke University School of Nursing. (2020). Tech tips: Your guide to video conferencing etiquette. https://nursing.duke.edu/news/tech-tips-your-guide-video-conferencing-etiquette Educause. (2020). 2020 Horizon report: Teaching and learning edition. https://library.educause. edu/resources/2020/3/2020-educause-horizon-report-teaching-and-learning-edition ICEF Monitor. (2019). Year in review: What we learned in 2019. https://monitor.icef.com/ 2019/12/year-in-review-what-we-learned-in-2019 Illinois Online Network. (2020a). Pedagogy and learning: What makes a successful online facilitator? University of Illinois website: https://www.uis.edu/ion/resources/ tutorials/pedagogy/successful-online-facilitator Illinois Online Network. (2020b). Pedagogy and learning: What makes a successful online student? University of Illinois website: https://www.uis.edu/ion/resources/tutorials/ pedagogy/successful-online-student Kaplan, A. M., & Haenlein, M. (2016). Higher education and the digital revolution: About MOOCs, SPOCs, social media, and the Cookie Monster. Business Horizons, 59(4), 441–450. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.bushor.2017.03.008 Kentnor, H. E. (2015). Distance education and the evolution of online learning in the United States. Curriculum & Teaching Dialogue, 17(1–2), 21–34. Kirkpatrick, J. D., & Kirkpatrick, W. K. (2016). Kirkpatrick’s four levels of training evaluation. Association for Talent Development. Kirkpatrick Partners. (2020). The new world Kirkpatrick model. https://www.kirkpatrick partners.com/Our-Philosophy/The-New-World-Kirkpatrick-Model

132  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

MarylandOnline. (2020). Quality matters program. https://www.qualitymatters.org Moodle. (2020). Moodle. https://moodle.org O’Neil, C. A., Fisher, C., & Rietschel, M. (2019). Developing online learning environments in nursing education (4th ed.). Springer Publishing Company. Online Learning Consortium. (2020). OLC OSCQR course design review scorecard. https:// onlinelearningconsortium.org/consult/oscqr-course-design-review Rcampus. (2020). Rubric gallery. http://www.rcampus.com/rubricshellc.cfm Vogt, M. A., & Schaffner, B. H. (2016). Evaluating interactive technology for an evolving case study on learning and satisfaction of graduate nursing students. Nurse Education in Practice, 19, 79–83. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.nepr.2016.05.006 Walker, R., Bennett, C., Kumar, A., Adamski, M., Blumfield, M., Mazza, D., & Truby, H. (2019). Evaluating online continuing professional development regarding weight management for pregnancy using the new world Kirkpatrick model. Journal of Continuing Education in the Health Professions, 39(3), 210–217. https://doi.org/10.1097/ CEH.0000000000000261 Williams, R. (2014). The non-designer’s design book (4th ed.). Peachpit Press.

8 Simulations in Nursing Education: Overview, Essentials, and the Evidence Pamela R. Jeffries, Kristina T. Dreifuerst, and Katie A. Haerling

OBJECTIVES 1. Describe types of simulations in nursing 2. Describe strategies of implementing different types of simulations into the nursing curriculum 3. Critique various debriefing approaches and their use in nursing education 4. Describe evaluation processes to use when developing and implementing simulations 5. Review developments in simulation practices, research, and credentialing

INTRODUCTION Traditionally, simulations have been used to provide opportunities for students to practice patient care in a safe environment before going into the clinical setting. However, in the current environment of increasing patient acuity and limited clinical placements, simulation may serve a broader role as an adjunct or replacement for traditional clinical hours. Moreover, the Institute of Medicine (2011) cited simulation as a critical ingredient for producing an adequate numbers of competent nurses, and the National Council of State Boards of Nursing has findings from a landmark, national study exploring substituting simulations for real clinical time that is impacting nursing education today (Hayden et  al., 2014b). As simulation pedagogy progresses, it also will play an increasingly important role in both formative and summative student and graduate evaluation. This chapter provides an overview of types of clinical simulations in nursing. The importance of creating realism and suspend disbelief in the simulations is discussed. In addition, implementation of simulations into a nursing curriculum, debriefing approaches, and evaluation processes to use when developing and implementing clinical simulations are presented. Finally, the evidence regarding the use of clinical simulations, beyond the point of asking if the pedagogy actually works but also how to make it work best, is highlighted.

134  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

DIFFERENT TYPES OF SIMULATION There are several different types of simulations that vary in the degree of fidelity, or the ability of the simulation environment to replicate the actual clinical environment (Loke et al., 2020). This fidelity, or realism, allows the learner to become engaged within the simulation on a physical, conceptual, emotional, and experiential level (Bauchat et al., 2016; MacLean et al., 2019).

MANIKIN-BASED SIMULATION Manikin-based simulation has been used for hundreds of years, including both the bronze acupuncture teaching statues from the Song Dynasty in China as well as “Mrs. Chase,” the classic nursing manikin used for task training since 1922 (Herrmann, 2008; Owen, 2012). Manikins, as human patient simulators (HPSs), vary in the amount and degree of technology and fidelity built into the device. Simulation fidelity is defined as the extent to which a simulated experience is real or believable to the participants (International Nursing Association for Clinical Simulation and Learning [INACSL] Standards Committee, 2016a). It can be thought of on two dimensions: engineering fidelity, or how authentic the simulation looks and feels, and psychological fidelity, or how realistic the behaviors and actions required mimic what is anticipated or expected (Loke et al., 2020). Hayden et al. (2014b) suggested using an appropriate level of fidelity to help learners achieve the objectives of the simulation activity. Some learning objectives require very simple resources, such as performing an intramuscular injection on an orange, while other learning objectives require higher levels of fidelity to create a realistic experience. Fidelity is important to consider when developing simulations for students because it reflects the level of engagement that will be expected of participants as they are involved in the experience (MacLean et al., 2019) and the extent to which the nurse educator and simulation personnel will go in creating it. Manikins that are life-sized, have realistic anatomical structures, and contain technology that dynamically mimics changes in human physiology are called highfidelity HPSs, whereas other full-sized manikins that may only partially or not as rapidly mimic physiologic changes are called medium-fidelity manikins (Loke et al., 2020). Low-fidelity HPSs are task trainers that are static and typically represent one function of the human body, such as an arm model used to practice venipuncture. These are particularly useful for novice students learning basic skills and general principles of patient care (MacLean et al., 2019). High-fidelity HPSs are best used when learners are expected to successfully care for a patient with multiple abnormal physiologic findings within the simulation scenario. These manikins allow for changes of physiologic parameters within the simulation, either by programming ahead of the simulation or by changing the parameters within the simulation. This allows faculty to evaluate the learner’s ability to rapidly respond to changes in the patient’s condition or demonstrate the physiologic effects of any given treatment (medications or interventions). Multiple physiologic parameters, including pupil dilation/constriction, respiratory and cardiac (breath and heart sounds, pulses, blood pressure, pulse oxygenation), and abdominal (bowel sounds) signs may be programmed, depending on the type of high-fidelity HPS. High-fidelity HPSs also allow learners to practice and refine psychomotor skills, such as basic and advanced life support. When the simulation

8. Simulations in Nursing Education: Overview, Essentials, and the Evidence  ■ 135

scenario requires only a limited number of physiologic changes or complex task training, using a medium-fidelity HPS may be sufficient. The decision about what level of fidelity to select is determined by what is available, the objectives of the experience, and the intended learner outcomes. Fidelity can also involve a variety of dimensions, including (a) physical factors such as environment, equipment, and related tools; (b) psychological factors such as emotions, beliefs, and self-awareness of participants; (c) social factors such as participant and instructor motivation and goals; (d) culture of the group; and (e) degree of openness and trust, as well as participants’ modes of thinking (Vincent et al., 2015). The level of fidelity is an important consideration for nurse educators during the process of selecting or designing simulations. The patient’s story in the scenario and objectives for the simulation become part of the fidelity or realism of the experience and help to socialize the student to the role of the nurse. Moulage is another aspect of fidelity that nurse educators can consider for simulation learning with manikins and other simulation modalities. Moulage incorporates the use of makeup, clothing, and wigs to enhance the patient story, and wax, latex, artificial fluids, and simulation enhancers to simulate injury, disease, aging, and other physical enhancements to the manikin (Stokes-Parish et al., 2019). Adding moulage to the simulation increases the realism for the student and can make the simulation experience more authentic for holistic learning. Fidelity in simulation is intended to immerse the student in a realistic learning experience that represents a clinical setting or client care situation. Attention to having realistic equipment and creating a representative physical environment impacts the believability of the simulation experience for many students and may impact clinical learning. Low, moderate, and high fidelity simulations can all be valuable learning environments when they are incorporated into the curriculum and learning objectives for nursing students.

STANDARDIZED PATIENTS A standardized patient (SP) is an individual who engages in specialized training to portray a patient with specific condition. SPs are able to play their role the same way during every encounter. During a simulation, an SP will provide a consistent answer to questions asked by the learner and has been trained prior to the simulation not to go off script, embellish the response, or provide additional information that was not asked by the learner. To do this, the SP rehearses the role with the faculty member to ensure that each learner experiences the same patient portrayal in each and every simulation. Sometimes an individual is enlisted to role-play a part in a simulation with little or no training. In this case, this individual is not an SP, as there is no assurance that the role will be played in the same manner for each simulation. SPs may be further subdivided according to the objective of the simulation and the role that they play. Within the simulation, they can portray patients, but also may function as the teacher, evaluator, or both. SPs are often used to teach and evaluate other physical examination skills, such as a head-to-toe assessment. Certain SPs obtain further education and training to evaluate the student in either formative evaluation or summative evaluation, including high-stakes simulation. Objective structured clinical examinations (OSCEs) are a series of stations where students care for a variety of patients according to a predetermined time-limited schedule for

136  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

each station. SPs are used to portray these patients and may participate in the evaluation of the student as well. Simulations may be enhanced by the use of SPs, particularly in simulation scenarios that teach and evaluate communication skills (Ryan et  al., 2010). Many prelicensure nursing programs use SPs for a variety of psychiatric mental-health simulations, whereas advanced practice nursing programs use SPs to teach and evaluate history-taking skills. Other uses of SPs include simulations involving interprofessional education (IPE) teams, ethical and cultural competencies, safety, and patient education. SPs also are used as unannounced patients to evaluate providers, similar to “secret shoppers” who evaluate customer service. Incorporating SPs within a simulation program requires planning and sufficient funds to hire and train them. They can be trained actors, students in other programs, or community members. Additional human resources may be required to coordinate the SP program within the school; however, most programs that use SPs believed that the experience is valuable (Rutherford-Hemming et al., 2019).

AUGMENTED REALITY, VIRTUAL REALITY, AND SCREEN-BASED SIMULATION Augmented reality, virtual reality and screen-based simulations provide seemingly endless possibilities for innovative teaching and learning in nursing (Foronda et al., 2017). Augmented reality refers to a variety of two- or three-dimensional applications where digital images merge with the real environment (Carlson & Gagnon, 2016). Foronda et al. (2017) provide several examples of augmented reality applications, including a flight simulator and Microsoft’s Hololens, where learners can interact with holograms representing human anatomy or super-imposing it on other simulators or task trainers. Screen-based simulation is one form of virtual simulation. This two-dimensional experience is delivered via computer or portable device similar to gaming strategies where the learners interact with avatars either through direct manipulation or by responding to questions based on the scenario. These platforms have been used extensively for teaching health assessment as well as patient care (Gu et al., 2017). Virtual reality simulation can also incorporate technology like Microsoft’s Hololens, FaceBook’s Oculus Rift headset, or even viewing devices attached to mobile phones to immerse the user in three-dimensional simulated environments for an educational experience (Rourke, 2020; Smith et al., 2018). Virtual reality immersion has also been developed into extraordinary lifet-like task trainers for both medicine and nursing. Gaming continues to be incorporated within simulation. One of the primary benefits of gaming as a teaching and learning strategy is that it engages learners in a way that they are highly motivated to achieve a goal or solve a problem (Verkuyl et al., 2016). One nursing program found that high-fidelity simulation along with a gaming experience enhanced the curriculum on end-of-life care (Kopp & Hanson, 2012). Another innovative simulation experience involved the use of a fictitious registered nurse blog to describe challenges during her first year of practice (Thomas et al., 2012). Depending on the objectives of the learning experience, games may be designed to allow learners to interact with the content independently or to collaborate with a facilitator or other learners.

8. Simulations in Nursing Education: Overview, Essentials, and the Evidence  ■ 137

The simulation learning objectives should dictate the type of simulation that will allow the student to accomplish the desired clinical outcomes. Regardless of the type of simulation selected, it is important to identify clearly how it will provide the realism necessary for the learner to fully engage in the simulation. To do this, a detailed simulation scenario should include the type of HPS to be used, along with the patient condition and corresponding physiologic parameters throughout the simulation. Any additional equipment needed to either more accurately replicate the clinical setting or that will be used by the learner to accomplish the objectives of the simulation must also be included in the experience.

INTEGRATION OF SIMULATION INTO CURRICULUM High-fidelity simulations offer a rich opportunity to improve student learning and achieve desired outcomes throughout a nursing curriculum. Simulations can be used in a variety of ways by faculty to meet different learning goals, ranging from knowledge acquisition to application of a theoretical concept, professional role development, and evaluation of student competency. Perhaps the most obvious use of high-fidelity simulation is creating a clinical experience for a student. This experience may supplement or replace clinical hours or a clinical day for any type of experience in a nursing curriculum. While more research is needed to demonstrate how time spent in simulation compares with time spent in clinical practice (Sullivan et al., 2019), it is clear that simulation and clinical practice should be considered complementary rather than independent instructional strategies (Pauly-O’Neill et al., 2013). In addition thoughtful curricular integration is key to their optimal application. Simulation allows all students in a program to experience patient care situations deemed critical for professional practice which cannot be guaranteed in a clinical setting. For example, it might be considered critical for all new nurses to know how to assess and care for a diabetic patient with significant hypoglycemia. While all students could be assigned a diabetic patient in a clinical setting, there is no guarantee that they would all provide care for a patient with hypoglycemia. Yet, this experience can be granted to every student using simulation. Simulations also can create clinical experiences that are rare in clinical practice, but potentially life threatening and require prompt recognition and intervention. Clinical simulations can be developed to provide students with a practice setting or a type of experience that is difficult to offer because of a variety of factors such as limited clinical sites, lack of qualified faculty in a specialty area, or geographic remoteness. For example, it may be difficult to place all of the students in labor and delivery, and there may be limited inpatient pediatric units. In those cases, simulation can be used to meet the learning needs of students to care for mothers during childbirth and children of all ages. There are several possible ways to provide simulation experiences for students in remote locations where significant travel is needed to reach the school or an appropriate clinical agency. For example, a live simulation with a small group of students could be broadcast to a satellite location where there is not a simulation lab. Simulations could also be integrated completely online where a recording of the simulation is posted and then debriefing occurs via an asynchronous discussion. Or, students could be assigned to view an online video clip of a simulation or interact with a live telehealth simulation followed by synchronous or asynchronous

138  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

discussions. Simulations encourage students to develop critical thinking, clinical reasoning, team building, and communication skills, and other professional attributes needed in a graduate nurse. Through simulation the student acts in the role of the nurse caring for patients, interacting with other healthcare providers, acting independently on physician orders, and documenting care, because it is a safe learning environment. Simulations should be leveled throughout the curriculum, building in complexity and ambiguity. When selecting or writing simulations, faculty should create experiences that help students develop competencies to meet national goals for professional practice, such as patient safety or quality goals. Faculty should also consider what content and skills students have found difficult to master and incorporate these into simulations. High-fidelity simulation, in addition to its use in clinical courses, can also be incorporated into traditional theory courses. This assists students in linking the content between theory and practice. For example, a didactic presentation could present the facts about a myocardial infarction and standard care of these patients. Following this classroom presentation, students could participate in a simulation that allowed them to apply those facts to assessment and care for a simulated patient with a myocardial infarction. Using another approach, the content could be presented via the simulation, with students given materials to prepare for the experience with the goal that knowledge would be attained through the simulation. A mechanism of introducing increasingly complex simulations into a curriculum is to use an unfolding case. In an unfolding case, students are introduced to a particular patient repeatedly at different points in the care continuum within a simulation, throughout a course or throughout the curriculum. The patient scenario becomes more complex and requires different assessment skills or interventions on the part of the nurse. For example, in a psychiatric mental health class, the students could be introduced to a patient with depression. Later in the semester the students may “meet” the same patient, but this time the patient is suicidal. The students interact with the same patient again at a later date in a different course, such as community health, when they are making a home health visit. During the home visit, the students can observe the patient interacting with their family. Another way to add complexity to a simulation is to repeat the same case but use a modified or an unfolding version. This could occur after debriefing one aspect of a simulation, when the students switch roles and repeat or continue the scenario in a slightly different way. For example, the first scenario might have the postpartum patient with normal vaginal discharge after delivery. When the simulation is repeated, the patient develops signs and symptoms of a postpartum hemorrhage, and the nurse needs to identify the difference as well as the appropriate nursing actions. Each of these simulations offers different opportunities for teaching and learning. Simulation can play an important role in developing professional roles and behaviors in nursing students. In addition to learning to think and act like a nurse, students need to learn how to work with other healthcare professions. IPE has been promoted as critical to improving team communication and fostering high-quality and safe patient care (Hodgkins et al., 2020). Interdisciplinary simulations can represent basic to complex interactions in patient care. For example, beginning students might be involved in a simulation where a patient has an abnormal laboratory value. The nurse would be responsible for identifying the problem, contacting the physician, and receiving and acting on new medical orders. The physician would be

8. Simulations in Nursing Education: Overview, Essentials, and the Evidence  ■ 139

responsible for evaluating the data presented by the nurse, making a diagnosis, and providing appropriate medical orders. With more advanced students, the interdisciplinary simulation might reflect a difference of opinion as to best care or an ethical dilemma related to possible care and treatment options. Other team members that should be incorporated include physical therapists, respiratory therapists, nutritionists, social workers, and pharmacists, among others. In IPE simulations, students typically portray roles within their own profession. They learn about other professions by observing others portray their role in the simulation and through the discussion in debriefing. There may be occasions when it is valuable to switch roles. A variety of simulation experiences may be used to help students understand other healthcare provider roles and responsibilities and to create some empathy for what the other professions experience. The debriefing often includes team aspects as well as a disciplinary focus (Hodgkins et al., 2020). Simulation can be used as a method to evaluate student knowledge and abilities. In introductory courses, students might have to identify normal or abnormal heart or breath sounds; in more advanced courses they might be required to demonstrate competency, for example, by recognizing deterioration of a patient’s status and taking appropriate action. Faculty need to reach a philosophical consensus and interrater reliability when using simulation as an evaluation tool (Rizzolo et al., 2015). Is the desired outcome to bring all students to a certain level of ability prior to allowing them to progress in the curriculum? This would typically indicate that students would have multiple opportunities to attempt the simulation, with assistance to improve as needed. Or, is the intent of the graded simulation to prevent progression of students unable to demonstrate a certain level of ability? This might mean that students would have only one opportunity to pass the simulation. Is there a grade associated with the simulation? If the simulation contributes to a grade in a course, a grading rubric is needed. Faculty also should reach a curricular consensus as to how to evaluate a simulation. At this time there is no standard recommendation as to how to most effectively evaluate student performance in a simulation; however, many options exist in the literature and are discussed later in this chapter. When students must achieve a certain level of performance during a simulation or else they fail a course or cannot graduate, the simulation is termed “high stakes.” Cordeau (2010), in her study of students’ perceptions of clinical simulation, provides several insights relevant to high-stakes simulations, which should be considered by faculty. First, students will have increased anxiety when simulation is used as a testing or evaluation criteria. Second, anxiety is experienced at all phases of the simulation from presimulation to the debriefing process. While a small amount of anxiety can sharpen performance, high anxiety will impair performance. Faculty should make efforts to maintain student anxiety at a manageable level so that students can be successful in meeting the outcomes of the clinical simulation. Third, adequate student preparation is needed to overcome anxiety and to foster success. Students should be oriented to the simulation environment and given adequate information about the simulation experience prior to the start. Prebriefing should include information about the simulated patient, similar to the nursing report that is shared before a nurse assumes the care of a patient. In addition, practice sessions, appropriate cues, and fidelity in a simulation can help students to be successful and demonstrate their best performance during the simulation. Finally, one of the most important issues related to using simulation for high-stakes testing is the need to use multiple evaluators who have had preparation and then establish interrater reliability prior to initiating this form of assessment. Finally, educators

140  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

need to be prepared to legally defend the scenarios and the evaluation rubrics used for high-stakes testing with simulation (Rutherford-Hemming et al., 2014).

IMPLEMENTATION OF SIMULATIONS Once simulation experiences have been mapped to the curriculum and the best methodology of presenting them have been identified by faculty, implementation can begin (Exhibit 8.1). To create an effective learning experience, faculty should carefully plan all aspects relevant to running the simulation (INACSL Standards Committee, 2016a). Using simulation as a teaching strategy cannot be done successfully as a spur-of-the-moment decision. The first step is the creation or selection of the simulation scenario. This might be done with several content experts writing and reviewing a draft of the simulation after consulting the literature to ensure that current guidelines for evidencebased practice are met. A template is helpful to provide a standardized structure for the simulation and to guarantee that key aspects are not overlooked; resources for faculty are available at the National League for Nursing (NLN) Simulation Innovation Research Center (SIRC; sirc.nln.org). Specific learning objectives and student outcomes should be identified. They should accurately reflect what students can actually accomplish in the allotted time given their skills and abilities. A detailed description related to staging the scene should include factors such as how the manikin or patient will “look,” what equipment needs to be in the room, what supplies the student will need to perform in the simulation, what props will add realism, what information needs to be in the patient’s medical record, and how the patient will respond (verbally, physiologically) to interventions made by the nurse. All of these details must be considered, planned, and directly written into the simulation scenario (INACSL Standards Committee, 2016a). An alternative to writing simulations is using premade or purchased scenarios. These have the advantage that the content has, in most circumstances, been reviewed by experts and determined to accurately reflect current standards of practice. Premade or purchased simulations may be adjusted to meet local differences in care practices or to level the simulation to meet the learner’s abilities at a given point in the curriculum. For faculty just learning to use simulation, this simplifies the process of incorporating simulation into the curriculum.

EXHIBIT 8.1 Checklist for Implementation of a Simulation Create or select the simulation scenario and objectives Determine your resources Number of manikins or SPs available Number of simulation rooms available Number of faculty available to assist in running simulation Determine the time needed to run scenario and debriefing Determine the time needed to allow all students to participate in simulation Number of student groups Include time to rotate groups Determine the date(s) and time(s) the simulation will run

8. Simulations in Nursing Education: Overview, Essentials, and the Evidence  ■ 141

The remainder of planning and implementing simulations into a course involves practical issues of running a simulation. A primary consideration is how much time will be needed for the prebriefing, simulation, and debriefing. Often, prebriefing is 15 to 30 minutes, scenarios run 10 to 30 minutes, and debriefing has taken at least twice the time of the scenario or longer, but these are generalizations. Many factors go into the timing decisions of simulation planning, including the complexity of the simulation, the level and roles of the learners, and the outcomes of the experience. It also is important to take into account the total number of students participating in simulation and the amount of time that is available (INACSL Standards Committee, 2016a). Consider this example. A basic simulation of 10 minutes also has 20 minutes of prebriefing and 30 minutes of debriefing time. It will therefore take 60 minutes for each group of students to complete the simulation. If you have 50 students, and you want them to participate in the simulation in groups of five, and each group needs 60 minutes for the simulation and debriefing, it will take at least 10 hours to run the simulation if you only have one manikin or SP to use at a time. Next consider how much time you have available. Are you using class time (e.g., a 50-minute time period)? This amount of time is not sufficient to run the simulation. At least 60 minutes is needed for one group, plus the additional time that is needed to rotate students and reset the room for the next group. For this reason, many programs utilize several manikins or SPs concurrently. In addition to time, there are other resources that should be considered. The number of simulation rooms and manikins or SPs that can be used at a single time is only one important variable. Also important to consider is how many faculty members and simulation staff are familiar with the pedagogy and technology and can be available to assist with facilitating the simulation. Faculty need to plan thoroughly for a simulation experience and consider all aspects needed to run the simulation smoothly. Attention to detail is important. Sufficient time has to be allotted to design, plan, and implement simulations into the curriculum. When the simulation day runs smoothly, faculty and staff are less stressed, and students receive a more positive learning experience.

DEBRIEFING Debriefing is an important component of student learning in simulation. Typically, debriefing immediately follows a simulation as an opportunity for the nursing students and teachers to review the experience and learn from what happened (Dreifuerst, 2009; Onello & Forneris, 2018; Palaganas et al., 2016) During debriefing, teachers can guide students to discuss, analyze, and synthesize their thoughts and feelings about the experience. It is also a time to carefully review the thinking, actions, and clinical decisions that occurred during the simulation (Cheng et al., 2018; Dreifuerst, 2015) and discuss options and alternatives to improve the nursing care or patient outcomes. Because of the sensitive nature of the discussion, holding debriefing in a comfortable private area, away from the actual simulated patient environment, is an important consideration (Daniels & Onello, 2018). There are many ways to debrief; however, it is common for faculty and students to focus the discussion on feedback including what went right, what went wrong, and what should be done differently and reflection focused on the thinking and actions including assimilation, accommodation, and anticipation (Gantt et al., 2018).

142  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

Debriefing is a constructivist, reflective teaching strategy (Johnson, 2020). It commonly involves an interactive discussion between the students who were directly involved in the simulation scenario, the students who observed the simulation, and the debriefer (Johnson, 2019). These lively discussions should use the learning objectives or outcomes as a guide. Debriefing using this format becomes a type of formative feedback, which is intended to change thinking and behaviors when the student encounters similar issues in clinical practice (Johnson, 2019). The debriefer typically guides the debriefing experience by acting as a mentor, coach, or clinical teacher depending on the situation, students, and simulation outcomes. The debriefer’s role in the debriefing process can vary because it is dependent on the skill level of the participants, how much guidance is needed to keep the discussion flowing, and the outcome of the simulation. Debriefers generally are more active when the participants are novices and new to simulation and when there has been an emotional experience by one or more of them. Likewise, the debriefer can guide the discussion to provide additional support when negative outcomes or poor student performance have occurred. As the students gain experience and knowledge, they assume a more active role in the discussion and the debriefer can become more of a guide and less of a facilitator (Dreifuerst, 2009). Guiding the discussion can involve the use of many communication strategies by the debriefer. These include incorporation of open-ended questions, active listening, Socratic questioning, restating, rephrasing, and leading questions. These techniques may require training and practice by the debriefer prior to the actual simulation experience (Arafeh et  al., 2010; Cheng et  al., 2016; Dreifuerst, 2015). Continuing education opportunities to learn evidence-based debriefing practices and strategies are available from a variety of venues, including formal education sessions and informal peer coaching. These are also opportunities to learn new ways and methods that can be used to debrief students. The importance of faculty development and training in debriefing to ensure consistent outcomes cannot be overlooked (Bradley, 2019; Jeffries et al., 2015).

Debriefing Methods There are many debriefing methods that are used in healthcare simulations. While many of these methods share similar practices, each has unique attributes that support different learners and environments (Husebo et  al., 2013; Overstreet, 2010). Reflection and feedback are an essential components of debriefing regardless of the method used (Shinnick et  al., 2011). Recalling the events of the simulation is important to understand the behaviors, decision-making, and patient outcomes in the simulation. Reflecting also solidifies learning from the experience, particularly when attention is paid to reflecting-in-action, reflecting-on-action, and reflectingbeyond-action (Dreifuerst, 2009; Schön, 1983). Different debriefing methods can be used to guide the reflective process. Some of the more common debriefing methods include Plus Delta, Debriefing for Meaningful Learning© (DML), Debriefing With Good Judgment using Advocacy-Inquiry, GatherAnalyze-Summarize (GAS), and Promoting Excellence and Reflective Learning in Simulation (PEARLS) (Exhibit 8.2). Variations of the Plus Delta debriefing method are popular in interdisciplinary healthcare simulations. This method emphasizes providing feedback including what went well (plus) and what could be done better or differently (delta, which is the Greek symbol for change), by soliciting reflective responses from the students

8. Simulations in Nursing Education: Overview, Essentials, and the Evidence  ■ 143

EXHIBIT 8.2 Debriefing Methods Plus Delta What went right What would you change Debriefing for Meaningful Learning Reflection-in-action Reflection-on-action Reflection-beyond-action Clinical reasoning and thinking like a nurse Relationship between thinking and actions Debriefing With Good Judgment Using Advocacy-Inquiry Statement of advocacy or assertion Request for clarification Gather-Analyze-Summarize Pull together pertinent information Discuss details of what went well and what did not Review all aspects of the experience in the context of the debriefing discussion Promoting Excellence and Reflective Learning in Simulation Reaction Phase Description Phase Analysis Phase Learner Self-Assessment Feedback and Teaching Summary Phase

involved in the simulation (Fanning & Gaba, 2007). This method is not difficult and is easily adapted to many different types of simulations and learners. DML is a structured method that emphasizes reflection-in-action, reflection-onaction, and reflection-beyond-action; clinical reasoning; and thinking like a nurse (Dreifuerst, 2009, 2015; Schön, 1983). A premise of this method is that the debriefer must be a clinician or a clinical teacher with knowledge about the patient population. The debriefer guides the reflective process of uncovering the students’ thinking that underpinned their actions and decisions during the simulation and how that thinking informed assimilation, accommodation, and anticipation (Dreifuerst, 2015). DML debriefing is best assessed using the Debriefing for Meaningful Learning Evaluation Scale (Bradley, 2018; Bradley & Dreifuerst, 2016). The DMLES assesses observable behaviors anchored in the DML debriefing. The items in the DMLES are closely aligned with the process of DML and assesses the presence of each of the behaviors that should be present when using this method for debriefing, but does not measure how well the behaviors were done. In the Debriefing with Good Judgment using Advocacy-Inquiry, the debriefer focuses on a particular component of the simulation because the student involved in the experience has done something unexpected or unanticipated

144  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

(Rudolph et  al., 2007). The discussion begins with a statement of advocacy or assertion about what was observed from the teacher’s perspective, followed by a question or request for clarification about their thinking and actions from the students in a nonthreatening way (Rudolph et al., 2007). This leads to a discussion that also includes feedback. The GAS method uses a three-step debriefing process (American Heart Association, 2010). Teachers guide the students to integrate or gather all of the pertinent information about the simulation experience, including what occurred, the decisions that were made, and outcomes. Next, the participants and facilitator analyze the information that has been gathered using the objectives for the simulation as well as what went right and what did not. Finally, everything that has been discussed is summarized to reinforce learning. PEARLS represents a method of debriefing that advocates educators’ intentional use of a variety of debriefing strategies to individualize the discussion to meet particular learner needs and unique learning environments. When debriefing using PEARLS, the debriefer can choose from different strategies to ensure the discussion includes reactions, descriptions, and analysis (Cheng et al., 2016). Regardless of the method used, debriefing that includes reflection and revisiting of the events and actions to understand behaviors, decision-making, and the impact on patient outcomes is an essential part of simulation learning. Additionally, debriefing should include the objectives of the experience and an intentional method of recalling the events of the simulation. Students should be actively involved in the discussion regardless if they were in a participant or an observer role, and have an opportunity to clarify anything that is uncertain during debriefing (Johnson, 2019). Faculty who use simulation should feel comfortable facilitating debriefing as an important component of student learning.

SIMULATION EVALUATION Simulation presents many opportunities for evaluation. It is commonly used for evaluating the learning or performance of the simulation participant, but there are other aspects of simulation that can also be evaluated. One way to examine the various opportunities for evaluation within simulation is by looking at the NLN Jeffries Simulation Theory (Jeffries, 2016) (Figure 8.1). There are seven concepts in the Theory: Context, Background, Design, Facilitator, Educational Strategies, Participant, and Outcomes, and each represents an opportunity for evaluation. The next section defines the first five concepts in the NLN Jeffries Simulation Theory and briefly describes opportunities for evaluation within each concept. In the section that follows, the last two concepts from the Theory, Participant and Outcomes, are discussed with more detailed descriptions of strategies for evaluation.

Concepts Within the NLN Jeffries Simulation Theory and Opportunities for Evaluation CONTEXT AND BACKGROUND

All simulations take place within a specific Context. Simulations may occur in an academic simulation lab, patient care setting, or even out in the community. Likewise, all simulations should have a specific purpose of instruction or evaluation

8. Simulations in Nursing Education: Overview, Essentials, and the Evidence  ■ 145

DIAGRAM OF NLN JEFFRIES SIMULATION THEORY© Context

En vir o

Background

Design

Experien tial

t rus of T t en nm Facilitator

Dynamic interaction

Participant Interactive

Educational strategies

Lea rner Cente red

ab o Coll

ra t

i ve

System Patient Participant Outcomes Copyright © 2015 by the National League for Nursing.

FIGURE 8.1 Diagram of NLN Jeffries simulation theory© NLN, National League for Nursing. Source: Jeffries, P., Rogers, B., & Adamson, K. (2016). NLN Jeffries simulation theory: Brief narrative. In P. Jeffries (Ed.), The NLN Jeffries simulation theory: A monograph (pp. 39–42). Wolters Kluwer. . Reprinted with permission of National League for Nursing (2020).

(Jeffries et al., 2015, p. 39). Within a given Context, each simulation serves a specific purpose and should be designed to meet identified goals and objectives. The facilities, equipment, and other resources provided to achieve these goals are all components of the Background. For any program evaluation, it is essential to consider variables within the Context and Background when evaluating the program. This is true for evaluating simulation programs as well. Variables to consider include the allocation and stewardship of resources, curricular integration, and alignment with accreditation requirements.

146  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

DESIGN

The Design of the simulation includes the specific learning objectives that inform the selection or development of the simulation scenario. The scenario should describe the roles and any scripts the facilitator and participants will use to manage dialogue or flow of the scenario. Finally, the Design guides the level of fidelity and whether video recording will be used for teaching, learning, or evaluation (Jeffries et  al., 2015, pp. 39–40). Two resources for evaluating the simulation Design include the INACSL Simulation Standards of Best PracticeSM Simulation Design (INACSL Standards Committee, 2016a) and NLN Simulation Design Scale (SDS) (NLN, 2005). This INACSL Standard provides 11 criteria to guide and evaluate the simulation Design. The NLN SDS is a 20-item tool that simulation participants complete. It reflects the Participants’ evaluation of the simulation Design in the areas of: objectives and information, support, problem-solving, feedback/guided reflection, and fidelity (realism). FACILITATOR AND EDUCATIONAL STRATEGIES

The simulation experience should be experiential, interactive, collaborative, and learner-centered, and should be carried out in an environment of trust (Jeffries et al., 2015, p. 41). The facilitator’s preparation, planning, and performance within the simulation affect the simulation experience. Examples of specific skills the facilitator contributes to the simulation experience include adjusting the simulation or progression of the scenario to meet learners’ needs, cuing, debriefing, and providing feedback (Jeffries et al., 2015, p. 41). There are a variety of criteria for evaluating a simulation Facilitator such as qualifications or scores on self, peer, or student evaluations. However, it is well accepted that debriefing is a key component of simulation. Therefore, one important opportunity for evaluating Educational Strategies is to evaluate the quality of the debriefing. Several resources exist for evaluating debriefing, but one that has been used extensively in the literature is the Debriefing Assessment for Simulation in Healthcare (DASH) (Simon et  al., 2011). The DASH examines six elements of debriefing: establishes an engaging learning environment; maintains an engaging learning environment; structures debriefing in an organized way; provokes engaging discussions; identifies and explores performance gaps; and helps participants achieve or sustain good future performance. PARTICIPANT

Specific participant characteristics such as age, level of anxiety, preparation, and performance all affect the simulation experience. Similarly, elements of the Context (whether the simulation is for instruction or evaluation) and Design (role assignments and whether there is video recording) may affect the Participant and in turn, the simulation experience (Jeffries et al., 2015, p. 41). OUTCOMES

Outcomes of the simulation include participant-level outcomes such as reactions, learning, or changes in behavior; patient-level outcomes such as a change in vital

8. Simulations in Nursing Education: Overview, Essentials, and the Evidence  ■ 147

signs, improved health, or decreased length of stay; and system level outcomes such as cost-savings or infection rates (Jeffries et al., 2015, p. 41). Participant and Outcomes are the concepts within the NLN Jeffries Simulation Theory that are most often considered when nurse educators think of simulation evaluation. Educators may be interested in evaluating participants’ satisfaction or engagement with simulation, their learning from the simulation, how their behavior in the clinical environment changed as a result of the simulation, or how those changes in behavior affected patient and system-level outcomes (Kirkpatrick & Kirkpatrick, 2019). Kirkpatrick and Kirkpatrick (2019) describe this progression using four levels that are helpful for categorizing evaluations. These levels, as they apply to simulation participant evaluation, are: ■ ■ ■ ■

Level 1: Participants’ reactions to the simulation activity Level 2: Participants’ learning from the simulation activity Level 3: Changes in Participants’ behavior as a result of the simulation activity Level 4: Longer-term results or Outcomes that take place because of the simulation activity

The category of learning (Level 2) may be further divided using the three domains of learning: cognitive, affective, and psychomotor. While many simulation evaluations seek to cover multiple levels and learning domains, using Kirkpatrick’s language helps to describe the focus (or foci) of the particular evaluation strategy. Evaluations become increasingly more difficult, but potentially more meaningful, as they progress from Level 1 (reaction) to Level 4 (results). For example, it is much easier to ask participants to rate their level of satisfaction with a simulation activity (Level 1: reaction) or assess participant knowledge before and after a simulation activity (Level 2: learning [cognitive]) than it is to determine whether a simulation activity impacts how participants performed in the clinical environment (Level 3: behavior) or changes patient outcomes (Level 4: results). However, the effort to produce such evaluations is commensurate with their potential impact. The information provided by Levels 3 and 4 evaluations has much greater impact than the information provided by the lower levels of evaluation (Levels 1 and 2). The INACSL Standards of Best Practice: SimulationSM Participant Evaluation provides four criteria for Participant Evaluation: Criterion 1: Determine the method of participant evaluation prior to the simulation-based experience. Criterion 2: Simulation-based experiences may be selected for formative evaluation. Criterion 3: Simulation-based experiences may be selected for summative evaluation. Criteria 4: Simulation-based experiences may be selected for high-stakes evaluation. (INACSL, 2016c, p. S27) The required elements for formative, summative, and high-stakes evaluation can be found in the INACSL Standards of Best Practice: SimulationSM Participant Evaluation at www.nursingsimulation.org/article/S1876-1399(16)30130-X/pdf. The requirements become more rigorous from formative to summative and from

148  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

summative to high-stakes evaluation. This is because the consequences of the evaluation for the participant or focus of the evaluation increase from formative to summative and from summative to high-stakes.

Planning the Simulation Evaluation One of the first steps in planning an effective simulation participant evaluation is to identify the purpose and focus of the evaluation. This includes determining the stakes of the evaluation: formative, summative, or high-stakes. Answering the following questions can also help frame the purpose and focus of the evaluation: Which level from Kirkpatrick’s (2019) levels of evaluation should be the focus (reaction, learning, behavior, or results)? Is there a specific learning objective, technical skill, or ability such as clinical judgment that needs to be assessed? Who will be the focus of the evaluation, individuals or groups? Once the purpose and focus of the evaluation have been determined, the next step is to design an effective simulation-based evaluation. If the evaluation is going to include an observation-based assessment such as a checklist or rubric completed by a rater while they watch the simulation, it is essential to ensure the simulation experience includes the opportunity for simulation participants to observably demonstrate their achievement of the learning objective, technical skill, or cognitive, affective, or psychomotor abilities being measured. If the rater cannot see the participant demonstrating the behavior, the rater cannot score it. The simulation should be appropriately timed depending upon the stakes of the evaluation. For example, a formative evaluation may take place in the middle of a course whereas a summative or high-stakes evaluation will likely take place at the end of a course or program of learning. Selecting or developing an appropriate evaluation instrument is the next key step in the evaluation process. The type of evaluation instrument will vary depending upon the objective of the evaluation. For example, a simple procedural checklist may be appropriate for a specific technical skill. If the objective of the evaluation is to measure clinical judgment ability, the simulation scenario must include opportunities for the participant to demonstrate clinical judgment and an instrument such as the Lasater Clinical Judgment Rubric (LCJR) may be applicable (Lasater, 2007). The LCJR is an 11-item rubric based on Tanner’s (2006) Model of Clinical Judgment. Each of the four aspects of clinical judgment, Noticing, Interpreting Responding, and Reflecting are rated using multiple items and a scale ranging from Beginning through Accomplished. The LCJR has demonstrated high reliability and validity (Adamson et al., 2012). Another well-accepted instrument for simulation participant evaluation is the Creighton Competency Evaluation Instrument (CCEI) (Creighton University, 2020). There are 23 items on the CCEI reflecting competencies in Assessment, Communication, Clinical Judgment, and Patient Safety. Scoring options for each competency include Demonstrates, Does not demonstrate, and Not applicable. The CCEI has established high reliability and validity (Hayden et  al., 2014a) and is available for use from the website: nursing.creighton.edu/academics/ competency-evaluation-instrument. Several other resources for identifying appropriate simulation evaluation instruments include the INACSL Repository of Instruments, available at www.inacsl. org/resources/repository-of-instruments/, and the Quality and Safety Education for Nurses (QSEN) Simulation Evaluation website: qsen.org/teaching-strategies/ simulation/simulation-evaluation/.

8. Simulations in Nursing Education: Overview, Essentials, and the Evidence  ■ 149

In recent years, there has been a proliferation of published simulation evaluation instruments (Adamson et al., 2013; Kardong-Edgren et al., 2010) and articles about simulation evaluation in nursing (Ball & Kilger, 2016; Benbenek et al., 2016; Oermann et al., 2016; Stayt et al., 2015; Trail Ross et al., 2017) and the health sciences (Bray et al., 2011; Kogan et al., 2009). The use of an existing simulation evaluation instrument is highly recommended, as the development of a new simulation evaluation instrument requires extensive investment of time and resources. Carefully selecting and training raters to complete the evaluation instrument will help ensure valid and reliable results. This may be as simple as identifying a qualified individual who will complete all the evaluations in one session, or as complex as selecting and training a group of raters and assessing important criteria such as interrater reliability. With these decisions made, the next steps include collecting, interpreting, and reporting evaluation data. Additional guidelines on assessment and evaluation that are relevant to simulation evaluation are provided in Chapters 13 and 14. While many of the characteristics of clinical evaluation are relevant to simulation participant evaluation, simulation offers evaluation opportunities that may not exist in traditional clinical environments. These include the ability to (a) create and standardize scenarios to isolate and elicit specific participant skills and behaviors, (b) allow multiple participants to engage in a given scenario or an individual participant to engage in a given scenario multiple times, and (c) allow a participant to make errors without endangering a patient. Simulation holds enormous promise for participant evaluation beyond augmenting assessment in the clinical environment (Benner et al., 2010). In the future, these evaluations may be implemented as an alternative or adjunct to the current multiple-choice examinations used for academic progression and licensure, or may simply be employed to reflect formative evaluations of participant performance. Thoughtful planning and a focus on higher levels of evaluation that reflect learning, behavior, and results from simulation training are important to the development of simulation pedagogy.

DEVELOPMENTS IN SIMULATION PRACTICES, RESEARCH, AND CREDENTIALING The use of simulation-based education is continuing to grow, and leaders in healthcare education consistently cite simulation as a top research priority (McGaghie et al., 2016). Consequently, the body of literature examining best practices for simulation-based education is expanding rapidly. The following section examines historical and emerging information about best practices in simulation education as well as specific hot-topics such as simulation in graduate nursing education, augmented and virtual reality, and the role of the observer in simulation. Finally, it describes resources for identifying current best practices and pursuing certification and accreditation.

Developments in Simulation Best Practices A classic meta-analysis of best practices that lead to effective learning in simulation was conducted by McGaghie and colleagues in 2010. The article was revisited in 2016 as one of the articles in the journal, Medical Education, as having the most

150  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

impact (McGaghie et al., 2016). The 2010 meta-analysis, while focused on medical education, is highly applicable to nursing education. Through their analysis, the authors identified 12 feature and best practices of simulation-based medical education. These features are listed in Exhibit 8.3. Other meta-analyses examined learning outcomes from simulation and showed positive effects of simulation (Cook, 2014; Lee & Oh, 2015). Seaton et al. (2019) conducted a scoping review of the literature and identified 15 articles demonstrating the contribution of simulation-based training to improvements in patient safety. Although simulation as an educational method has been shown to have a positive effect on learning when compared with other educational modalities, more research is needed in several areas. First, there is a lack of valid and reliable evaluation instruments to measure simulation outcomes (Adamson et al., 2013). Valid and reliable data about how simulation contributes to learning, improved practice, and patient outcomes can only be generated with the help of robust, psychometrically sound measurement instruments and rigorous rater-training (Kardong-Edgren et al., 2017). Next, if simulation is to be used for high-stakes, end-of-program evaluation, further research is needed to determine the type of simulation scenarios as well as reliable and valid tools that best measure these outcomes (Bensfield et al., 2012; Oermann et al., 2016). Finally, there is much interest in determining whether using simulation in an educational program has a positive effect on quality and safety in the healthcare setting. To that end, there is a move to use simulation as a method to evaluate continued competence of healthcare providers on the public’s behalf (Decker et al., 2011; Hinton et al., 2012). Other developments in simulation research include the National Council of State Boards of Nursing’s landmark study exploring the amount of traditional clinical time that could be substituted with high-quality clinical simulation (Hayden et al., 2014b). The national, longitudinal study included three groups of participants (n = 666) across 10 different schools of nursing (five baccalaureate and five associate degree programs) in the United States. One group, serving as the control, had less than 10% of clinical time replaced with clinical simulations, another group had 25%

EXHIBIT 8.3 Feature and Best Practices of Simulation-Based Education 1. Essential role of feedback in simulation-based education 2. Essential role of deliberate practice in simulation-based education 3. Importance of integrating simulation with other learning activities 4. Need for outcome measures that provide valid and reliable data 5. Importance of aligning the level of fidelity with the goals of the simulation 6. Opportunities to use simulation for both skill acquisition and skill maintenance 7. Usefulness of mastery learning strategies for competency-based learning 8. Need for educators to demonstrate and document the degree to which simulation-based learning is transferred into practice 9. Opportunities simulation provides for teaching and practicing important team training principles 10. Opportunities simulation provides for conducting high-stakes evaluation 11. Need for rigorous instructor training 12. Importance of educational and professional context of simulation-based training

8. Simulations in Nursing Education: Overview, Essentials, and the Evidence  ■ 151

of the clinical time replaced with simulations, and a third group had up to 50% of clinical time replaced with simulation across seven different courses. The clinical practice time was replaced with controlled, immersive clinical simulations in four semesters of a generic baccalaureate and an associate degree nursing program. Findings from this national study included: 1. Up to 50% of traditional clinical hours may be replaced with high-quality simulation in all core courses across the prelicensure nursing curriculum. 2. This 50% replacement with simulation can be effectively used in various program types, in different geographic areas in urban and rural settings with good educational outcomes. 3. NCLEX-RN® pass rates were unaffected by the substitution of simulation throughout the curriculum. 4. All groups were equally prepared for entry into practice as a new graduate RNs. 5. Policy decisions about the use and amount of simulation in nursing should depend on the use of best practices in simulation. This study in nursing education has made an impact on how teachers are using and integrating simulations into the nursing curricula. In addition, guidelines for state boards of nursing regulators and for leaders in schools of nursing have been developed, with variance across states and programs (Alexander et al., 2015).

Developments in Simulation Research While this research has been instrumental in changing practice and policy on the use of simulation in undergraduate nursing education, there also have been recent developments in the use of simulation in graduate nursing education (Parry & Fey, 2019). Many leaders agree that simulation must play an integral role in graduate nursing education (Giddens et  al., 2014; LeFlore & Thomas, 2016). However, the National Organization of Nurse Practitioner Faculties (NONPF) only allows simulation to be used in addition to the minimal 500 required traditional clinical hours (Gore & Thomson, 2016). The use of simulation in graduate nursing education as a supplement to clinical hours is widespread and varies geographically and by specialty (Nye et al., 2019). One area of simulation that is growing across levels of nursing education is the use of virtual and augmented reality. From undergraduate nursing prerequisites such as anatomy and physiology, to clinical courses, virtual and augmented reality are likely the wave of the future. The INACSL Standards of Best Practice: SimulationSM Simulation Glossary (INACSL, 2016b) defines virtual reality as, “A computer-generated reality, which allows a learner or group of learners to experience various auditory and visual stimuli. This reality can be experienced through the use of specialized ear and eyewear” (p. S45). The Society for Simulation in Healthcare Simulation Dictionary describes augmented reality as, “A technology that overlays digital computer-generated information on objects or places in the real world for the purpose of enhancing the user experience” (Lioce, 2020, p. 8). Educators and researchers are increasingly interested in the efficacy (Shin et  al., 2019) and cost-effectiveness (Haerling, 2018) of virtual simulation activities. While these computer-assisted simulations will likely not completely replace simulation

152  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

in the physical world, they provide extensive opportunities for improving teaching and learning. Another emerging area of interest in simulation research, practice, and policy is the role of the observer in a simulation-based learning activity. Traditional thought has been that experiential learning required active participation in the simulation. However, recent empirical evidence (Johnson, 2019) and theoretical explorations (Johnson, 2020; Stocker et al., 2014) provide convincing arguments about the value of the observer role in simulation activities. This is an exciting development for educators who struggle to maximize the learning opportunities available within a limited number of simulation activities with a limited number of active roles for learners. As the science of simulation also continues to develop, one of the most up-todate resources for identifying current best practices is the INACSL Standards of Best Practice: SimulationSM. (INACSL, 2016a). There are Standards documents for Simulation Design, Outcomes and Objectives, Facilitation, Debriefing, Participant Evaluation, Professional Integrity, Simulation-enhanced Interprofessional Education, and Operations as well as a Glossary of terms. These Standards are considered “living documents” that continue to evolve as new research emerges making them indispensable resources for educators interested in simulation. All resources are available for free download at: www.inacsl.org/ inacsl-standards-of-best-practice-simulation/.

Developments in Simulation Credentialing There are two types of certification offered by the international organization Society for Simulation in Healthcare (Society for Simulation in Healthcare, 2020). These include certified health simulation educator (CHSE) and advanced certification for health simulation educators (CHSE-A). The purposes for which health professionals might seek these certifications include to: (a) improve healthcare simulation education through the identification of best practices and recognition of practice; (b) improve healthcare simulation by providing standardizations and a pool of knowledge of best practices; (c) provide external validation of individual educator knowledge, skills, and attitudes; and (d) strengthen the organizational community and learner confidence in the quality of education provided in simulation (Society for Simulation in Healthcare [SSH], 2020). These credentials define and recognize achievement of best practices in simulation pedagogy. Simulation holds great promise for increasing the validity of nursing licensure and credentialing processes through incorporation of standardized testing practices involving simulation. Internationally, simulation is used for interdisciplinary healthcare professional licensure examinations and may play a role in such processes within the United States in the future (Holmboe et al., 2011). Simulation centers, local and global, can now pursue accreditation through the SSH. Accreditation of simulation centers, or simulation programs in healthcare, is possible when there is evidence of an organizational group with dedicated resources (personnel and equipment) whose mission is specifically targeted toward improving patient safety and outcomes through assessment, research, advocacy, and education using simulation. Centers and programs can seek SSH accreditation in three areas of simulation: (a) assessment, (b) research, (c) teaching/education, and (d) systems integration (SSH, 2017).

8. Simulations in Nursing Education: Overview, Essentials, and the Evidence  ■ 153

SUMMARY Simulation will continue to play an important role in nursing education. The rapid infusion of the innovative technology associated with high-fidelity manikins, sophistication of gaming, and impact of the use of SPs have all contributed to the rise in simulation use in nursing education today. Despite this increased use, there is continued need for research into best practices for further integration into the nursing curriculum and evaluation of simulation use and impact on healthcare practices of the future.

REFERENCES Adamson, K. A., Gubrud, P., Sideras, S., & Lasater, K. (2012). Assessing the reliability, validity, and use of the lasater clinical judgment rubric: Three approaches. Journal of NursingEducation, 51(2), 66–73. https://doi.org/10.3928/01484834-20111130-03 Adamson, K. A., Kardong-Edgren, S., & Willhaus, J. (2013). An updated review of published simulation evaluation instruments. Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 9(9), e393– e400. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecns.2012.09.004 Alexander, M. A., Durham, C. F., Hooper, J. I., Jeffries, P. R, Goldman, N., KardongEdgren, S., & Tillman, C. (2015). The NCSBN simulation guidelines for prelicensure nursing programs. Journal of Nursing Regulation, 6(3), 39–42. https://doi.org/10.1016/ S2155-8256(15)30783-3 American Heart Association. (2010). Structured and supported debriefing. http://members .nata.org/education/f/ATEC2015/GAS-Model-of-Debriefing.pdf Arafeh, J. M., Hansen, S. S., & Nichols, A. (2010). Debriefing in simulated-based learning: Facilitating a reflective discussion. Journal of Perinatal & Neonatal Nursing, 24(4), 302–309. https://doi.org/10.1097/JPN.0b013e3181f6b5ec Ball, L. S., & Kilger, L. (2016). Analyzing nursing student learning over time in simulation. Nursing Education Perspectives, 37(6), 328–330. https://doi.org/10.1097/01.NEP.0000 000000000039 Bauchat, J. R., Seropian, M., & Jeffries, P. R. (2016). Communication and empathy in the patient-centered care model: Why simulation-based training is not optional. Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 12(8), 356–359. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecns.2016.04.003 Benbenek, M., Dierich, M., Wyman, J., Avery, M., Juve, C., & Miller, J. (2016). Development and implementation of a capstone objective structured clinical examination in nurse practitioner and nurse-midwifery programs. Nurse Educator, 41(6), 288–293. https:// doi.org/10.1097/NNE.0000000000000283 Benner, P. E., Sutphen, M., Leonard, V., & Day, L. (2010). Educating nurses: A call for radical transformation. Jossey-Bass. Bensfield, L., Olech, M., & Horsley, T. (2012). Simulation for high-stakes evaluation in nursing. Nurse Educator, 37(2), 71–74. https://doi.org/10.1097/NNE.0b013e3182461b8c Bradley, C. S. (2018). Confirmatory factor analysis of the debriefing for meaningful learning inventory. Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 14, 15–20. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecns.2017 .09.004 Bradley, C. S. (2019). Impact of training on use of debriefing for meaningful learning. Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 32(C), 13–19. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecns.2019.04.003. Bradley, C. S., & Dreifuerst, K. T. (2016). Pilot testing the debriefing for meaningful learning evaluation scale. Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 12(7), 277–280. https://doi.org/10.1016/ j.ecns.2016.01.008 Bray, B. S., Schwartz, C. R., Odegard, P. S., Hammer, D. P., & Seybert, A. L. (2011). Assessment of human patient simulation-based learning. American Journal of Pharmaceutical Education, 75(10), Article 208. https://doi.org/10.5688/ajpe7510208

154  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

Carlson, K. J., & Gagnon, D. J. (2016, April). Augmented reality integrated simulation education in health care. Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 12(4), 123–127. https:// doi.org/10.1016/j.ecns.2015.12.005 Cheng, A., Eppich, W., Sawyer, T., & Grant, V. (2018). Debriefing: The state of the art and science in healthcare simulation. In D. Nestel, M. Kelly, B. Jolly), & M.Watson (Eds.). Healthcare simulation education: Evidence, theory and practice (pp. 158–164). Wiley. Cheng, A., Grant, V., Robinson, T., Catena, H., Lachapelle, K., Kim, J., . . . Eppich, W. (2016). The promoting excellence and reflective learning in simulation (PEARLS) approach to health care debriefing: A faculty development guide. Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 12(10), 419–428. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecns.2016.05.002 Cook, D. A. (2014). How much evidence does it take? A cumulative meta-analysis of outcomes of simulation-based education. Medical Education, 48(8), 750–760. https:// doi.org/10.1111/medu.12473 Cordeau, M. A. (2010). The lived experience of clinical simulation of novice nursing students. International Journal for Human Caring, 14(2), 9–15. https://doi.org/10.20467/ 1091-5710.14.2.8 Creighton University. (2020, February 27). Creighton competency evaluation instrument. https://nursing.creighton.edu/academics/competency-evaluation-instrument Daniels, A., & Onello, R. (2018). Psychological safety. In S. G. Forneris & M. K. Fey (Eds.), Critical conversations: The NLN guide for teaching thinking (pp. 13–26). Wolters Kluwer. Decker, S., Utterback, V., Thomas, M., Mitchell, M., & Sportsman, S. (2011). Assessing continued competency through simulation: A call for stringent action. Nursing Education Perspectives, 32(2), 120–125. https://doi.org/10.5480/1536-5026-32.2.120 Dreifuerst, K. T. (2009). The essentials of debriefing in simulation learning: A concept analysis. Nursing Education Perspectives, 30(2), 109–114. Dreifuerst, K. T. (2015). Getting started with debriefing for meaningful learning. Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 11(5), 268–275. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecns.2015.01.005 Fanning, R. M., & Gaba, D. M. (2007). The role of debriefing in simulation-based learning. Simulation in Healthcare, 2(2), 115–125. https://doi.org/10.1097/SIH.0b013e3180315539 Foronda, C. L., Alfes, C. M., Dev, P., Kleinheksel, A. J., Nelson, D. A., O’Donnell, J. M., & Samosky, J. T. (2017). Virtually nursing: Emerging technologies in nursing education. Nurse Educator, 42(1), 14–17. https://doi.org/10.1097/NNE.0000000000000295 Gantt, L. T., Overton, S. H., Avery, J., Swanson, M., & Elhammoumi, C. V. (2018). Comparison of debriefing methods and learning outcomes in human patient simulation. Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 17, 7–13. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecns.2017.11.012 Giddens, J. F., Lauzon-Clabo, L., Morton, P. G., Jeffries, P., McQuade-Jones, B., & Ryan, S. (2014). Re-envisioning clinical education for nurse practitioner programs: Themes from a national leaders’ dialogue. Journal of Professional Nursing, 30(3), 273–278. https:// doi.org/10.1016/j.profnurs.2014.03.002 Gore, T., & Thomson, W. (2016). Use of simulation in undergraduate and graduate education. AACN Advanced Critical Care, 27(1), 86–95. https://doi.org/10.4037/ aacnacc2016329 Gu, Y., Zou, Z., & Chen, X. (2017). The effects of vSIM for nursing™ as a teaching strategy on fundamentals of nursing education in undergraduates. Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 13(4), 194–197. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecns.2017.01.005 Haerling, K. (2018). Cost-utility analysis of virtual and mannequin-based simulation. Simulation in Healthcare, 13(1), 33–40. https://doi.org/10.1097/SIH.0000000000000280 Hayden, J., Keegan, M., Kardong-Edgren, S., & Smiley, R. A. (2014a). Reliability and validity testing of the creighton competency evaluation instrument for use in the NCSBN national simulation study. Nursing Education Perspectives, 35(4), 244–252. https://doi.org/10.5480/13-1130.1 Hayden, J., Smiley, R., Alexander, M. A., Kardong-Edgren, S., & Jeffries, P. J. (2014b). The NCSBN national simulation study: A longitudinal, randomized, controlled study

8. Simulations in Nursing Education: Overview, Essentials, and the Evidence  ■ 155

replacing clinical hours with simulation in prelicensure nursing education. Journal of Nursing Regulation, 5(Suppl. 2), S3–S40. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2155-8256(15)30062-4 Herrmann, E. K. (2008). Remembering Mrs. Chase. Before there were smart hospitals and Sim-Men, there was “Mrs. Chase.” Imprint, 55(2), 52. Hinton, J. E., Mays, M. Z., Hagler, D., Randolph, P., Brooks, R., DeFalco, N., & Weberg, D. (2012). Measuring postlicensure competence with simulation: The nursing performance profile. Journal of Nursing Regulation, 3(2), 45–53. https://doi.org/10.1016/ S2155-8256(15)30219-2 Hodgkins, S. R., Marian, K. M., Shrader, S., Averett, E., Crowl, A., Kalender-Rich, J. L., & Johnston, K. (2020). A case of anaphylaxis: IPE simulation as a tool to enhance communication and collaboration. Journal of Interprofessional Education & Practice, 18, 100303. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.xjep.2019.100303 Holmboe, E. M., Rizzolo, M. A., Sachdeva, A. K., Rosenberg, M. D., & Ziv, A. (2011). Simulation-based assessment and the regulation of healthcare professionals. Simulation in Healthcare, 6(Suppl. 7), S58–S62. https://doi.org/10.1097/SIH.0b013e3182283bd7 Husebo, S. E., Dieckmann, P., Rystedt, H., Soreide, E., & Friberg, F. (2013). The relationship between facilitators’ questions and the level of reflection in post simulation debriefing. Simulation in Healthcare, 8(3), 135–142. https://doi.org/10.1097/SIH.0b013e31827cbb5c INACSL Standards Committee. (2016a). INACSL standards of best practice: SimulationSM Simulation design. Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 12(S), S5–S12. https://doi.org/ 10.1016/j.ecns.2016.09.005. INACSL Standards Committee. (2016b, December). INACSL standards of best practice: SimulationSM Simulation glossary. Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 12(S), S39–S47. https:// doi.org/10.1016/j.ecns.2016.09.012. INACSL Standards Committee. (2016c, December). INACSL standards of best practice: SimulationSM Participant evaluation. Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 12(S), S26–S29. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecns.2016.09.009. Institute of Medicine. (2011). The future of nursing: Leading change, advancing health. National Academies Press. Jeffries, P. R. (2016). The NLN Jeffries simulation theory: A monograph. Wolters Kluwer. Jeffries, P. R., Dreifuerst, K. T., & Kardong-Edgren, S. (2015). Faculty development when initiating simulation programs: Lessons learned from the NCSBN simulation study. Journal of Nursing Regulation, 5(3), 1–8. https://doi.org/10.1016/S2155-8256(15)30037-5 Johnson, B. K. (2019, August). Simulation observers learn the same as participants: The evidence. Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 33(C), 26–34. https://doi.org/10.1016/ j.ecns.2019.04.006. Johnsonn B. K. (2020). Observational experiential learning: Theoretical support for observer roles in health care simulation. Journal of Nursing Education, 59(1), 7–14. https://doi.org/ 10.3928/01484834-20191223-03 Kardong-Edgren, S., Adamson, K., & Fitzgerald, C. (2010). A review of currently published evaluation instruments for human patient simulation. Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 6(1), e25–e35. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecns.2009.08.004 Kardong-Edgren, S., Oermann, M. H., Rizzolo, M., & Odom-Maryon, T. (2017). Establishing inter- and intrarater reliability for high-stakes testing using simulation. Nursing Education Perspectives, 38(2), 63–68. https://doi.org/10.1097/01.NEP.0000000000000114 Kirkpatrick, J., & Kirkpatrick, W. (2019). An introduction to the new world Kirkpatrick model. Kirkpatrick Partners. Kogan, J. R., Holmboes, H., & Hauer, K. E. (2009). Tools for direct observation and assessment of clinical skills of medical trainees. Journal of the American Medical Association, 302(12), 1316–1326. https://doi.org/10.1001/jama.2009.1365 Kopp, W., & Hanson, M. (2012). High-fidelity and gaming simulations enhance nursing education in end-of-life care. Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 8(3), e97–e102. https:// doi.org/10.1016/j.ecns.2010.07.005

156  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

Lasater, K. (2007). Clinical judgment development: Using simulation to create an assessment rubric. Journal of Nursing Education, 46(11), 496–503. https://doi.org/ 10.3928/01484834-20071101-04 Lee, J., & Oh, P. J. (2015). Effects of the use of high-fidelity human simulation in nursing education: A meta-analysis. Journal of Nursing Education, 54, 501–507. https://doi.org/ 10.3928/01484834-20150814-04 LeFlore, J. L., & Thomas, P. E. (2016). Educational changes to support advanced practice nursing education. Journal of Perinatal & Neonatal Nursing, 30(3), 187–190. https:// doi.org/10.1097/JPN.0000000000000201 Lioce, L., Downing, D., Chang, T. P., Robertson, J. M., Anderson, M., Diaz, D. A., Spain, A. E., & the Terminology and Concepts Working Group. (2020). Healthcare simulation dictionary–Second edition. Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality. AHRQ Publication No. 20-0019. https://doi.org/10.23970/simulationv2 Loke, J. C. F., Lee, B. K., Loh, S., & Noor, A. M. (2020). High fidelity full sized human patient simulation manikins: Effects on decision making skills of nursing students. Journal of Nursing Education and Practice, 4(7), 31-40. https://doi.org/10.5430/ jnep.v4n7p31 MacLean, S., Geddes, F., Kelly, M., & Della, P. (2019). Realism and presence in simulation: Nursing student perceptions and learning outcomes. Journal of Nursing Education, 58(6), 330–338. https://doi.org/10.3928/01484834-20190521-03 McGaghie, W., Issenberg, S., Petrusa, E., & Scalese, R. (2010). A critical review of simulation-based medical education research: 2003–2009. Medical Education, 44(1), 50–63. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.1365-292009.03547.x McGaghie, W., Issenberg, S., Petrusa, E., & Scalese, R. (2016). Revisiting ‘A critical review of simulation‐based medical education research: 2003–2009’. Medical Education, 50(10), 986–991. https://doi.org/10.1111/medu.12795 National League for Nursing. (2005). Simulation design scale. http://www.nln.org/docs/ default source/professional-development-programs/nln-instrument_simulation-designscale.pdf?sfvrsn=0 Nye, C., Campbell, S. H., Hebert, S. H., Short, C., & Thomas, M. (2019, January). Simulation in advanced practice nursing programs: A North-American survey. Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 26(C), 3–10. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecns.2018.09.005. Oermann, M. H., Kardong-Edgren, S., & Rizzolo, M. A. (2016). Summative simulated-based assessment in nursing programs. Journal of Nursing Education, 55(6), 323–328. https:// doi.org/10.3928/01484834-20160516-04 Onello, R., & Forneris, S. G. (2018). Clinical conversations. In S. G. Forneris & M. K. Fey (Eds), Critical conversations: The NLN guide for teaching thinking (pp. 49–58). Wolters Kluwer. Overstreet, M. (2010). E-chats: The seven components of nursing debriefing. Journal of Continuing Education in Nursing, 41(12), 538–539. https://doi.org/10.3928/0022012420101122-05 Owen, H. (2012). Early use of simulation in medical education. Simulation in Healthcare, 7(2), 102–116. https://doi.org/10.1097/SIH.0b013e3182415a91 Palaganas, J. C., Fey, M., & Simon, R. (2016). Structured debriefing in simulation-based education. AACN Advanced Critical Care, 27(1), 78–85. https://doi.org/10.4037/ aacnacc2016328 Parry, M., & Fey, M. (2019). Simulation in advanced practice nursing. Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 26, 1–2. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecns.2018.11.004 Pauly-O’Neill, S., Prion, S., & Lambton, J. (2013, April). How often do BSN students participate in pediatric critical events during simulation and hospital rotations? Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 9(4), e113–e120. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecns.2011.11.006. Rizzolo, M. A., Kardong-Edgren, S., Oermann, M., & Jeffries, P. R. (2015). The national league for nursing project to explore the use of simulation for high stakes assessment:

8. Simulations in Nursing Education: Overview, Essentials, and the Evidence  ■ 157

Process, outcomes, and recommendations. Nursing Education Perspectives, 36(5), 299–303. https://doi.org/10.5480/15-1639 Rourke, S. (2020). How does virtual reality simulation compare to simulated practice in the acquisition of clinical psychomotor skills for pre-registration student nurses? A systematic review. International Journal of Nursing Studies, 102, 103466. https:// doi.org/10.1016/j.ijnurstu.2019.103466 Rudolph, J. W., Simon, R., Rivard, P., Dufresne, R. L., & Raemer, D. B. (2007). Debriefing with good judgment: Combining rigorous feedback with genuine inquiry. Anesthesiology Clinics, 25(2), 361–376. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.anclin.2007.03.007 Rutherford-Hemming, T., Alfes, C. M., & Breymier, T. L. (2019). A systematic review of the use of standardized patients as a simulation modality in nursing education. Nursing Education Perspectives, 40(2), 84–90. https://doi.org/10.1097/01.NEP.0000000000000401 Rutherford-Hemming, T., Kardong-Edgren, S., Gore, T., Ravert, P., & Rizzolo, M. A. (2014). High-stakes evaluation: Five years later. Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 10(12), 605–610. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecns.2014.09.009 Ryan, C., Walshe, N., Gaffney, R., Shanks, A., Burgoyne, L., & Wiskin, C. (2010). Using standardized patients to assess communication skills in medical and nursing students. BMC Medical Educator, 10(24), 1–8. https://doi.org/10.1186/1472-6920-10-24 Schön, D. A. (1983). The reflective practitioner: How professionals think in action. Basic Books. Seaton, P., Levett-Jones, T., Cant, R., Cooper, S., Kelly, M., Mckenna, L., Ng, L., & Bogossian, F. (2019). Exploring the extent to which simulation-based education addresses contemporary patient safety priorities: A scoping review. Collegian, 26(1), 194–203. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.colegn.2018.04.006 Shin, H., Rim, D., Kim, H., Park, S., & Shon, S. (2019). Educational characteristics of virtual simulation in nursing: An integrative review. Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 37(C), 18–28. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecns.2019.08.002 Shinnick, M. A., Woo, M. A., Horwich, T. B., & Steadman, R. (2011). Debriefing: The most important component in simulation. Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 7(3), e105–e111. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecns.2010.11.005 Simon, R., Raemer, D. B., & Rudolph, J.W. (2011). Debriefing assessment for simulation in healthcare (DASH)© – rater version, short form. Center for Medical Simulation. https:// harvardmedsim.org/wp-content/uploads/2017/01/DASH.RV.ShortScoresheet.2011.pdf Smith, S. J., Farra, S. L., Ulrich, D. L., Hodgson, E., Nicely, S., & Mickle, A. (2018). Effectiveness of two varying levels of virtual reality simulation. Nursing Education Perspectives, 39(6), E10–E15. https://doi.org/10.1097/01.NEP.0000000000000369 Society for Simulation in Healthcare. (2017). SSH accreditation of healthcare simulation programs. https://www.ssih.org/Credentialing/Accreditation Society for Simulation in Healthcare. (2020). SSH certifications. https://www.ssih.org/ Credentialing/Certification Stayt, L. C., Merriman, C., Ricketts, B., Morton, S., & Simpson, T. (2015). Recognizing and managing a deteriorating patient: A randomized controlled trial investigating the effectiveness of clinical simulation in improving clinical performance in undergraduate nursing students. Journal of Advanced Nursing, 71(11), 2563–2574. https://doi.org/ 10.1111/jan.12722 Stocker, M., Burmester, M., & Allen, M. (2014). Optimisation of simulated team training through the application of learning theories: A debate for a conceptual framework. BMC Medical Education, 14(1), 69. https://doi.org/10.1186/1472-6920-14-69 Stokes-Parish, J., Duvivier, R., & Jolly, B. (2019). Expert opinions on the authenticity of moulage in simulation: A Delphi study. Advances in Simulation, 4(1), 16. https://doi.org/ 10.1097/01.NEP.0000000000000095 Sullivan, N., Swoboda, S. M., Breymier, T., Lucas, L., Sarasnick, J., Rutherford-Hemming, T., Budhathoki, C., & Kardong-Edgren, S. (2019). Emerging evidence toward a 2:1 clinical to simulation ratio: A study comparing the traditional clinical and simulation settings. Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 30(C), 34–41. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecns.2019.03.003

158  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

Thomas, C., Bertram, E., & Allen, R. (2012). Preparing for transition to professional practice: Creating a simulated blog and reflective journaling activity. Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 8(3), e87–e95. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecns.2010.07.004 Trail Ross, M. E., Otto, D. A., & Stewart Helton, A. (2017). Benefits of simulation and roleplaying to teach performance of functional assessments. Nursing Education Perspectives, 38, 47–48. https://doi.org/10.1097/01.NEP.0000000000000095 Verkuyl, M., Atack, L., Mastrilli, P., & Romaniuk, D. (2016). Virtual gaming to develop students’ pediatric nursing skills: A usability test. Nurse Education Today, 46, 81–85. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.nedt.2016.08.024 Vincent, M. A., Sheriff, S., & Mellott, S. (2015). The efficacy of high-fidelity simulation on psychomotor clinical performance improvement of undergraduate nursing students. Computers, Informatics, Nursing, 33(2), 78–84. https://doi.org/10.1097/CIN.000000 0000000136

9 Weaving Interprofessional Education into Nursing Curricula Karen T. Pardue, Shelley Cohen Konrad, and Dawne-Marie Dunbar

OBJECTIVES 1. Describe foundational frameworks for interprofessional education (IPE) 2. Identify core competencies for IPE 3. Examine the content and processes for integrating IPE into nursing curricula 4. Describe teaching strategies for IPE in the classroom, simulation, and clinical learning environments

INTRODUCTION The transformation of healthcare, coupled with alarming patient care outcome data, heralded a new mandate to prepare nurses for collaborative team-based models of care. The Institute of Medicine (IOM) had systematically examined the U.S. healthcare system for decades, noting concerns about care quality, patient safety, and astounding rates of medical error. Ineffective communication and poor collaboration are practices contributing to system failure and adverse patient care outcomes (Donaldson, Corrigan, & Kohn, 2000; Greiner & Knebel, 2003; IOM Committee on Quality of Health Care in America, 2001; Makary & Daniel, 2016). The IOM called on educators to respond by reforming health profession curricula to include interprofessional (IP), collaborative team-based competencies as a requisite part of academic preparation (Greiner & Knebel, 2003). The nursing profession has additionally been challenged through recommendations advanced in the IOM Future of Nursing report (Committee on the Robert Wood Johnson Foundation Initiative on the Future of Nursing at the Institute of Medicine, 2011). This report sets forth a blueprint for the profession to actively engage in leading healthcare reform and improving the nation’s health. To accomplish this, faculty need to prepare all nurses to function at the highest level commensurate with their degree, and this preparation should include education with other members of the

160  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

healthcare team (Committee on the Robert Wood Johnson Foundation Initiative on the Future of Nursing at the Institute of Medicine, 2011; Gergerich et al., 2019). Such educational opportunities support the cultivation of nurses’ abilities to contribute to and lead healthcare delivery. This educational reform presents a daunting challenge, as the configuration of most nursing, medicine, and allied health programs reflects singular siloed programs of study. Such design results in nursing and health profession graduates who have little to no knowledge of what their respective colleagues do, and demonstrate little to no skill or experience in IP communication and ways of effectively working together on teams. This chapter examines the content and processes for weaving IPE and collaborative learning into nursing curricula. Foundational frameworks are provided, along with examination of didactic, simulation, and clinical learning experiences that promote collaborative practice capabilities.

FOUNDATIONAL FRAMEWORKS Defining Interprofessional Education Interprofessional education (IPE) is defined as involving two or more disciplines that “learn with, from, and about each other to improve collaboration and the q ­ uality of care and services” (Centre for the Advancement of Interprofessional Education [CAIPE], 2016). Based in the United Kingdom, CAIPE was established in 1987 and represents one of the initial organizations to formally propose a definition of IPE (Buring et al., 2009). The World Health Organization (WHO) augments the CAIPE definition, contending that IPE occurs when students “representing two or more professions learn about, from, and with each other to enable effective collaboration and improve health outcomes for patients and populations they serve” (WHO, 2010, p. 13). These perspectives and definitions are well accepted and frequently referenced in the IPE literature.

Interprofessional Collaboration The word collaboration is derived from the Latin word collaborare, meaning “to labor, to work with and together” (LatDict, 2016). Collaboration requires active engagement between participants, characterized by a reciprocal giving and receiving of information, and mutuality of a working relationship occurring within an environment of trust and respect. IP collaborative practice enables health professionals to engage and interact with one another, and with patients and their families, to render safe, high-quality care (WHO, 2010). The Interprofessional Education Collaborative (IPEC) Expert Panel report published in 2011 advances critical tenets of patient-centered, safe, and engaged practice. This landmark document instructs that the way healthcare is delivered is as important to the outcome as the type of care that is provided (IPEC Expert Panel, 2011, p. 4). It reflects a new practice orientation, focusing on the contribution of communication, teamwork, problem-solving, and conflict resolution in achieving optimal patient health outcomes. This renders a new nursing education directive, extending the curriculum beyond teaching what nurses do and including intentional learning experiences with other health disciplines to prepare a future collaborative workforce.

9. Weaving Interprofessional Education into Nursing Curricula  ■ 161

Core Competencies for Interprofessional Practice In 2009, six national health profession associations established a collaborative to examine the nature and development of IPE. The initial membership included ­representatives from dentistry, nursing, medicine, osteopathic medicine, pharmacy, and public health. The collaborative issued an expert panel report in 2011, asserting that the goal of IP collaborative practice is the provision of safe, high-quality, patient- and family-centered care. The report identified four broad competency domains as characterizing IP collaborative practice: ■ ■ ■ ■

Values and Ethics for IP Practice Roles and Responsibilities for Collaborative Practice IP Communication Practices IP Teamwork and Team-Based Practice

Each of these broad competency domains is accompanied by eight to 11 specific subcompetency statements. These four competency domains were reaffirmed in 2016 when IPEC issued an updated report. Membership in the collaborative has expanded since 2011, now including the additional disciplines of physical therapy, physician assistant, podiatric medicine, optometry, social work, and veterinary medicine (IPEC, 2016). The updated report reconceptualized IP collaboration as the primary central domain under which each of the four major competencies and associated subcompetencies are organized (IPEC, 2016, p. 4). Additionally, the updated version places greater emphasis on population health outcomes to realize health system quality and safety improvements (IPEC, 2016). These revisions reflect changes in the healthcare environment occurring through the enactment of the 2010 Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act. The integration of the Triple Aim (Berwick et al., 2008), and associated goals for improving patient satisfaction with care, improving the health of populations, and reducing the cost of care, has sharpened the focus toward aggregate health (Brandt et al., 2014; Earnest & Brandt, 2014). Table 9.1 presents each of the four major IP competency domains and highlights sample subcompetency statements.

TABLE 9.1  FOUR INTERPROFESSIONAL CORE COMPETENCY DOMAINS WITH SAMPLE SUBCOMPETENCY STATEMENTS IPEC Competency Domain and Definition Values/Ethics for Interprofessional Practice: Work with individuals of other professions to maintain a climate of mutual respect and shared values. (p. 11)

Sample Subcompetency Statement Embrace the cultural diversity and individual differences that characterize patients, populations, and the health team. Act with honesty and integrity in relationships with patients, families, communities, and other team members. (p. 11) (continued )

162  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

TABLE 9.1  FOUR INTERPROFESSIONAL CORE COMPETENCY DOMAINS WITH SAMPLE SUBCOMPETENCY STATEMENTS (CONTINUED) IPEC Competency Domain and Definition

Sample Subcompetency Statement

Roles and Responsibilities for Collaborative Practice: Use knowledge of one’s own role and those of other professions to appropriately assess and address the healthcare needs of patients and to promote and advance the health of populations (p. 12)

Explain the roles and responsibilities of other providers and how the team works together to provide care, promote health, and prevent disease. Recognize one’s limitations in skills, knowledge, and abilities. (p. 12)

Interprofessional Communication: Communicate with patients, families, communities, and professionals in health and other fields in a responsive and responsible manner that supports a team approach to the promotion and maintenance of health and the prevention and treatment of disease. (p. 13)

Choose effective communication tools and techniques, including information systems and communication technologies, to facilitate discussions and interactions that enhance team function. Listen actively, and encourage ideas and opinions of other team members. (p. 13)

Interprofessional Teamwork and Team-Based Practice: Apply relationship-building values and principles of team dynamics to perform effectively in different team roles to plan, deliver, and evaluate patient-/population-centered care and population health programs and policies that are safe, timely, efficient, effective, and equitable. (p. 14)

Describe the process of team development and the roles and practices of effective teams. Engage self and others to constructively manage disagreements about values, roles, goals, and actions that arise among health and other professionals and with patients, families, and community members. (p. 14)

Source: Interprofessional Education Collaborative. (2016). Core competencies for interprofessional collaborative practice: 2016 update. Author.

In addition to the U.S. competencies, the Canadian Interprofessional Health Collaborative (CIHC) identifies collaborative leadership as critical to best practice. The competency of collaborative leadership is grounded in relational strength, whereby the healthcare team jointly determines the member most equipped for leadership based upon the needs of a given situation (CIHC, 2010). Facilitation is at the heart of collaborative leadership, as are value and respect for every team member. Skills for collaborative leadership include soliciting input from all relevant members; listening to concerns, especially those that may affect patient safety; and modeling support for working together. Leaders are responsible for setting a culture of psychological safety in which all participants feel comfortable providing input. Inherent in this culture is the belief that the learning and practice environment is safe for sharing ideas and/or offering opinions without fear of negative repercussions (Edmondson, 2019; Edmondson et al., 2016). Collaborative leaders use good communication methods to assure that all members of the team know what is expected of them in their execution of patient care. As nurses commonly assume

9. Weaving Interprofessional Education into Nursing Curricula  ■ 163

care coordination roles in both inpatient and outpatient settings, collaborative leadership presents a final important IP competency for inclusion in nursing education.

THEORETICAL FRAMEWORKS TO SUPPORT INTERPROFESSIONAL EDUCATION IPE differs from disciplinary education in that the primary focus is on dialogue and interaction among learners, as opposed to teachers imparting information and specific content. As such, IPE is grounded in social engagement within the context of learning, and numerous theories are useful for nurse educators when designing and implementing shared learning experiences.

Theories for Designing Interprofessional Education Learning Experiences No one theory is universally accepted for IPE; rather, most endeavors reflect a blend of Education and Social Engagement Theory to achieve collaborative learning outcomes (Reeves & Hean, 2013). Principles of adult learning provide solid underpinning for IPE (Barr, 2013; Oandasan & Reeves, 2005). Knowles advanced the concept of andragogy and the belief that engaged adult learners are motivated and assume responsibility for their education experience (Bertrand, 2003). Adults seek relevant educational opportunities, making connections between new learning and their current and past life experience (Bertrand, 2003). Mezirow (1998) builds on adult learning principles, asserting that critical reflection and reflexivity (knowing where knowledge comes from) is an essential practice for transformative education. Critical reflection is founded on the premise that there are no simple solutions to complex problems, and this paradigm is particularly true in considering care for patients and families living with chronic health conditions. Faculty support critical reflection through incorporating introspective, contextual, and active learning strategies. Introspection challenges the student to think deeply and critically about personally held beliefs and assumptions (Mezirow, 1998). IP learning opportunities, which include building in a pause or an intentional time for students to engage in a free write (writing about their experiences for a set period of time without concern about format or grammar) are two ways faculty can foster introspection and critical reflection. Contextual thinking asks learners to consider people’s health and wellness on a broader scale: for example, how economic, cultural, or social factors affect one’s ability to access or adhere to care recommendations. Active learning strategies allow students to share their thoughts and reflections with one another, thereby rendering robust dialogue or discourse. When needed, faculty facilitators guide or steer students to elicit the views and knowledge of others, compare evidence, and test out arguments, thus promoting educational transformation (Mezirow, 1998). These constructs are consistent with IPE and are useful considerations for educators developing IPE programming. Kolb (1984) advances the Theory of Experiential Learning, proposing that learning occurs when students move through four discrete domains in the learning cycle. Kolb defines these learning cycle phases as: concrete experience (new material is presented); reflective observation (observing, considering, and mentally reviewing the new material); abstract conceptualization (analysis and generation of questions about the material); and active experimentation (application or testing of new

164  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

learning to the real-world situation). Creating IPE experiences that incorporate each stage of the cycle supports effective and lasting learning. Kolb’s Experiential Learning Theory provides yet another helpful framework for nurse educators in designing IPE learning opportunities. Social engagement models support Classic Education Theory in the development of IPE. Contact hypothesis, as proposed by Hewstone and Brown (1986), asserts that attitudinal change is fostered among individuals when participants have the opportunity to actively learn together. Learning with others cultivates new relationships and results in the questioning of negative stereotypes and assumptions as new associations are formed. Making connections supports the discovery of professional similarities and differences, thereby promoting mutuality and respect (Pettigrew, 1998). When integrating Contact Hypothesis Theory into the design of IPE, it is important that learners be of comparable stages of development, hold equal status in the learning experience, and be bound together via common educational goals (Hean & Dickinson, 2005). Communities of practice reflect Constructivist Theory and the active role learners play in building new knowledge and capabilities together (Wenger-Trayner & Wenger-Trayner, 2015). Communities of practice involve three characteristics: the domain (common goal of learning), community (health profession students or clinicians), and practice (competencies and approaches for quality patient outcomes). This orientation advances collaborative problem-solving to address “real-world” issues, where participants engage in peer-to-peer learning, active questioning, and robust discussion (Wenger-Trayner & Wenger-Trayner, 2015). This approach supports future IP collaborative practice, developing students’ communication, teamwork, problem-solving, and critical-thinking skills. Relational learning methods recognize that information sharing and processing are best accomplished in the context of interpersonal relationships. Environments using relational pedagogies prioritize psychological safety offering student opportunities to practice together, be curious, tolerate differences among them, and use these differences to develop, assess, and formulate plans that lead to productive patient outcomes. Relational learning builds capacities to address and manage difficult encounters with patients and also with colleagues. Students are encouraged to work together in a complementary rather than competing fashion with the patient’s health as a common goal. Successful relational learning models the kind of teamwork that translates well into future workplace alliances (Edmondson, 2019; Edmondson et al., 2016). Cultural sensitivity and recognition of social determinants affecting patient care are critical aspects of relational learning and align well with IPEC’s (2016) expanded emphasis on population health. Infusion of cultural sensitivity extends to how students discuss patients and families as well as to the how differences between disciplinary cultures are managed. Cases for IP learning are designed with ­sociocultural factors and health disparities in mind; students are prompted to ­consider how ethnicity, gender, class, race, life experience, and population factors affect patient health and care. They are guided to examine the patient’s access to care, transportation, literacy, and perceptions of stigma and to consider how such factors might affect effective communication and the team’s relationship with the patient. Differing ideologies, ethics, and protocols between health professions are often sources of conflict (Edmondson et al., 2016). In relational learning, these potential domains of contention are acknowledged and openly addressed to avert difficulties that thwart collaboration and IP practices.

9. Weaving Interprofessional Education into Nursing Curricula  ■ 165

Model for Conceptualizing Process of Interprofessional Student Learning In combination, these theories provide a foundation for shaping and implementing collaborative learning. The University of British Columbia (UBC) offers a helpful model for conceptualizing the process of IPE student learning (Charles et al., 2010). The model serves as a guide to faculty in developing IP learning experiences across the curriculum. The initial stage in the UBC Model is exposure. Exposure learning is introductory and provides a foundation for success in future IP collaborations (Charles et al., 2010). Exposure learning is appropriate for novice prelicensure learners and involves bringing students together from diverse professions to begin to learn about collaborative practice. Sample topics reflective of the exposure stage of IPE might include: ■ ■ ■ ■

■ ■

What is IP practice? Why does IP collaborative practice matter? What are the roles and responsibilities of various health profession disciplines? What are the myths and/or stereotypes associated with different health professions? What are critical elements inherent in high-functioning teams? What are communication tools and techniques that promote optimal team functioning?

Immersion represents the second stage in the UBC Model, involving more advanced learners with some experience from clinical practice settings (Charles et al., 2010). The immersion stage challenges students to work with each other, using their emerging professional knowledge and skills to determine how disciplinary roles and collaborative teamwork contribute to high-quality patient and family care delivery (Charles et al., 2010). Examples of immersion learning experiences include: ■ ■ ■

■

IP teams of students analyzing a complex or unfolding case study; IP disciplines participating together in a shared high-fidelity simulation; diverse health profession disciplines examining a standardized patient (patient actor); and IP disciplines coordinating a clinical plan of care with a patient.

Mastery is the final stage of learning conceptualized in the UBC Model (Charles et al., 2010). The mastery phase represents advanced practice and is generally limited to postlicensure learners in graduate or doctoral education, or practicing ­clinicians engaged in continuing education. Mastery is realized through substantial clinical practice, and involves the ability to engage in high-level critical thinking and ­analysis, as well as deep self-reflection on one’s own IP experiences (Charles et al., 2010).

CURRICULAR CONSIDERATIONS Nurse educators often take the lead in championing IP learning opportunities, and such curricular integration requires significant planning and collaboration with disciplines outside of nursing. The following are a select number of pedagogical considerations essential for the successful design and implementation of IPE.

166  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

Learning Outcomes A first step in successful curriculum design involves the identification of desired learning outcomes from collaborative experiences (Pardue, 2015). Nurse educators need to explicitly determine the knowledge, skills, abilities, and/or attitudinal changes students will demonstrate at the conclusion of IPE. These capabilities likely address the four IPEC competency domains (IPEC, 2016), including knowledge of disciplinary roles and responsibilities, effective communication, collaborative teamwork, and ethics for IP practice. For that reason, it is recommended that the subcompetencies as explicated in the IPEC competency report (2016) be used as a blueprint for identifying desired student learning outcomes (Pardue, 2015). Faculty planners need to engage in extensive collaboration to ensure collective affirmation of agreedupon outcomes. The IPEC competencies presented in Table 9.1 provide examples of outcomes-based learning achieved through IPE. Nurse educators need to carefully plan and scaffold IPE learning to achieve desired outcomes. Consistent with any curriculum planning, IP knowledge, skills, and abilities should be formally introduced at an appropriate time for learning (exposure stage), and subsequently reinforced later on in the curriculum through experiential opportunities (immersion stage). Speakman (2017) advocates that nurse educators create a systematic plan for IPE, thereby formally mapping learner participation in IPE. Table 9.2 provides a sample curriculum map addressing IPE. TABLE 9.2  CURRICULUM MAPPING FOR IPE: SAMPLE SCAFFOLDING OF EXPOSURE AND IMMERSION LEARNING IPE Competency

Program Timeline (example)

Values and Ethics for Interprofessional Practice

Fall, Year 1

Roles and Responsibilities for Collaborative Practice

Interprofessional Communication

Interprofessional Teamwork and Team-Based Practice

Didactic/Exposure Didactic/Exposure Didactic/Exposure

Spring, Year 1 Didactic/Exposure Immersion/ Simulation Experience

Immersion/ Simulation Experience

Immersion/ Simulation Experience

Fall, Year 2

Immersion/Adult Clinical Rotation

Immersion/Adult Clinical Rotation

Immersion/Adult Clinical Rotation

Spring, Year 2 Immersion/Clinical Immersion/ Rotation Specialty Clinical Rotation

Immersion/ Specialty Clinical Rotation

Immersion/ Specialty Clinical Rotation

Immersion/ Simulation Experience

IPE, interprofessional education. Source: Data from Charles, G., Bainbridge, L., & Gilbert, J. (2010). The University of British Columbia model of interprofessional education. Journal of Interprofessional Care, 24(1), 9–18. https://doi.org/10.3109/13561820 903294549.

9. Weaving Interprofessional Education into Nursing Curricula  ■ 167

LEARNER CONSIDERATIONS Identifying potential programs and participants for collaborative education is a ­second early consideration in IP learning. This process can be challenging, as health profession education is disciplinarily nuanced, thereby reflecting diverse points in time for student readiness for IPE. Thibault (2011) referred to this mutual time for IPE readiness as curricular “sweet spots,” requiring faculty to become well acquainted with their partnering program(s) in order to ascertain parallel points in time for student preparation. This design also renders “asymmetrical” education encounters (Thibault, 2011), bringing together students from dissimilar academic years and even different degree levels (e.g., prelicensure nursing and doctoral physical therapy) for IPE. These learner considerations require intensive coordination between nursing faculty and other disciplines in planning and delivering effective IPE for all students. Class size, disciplinary balance, and participant stability are other important learner considerations (Oandasan & Reeves, 2005; Reeves et al., 2007). Class size addresses the actual number of participants for collaborative education: How large are the disciplines being assembled, and is there space to accommodate shared learning? In planning for IPE, it is not necessary to include all professions in all events; such design becomes unwieldy and does not mirror actual clinical practice. To promote active student engagement, groups are generally divided into smaller subgroups or teams. There is disagreement in the IPE literature as to the appropriate size for optimal small group interaction, with scholars generally recommending that membership involve five to no more than 10 participants Oandasan & Reeves, 2005; Reeves et al., 2007). Disciplinary balance presents a second consideration, as an equal mix of ­disciplines serves to foster equality of voice and equitable interaction. Ensuring a distributed composition of students supports team functioning and negates the opportunity for dominance by any one profession (Cohen Konrad et al., 2017; Oandasan & Reeves, 2005; Reeves et al., 2007). Participant stability is yet another important pedagogical aspect, as a one-time engagement in an IPE endeavor differs quite significantly from repeated collaborative learning with familiar peers (Oandasan & Reeves, 2005; Reeves et al., 2007). The opportunity for multiple interactions between learners supports team development and provides an authentic learning environment to achieve the goals of cross-disciplinary communication, knowledge of one another, professional respect, and teamwork. Timing for IPE is another feature requiring attention by nurse faculty and their IP colleagues. In the IPE community, there is robust debate as to the best time to introduce collaborative learning. On the one hand, novice learners typically have limited clinical experience, rendering concepts such as team functioning, conflict resolution, and professional respect abstract and without meaningful context (Oandasan & Reeves, 2005). Alternatively, the early introduction of IPE can reduce disciplinary stereotyping and promote a culture of healthy dialogue and collaboration among all professions (Begley, 2009; Stadick, 2020). Students respond favorably to IPE when they see the relevance of the experience to their current or future professional practice (Oandasan & Reeves, 2005). Pardue (2013) describes the introduction of IPE in the first semester of undergraduate study, whereby students begin to explore roles and responsibilities of various disciplines. This reflects introductory IPE learning with immediate relevance, as first-semester students may still be introspectively

168  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

wrestling with their decision about their major. This introduction parallels the UBC Model of exposure, laying a foundation for future collaborative learning once students gain more knowledge about their own profession (Charles et al., 2010). The process of helping students to learn with, from, and about each other requires active social learning pedagogical approaches (Begley, 2009; Oandasan & Reeves, 2005; Reeves et al., 2007). The key is promoting student interaction, reflecting an instructional strategy that may be unfamiliar to faculty. Faculty are typically well acquainted with lecture and the role of imparting information to students. In contrast, successful IPE relies on students interacting with each other; the focus in IPE centers on learner engagement and not on faculty transmitting content. Numerous active learning strategies foster the development of collaboration abilities, including small groups of students analyzing case studies, engaging in role-play, interacting with standardized patients, completing simulations, participating in web quests, and working together on a team activity.

FACULTY ROLE The constructivist theories that underpin IPE inform the faculty role and associated approaches to instruction. As stated, faculty offer direction, not didactics, when engaged in collaborative learning. Faculty invite students to work and think together, during which time participants ask questions, examine multiple perspectives, and explore areas of similarities, differences, and potential conflict. Faculty use the skills of facilitation, paying close attention to team formation and group dynamics to anticipate and intervene with any issues that may arise (Oandasan & Reeves, 2005). Facilitators are responsible for creating, modeling, and enacting a nonthreatening environment to support full engagement among all participants (Reeves et al., 2007). Most faculty are comfortable and familiar with traditional lecture and single-discipline teaching, and IP facilitation is not necessarily intuitive. For that reason, it is recommended that faculty be afforded additional training and support in IPE facilitation. Exhibit 9.1 offers select tips and techniques that support successful IPE facilitation. In addition to facilitation, faculty model collaboration by interacting cross-­ professionally with colleagues during IPE instruction. The rationale for intentional faculty interaction is based on the observation that students regard IPE seriously when they see their own instructors actively engaged in communication, teamwork, and problem-solving—the very behaviors targeted through IP learning. Conversely,

EXHIBIT 9.1 Tips and Techniques for Successful Facilitation Are there common, agreed-upon learning objectives? Are two or more professions involved? Are the sessions interactive? Are contributions of different members encouraged? Has psychological safety been established? Are learners, not teachers, doing most of the talking? Are IP communication strategies employed? Is there time planned for a focused debrief based on IP competencies? Are faculty trained in IP facilitation?

9. Weaving Interprofessional Education into Nursing Curricula  ■ 169

when faculty are disengaged in IPE instruction, their students assume a similar posture and the experience is rendered “soft” and “unimportant.” Opportunities for faculty role modeling are an important consideration in planning and implementing IPE. The technique of debriefing reflects a constructivist method consistent with IP learning. Debriefing involves revisiting important conversations, examining changed assumptions, and discussing new insights gleaned from a given educational experience. IPE commonly culminates in a formal debriefing, and this may be conducted by instructors or alternatively by more senior students. Oftentimes, advanced students are well-equipped to debrief an IPE experience, providing powerful role modeling for learners. The practice of debriefing and summarizing all that transpired during an interactive IPE session reflects one method for successfully reinforcing new knowledge. Facilitators should be mindful that debriefing has a focus on IP competencies and behaviors versus discipline-specific clinical content. The art of debriefing is discussed in more detail later in this chapter in the context of simulation.

DIDACTIC LEARNING Didactic learning is a common instructional format for introducing nursing students to IPE and reflects UBC exposure-level learning. A didactic approach supports a uniform educational experience for all participants and can be delivered in numerous ways. For example, some institutions require that all incoming students take part in an IPE session as part of their overall orientation. A mandatory session acknowledges the critical importance and integration of IPE, explicitly recognizing that collaborative competencies are essential to best practice and not, as previously mentioned, “soft” knowledge and skills. Sessions introduce core IP competencies and illustrate future IPE co-curricular and extracurricular activities in which students have an opportunity to apply their developing knowledge and skills. Early learners are eager to gain knowledge of their own discipline; thus, integration of IPE must explicitly connect the dots between nursing education and collaborative competencies. Why is it important for nurses to know the skill set of an occupational therapist? What specialized skills are necessary for teamwork and how can nurses advance patient care when working on a team? How do nurses and their patients benefit from a collaborative, psychologically safe environment? In the classroom, faculty may use modules, videos, and interactive strategies to expose students to basic tenets of IPE competencies. Numerous low- or no-cost IPE resources exist to assist faculty, and some are depicted in Table 9.3. Interactive instructional methods offer students a glimpse of the processes of team-based care in day-to-day practice. Inviting cross-professional guest speakers is another approach that provides early exposure to the range of disciplinary skills and expertise that nursing students will work alongside in their future practices. Teachers are charged with prompting peer discussion that highlights similarities and differences in roles, examines communication and teamwork know-how, and imparts respect for the various roles professional and support staff play on the team. Case-based learning (CBL) can be used to shed light on the advantages of IP ­collaboration. The aim of the team-centered CBL is for students to learn from each other and develop a shared vision of their distinctive and shared roles in

170  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

TABLE 9.3  RESOURCES FOR DEVELOPING INTERPROFESSIONAL LEARNING Resource/URL

Description

Guide to Effective Interprofessional Education Experiences in Nursing Education www.nln.org/docs/defaultsource/default-document-library/ipetoolkit-krk-012716.pdf?sfvrsn=6

A free guide for designing and implementing effective IPE and collaborative practice experiences in nursing. Site includes sample lesson plans for didactic, simulation, and clinical education.

National Center for Interprofessional Practice & Education: Resource Center nexusipe.org

A national web resource center hosting an extensive digital library that includes IPE assessment tools and instruments.

CompTIME: University of New England Online Modules Addressing IPE Competency Development www.une.edu/cece/students/ online-training-comptime

A set of five free interactive online modules designed to support students and faculty in learning about IPE competencies and collaborative practice. Content is creatively presented through weaving a clinical patient story throughout the module series.

American Interprofessional Health Collaborative aihc-us.org

A forum that showcases national IPE and collaborative practice efforts. Audio presentations and PowerPoint slides of recent webinars are archived for review. A series addressing “Getting Started with IPE” is available for a nominal fee.

Institute for Health Improvement Open School www.ihi.org/education/ ihiopenschool/Pages/default.aspx

An online community providing modular education to support the delivery of safe, high-quality patient care. Select modules address IPE competencies, including communication/teamwork, quality improvement and leadership. Courses are free to all students and faculty with an “edu” email address.

IPE, interprofessional education.

patient care. The most successful CBL scenarios involve situations familiar to students (e.g., with foundational learners the case might depict a classmate struggling with homesickness or an eating disorder). Cross-professional group projects bring students together to focus on a common health or social concern such as bullying or environmental hazards. Both of these assignments (CBL or group project) require students to reach out to and work with counterparts from another profession or, at the very least, study how another discipline might address the problem at hand. Presentation of findings from CBL and group projects reinforces what students have learned and invites input from other participants that can extend teachable moments. Asynchronous learning offers student opportunities to interact on their own when schedules and curricular constraints are obstacles to face-to-face exchange. Faculty can coordinate shared assignments whereby students are required to reach

9. Weaving Interprofessional Education into Nursing Curricula  ■ 171

out to classmates for information about their professions or get an opinion about a case scenario from diverse disciplines. In some instances, student posters or oral presentations are used as final products so that students can demonstrate their IP process and cross-disciplinary learning. Facilitation and faculty modeling are pivotal to successful IPE didactic instruction, especially during the exposure phase. New learners may struggle with the relevance of IPE; many already consider themselves proficient communicators and team players. Ironically engagement in IP team-based activities reveals to these students how very difficult collaborative teamwork can be and why explicit IPE instruction is needed. Teaching methods must actively engage students in activities that are developmentally meaningful to them, with teachers guiding discussions to assure that IPE learning objectives are met. Facilitation assists in transitioning students from ­concrete knowledge formation to engagement in reflectivity and critical thinking. Even in the context of disciplinary-specific instruction, faculty play an important role through infusing perspectives of another discipline into discourse or immediately addressing biases and stereotypes that students may voice about other professions. Utilization of the arts—for example, theater, visual arts, and literature—is a relatively underused method in nursing and health profession education. When integrated effectively, the arts engage affective knowing, emotional intelligence, and critical thinking—all essential capabilities for nursing practice. Stories impart ethical dilemmas, calling forth issues of human dignity, health disparities and inequities, empathy, value-based care, and the exigencies of poor communication in ways that traditional lecture cannot. Readers Theater is a particularly salient deployment of the arts in health profession education, especially when the key players represent different professional groups dramatically narrating the story of vulnerable patients and situations. As with all aspects of IPE instruction, opportunities for participants to engage in nonjudgmental reflection and guided debrief amplify learning. In 2014, the Josiah Macy Jr. Foundation panel (2014) called on health profession educators to integrate patients and families as contributory partners in developing and teaching health profession education. Stories of patients from patients are perhaps the most transformative of learning experiences for students. Patient stories told in nonclinical, real-life terms remind students that any one of us could at any given time be a person facing a life-altering health situation. Inviting patients and their care providers to the classroom to share their care experience narratives has the added benefit of explicating how collaboration works or fails to work. Table 9.4 offers sample teaching and learning strategies appropriate for IPE d ­ idactic instruction.

SIMULATION LEARNING The simulation laboratory provides an unparalleled experiential learning environment for cultivating and assessing IP capabilities. Clinical simulation was initially piloted in the 1950s and has advanced exponentially over the years as a clinical training tool (Palaganas et al., 2014). Consistent with prior definitions, IP simulation (IPE-SIM) occurs when faculty, facilitators, and students from two or more disciplines participate together in a shared simulation experience to realize mutually identified goals or learning outcomes (Decker et al., 2015, p. 294). IPE-SIM reflects an

172  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

TABLE 9.4  SAMPLE ACTIVE LEARNING STRATEGIES FOR DIDACTIC INTERPROFESSIONAL EDUCATION IPEC Competency Domain

Sample Active Learning Strategy

Values/Ethics for IP Practice

View an online video presenting the story of Sue Sheridan (Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality website www. ahrq.gov/teamstepps/instructor/videos/ts_Sue_Sheridan/ Sue_Sheridan-400-300.html) or Josie King (YouTube www. youtube.com/watch?v=JMs-gNFPgm8). Assemble students into small groups to work together in identifying and analyzing issues related to patient safety and quality care. Prompt students to propose IP practices and processes to address these issues.

Roles and Responsibilities for Collaborative Practice

Assemble students into small IP groups with access to the Internet. Assign students to complete a Web Quest in researching similarities and differences in roles and responsibilities of various health disciplines (e.g., roles of physical therapy, occupational therapy, speech therapy, leisure/recreation therapy). Have students create a graphic or visual to capture their findings.

IP Communication

Assemble students into small IP groups and provide TeamSTEPPS® communication resources (materials are free at Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality website www.ahrq.gov/teamstepps/index.html). Instruct students to examine together as a team two assigned communication tools (e.g., SBAR, Teach-back, CUS). Have students prepare a 5-minute tutorial, including a sample role-play, to illustrate the select communication technique. Teams then present their assigned communication tool to one another and discuss clinical uses and implications.

IP Teamwork and TeamBased Practice

Assemble students into small IP groups. Assign students to work together in completing a teamwork activity found on the web (e.g., paper chain challenge, Lego® tower challenge, marshmallow challenge). Debrief by analyzing the process: How did you work as a unit? What was the process like? Did a leader emerge? If so, how? Who assumed what role in completing the activity? What did the team do when different ideas were expressed? Any observations regarding communication? Who negotiated? How were problems solved? What would you do differently next time? Questions for the winning team: What was your process like? How does this compare to the other teams?

CUS, concerned, uncomfortable, safety; IP, interprofessional; IPEC, Interprofessional Education Collaborative; SBAR, situation, background, assessment, recommendation.

9. Weaving Interprofessional Education into Nursing Curricula  ■ 173

immersive, performance-based strategy (Charles et al., 2010), focused on the skills of teamwork, communication, collaboration, and problem-solving. The simulation lab provides students with opportunities to enact behaviors characteristic of collaborative health profession practice (Boet et al., 2014). Attention to the process of care and working together as a team differentiates IPE-SIM from d ­ iscipline-specific simulation, thus requiring joint faculty collaboration and the development of new scenarios to achieve IP learning outcomes. A team-based approach to simulation development, in which involved ­faculty stakeholders use their own clinical experiences as a guide, renders scenario cocreation that is both authentic and relevant for the disciplines involved. Scenario learning objectives should be guided by the IPEC competencies (2016) and jointly identified by the faculty planning team. The simulation experience should provide learners an opportunity to elicit knowledge and demonstrate behaviors and attitudes reflective of collaborative practice. An IPE scenario does not have to be complex to be effective, but it does have to be true to real-life patient and provider experiences. One common pitfall in IPE-SIM occurs when too many disciplines are involved at the same time, or different professions are linked in a manner that does not reflect the realities of patient care delivery. In such situations, students quickly disengage, as provider relationships are forced, unnatural, and artificial. The development team should be aware of social hierarchy and diversity stereotypes (e.g., surgeons are difficult, all nurses are female) what could influence the learning outcomes and future performance of the learners (Kaufman, 2020; Sharma et al., 2011). The IPESIM development team needs to consider authentic clinical situations and associated opportunities for disciplinary collaboration, as well as the points in the care delivery continuum where these collaborations naturally occur. For example, an IPE-SIM was created by an IP faculty workgroup designed to address collaborative care of a young woman with life-altering injuries from a motor vehicle accident. Chronic pain, loss of mobility, self-care deficits, previously unidentified dental issues, relational role strain, financial concerns, and questions about childbearing options characterized the issues set forth in this multisession IPE-SIM. This unfolding case was designed so that student IP teams could assess and prioritize needs, and propose an integrated care plan for the simulated patient and her husband as care advanced across the continuum from acute hospitalization to rehabilitation to home. Students from nursing, osteopathic medicine, physician assistant, dental hygiene, dental medicine, social work, pharmacy, and occupational and physical therapy all provided meaningful contributions at various points in time to this simulated patient and her husband. The IP exchange and multisession sequence allowed ­students to get to know one another and their varied expertise. This served to enhance student understanding as to the rigors and benefits of collaboration, and fostered an ­appreciation for what it takes to become an effective patient-centered team in real-world practice. Participating IPE-SIM students described gaining ­confidence in their own professional identity and an enhanced ability to communicate and work effectively on a team (Cohen Konrad et al., 2017). Students further reported that recognizing the knowledge overlap between professions served to increase the team’s confidence to provide safe, efficient care. The organizational framework of IPE-SIM reflects the same best practice process found in any discipline-specific simulation experience, including a prebrief,

174  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

simulation, and debrief. Chapter 8 provided an excellent overview and helpful guidance for the design and implementation of simulation. IP debriefing can be challenging for even the most experienced simulation facilitators. While there are numerous valid methods for debriefing, key to a successful IP debrief is faculty determination of a consistent model or set of questions during the scenario development phase. The temptation to digress into discipline-specific clinical content is bypassed when clear IPE learning objectives guide the debriefing. Providing each student opportunity and active encouragement to reflect and express their point of view uncovers learner progress, with areas of confusion addressed through additional faculty guidance and facilitation. Debriefing further uncovers cognitive frames relating to diversity or professional hierarchy, and when facilitated with attention to ­psychological safety, provides a safe venue for discussion, recognition, and strategies for change. One indicator of success is when students articulate how IPE-SIM will change or influence their future practice as a result of the experience and opportunity for reflection. A useful multipurpose tool for IP simulation debriefing is the Debriefing Interprofessionally: Recognition and Reflection (DIPRR; Poore et al., 2019). The DIPRR allows any simulation scenario to be converted to an academic or clinical IP learning activity. Debriefing questions are appropriate for both uniprofessional and multiprofessional learners and are aligned with the Core Competencies for Interprofessional Practice (IPEC, 2016) and the Quality and Safety Education for Nurses (Cronenwett et al., 2007) competency framework. The DIPRR is designed for both novice facilitators (basic debriefing questions) and experienced debriefers (probing questions), and is divided into three phases to guide learners: reaction, analysis, and reflection. The DIPRR provides open source IP resources and the ability to quickly link learning objectives to QSEN and IPEC competencies. The DIPRR instrument with four sections for each Core Competency is found in Appendix B. There are numerous challenges that commonly arise in the design and delivery of IPE-SIM, and anticipating obstacles is an important step in the planning process. Logistical impediments include finding a common time for IPE-SIM, as multiple professional programs have differing calendars and curricular sequences. Administrators may be reticent to provide sufficient faculty release time for shared IPE-SIM development or similarly dedicate adequate faculty coverage during the execution of IPE-SIM (Boet et al., 2014). Financial support may be problematic in determining how and which program resources will be used to fund IPE-SIM (Boet et al., 2014). Additionally, faculty may express discomfort in working with learners of differing education levels, clinical experience, and perceived inequalities in professional authority (Boet et al., 2014). Addressing these challenges requires flexibility, creativity, and “out of the box” thinking. Early collaboration with administration can clarify the importance of IPE-SIM, which may render protected time and financial investments at an institutional level. Providing administration with an overview as to how simulation activities simultaneously meet learning outcomes for different disciplines highlights the advantage of common infrastructure and financial investment. IPE-SIM ­development requires careful consideration of the level of fidelity supporting each simulation scenario. Faculty should weigh the benefits of using high- or l­ ow-fidelity manikins, standardized patients, or multiplayer virtual reality simulation platforms. Fidelity should enhance not distract from the learning experience. Various IP communication and collaboration activities are effective tools for addressing disciplinary scheduling challenges. Learners do not necessarily need to

9. Weaving Interprofessional Education into Nursing Curricula  ■ 175

be in the same physical space during simulation, and can successfully share information and plan care through email, texts, phone calls, or live Internet communications such as Skype or Zoom. As an example, while participating in an on-campus high-fidelity simulation, baccalaureate nursing students sought consultation from off-site pharmacy students using previously provided cell phone contacts. In addition, Zoom has been successfully employed to mimic telehealth encounters engaging IP students from diverse locations. These exemplars provide opportunity for students to collaborate in real time in the care of simulated patients while maintaining different program-specific curriculum schedules. Through careful IP faculty planning, the logistical challenges of scheduling simulations and providing students with authentic, real-world clinical collaborative practice learning experiences can be successfully addressed.

CLINICAL LEARNING IP and collaborative clinical learning is experiential in nature, providing a pedagogical bridge between what students learn in the classroom and what occurs in the practice workplace. This represents an immersion level of learning (Charles et al., 2010), as students use foundational concepts gleaned through didactics to inform processes and demonstrate practices for high-quality care provision. The opportunity to work with other health disciplines in the actual care of patients, families, or communities further extends and deepens nursing students’ practical know-how for IP practice. These experiences, however, will be variable, as not every student will have the same opportunity or engagement with clinical IPE. The culture of select settings and care foci reflect an inherent disposition toward teamwork and collaboration. Rich IP clinical learning opportunities are common for nursing students engaged in geriatric, rehabilitation, hospice, substance abuse, diabetes, ambulatory care, and rural health rotations. IP clinical learning may be realized thorough numerous approaches. Job shadowing is one potential activity, allowing students to observe other professions in action. How does the practice of the observed discipline compare with nursing practice? What roles overlap with those of nursing? Observing in vivo demonstration of others’ skills encourages students to reflect on how and when working together serves to achieve best practice. Such experiences also illustrate referral processes, explicating how and why nursing recommends the engagement of another discipline. Faculty prompts further guide student reflection, debriefing, and critical observation. Students might orally present their job shadowing findings related to communication, roles, and teamwork as part of a clinical postconference. Alternatively, students may journal on their shadowing experience, providing time for reflection on disciplinary approaches, dialogue observed, and application for future practice. Patient rounding presents another experience for IP clinical learning. This setting-dependent practice provides students with an opportunity to engage and problem-solve with patients and other health disciplines involved in care ­delivery. The student experience may assume numerous forms: observational in ­noting team participant interactions or direct if providing care to the patient in q ­ uestion. Rounding also provides opportunities for nursing students to observe leadership skills and identify differences in approaches or styles in leading care teams. These observations constitute useful topics for clinical postconference, allowing students to analyze the impact of leadership on clinical care delivery and patient outcomes.

176  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

Some clinical settings (e.g., hospice and long-term care) commonly conduct case conferences to assess how care is being provided and to establish future clinical goals. Ideally, case conferences are patient-centered, thereby including perspectives not only from providers but also from the patient and family. Participation in or observation of case conferences affords nursing students additional experience in examining how communication, teamwork, and collaboration impact the process and outcomes of clinical care. The opportunity to debrief these observations with cross-professional classmates adds considerable value to the case conference learning experience. Through coordination with IP colleagues, faculty may discover other professional disciplines on clinical rotation at the same time as a given nursing rotation. This presents possibility for shared pre- or postconferences, as well as opportunity for collaborative care planning assignments. If the rotation involves community health, it might be possible to arrange joint home visiting experiences for IP students. Faculty collaboration and creativity are essential in discovering and advancing IP clinical learning for nursing students. IP collaborative practice is also implemented in settings outside of healthcare. School systems, childcare, and corrections facilities are examples of natural venues where core competencies such as cross-professional communication, knowing the roles of others, and shared decision-making can improve coordination and quality provided to those receiving services from nurses and other health professions and workers (Dunn & Cohen Konrad, 2019; Stone & Charles, 2018). Recognized as a learning method to raise student awareness of health and social disparities and improve civic responsibility and culturally sensitive practice, service learning is increasingly being explored as a means for helping students develop IP teamwork skills (Dunn & Cohen Konrad, 2019).

EVALUATION OF INTERPROFESSIONAL EDUCATION Evaluation of IPE outcomes begins with a clear identification of the desired knowledge, skills, and abilities engendered through IP learning. Early IPE endeavors involve exposure or introduction of foundational concepts; thus, the determination of student learning can be achieved through direct assessment techniques such as examinations, student writing/reflections, or focus groups. Faculty colleagues collaborating on exposure IPE experiences should determine from the onset what artifacts will be used as evidence of student learning. Foundational outcomes commonly address participant knowledge about communication, roles and responsibilities, and the process of collaboration, as well as determination of any changes in attitudes or perceptions about working together on teams. Although there is value in validating that students have cognitively grasped collaborative practice principles, what matters more is whether students demonstrate IP capabilities in the actual provision of patient care. As a result, an IPE evaluation plan generally assumes a longitudinal, multistep design. Immersion learning supports student performance of collaborative behaviors, and is accomplished through simulation or observation in the clinical practice setting. It is important to clearly identify the action or behavior to be evaluated, with IP competency statements subsequently integrated as part of simulation performance rubrics or as items on clinical evaluation tools. This process invites students

9. Weaving Interprofessional Education into Nursing Curricula  ■ 177

and supervising faculty to narratively describe situations and associated actions or behaviors performed that evidence collaborative practice capabilities. Additionally, valid and reliable IP tools are available at the National Center for Interprofessional Practice and Education website (nexusIPE.org). Each instrument in the resource center is accompanied by a description as to use, target audience, intended outcome/competency, and authorship. The National Center provides an invaluable resource for nurse educators in the IPE evaluation process. Rapid cycle evaluation is an expedient method to assess the efficacy of IP learning methods and programs (Zakocs et al., 2015). Continuous student feedback informs faculty about which methods are well received by students and whether they are meeting proposed learning outcomes. Information obtained through rapid cycle evaluation is used to revise and improve learning activities and to confirm to students that their input is taken seriously and used to construct future programming. Finally, questions addressing IP learning may be incorporated into departmental/college alumni satisfaction surveys. Students may not realize the value of collaborative practice lessons until well-engaged postlicensure in day-to-day clinical practice. Determining graduate perceptions of IPE learning serves to inform curricular efficacy, and supports future refinements and improvements.

SUMMARY This chapter provides pedagogical guidance in the design, implementation, and evaluation of IPE in nursing education. Opportunities for broad curricular integration, including didactic, simulation, and clinical learning, are explored. Numerous exemplars and resources are provided to support faculty newly embarking on IP teaching and learning. It is essential for nursing education to adopt and integrate IPE, thereby cultivating nursing graduates WHO are knowledgeable about disciplinary roles and responsibilities and are competent in communication, teamwork, and collaborative leadership. Learning together for future practice together supports national calls for health profession education reform and produces practice-ready nurses prepared for today’s collaborative, team-based workforce.

REFERENCES Barr, H. (2013). Toward a theoretical framework for interprofessional education. Journal of Interprofessional Care, 27(1), 4–9. https://doi.org/10.3109/13561820.2012.698328 Begley, C. M. (2009). Developing inter-professional learning: Tactics, teamwork and talk. Nurse Education Today, 29(3), 276–283. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.nedt.2008.09.006 Bertrand, Y. (2003). Contemporary theories in education and practice. Atwood Publishing. Berwick, D., Nolan, T., & Whittington, J. (2008). The triple aim: Care, health, and cost. Health Affairs, 27(3), 759–769. https://doi.org/10.1377/hlthaff.27.3.759 Boet, S., Bould, M. D., Layat Burn, C., & Reeves, S. (2014). Twelve tips for a successful interprofessional team-based high-fidelity simulation education session. Medical Teacher, 36(10), 853–857. https://doi.org/10.3109/0142159X.2014.923558 Brandt, B., Lutfiyya, M. N., King, J. A., & Chioreso, C. (2014). A scoping review of interprofessional collaborative practice and education using the lens of the Triple Aim. Journal of Interprofessional Care, 28(5), 393–399. https://doi.org/10.3109/13561820 .2014.906391

178  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

Buring, S., Bhushan, A., Broeseker, A., Conway, S., Duncan-Hewitt, W., Hansen, L., & Westberg, S. (2009). Interprofessional education: Definitions, student competencies, and guidelines for implementation. American Journal of Pharmaceutical Education, 73(4), 59. https://doi.org/10.5688/aj730459 Canadian Interprofessional Health Collaborative. (2010). A national interprofessional competency framework: Quick reference guide. http://studycollaboration.com/static/ uploads/pdfs/CIHC_IPCompetenciesShort_Feb1210.pdf Centre for the Advancement of Interprofessional Education. (2016). Home. http://www .caipe.org Charles, G., Bainbridge, L., & Gilbert, J. (2010). The University of British Columbia model of interprofessional education. Journal of Interprofessional Care, 24(1), 9–18. https://doi .org/10.3109/13561820903294549 Cohen Konrad, S. C., Cavanaugh, J., Hall, K., Rodriguez, K., & Pardue, K. T. (2017). A fivesession interprofessional team immersion program for health professions students. Journal of Interprofessional Education and Practice, 6, 49–54. https://doi.org/10.1016/ j.xjep.2016.12.007 Committee on the Robert Wood Johnson Foundation Initiative on the Future of Nursing at the Institute of Medicine. (2011). The future of nursing: Leading change, advancing health. http://www.nap.edu/catalog.php?record_id=12956 Cronenwett, L., Sherwood, G., Barnsteiner J., Disch, J., Johnson, J., Mitchell, P., Sullivan, D., & Warren, J. (2007). Quality and safety education for nurses. Nursing Outlook, 55(3), 122–131. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.outlook.2007.02.006 Decker, S. I., Anderson, M., Boese, T., Epps, C., McCarthy, J., Motola, I., & Scolaro, K. (2015). Standards of best practice: Simulation standard VIII: Simulation-enhanced interprofessional education (Sim-IPE). Clinical Simulation in Nursing, 11, 293–297. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ecns.2015.03.010 Donaldson, M.S., Corrigan, J.M., & Kohn, L.T. (2000). To err is human: Building a safer health system. (Vol. 6), National Academies Press. Dunn, K., & Cohen Konrad, S. (2019). Stronger when combined: Lessons from an interprofessional, jail-based service-learning project. Partnerships: A Journal of ServiceLearning and Civic Engagement, 10(1), 117–128. Earnest, M., & Brandt, B. (2014). Aligning practice redesign and interprofessional education to advance triple aim outcomes. Journal of Interprofessional Care, 28(6), 497–500. https:// doi.org/10.3109/13561820.2014.933650 Edmondson, A. (2019). The fearless organization: Creating psychological safety in the workplace for learning, innovation, and growth. Wiley. Edmondson, A., Higgins, M., Singer, S., & Weiner, J. (2016). Understanding psychological safety in health care and education organizations: A comparative perspective. Research in Human Development, 13(1), 65–83. https://doi.org/10.1080/15427609.2016.1141280 Gergerich, E., Boland, D., & Scott, M. A. (2019). Hierarchies in interprofessional training. Journal of Interprofessional Care, 33(5), 528–535. https://doi.org/10.1080/13561820.2018 .1538110 Greiner, A. C., & Knebel, E (2003). Health professions education: A bridge to quality. National Academies Press. Hean, S., & Dickinson, C. (2005). The contact hypothesis: An exploration of its further potential in interprofessional education. Journal of Interprofessional Care, 19(5), 480–491. https://doi.org/10.1080/13561820500215202 Hewstone, M., & Brown, R. (1986). Contact is not enough: An intergroup perspective on the “contact hypothesis.” In M. Hewstone & R. Brown (Eds.), Contact and conflict in intergroup encounters (pp. 1–44). Blackwell. Interprofessional Education Collaborative. (2016). Core competencies for interprofessional collaborative practice: 2016 update. Author.

9. Weaving Interprofessional Education into Nursing Curricula  ■ 179

Interprofessional Education Collaborative Expert Panel. (2011). Core competencies for interprofessional collaborative practice: Report of an expert panel. Author. Josiah Macy Jr. Foundation. (2014). Partnering with patients in education and health care transformation. Conference Recommendations. https://macyfoundation.org/news-andcommentary/partnering-with-patients-in-education-and-health-care-transformation Kaufman, J. (2020). Investigating conflict perceptions among health profession students in an interprofessional education activity. Journal of Interprofessional Education & Practice, 18, 1–5. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.xjep.2019.100302 Kolb, D. (1984). Experiential learning: Experiences as the source of learning and development. Prentice Hall. LatDict. (2016). Collaborare. http://latin-dictionary.net Makary, M. A., & Daniel, M. (2016). Medical error – the third leading cause of death in the US. British Medical Journal, 353, i2139. https://doi.org/10.1136/bmj.i2139 Mezirow, J. (1998). On critical reflection. Adult Education Quarterly, 48(3), 185–191. https:// doi.org/10.1177/074171369804800305 Oandasan, I., & Reeves, S. (2005). Key elements for interprofessional education: Part 1: The learner, the educator and the learning context. Journal of Interprofessional Care, 19(Suppl. 1), 21–38. https://doi.org/10.1080/13561820500083550 Palaganas, J., Epps, C., & Raemer, D. (2014). A history of simulation-enhanced interprofessional education. Journal of Interprofessional Care, 28(2), 110–115. https:// doi.org/10.3109/13561820.2013.869198 Pardue, K. T. (2013). Not left to chance: Introducing an undergraduate interprofessional education curriculum. Journal of Interprofessional Care, 27(1), 98–100. https://doi.org/ 10.3109/13561820.2012.721815 Pardue, K. T. (2015). A framework for the design, implementation, and evaluation of interprofessional education. Nurse Educator, 40(1), 10–15. https://doi.org/10.1097/ NNE.0000000000000093 Pettigrew, T. (1998). Intergroup contact theory. Annual Review of Psychology, 49, 65–85. https://doi.org/10.1146/annurev.psych.49.1.65 Poore, J., Dawson, J., Dunbar, D. M., & Parrish, K. (2019). Debriefing interprofessionally: A tool for recognition and reflection. Nurse Educator, 44(1), 25–29. https://doi.org/ 10.1097/NNE.0000000000000518 Reeves, S., Goldman, J., & Oandasan, I. (2007). Key factors in planning and implementing interprofessional education in health care settings. Journal of Allied Health, 36(4), 231–235. Reeves, S., & Hean, S. (2013). Why we need theory to help us better understand the nature of interprofessional education, practice and care. Journal of Interprofessional Care, 27(1), 1–3. https://doi.org/10.3109/13561820.2013.751293 Sharma, S., Boet, S., Kitto, S., & Reeves, S. (2011). Interprofessional simulated learning: The need for ‘sociological fidelity’. Journal of Interprofessional Care, 25(2), 81–83. https:// doi.org/10.3109/13561820.2011.556514 Speakman, E. (Ed). (2017). Interprofessional education and collaborative practice: Creating a blueprint for nurse educators. National League for Nursing. Stadick, J. L. (2020). The relationship between interprofessional education and health care professional’s attitudes towards teamwork and interprofessional collaborative competencies. Journal of Interprofessional Education & Practice, 19, 100320. https:// doi.org/10.1016/j.xjep.2020.100320 Stone, S. I., & Charles, J. (2018). Conceptualizing the problems and possibilities of interprofessional collaboration in schools. Children & Schools, 40(3), 185–192. https:// educate.bankstreet.edu/faculty-staff/32 Thibault, G. E. (2011). Interprofessional education: An essential strategy to accomplish the future of nursing goals. Journal of Nursing Education, 50(6), 313–317. https://doi.org/ 10.3928/01484834-20110519-03

180  ■ II. TEACHING IN NURSING

Wenger-Trayner, E., & Wenger-Trayner, B. (2015). Introduction to communities of practice. http://wenger-trayner.com/introduction-to-communities-of-practice World Health Organization. (2010). A framework for action on interprofessional education & collaborative practice. Author. http://www.who.int/hrh/resources/framework_action/en Zakocs, R., Hill, J., Brown, P., Wheaton, J., & Friere, K. E. (2015). The data-to-action framework: A rapid program improvement process. Health Education & Behavior, 42(4), 471–479. https://doi.org/10.1177/1090198115595010

III Teaching in Learning Laboratory and Clinical Setting

10 Learning Laboratories as a Foundation for Nursing Excellence Carol F. Durham and Darlene E. Baker

OBJECTIVES 1. Describe the process of skill development and implications for teaching in learning laboratories 2. Analyze the role of the learning laboratory in nursing programs 3. Describe the effective setup and operations of learning laboratory 4. Describe best practices for teaching in a learning laboratory

INTRODUCTION Skills acquisition is an important component of nursing education, beginning early in the curriculum and continuing throughout the nursing program. Learning laboratories provide a safe environment for initial psychomotor skills acquisition while offering opportunities to socialize students into the professional role of a nurse. The phrase learning laboratory used in this chapter refers to what may frequently be termed a resource center, learning center, or skills laboratory. The phrase is used to allow for a broader understanding of the function and purpose of this environment, which may encompass a wide range of learning activities, processes, supplies, and equipment to enhance clinical reasoning and provide for deliberate practice prior to applying knowledge, skills, and attitudes in patient care. While simulation is discussed in Chapter 8, the pedagogy in this chapter is applicable. The learning laboratory is designed to simulate the clinical setting and to be a nonthreatening space for the development of knowledge, skills, and attitudes that are foundational to clinical practice. Students enter learning laboratories excited about becoming nurses, and they often envision the psychomotor skills taught there as being what nurses do. The challenge for nurse educators in the laboratory is to assist students in understanding that acquisition of psychomotor skills is foundational to nursing practice but is only one component of being a nurse. Educators in laboratory settings are charged with encouraging the development of a strong foundation of learning so students can advance in their understanding of the depth and breadth of the art of nursing.

184  ■ III. Teaching in Learning Laboratory and Clinical Setting

This chapter provides practical strategies embedded in educational pedagogy of skills acquisition. Students’ ability to perform skills is essential to safe and highquality patient care. Acceptable competence of clinical skills is a prerequisite to developing competency at the expert level. Professional performance of psychomotor skills is not simply automated; it requires sound judgment, careful planning, critical thinking, and decision-making to ensure safe and effective patient care. This knowledge is integral to the successful implementation of psychomotor skills, and it represents a critical cognitive component of skill mastery. It is important that learners not only understand and are able to perform the skill, but also comprehend the rationale for the skill. Educators and learners need to understand that knowing and doing are two different things. As an example, memorizing the skills checklist for evaluation may demonstrate knowledge of the steps, but does not prepare a learner to perform the skill in a safe and competent manner in the dynamic context of patient care. Patients expect nothing less, as they rate nursing as the most trusted profession for the 18th consecutive year (Reinhart, 2020). The privilege and responsibility for our profession to fulfill that trust is incumbent on all components of nursing education and begins in the laboratory.

SKILL DEVELOPMENT: ESSENTIAL CONCEPTS A solid understanding of the skill and ability to perform it enables learners to develop their competence and confidence as practitioners, allowing them to consider the clinical situation in a broader context. Diers (1990) provided a succinct description of the complexity of skills acquisition that can be shared with students as they begin learning in the laboratory and embarking on their nursing career: Skills are thought to be the rudiments of more complicated things, and therefore rote, unchanging, mechanical. But the acquisition of skill is neither easy nor automatic. Once learned, however, a skill is absorbed into the banks of memory and the fibers of the nervous system so it can be called up and counted upon with instant reliability. Carefully learned skills free the mind for analysis, for decision-making, for innovation and choice. Skill implies mastery, but skill mastery does not define excellence in practice. It is only one of the springboards from which a leap to excellence becomes possible. (p. 66) The automation of basic skills mentioned by Diers allows the learner to examine what is going on with the patient at a higher level. However, reflecting on Ericsson’s (2004) deliberate practice, discussed later in the chapter, it is important not to move too quickly to automation of nursing skills. In the learning laboratory, educators should understand that they are working with novice learners, defined by Benner (1984) as “beginners [who] have had no experience of the situations in which they are expected to perform” (p. 20). Because “novices have no experience of the situation they face, they must be given rules to guide their performance” (p. 21). Students’ experiences in the learning laboratory have an important role in developing their understanding of skills in a contextual framework. Students are embarking on a career with its own culture, language, and application of skills that are unique in the healthcare field.

10. Learning Laboratories as a Foundation for Nursing Excellence  ■ 185

Often educators expect learners to be expert in skill performance prior to beginning clinical practice. However, only basic performance of skills should be expected because skills have just been introduced. Clinical and laboratory educators have to create opportunities for students to continue developing their skills through application with frequent feedback and opportunity for refinement. For example, when designing laboratory experiences, nurse educators can teach some skills early, such as donning sterile gloves and universal precautions. As students progress through subsequent laboratories, learning more complex skills, they should continue to be held accountable for the earlier skills such as sterile gloving and universal precautions as they are expected to do in clinical practice. This scaffolding of learning is essential for moving learners toward expert skill development. Benner (1984) suggested that an expert “no longer relies on an analytic principle (rule, guideline, maxim) to connect her or his understanding of the situation to an appropriate action” (p. 31) because the expert nurse has “an enormous background of experience” (p. 32). Only through practice and experience can students advance in their skills development. This enormous amount of experience takes time. Some suggest that it may take approximately 4 hours of practice per day for 10 years to achieve a level of mastery for more complex knowledge and professional skills (Colvin, 2008; Ericsson, 2008; Levitin, 2006). Therefore, it is important for educators to establish an expectation of acceptable performance early on, with the understanding that skills development continues throughout a professional career. The importance of solid skills development cannot be underestimated for the patient, nurse, or employer. Patients equate excellence in care with the ability of their nurse to perform the skills necessary for their care. The confidence of nurses is intertwined with their ability to competently perform those same skills. The employer relies on nurses to deliver excellent care, which requires high levels of knowledge and psychomotor skills development. Competent performance of skills is expected through a nurse’s last day of clinical practice. If this important foundation is not established properly early in the curriculum, then the students will continue to struggle with skills and will adopt poor practices that can have a negative impact on the quality and safety of nursing practice. These poor practices not only become ingrained in that nurse’s clinical performance but can also become a poor standard of care for a given clinical setting as that nurse precepts new nurses and students.

PHASES OF SKILL DEVELOPMENT Fitts and Posner (1967) described three phases of skills development: cognitive, associative, and autonomous. The cognitive phase requires a lot of attention and is focused on understanding the skill, how best to implement the skill, and the evaluation of the skill. The associative phase is devoted to refining the skill, so the performance is more consistent with less variability. The autonomous phase is more habitual and automatic, requiring less attention and freeing the learner for higher level thinking. Students in learning laboratories are in the cognitive phase and may begin to move to the associative phase near the end of their laboratory experience, depending on the amount of practice and instructor feedback they obtain. It is more likely that the associative and autonomous phases will occur in professional practice, where certain skills such as washing hands, introducing self, and surveilling

186  ■ III. Teaching in Learning Laboratory and Clinical Setting

the environment will become second nature. These automatic abilities require initial skill learning followed by practice and then repeated performance in a variety of patient care scenarios, both simulated and real. For example, it is important that learners be able to automate select skills, such as assessing blood pressures of a rapidly deteriorating patient, without having to think about the sequence of steps needed to assess the blood pressure.

DELIBERATE PRACTICE Automation of all skills, however, is not the end goal for expert performance. To facilitate the journey to expert performance, it is helpful to consider deliberate practice. Ericsson (2004) defined deliberate practice as “engaging in practice activities with the primary goal of improving some aspect of performance” (p. S73). He delineated the steps as first identifying an area for improvement for a well-defined task, then receiving immediate feedback, and finally problem-solving for improved performance through repetition of the task (Ericsson, 2004). Ericsson (2008) cautioned, however, that those who are trying to achieve expert performance must work to counteract automaticity by striving for continual improvement. For example, students arrive at the school of nursing with handwashing automated from years of washing their hands. However, in healthcare, we need them to be more deliberate in not only the technique of handwashing but also in the frequency and timing of handwashing. Educators are not trying to automate the task but are trying to automate the expectation that handwashing will be done on entering the patient’s room and prior to patient care. For high-risk patient safety skills such as medication administration, it is important that they are not automated. There is a risk of disengaged thinking while performing repetitive psychomotor motions during a skill such as medication administration. It is essential that learners recognize that these skills require concentration and careful attention to detail for accuracy and safety in the presence of repetition. Ericsson (2008) suggested that with careful evaluation of the procedure as it occurs and with concurrent problem-solving for potential areas of improvement, skill development can be enhanced. Many agencies and nurses are reflecting on the practice of medication administration, considering methods to improve the skill of medication administration, and implementing “do not disturb zones” for the medication administration nurse to minimize distractions and associated errors. Faculty members should instill in their learners an expectation that they should personally, as well as within the profession, continually reexamine how skills are performed and explore ways to improve patient care using deliberate practice instead of settling for acceptable performance.

DEVELOPMENT OF PROFESSIONAL CONFIDENCE The learning laboratory is also essential for establishing the professional confidence that graduates need to begin their nursing career. It can be the setting where students begin to develop their ability to provide patient-centered care. The Quality and Safety Education for Nurses (QSEN) competencies define patient-centered care as “[recognizing] the patient or designee as the source of control and full partner in providing compassionate and coordinated care based on respect for [the] patient’s preferences, values, and needs” (Cronenwett et al., 2007, p. 123). Assisting students

10. Learning Laboratories as a Foundation for Nursing Excellence  ■ 187

in learning how to approach patients with respect and dignity, being responsive to their individual needs, being sensitive to cultural differences, and collaborating with the patient and with other members of the healthcare team in the delivery of safe and quality care are a few of the overarching goals of socialization into the nursing profession. As educators design experiences for students, it is important not to overlook these core values of good nursing care. Learners need the opportunity to practice cognitive as well as motor skills. Educators can embed skills in patient care scenarios to teach these concepts.

ROLE OF FACULTY, STAFF, TEACHING ASSISTANTS, AND PEER MENTORS The type of nurse educator chosen to teach in a learning laboratory varies based on the objectives and academic considerations. Laboratory educators should be nurses and can include faculty members, staff, or graduate nursing teaching assistants based on staffing needs. Undergraduate peers also may be used with qualified nursing oversight. All educators, regardless of position or experience, require training on the content of each laboratory to promote consistent teaching and demonstration of skills, to enable educators to effectively communicate rationales and evidencebased practice (when available), and to permit them to adequately and consistently assess student performance during evaluation. Training sessions should be held at the start of the academic term and regularly through the semester or quarter. These sessions should be structured to allow review of previously taught material as needed, discussion of upcoming skills to be learned, and demonstration of skills. Educators may practice the skills and receive coaching on skills demonstration as needed. At the end of the term, a wrap-up session should occur to discuss opportunities to refine the teaching plan and improve educational practices. Faculty members provide supervisory oversight of all activities, including learning module development, laboratory scheduling, and coordination of laboratories with clinical courses, and represent the laboratory on nursing school curriculum and other committees. In addition, faculty members should be capable of teaching skills in an interactive and engaging manner and of facilitating simulation experiences. It is important to know that a great nurse or lecturer does not translate to a competent skill faculty; additional training is required. Full-or part-time staff members who engage in direct teaching of nursing skills should be nurses. The educational background required to work in a learning laboratory is based on standards and policies established by the state board of nursing. Staff members might be nurses who work at local healthcare facilities or might be employed solely by the school of nursing. Apart from teaching in the laboratory or simulation settings, staff members might be responsible for laboratory operations such as ordering and maintaining supplies and equipment, supervising the setup and breakdown, and tracking student progress through learning modules and simulation experiences. Staff members might also complete administrative work such as copying, entering grades, scheduling student evaluations and practice sessions, and rescheduling any missed laboratories or evaluations. Some of these administrative duties can be assigned to non-nursing personnel. Part-time teaching assistants may be graduate nursing students or practicing nurses. If graduate students are available, they provide a great resource for staffing laboratories because they typically bring current clinical expertise to their teaching

188  ■ III. Teaching in Learning Laboratory and Clinical Setting

and benefit from being mentored into the educator role. Many teaching assistants seek the position because they desire to become nurse educators. Because it is likely that teaching assistants can earn more working per diem in a healthcare agency, recruitment for the position requires an appealing package that includes financial compensation, tuition reimbursement, and health insurance coverage. In addition, work schedules must coordinate with academic schedules. To provide teaching assistants with a more holistic understanding of the laboratory environment beyond teaching content and skills, they also should be trained to assist with the laboratory setup and breakdown and routine cleaning tasks, and to input data to monitor student attendance. This broader perspective of the complexity of the lab allows them to appreciate all the components that contribute to a quality teaching environment. If a peer-mentored environment is desired, students in upper levels of the nursing program can be recruited to provide additional practice for beginning students. Peer mentoring allows additional time not only for deliberate practice of psychomotor skills, but also for informal mentoring of students. The peer-mentored system should have established guidelines and expectations of the mentors and identified benefits for the students who participate in it.

EXPECTATIONS FOR LEARNERS IN LABORATORY To encourage development of the professional nurse role, students should be given a written overview of guidelines and rules for laboratory attendance and preparation that parallels behaviors they will be expected to demonstrate in their role as professional nurses in the clinical setting. This information should be given with or before their first exposure to the learning laboratory. Students should learn about behavioral expectations, which emphasize the importance of personal accountability, patient and nurse safety, and compliance with the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) and Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act (FERPA) standards. In addition to written guidelines, educators should role model the expected clinical behaviors during laboratory sessions. Students should learn to clean up the bedside work area after patient care and ensure proper disposal of all supplies and equipment according to Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and agency guidelines, which parallel the expectations of their behavior in a patient care environment. Students should be required to dress in a professional manner while performing patient skills in the laboratory, following established guidelines regarding necklines, and footwear, which would be appropriate to working in a patient care environment. Some schools of nursing ask students to dress for laboratory experiences, including simulation sessions, in their clinical uniforms. The main idea underpinning enclothed cognition is that “clothes have not only interpersonal effects, but also intrapersonal ones” (Adam & Galinsky, 2019, p. 157). The clothes “influence not only those with whom we interact, but also our own psychological processes” (p. 157). Their research suggests that donning a laboratory coat as a physician increases the person’s attentiveness and carefulness. This can be transferrable to nursing students wearing their uniforms in laboratory settings, affecting their psychological perception of being and acting like a nurse. What they wear in laboratory might have an influence on how they begin to build confidence in their role as a nurse. Consequences of violating expectations of dress and appearance should be clearly outlined in the laboratory guidelines.

10. Learning Laboratories as a Foundation for Nursing Excellence  ■ 189

INTEGRATION OF LABORATORIES INTO CURRICULA A successful learning laboratory is one that is integrated throughout the curriculum, allowing students regular, repetitive opportunities for deliberate practice. It is important for skills acquisition to provide a psychologically safe environment in which the learner can easily speak up without risk or embarrassment and accepts being uncomfortable (Kang & Min, 2019). This safe environment does not diminish teaching and holding learners accountable for the standard of care, but rather creates space for the learner to focus on learning versus shutting down from fear of consequences. The climate of the learning laboratory is that of collaboration. Achievement of acceptable psychomotor skills demonstration (a designated level of performance, determined by nurse educators using evidence-based practice and best standards of practice) and attainment of related knowledge is the joint responsibility of the students and educator. Students are responsible for participating in designated learning activities to attain knowledge and promote acceptable skills acquisition. Although students may be able to perform a skill at the time of assessment, skills can be retained only with practice (Oermann et al., 2016). Educators are responsible for providing opportunities for practice, feedback, and repeated practice at regular intervals, not only in the laboratory but also in the clinical setting. Many learning laboratories include not only psychomotor skills acquisition but also simulation experiences, using computerized manikins, task trainers, standardized patients, and virtual reality with case-based scenarios. These provide an opportunity for students to apply what they are learning in the laboratory to patient care scenarios that simulate clinical practice. Simulation can be integrated throughout the curriculum beyond content for adult health, pediatrics, and obstetrics courses to include leadership, community health, mental health, and interprofessional experiences. Chapter 8 discusses the pedagogy of simulation in the learning laboratory.

TYPES OF LEARNING LABORATORIES A variety of laboratories associated with both clinical and nonclinical courses may be offered throughout the prelicensure program and in graduate nursing programs. Schools of nursing vary in the sequencing of skills across the curriculum, usually beginning with basic foundational skills and advancing to more complex skills. There is no consensus on what constitutes a complex skill; however, handwashing is a basic skill, whereas central line care is a complex skill. Grouping of skills should be a deliberate decision by faculty to meet the learning needs of their students as they move from laboratories to practice settings. The established flow of clinical experiences in a nursing program will also influence how skills are grouped. Beyond beginning with foundational skills and building to complex skills, there is no consensus on what sequence skills should be taught. In the graduate curriculum, laboratories can be offered for advanced health assessment, diagnostic reasoning, development of skills, and various content-specific learning experiences. Table 10.1 provides an example of typical laboratories offered in a nursing program, listed by course and purpose, examples of skills taught for each course, and necessary preparation by students and laboratory personnel. The table includes prelicensure laboratories and also more advanced laboratories that may be offered, such as a laboratory in a diagnostic reasoning course for graduate students in nurse practitioner programs and an interprofessional education laboratory to provide essential immersive environments for interprofessional learners to develop essential skills in communication, collaboration, and teamwork.

190  ■ III. Teaching in Learning Laboratory and Clinical Setting

TABLE 10.1  TYPES OF LEARNING LABORATORIES Learner Groups ■

■ ■

■

Scheduled laboratory groups (can be based on clinical assignments, arbitrarily assigned, or self-selected) Small group for deliberate practice (students self-select attendance days and times) One-to-one skills review and/or deliberate practice (completed at the request of students or faculty/staff) Small simulation sessions (tabletop exercises such as problem-based learning and patient care scenario-based case studies)

Course and Purpose

Sample Skills Focus Areas

Preparation

Fundamentals Skills Laboratory/Basic Medical Surgical Skills Laboratories (Can bridge across several clinically oriented courses or be contained in one fundamentals nursing course) Learn, practice, and refine: ■ Communication skills ■ Bedside psychomotor nursing skills ■ Increase students’ confidence in the clinical setting

Basic to advanced patient care skills based on course requirements. Generally encompass aspects of: ■ Microbial safety and vital signs ■ Personal care ■ Immobility interventions ■ Safe patient handling and movement ■ Medication administration techniques for various non parenteral routes ■ Injections ■ Intravenous therapy ■ Wound care ■ Elimination ■ Respiratory interventions ■ GI intubation ■ End-of-life care ■ Central venous access devices ■ Venipuncture

Provide learning modules in advance for student review prior to the laboratory session. Set up supplies, equipment, and charts specific to the skills to be taught in each laboratory.

Health/Physical Assessment Laboratories Learn, practice, and refine: ■ Communication and interviewing skills ■ Body system assessment skills

Conduct body system assessment specific to each session’s content. Provide regular practice, integrating the systems learned each week into a cohesive patient assessment.

Provide learning modules in advance for student review prior to the laboratory session. Online format: No room or laboratory resources needed (continued )

10. Learning Laboratories as a Foundation for Nursing Excellence  ■ 191

TABLE 10.1  TYPES OF LEARNING LABORATORIES (CONTINUED) Learner Groups ■

Documentation skills

Classroom format: Laboratory setup Provide a private space with appropriate diagnostic equipment for the body systems reviewed in each session. Set up additional learning resources such as simulators and anatomical models.

Advanced Medical Surgical/Capstone Laboratories Refresh previously learned communication and psychomotor skills. Increase students’ confidence with psychomotor skills.

Basic to advanced patient care skills based on course requirements. Generally encompasses aspects of: ■ Medication administration: oral, injectable, intravenous, gastrostomy, central line flushes ■ Sterile dressing changes ■ Tracheostomy care ■ Catheterization ■ Health/physical assessment ■ Venipuncture ■ Equipment review

Provide learning modules in advance for student review prior to the laboratory session. Set up supplies and equipment for: ■ Applicable medication administration routes ■ Selected bedside clinical skills ■ Health/physical assessment review

Pharmacology Competency Laboratories Synthesize content from multiple courses (health/ physical assessment, fundamentals, pharmacology). Integrate pharmacologic knowledge with medication administration procedures.

Interpretation of laboratory values Use of pharmacologic references Medication administration includes: ■ Recognizing and/or averting medication errors ■ Medication administration skills: oral, topical, eye, ear, injectable, intravenous

Provide learning modules in advance for student review prior to the laboratory session. Instruct students to perform a focused review of content: ■ Applicable medication administration procedures from fundamental skills training (continued )

192  ■ III. Teaching in Learning Laboratory and Clinical Setting

TABLE 10.1  TYPES OF LEARNING LABORATORIES (CONTINUED) Learner Groups Health/physical assessment skills pertinent to each scenario Effective communication with healthcare team

Selected drug classifications and categories, including but not limited to the medications found in the scenarios ■ General health assessment skills Set up supplies, equipment, and charts for each patient care scenario. ■

Pediatric and Family Health Laboratories Review previously learned skills in a pediatric and family-oriented context. Practice patient-specific skills and interventions for the pediatric population. Review equipment.

Generally includes practice in: ■ Medication administration: oral, injectable, intravenous ■ Use of infusion devices ■ Infant bathing, feeding, and diapering GI intubation: insertion, feedings, medications, removal ■ Urinary catheterization and specimen collection ■ Ostomy care as applicable to area ■ Tracheostomy care as applicable to clinical setting

Provide learning modules in advance for student review prior to the laboratory session. Instruct students to review required modules prior to laboratory. Set up supplies, equipment, and charts for: ■ Medication administration ■ Infant care skills Bedside procedures

Maternal and Newborn Health Laboratories Review previously learned skills in the context of a labor patient, a newborn, and a postpartum patient. Practice patient-specific skills and interventions for the maternal/newborn population. Review equipment.

Generally includes practice in: ■ Labor support techniques and interventions for the patient and family ■ Fetal heart monitoring ■ Postpartum assessment checklist ■ Newborn assessment and medication administration ■ Practice counting newborn heart rate and respiratory rate

Provide learning modules in advance for student review prior to the laboratory session. Set up supplies, equipment, and charts specific to the skills to be reviewed.

(continued )

10. Learning Laboratories as a Foundation for Nursing Excellence  ■ 193

TABLE 10.1  TYPES OF LEARNING LABORATORIES (CONTINUED) Learner Groups Public/Community Health Laboratories Review previously learned skills in the context of a community setting. Develop and practice patient education and intervention skills in a community-oriented context.

Diagnostic Reasoning Laboratories (Graduate student nurse practitioner laboratories for various specialty areas) Practice and refine body system assessment skills. Refine communication and interviewing skills with a provider-oriented focus.

Interprofessional Education Laboratories Learn, practice, and refine: ■ Interprofessional communication skills ■ Principles of teamwork and collaboration Practice skills and procedures within interprofessional teams.

Generally includes review of: ■ Vital signs: use of manual and/ or noneletronic equipment ■ Glucometer use ■ Basic wound care Use of patient education materials: posters, supplies, equipment, models ■

■

■

■

Provide learning modules in advance for student review prior to the laboratory session. Set up supplies, equipment, and charts specific to the skills to be reviewed.

Body system assessment specific to each session’s content Regular practice integrating systems learned each week into a cohesive assessment

Provide learning modules, case studies, and integrated clinical scenarios as required. Provide a private space with appropriate diagnostic equipment for the body systems reviewed in each session. Set up additional learning resources such as simulators and anatomical models. Set up audio or video equipment as required based on scenario needs and objectives.

Basic to advanced patient care skills and assessment techniques based on patient care scenarios Practice integration of teamwork, collaboration, and communication skills

Provide learning modules in advance for student review prior to the laboratory session. Set up supplies, equipment, and charts specific to the skills to be reviewed.

(continued )

194  ■ III. Teaching in Learning Laboratory and Clinical Setting

TABLE 10.1  TYPES OF LEARNING LABORATORIES (CONTINUED) Learner Groups External Clients Nursing skills refresher for skills development laboratories: ■ Practice specific skills and procedures ■ Improve communication skills ■ Videotaping education offerings.

Basic to advanced patient care skills and assessment techniques based on course requirements

Provide learning modules in advance for student review prior to the laboratory session. Set up supplies, equipment, and charts specific to the skills to be reviewed.

GI, gastrointestinal. Source: Copyright Education-Innovation-Simulation Learning Environment, School of Nursing, The University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill (2020). Reprinted with permission.

LABORATORY ORGANIZATION Instructor-to-Student Ratio The instructor-to-student ratio in the laboratory is determined based on several criteria and can vary based on the intent of each laboratory. Several laboratory groupings are suggested at the top of Table 10.1. Room size, number of staff available to teach, availability and amount of equipment and supplies, student level in the program, and technical difficulty of skills in a particular laboratory all influence the instructor-to-student ratio. The evolving learning styles of students also should be considered. Ratios may range from 1:8 or 1:10 to mimic the clinical setting or can be 1:12 or higher with a large group focus. Because skills acquisition requires more than theoretical knowledge, students need the opportunity to practice with timely feedback, which may be difficult to offer in laboratories with a high student-tofaculty ratio.

Student Assignment Students can select their laboratory section through a registration process, which allows for individual preferences, or might be placed in laboratories based on predetermined criteria such as clinical group assignments. Educators can be assigned to specific laboratory groups for the term or to laboratory sections on a rotational basis. Assigning educators to a specific laboratory section across the term provides them an opportunity to become familiar with the students in that section and to better understand the students’ learning styles. It also can establish an atmosphere of trust and collegiality. However, rotating educators between laboratory groups can provide learners with an opportunity to experience diverse teaching styles and to learn strategies for working within contingency teams, an arrangement that parallels staffing patterns in clinical practice.

10. Learning Laboratories as a Foundation for Nursing Excellence  ■ 195

Staging Area Organization of the laboratory is essential to the success of the laboratory and nursing program. The need for organization cannot be overestimated: when done well, organization makes the laboratory environment seem to run effortlessly. The learning laboratory requires a lot of consumable supplies, durable equipment, staff, and logistical systems to manage both staff and the flow of large numbers of students. Because supply and equipment management is essential to a well-run laboratory, the laboratory requires a staging area. The staging area is more than a storage room. In fact, if called storage, facility management committees may be tempted to move the laboratory storage area to an inconvenient location, making it challenging to access. If the focus of the space is on staging, the space is recognized as being an integral component of the laboratory operations. The staging area is the center of infrastructure activity of the learning laboratory. Functionality of the staging area is dependent on appropriate building structure and a high level of organization and tidiness to allow for accessibility of equipment and supplies when needed. It should be equipped with at least one sink for cleaning and resetting equipment. A sink is also essential to prepare supplies for laboratories that require simulated liquids such as IV fluids, parenteral nutrition (PN), blood, urine, gastrointestinal fluids, and fake stool samples. The staging area also requires adequate shelving and power sources to store supplies and equipment, flat work areas for assembling and packing, and appropriate carts for item transport. A variety of cleaning supplies should be readily available to assist in harvesting used supplies. It is helpful to have various adhesive removers to use for removing adhesive residue from tubing, manikins, and other surfaces. Basic office supplies, from scissors, tape, and markers to printers and label-making equipment, should be accessible in the staging area workspace.

Laboratory Action Plan Teaching materials and instruction guides pertaining to each specific laboratory taught should be standardized across content and room setup across s­ imultaneously occurring laboratories to promote consistent educational experiences. The examples of teaching materials and other documents for a laboratory module included in this chapter can assist in the development and revision of learning laboratory ­documents in the reader’s own institution. A supply list should be created to identify the items needed to teach the lab, along with the location of each item in case more is needed during the teaching session. Optionally, the supply list can also include a snapshot of what each teaching area should look like at the start of lab. To promote standardized room setup, it is helpful to create a guide that outlines how to prepare the space and/or manikins for student learning and practice with instructions to reset or break down the space, manikins, and supplies after the final teaching session. Table 10.2 provides an equipment, supply use, and reset guide template. It provides guidelines to follow before, during, and after each teaching session. The guide should be reviewed by each educator prior to beginning the session to ensure familiarity with the setup equipment, supplies, and procedures. In addition to the room and laboratory setup guidelines, there should be a lesson plan that both outlines the content to be covered and indicates the amount of time to be spent on each topic. Recommendations for possible teaching strategies, such as observation, participation during the educator’s demonstration (round table

196  ■ III. Teaching in Learning Laboratory and Clinical Setting

practice discussed later in the chapter), and practice after observation, should be included on the lesson plan to guide the educational experience, allowing consistency among educators. Table 10.3 shows a one-page lesson plan template to briefly outline the topics to present, teaching method, and allotted time for each topic. TABLE 10.2  EQUIPMENT, SUPPLY USE, AND RESET GUIDE TEMPLATE NAME OF LAB Equipment and Supply Use and Reset Guide 1. Provide instructions to finalize set up prior to lab: a. Explain what has to be checked, such as the presence of a fluid reservoir b. Identify final preparation steps to complete, such as applying dressings c. List items to lay out for instructor and/or student use, such as syringes and needles 2. Provide instructions to follow during lab: a. Indicate where to find replacement or additional supplies for items used during lab b. List what to do with used supplies (reusable and disposable ones, including biohazard waste requirements), such as refilling and repackaging syringes or emptying and repackaging tubing 3. Provide instructions to reset at the end of lab for repeated sessions that day: a. Identify what the instructor and students should do to reset the area, such as putting out new supplies, refilling bags or syringes, or emptying reservoirs b. Identify where to find replacements to restock one-time use supplies 4. Provide instructions to close down the room if there is a delay between teaching sessions and to close down the room at the end of the final teaching session: a. List the items that need to be refilled and repackaged or emptied and repackaged b. List things to do to prevent degradation of supplies or equipment, such as removing transparent dressings from manikins and emptying reservoirs c. List steps to close the room, such as emptying trash, washing, or turning off technology

TABLE 10.3  LESSON PLAN TEMPLATE NAME OF LAB Schedule TIME

EVENT or SKILL

Insert time (in minutes or hours)

List each individual event or skill in a separate cell in preferred chronological order before the break Include a breakdown of expected teaching method, such as round table practice, instructor demonstration, or student practice after instructor demonstration

Insert time

Break (indicate when the break occurs during the teaching session)

Insert time in minutes or hours

List each individual event or skill in a separate cell in preferred chronological order

Optional: List specific information for related to equipment or supplies (e.g., keep original packaging with feeding tubes and repackage after demonstrating the tubes)

10. Learning Laboratories as a Foundation for Nursing Excellence  ■ 197

To enhance efficiency and consistency in each laboratory and between rooms, a teaching box can be created for each module or session (Figure 10.1). Modulespecific equipment and supplies are placed in the teaching box, along with a list of contents. Items that are necessary for the teaching session but do not fit into the teaching box can be included on the list, along with the storage location of those items. The list should indicate where to obtain replacement supplies if needed. Figure 10.1 also shows an example of a teaching box supply list. Teaching boxes are prepared and restocked after each teaching session. The restocked teaching boxes can be stored in a staging area, ready for the next session (Figure 10.2).

FIGURE 10.1 Examples of teaching boxes used for laboratory setup Source: Reprinted with permission from Education-Innovation-Simulation Learning Environment, School of Nursing, The University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, 2020.

198  ■ III. Teaching in Learning Laboratory and Clinical Setting

FIGURE 10.2 Teaching boxes stored in laboratory staging area. Source: Reprinted with permission Education-Innovation-Simulation Learning Environment, School of Nursing, The University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, 2020.

LEARNING MODULES Students should enter each laboratory session with a basic understanding of the content to be covered in that laboratory. Learning modules, provided to students well in advance of the scheduled session, give students a standardized baseline from which to start skills acquisition. Each module should include the name of the lab or subject area to be presented, student preparation instructions, learning outcomes, required and recommended readings and audiovisuals, a list of topics to be covered in the laboratory with the assigned readings (ideally in a table with one column for the topic and one column for the specific assigned readings or audiovisuals per topic), and a breakout for each topic that includes specialized content focusing on the key theoretical concepts and an outline or checklist for completing each procedural skill to be reviewed. Learning modules should be named for continuity and/or clarity in a manner that follows the course syllabus or learning management system plan. Modules can be given a general name, such as Respiratory Interventions, or can be given a specific name, such as Respiratory and Enteral Medications. Whichever naming convention is used, students and instructors should be able to figure out what is being taught in that session and should be able to differentiate that content from previous or future laboratory experiences. For example, naming a learning module Skills Lab 1 does not identify what specific content will be covered in the lab versus what will be taught in the next skills lab. Student instructions should include information about preparation before, activities during, and expectations at the end of the laboratory experience. Steps that students need to complete prior to attending lab, for example, take online quiz, should be listed. If students are supposed to bring a supply kit they have already received, it is sometimes helpful to include a picture of the supply kit or a list of the required

10. Learning Laboratories as a Foundation for Nursing Excellence  ■ 199

items. Preparation instructions may also include general reminders for behaviors expected during lab that cross multiple learning experiences such as demonstrating proper body mechanics and reminders that are specific to that session learning content, for example, demonstrating sterile technique during the sterile field setup. Expectations of students at the end of lab (“clean up and reset work area”) should be included, along with reminders such as not discarding specific supplies that students need to take with them after lab. Learning outcomes should be listed numerically with the expected level of achievement. Ideally, the outcomes should be listed in the expected order of completion within a topic area so they flow according to how the skill would be completed in practice. For example, an outcome about appropriate documentation should not be listed before an outcome about appropriately administering an oral medication using medical asepsis. The required and recommended readings and audiovisual content used to develop the teaching content should be outlined in a standardized presentation across all modules, such as textbooks first, then journals, then internet sites or videos. A table can be included with a column for the list of topics (and related learning outcomes) and a column for assigned readings. This provides students with a centralized location to access required information if they cannot complete all the assignments at one time. The module can also include any additional theoretical concepts that students need to know for the topic. Providing students with the key concepts underlying individual skills is a component of teaching any skill. Learning the theoretical underpinnings and patient care application of skills assists the learner to understand how the knowledge can be used in practical clinical situations. Making the connections between acquiring and using knowledge is what Benner et al. (2010) referred to as teaching for a sense of salience. This sense-making of knowledge assists students to understand the nuances of skills, their application to patient care, and how skills acquisition affects their professional development as a nurse. Modules can include specific procedural skill checklists. Skills that are closely related to one another can be grouped together to encourage students to associate those steps. For example, the steps of introducing oneself to the patient, identifying the patient, and asking about allergies can be grouped together to encourage students to develop a habit of completing them at the same time. A rationale for the steps in the procedure and why they are grouped together can be included. Important steps that occur before or after the actual psychomotor skill completion, such as verifying orders, checking medications, documenting, or assessing patient response to a treatment or medication, also should be included in the module. Learning modules vary from locally prepared documents to ones obtained from commercial publishers and nursing organizations. They should be available to learners for either printing or downloading to meet different reading and learning styles. Faculty members should ensure that content found in the course textbook and learning resources matches the laboratory modules. These documents need to be revised each year to stay current with practice, national guidelines, articles, textbooks, and other resources used in the course. If learning module content differs from these resources, that fact should be noted in the module, with a rationale for the difference to assist the learner to understand how evidence-based practice may evolve quicker than the supporting textbook.

200  ■ III. Teaching in Learning Laboratory and Clinical Setting

Some nursing education programs provide didactic content prior to lab where the skills are covered in lecture with a subsequent lab. Other programs provide conceptual themes, such as immobility, without didactic content related to the skills. An additional teaching strategy is to provide a podcast to deliver standardized key theoretical or procedural content, eliminating the possibility of inconsistent coverage of material in individual laboratories. Additionally, the podcast allows students who are auditory learners an alternative method for acquiring the content. Students read the module and have the option of listening to a podcast of the content prior to attending the laboratory session.

LEARNING LABORATORY SESSIONS It is important for students to review the content before attending the laboratory session, to avoid spending a significant amount of time during the laboratory discussing key concepts and to allow for more time for practicing skills. To encourage student review and a basic level of preparation, a quiz might be administered online or in person before the laboratory session or as the first component of the session before teaching begins. The frequency of these quizzes may vary from preceding each laboratory session to being given randomly throughout the course. The aim of these quizzes is to assess preparation for the laboratory and understanding of key concepts, not to assess skill application. Ideally, all students will have an opportunity for guided practice of all skills (either by the educator or by a peer observing using the procedure guide). Another option is to have students view video recordings that demonstrate the skills and include evidence-based practice. Students can then use laboratory time to apply what they have learned in case-based scenarios. A third approach, round table practice, is used when students move through the steps of a skill together. As an example, students can arrange the overbed tables in a half circle as the educator demonstrates and walks the students through a skill (such as donning sterile gloves) in a stepwise manner. Students continue to practice while the educator walks around the room to critique technique and offer feedback. The best approach depends on the learners, content, space and time constraints, and expertise of the educator. During the laboratory sessions, students should have practice time with feedback after skills are demonstrated to allow them the opportunity for deliberate practice to improve performance. Some skills can be practiced outside the laboratory setting, but others require specialty laboratory equipment and supplies (e.g., tracheostomy suctioning). Adequate time in the laboratory environment is an important consideration. Regardless of where skills are practiced, it is important to provide specific criteria to facilitate accurate practice.

REALISM Realism in the learning laboratory enhances preparation of students for actual patient care. Realism should be enhanced as much as possible within the constraints of the learning laboratory to encourage students to immerse themselves in the patient care scenario. There are many ways to promote a realistic environment, from setting up simulated hospital rooms with patient records and manikins in the beds to obtaining the actual equipment and supplies available at local facilities.

10. Learning Laboratories as a Foundation for Nursing Excellence  ■ 201

Cost is always a consideration when determining how realistic a laboratory can be. The school of nursing must decide whether to purchase or create a facsimile of the necessary items for teaching, such as call bells and medication labels. For example, call bells can be made from pictures downloaded from the internet, which are then laminated or affixed to a surface and attached to a cord. The cord can be a purchased electrical cord or a cloth or cable that is made to represent a hospital call bell cord. Simple computer software found free on the internet can be used to simulate medication labels, or labeling systems can be purchased from a vendor. Learning laboratory personnel constantly have to balance educational needs and funding constraints. Another way to create realism is to provide documents that mimic affiliate agencies’ forms that the student would use for documenting the skill when completed. For medication administration, a provider’s order sheet, medication administration record, and other pertinent documentation forms should be available for the specific laboratory content. The forms can be hard copies or in an electronic format. Many schools of nursing have invested in academic electronic health record systems for students to learn documentation.

SUPPLY BAGS Skill acquisition requires manipulation of materials and practice. To enable handson practice, supply bags can be assembled, providing the student with a select list of supplies for skill development. Bags can be purchased for a specific nursing course or periodically throughout the program to meet specialized clinical requirements. The contents of each bag will reflect the skills that the faculty consider most important for students to gain competence in performing. Supply bags can be funded with a separate fee that students pay in addition to other course costs, or they can be provided as part of the required lab fees. Supply bags can promote student responsibility while providing all students with the same level of supplies, either new or used. Providing supplies up front to students can decrease the amount needed to keep in stock, which has implications for space utilization, storage, and funding. Decisions should be made about the specific contents to offer in the supply bag, such as whether to supply needles and syringes for practice and appropriate disposal or recycling of used supplies at the end of training.

PRACTICE LABORATORIES Practice laboratories allow deliberate practice of skills taught in laboratories and can enhance student performance. Practice laboratories can be regularly scheduled or can occur on an as-needed basis, depending on the requirements of the specific course and nursing program. These laboratories can be open to general practice of any skill requiring refreshment or refinement or geared toward preparation for an upcoming performance evaluation with a focus on the set of skills to be evaluated. Practice laboratories for evaluation should not be considered a time to reteach laboratory content, but rather a time for skill refinement using deliberate practice. These laboratories do not have to be tied to a specific clinical course; instead, they can be offered to any student who needs to refresh skills or who requires remediation. Staffing decisions for practice laboratories depend on the availability of resources, both personnel and physical. Ideally, all practice laboratories should be staffed with

202  ■ III. Teaching in Learning Laboratory and Clinical Setting

a qualified educator, and the ratio of educators to students should be low to allow for more direct guidance and feedback to students as they practice skills. If the decision is made to offer practice laboratories without an educator present, space access and accountability issues have to be addressed. Practice laboratories should occur with the same room setup as the one in which skills were taught, which can result in competition for space and faculty. Decisions also have to be made about when to offer practice laboratories and what equipment and supplies will be made available to students during them. General practice laboratory policies and procedures should be in place and available for students, including cleaning and resetting the laboratory space for later students, timeliness, and attendance requirements.

INDIVIDUAL DELIBERATE PRACTICE Individual deliberate practice sessions, one-to-one teaching time, can benefit students who need additional time to grasp a specific skill or concept in the laboratory or who want to improve their competence. Individual practice sessions should not be used in place of initial teaching or group practice but should be used as an adjunct to maximize resource utilization. Clear guidelines for the use of deliberate practice time have to be established to ensure the most equitable availability for all students who seek assistance. Consideration should be given to the frequency of deliberate practice time, the best qualified educator to guide learning in the session, and policies for determining the frequency of individual student access because of limited resources.

COMPETENCY EVALUATIONS Demonstration of skills through competency evaluation provides visible evidence of the student’s psychomotor skill learning. Competency in skill performance should be assessed in periodic performance evaluations throughout the term, but it can also be assessed only at the end of the term. Designated levels of performance expected in clinical practice and determined by faculty are the traditional ways to constitute skills competence. Skills evaluation can be formative or summative. Formative evaluation continually assesses students’ progress in developing skills and is focused on diagnostic feedback to assess further learning needs. Formative evaluations do not assign a grade to the evaluation experience. Summative evaluation, in contrast, assesses what students have learned at the end of instruction and may be done periodically or at end of term. Summative evaluation provides a grade or a basis for making high-stakes decisions (Oermann & Gaberson, 2021). Formative and summative evaluations both use skill procedure checklists to assess preassigned or randomly selected skills. Formative skills competency evaluation may occur through an informal assessment of selected skills, such as when an evaluator observes a student performing a dressing change and provides immediate feedback about the student’s technique and ability to perform the skill at a safe and competent level. A summative skills competency evaluation of the same dressing change skill is a formal assessment of the student’s ability to perform the skill according to predetermined criteria (pass/fail or graded). Proceeding without feedback from the evaluator, the student attempts to perform the skill at a safe and competent level. At the end of the summative evaluation, the student receives feedback

10. Learning Laboratories as a Foundation for Nursing Excellence  ■ 203

about the skill demonstrated. Both types of evaluation are essential components in learning laboratories. More in-depth discussion about formative and summative evaluation can be found in Chapter 13. Decisions about the amount and type of feedback to be offered during skills performance should be made by and agreed on by all evaluators to promote standardized evaluation criteria. Consistency in teaching skills is critical; inconsistency places the learner at a disadvantage for the performance evaluation. Students need to be assured that they have been taught what is necessary to be successful, not only on the competency exam, but also for practice. Standardized evaluation checklists are important to enhance consistency among evaluators and can be developed based on the course material or a skills guide or generated locally. Evaluations can be awarded a grade, or a successful result can be considered a pass– fail requirement for a course. The importance of skills evaluation as a component for ­successful ­completion of the course must be outlined in the course syllabus. The selection of skills for evaluation can vary based on local agency and nursing program requirements. Skills to be evaluated might be a predetermined set that all students complete, or they might be randomly assigned from the skills to be demonstrated. Evaluations can be documented on paper or in an electronic format. Electronic formats are easy to provide to students for review after each evaluation is complete, and the educator can upload the performance evaluation checklists into a secure student file. Verbal feedback given to students at the end of the evaluation can be followed up by providing the student with a copy of the checklist documentation. This provides students the opportunity to review what was missed as they prepare for return demonstration of the skill at a later time. As with all testing instruments, information security concerning evaluation forms must comply with established academic standards. When the instructor creates student evaluation checklists, it is helpful for both students and evaluators to know which critical steps are mandatory for successful completion of the skills. If there are critical patient or nurse safety elements that, when omitted, would require students to repeat the evaluation, both the evaluator and the student should be aware of those elements. However, students should not expect to pass skills if only the critical steps are completed, while other less critical but important steps are not demonstrated. A star system is an example of a transparent evaluation system that triages the steps of skills into different levels. A star system, assigning one, two, or three stars to each step of the skill, encourages students to understand the critical steps in a skill, promotes patient and nurse safety, and reinforces the understanding that all steps have a rationale and degree of importance. If students omit or do not perform correctly a one-star step, they can be required to be reassessed for that skill, regardless of how well they perform the rest of the steps. If students omit or do not perform correctly two of the two-star steps, they need to be evaluated again, and so forth. Table 10.4 provides a template of a skill competency evaluation checklist using the star system. Students should be able to review the evaluation results, especially if they will be required to be reassessed on those skills at a later date. When students do not perform a skill satisfactorily, they are usually evaluated again on the same skill. Students can be required to perform a different skill in subsequent evaluations, based on local policy and depending on the importance of the skill or underlying concept. High-risk skills such as administration of an intravenous medication

204  ■ III. Teaching in Learning Laboratory and Clinical Setting

TABLE 10.4  TEMPLATE OF SKILL COMPETENCY EVALUATION CHECKLIST Evaluation Criteria: miss any one bullet in a one-star item (*), have to redo; miss any two bullets out of two-star items (**), have to redo; and miss any three bullets out of three-star items (***), have to redo ✓/NAME OF SKILL

Eval

Redo 1

Redo 2

List the steps for each section of the skill: Use bullets (if no specific order is required) or numbers (if a specific order is required) to list all substeps that should be accomplished ■ Use a separate row for different steps ■ Indicate the level of evaluation criteria after each step or sub step using the appropriate number of stars (*/**/***) ■

Date

Evaluator Name

Score (circle one)

Evaluation

Skill: Pass (Points) Redo

Redo 1

Skill: Pass (Points) Redo

Redo 2

Skill: Pass (Points) Redo

Source: Reprinted by permission Education-Innovation-Simulation Learning Environment, School of Nursing, The University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, 2020.

would benefit from a second attempt at the same skill, possibly with a different medication. Performance evaluation can contribute points to a course grade or be pass– fail. If evaluations are pass–fail, students might not attend to the important work of skills acquisition due to competing priorities. If points (even minimal points) are attached to skills performance, students may give higher priority to the laboratory content. The number of allowable reassessments should be incorporated into the course syllabus to avoid a situation in which students continually fail performance evaluations but still pass the course. The consequences of not obtaining a satisfactory pass after the established numbers of allowable attempts must be determined and communicated to students at the beginning of the course.

LOGISTICS Scheduling Scheduling is a key consideration when running a learning laboratory. The need for multiple student interactions requires close scheduling to avoid conflict and meet

10. Learning Laboratories as a Foundation for Nursing Excellence  ■ 205

staffing requirements. Regularly scheduled teaching laboratories, practice laboratories, evaluations, opportunities to be reassessed on the performance of skills, and remediation sessions have to be coordinated around the students’ class and clinical schedules. Laboratories and simulation experiences for students in different terms of the nursing program may have to be interwoven because of competition for space and staffing. The schedule should be developed and maintained centrally in the learning laboratory to minimize conflicts and accidental overbooking.

Sign Up Tools Scheduling students for practice laboratories, evaluations, and individual practice time can be accomplished in different ways. Students can be allowed to sign up independently, or they can be scheduled for activities by laboratory personnel. If students are allowed to sign up on their own, the method chosen must be accessible to all students. They should be notified in advance when the sign up will be available, thereby providing equal opportunity for selecting preferred timeslots. Guidelines should be in place for determining how many times students can sign up for recurring activities, when sign up will open and close, how students notify learning laboratory personnel if they cannot attend a scheduled laboratory, and any penalties for nonattendance.

Inventory Tracking An inventory system for tracking equipment needs to be in place in the learning laboratory. Personnel should be able to track equipment purchases; schedule and complete maintenance; and check out equipment to students, staff, and faculty members. The inventory tracking system can be hardcopy or electronic and should include a labeling system to track each individual piece of equipment. Regular inventory checks should be accomplished to ensure that all equipment is available and tested for usability. Equipment needing an upgrade can be noted in the inventory for future purchasing opportunities.

Budget and Purchasing The budget for learning laboratories varies across schools of nursing and can range from minimal to substantial. It can come from different sources, both internal and external. The budget for the learning laboratory should include recurring supply purchases, plans for one-time equipment purchases, and personnel salaries, if applicable. A purchasing and budget tracking system should be in place, using both hardcopy forms and electronic tracking processes. Information concerning warranties, recall notices, and items purchased via outside sources for the laboratory should be kept with purchasing and budget documents to facilitate continuity in equipment maintenance, planning, and utilization of funds. The fiscal costs of running a laboratory include obtaining sustainable equipment and consumable supplies. Sometimes laboratories acquire used beds, overbed tables, bedside tables, and other equipment when area hospitals purchase new items. Additionally, purchasing from companies that have refurbished equipment can lower costs, but it is recommended to complete a reference check to ensure that the equipment has been adequately refurbished. Laboratories make large financial investments in computerized simulation manikins, static manikins, and task

206  ■ III. Teaching in Learning Laboratory and Clinical Setting

trainers. As good stewards, learning laboratories need to care for these teaching aids to maximize their longevity. Even with excellent care, equipment will eventually have to be replaced. Replacement considerations should be included in annual fiscal planning for the laboratory. Consumable supplies are a large expense for laboratories. If schools have the option to affiliate with a medical facility purchasing department to order supplies, it can be cost effective because of bulk ordering. Additional fees such as stocking fees charged by the medical facility must be calculated into the budget. Outside vendors also are a viable resource for laboratory supplies. Often it is beneficial to have accounts with multiple supply vendors to allow for access to various products, competitive cost comparisons, and flexible shipping timelines.

EXTERNAL CLIENTS Given the rich resources of a learning laboratory, there are often external clients that request utilization of the laboratory to equip their learners. External clients may include healthcare continuing education programs, local hospitals, emergency services, and researchers, among others. External clients benefit from having a laboratory located nearby to provide an easily accessible space for learner practice. Researchers can use a laboratory to properly train employees in such tasks as blood collection, taking vital signs, and medication administration. Depending on legal requirements and local needs, a business contract outlining the details of staffing, funding, reimbursement, and purchasing should be established.

SUMMARY Learning laboratories exist both to create meaningful learning experiences during skills acquisition and to nurture the development of professional nurses who can provide safe and quality care. For learning laboratories to function effectively, they should be integrated into the curriculum to provide students the opportunity to review skills and engage in deliberate practice, while applying skills across the patient care continuum. Although educators who work in the learning laboratory might come from a variety of backgrounds or hold varied positions, they should all agree on the importance of the learning laboratory in the greater context of nursing education. Teaching in learning laboratories can be a rewarding role because students enter the laboratory excited about learning psychomotor skills, and the educator has the opportunity to encourage depth and breadth of professional competency. When planning learning laboratory content, educators must consider staffing needs, training requirements for laboratory educators, expectations of and by students, the educator-to-student ratio, and the depth and breadth of student assignments and evaluations to be completed. Storage and staging of equipment and supplies, the action plan for laboratory setup and breakdown, the type and quantity of supplies available to students, and efforts to promote realism in the laboratory setting must also be considered within budgetary constraints. Laboratory content should be structured and presented in a timely manner, preferably at the same time as or close to the time that applicable course content is taught. Careful development of learning experiences that provide consistent opportunities for all learners

10. Learning Laboratories as a Foundation for Nursing Excellence  ■ 207

is an important consideration when determining the flow of laboratory content. The availability and frequency of psychomotor skills practice, including the amount of deliberate practice that can be provided, has to be balanced with the need to present new content, evaluate skills acquisition, and provide simulation experiences. All of these factors, while challenging, contribute to making the learning laboratory an environment that is both rewarding and renewing with each new influx of students. Learning laboratories should be vibrant, educational hubs for engaging learners to be immersed in deliberate practice to provide quality and safe patient care. Faculty members are responsible for providing creative learning experiences that move the learner from knowing about to implementing those skills, while considering how to provide optimal care in each unique patient situation. Laboratory educators are privileged to be guides for learners during this portion of their journey from novice to expert practitioner.

REFERENCES Adam, H., & Galinsky, A. D. (2019). Reflections on enclothed cognition: Commentary on burns, et al. Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 83, 157–159. https://doi.org/ 10.1016/j.jesp2018.12.002. Benner, P. (1984). From novice to expert: Excellence and power in clinical nursing practice. Addison-Wesley. Benner, P., Sutphen, M., Leonard, V., & Day, L. (2010). Educating nurses: A call for radical transformation. The Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching. Colvin, G. (2008). Talent is overrated: What really separates world-class performers from everybody else. Penguin. Cronenwett, L., Sherwood, G., Barnsteiner, J., Disch, J., Johnson, J., Mitchell, P., & Warren, J. (2007). Quality and safety education for nurses. Nursing Outlook, 55(3), 122–131. https:// doi.org/10.1016/j.outlook.2007.02.006 Diers, D. (1990). Learning the art and craft of nursing. American Journal of Nursing, 90(1), 65–66. doi:10.2307/3426230 Ericsson, K. A. (2004). Deliberate practice and the acquisition and maintenance of expert performance in medicine and related domains. Academic Medicine, 79(Suppl. 10), S70–S81. https://doi.org/10.1097/00001888-200410001-00022 Ericsson, K. A. (2008). Deliberate practice and acquisition of expert performance: A general overview. Academic Emergency Medicine, 15(11), 988–994. https://doi.org/10.1111/ j1553-2712.2008.00227.x Fitts, P. M., & Posner, M. I. (1967). Human performance. Brooks/Cole. Kang, S. J., & Min, H. Y. (2019). Psychological safety in nursing simulation. Nurse Educator, 44(2), E6–E9. https://doi.org/10.1097/NNE.0000000000000571 Levitin, D. J. (2006). This is your brain on music: The science of a human obsession. Dutton. Oermann, M. H., & Gaberson, K. B. (2021). Evaluation and testing in nursing education (6th ed.). Springer Publishing Company. Oermann, M. H., Muckler, V. C., & Morgan, B. (2016). Framework for teaching psychomotor and procedural skills in nursing. Journal of Continuing Education in Nursing, 47(6), 278–282. https://doi.org/10.3928/00220124-20160518-10 Reinhart, R. J. (2020). Nurses continue to rate highest in honesty, ethics. Gallup, 2020. https:// news.gallup.com/poll/274673/nurses-continue-rate-highest-honesty-ethics.aspx

11 Clinical Teaching in Nursing Lisa K. Woodley and JoAn M. Stanek

OBJECTIVES 1. Describe the importance of effective clinical teaching in nursing 2. Summarize research related to clinical teaching in nursing 3. Differentiate between the various components of the process of clinical teaching, including learning outcomes, student learning needs, clinical learning activities, student guidance in the clinical setting, and evaluation of student performance

INTRODUCTION The clinical teacher plays a pivotal role in shaping the learning for nursing students in the clinical setting. Because of this, it is essential that clinical teachers exhibit effective teaching behaviors and best practices in teaching nursing, and that they inspire students. This chapter explains why effective clinical teaching is so critical, the process of clinical teaching, and how the clinical teacher should best address learning outcomes for students. Specific teaching strategies are discussed, such as how to create a learning climate that is inviting and supportive to students, how to foster effective relationships in the clinical setting, how to design an effective and inspirational clinical orientation, how to choose best patient assignments for students, and how to conduct effective site visits for prelicensure and nurse practitioner students. This chapter also describes other best clinical teaching practices, such as structuring and organizing the clinical day, creating clinical conferences and other learning activities that enhance student learning, and giving guidance and feedback to students in the clinical setting. The concepts and teaching strategies described in the chapter are applicable across clinical settings and apply to prelicensure as well as APRN students. Models of clinical teaching, such as dedicated education units and other types of partnerships, are described in Chapter 12, and clinical evaluation is discussed separately in Chapter 15.

THE IMPORTANCE OF EFFECTIVE CLINICAL TEACHING The clinical experience has long been recognized as a significant and essential ­component of nursing education. Because of the importance of clinical learning experiences, and because resources are limited, clinical teachers need to optimize

210  ■ III. TEACHING IN LEARNING LABORATORY AND CLINICAL SETTING

clinical practice opportunities. Clinical teachers have a responsibility not only to their students, but also to patients, families, and the nursing profession to identify and exhibit highly effective clinical behaviors. Many clinical teachers, however, have had little formal preparation for this complex teaching role. New clinical teachers might have clinical competence and have completed a graduate program related to APRN but possess little to no experience or formal education in how to effectively teach students. Furthermore, faculty shortages can make the recruitment and retention of effective full-time clinical faculty with current expertise in the clinical area challenging, resulting in more part-time clinical teachers working with students in clinical and laboratory settings (Hewitt & Lewallen, 2010; Owens, 2017). While novice teachers are often excited at the opportunity to contribute to the education of nursing students, they may encounter reality shock as they try to meet the many responsibilities inherent in the role of clinical faculty (Jetha et al., 2016). Not only must they relearn what the clinical experience is like for nursing students, but clinical teachers must be prepared to teach multiple generations of students, since the ages of today’s students can vary widely (Bryan, 2018; Lewis-Pierre, 2019). Many of these students will be millennial students, who desire highly stimulating learning environments and are used to multitasking and quickly accessing a variety of information. Generation Z students, individuals born after 1990, are entering nursing programs (Williams, 2019). Others, including second degree students, are often older in age and are pursuing nursing as second career (Lewis-Pierre, 2019). Because many nurse educators are from the baby boomer generation, they may find themselves needing to quickly adapt to the needs of these students and having to engage them in new, innovative, and creative ways (Ferszt et al., 2017). Multiple factors present in the clinical setting pose additional challenges. In inpatient settings, clinical faculty teach in complex and often unpredictable clinical practice areas, with high patient complexity and acuity, specialized interventions, and ever-changing technology (Hewitt & Lewallen, 2010; Yang & Chao, 2018).). In clinical settings such as outpatient areas, mental health learning environments, and hospice, clinical teachers face other challenges. For example, many students report feeling intimidated and concerned with their ability to effectively communicate with patients and families in mental health and hospice settings (Abraham et al., 2018; Jeffers, 2018). Furthermore, in mental health settings students may bear witness to perceived unequal power between nurses and patients (Slemon et al., 2018). In an outpatient setting, students need structured learning activities and guidance for the clinical experience to be successful (Helgesen et al., 2016). Despite the challenges, clinical teachers promote student learning in varied clinical practice areas. Without a positive clinical experience, students are unlikely to choose a given area to practice after they graduate and may even perpetuate stigma associated with caring for those populations. Clinical teachers represent an essential component of the clinical experience for students. They can promote learning regardless of experiences available in the clinical setting and can hamper learning despite valuable experiences being available (Oermann et al., 2018). The clinical experience offers nursing students the opportunity to apply theory from the classroom setting into the practice setting, solve complex clinical problems, reflect on care observed or provided, think creatively to meet patient and family needs, and carry out nursing skills within the context of the healthcare system (Ironside et al., 2014). However, simply placing a student in the

11. Clinical Teaching in Nursing  ■  211

clinical area does not guarantee that this learning will occur. Without an effective clinical teacher, students might develop poor habits and disillusionment because they might view the classroom and clinical environments as two completely separate worlds. Effective clinical nurse educators can help students find meaning in their learning experience, bridge the gap between theory and practice, and enhance student self-confidence (Arkan et al., 2018).

RESEARCH RELATED TO CLINICAL TEACHING The literature suggests that for clinical teachers to be effective, they need to p ­ ossess a variety of teaching behaviors. These behaviors fall into several categories, including nursing competence, teaching ability, interpersonal relations, personality characteristics, and evaluation skills (Knox & Mogan, 1985). Nursing competence refers not only to having extensive, up-to-date knowledge, but also the ability to clearly communicate that knowledge to students and facilitate their development of clinical judgment. Teaching ability includes activities such as helping students organize their thoughts about patient problems and being well prepared and organized. Interpersonal relations are reflected in a clinical teacher’s ability to display mutual respect; listen to students; and be supportive and encouraging, yet challenging. Personal characteristics include being approachable and enthusiastic, being a strong role model for students, admitting mistakes, and having a sense of humor. Evaluation skills include the ability to provide feedback and evaluate students fairly, constructively, and in a manner that will facilitate learning (Knox & Mogan, 1985). Clinical teachers need to possess behaviors in all five categories to be effective, although certain groups of students may emphasize the importance of some categories more than others (Soriano & Aquino, 2017). It is especially important to recognize that some underrepresented minority students have unique challenges in the clinical setting related to living between two worlds, the paucity of role models in nursing from similar backgrounds, and struggling to feel as though they belong (Woodley & Lewallen, 2020). Because of this, it is essential that clinical teachers ensure as much as possible that all students feel supported and that their success is important. When clinical teachers demonstrate a commitment to student success and interest in students as individuals, positive faculty–student relationships are fostered. Furthermore, these teacher behaviors model the core values of nursing such as care, compassion, and empathy—values that are essential in the development and socialization of the student into the profession of nursing (Percy & Richardson, 2018). Research suggests that students’ view of the effectiveness of clinical faculty directly relates to their motivation for learning (Valiee et al., 2016). In fact, student confidence flourishes when the clinical teacher practices a holistic approach to education, demonstrated by supporting students and promoting their independence (Valiee et al., 2016). The correlation between effective clinical teaching and emotional intelligence has also been studied but results have been inconclusive to date. Current research hints at a trend toward significance between emotional intelligence and nursing competence—a subcategory of clinical teaching effectiveness. More research is needed to clearly understand this relationship and what impact it may have on student learning in the clinical setting (Mosca, 2019).

212  ■ III. TEACHING IN LEARNING LABORATORY AND CLINICAL SETTING

Stresses of Students and Teachers in Clinical Practice Research on clinical teaching in nursing reflects that students experience a variety of stressors in the clinical practice area. One real stressor is the fear of making mistakes in the clinical setting, including medication errors, potentially impacting not only the patient safety but also the student’s confidence and self-worth (Koharchik & Flavin, 2017; Zieber & Williams, 2015). Other student stressors include: being unfamiliar with the clinical setting and clinical practices; experiencing different types and acuity of patient conditions; interacting with patients, staff members, and other healthcare providers; and interacting with and being observed by clinical faculty members. Some settings, such as pediatrics, may create more stress for students because of the vulnerability of pediatric patients and the frequent but potentially intimidating involvement of families in patients’ care. Other settings, such as hospice, may create anxiety for students because of their need to confront their own emotions as well as their lack of confidence in communicating comfort to dying patients and families (Jeffers, 2018). Clinical teachers are essential in helping students successfully navigate these stressors within the clinical learning environment. For example, if nursing students experience incivility from staff nurses, clinical teachers, or other health professionals, they are more likely to develop emotional exhaustion and burnout (BabenkoMould & Laschinger, 2014). Clinical educators are instrumental in ensuring that this does not happen, and if it does, to help the student work through the experience. It  is essential for clinical teachers to be aware of how stressful the clinical experience can be for students, and to reassure students that the role of the clinical teacher is not just to evaluate, but rather to teach, mentor, and help students learn. Keeping clinical feedback instructional and not overly personal or critical can also reduce students’ stress and increase student motivation to learn (Oermann et al., 2018). It is important to note that the stress experienced by nursing students does not diminish as they advance through the program. Senior students who are about to graduate might be anxious about passing their licensing examination, fear whether they know enough to practice competently, and experience the anxiety of job hunting while they are completing their studies. The need for clinical teachers to role model excellence in nursing and to support and guide senior students remains just as paramount as when working with beginning nursing students. Stressors exist for clinical nurse educators as well. Managing clinical groups with a large number of students, missing learning opportunities for students because of group size, experiencing time constraints due to short clinical rotations, having difficulty balancing student learning with patient safety, being viewed as visitors in their designated teaching area, and having a lack of formal preparation for teaching are all current challenges facing clinical faculty (Luhanga, 2018). Additional stresses for clinical educators are teaching outside their primary area of clinical expertise, fostering collaborative relationships with staff, having students being used as nursing staff rather than focusing on their learning needs, witnessing student and staff conflict, working with poorly prepared and failing students, fulfilling lengthy organizational compliance requirements, and receiving less than desirable compensation and teaching contracts (Poorman & Mastorovich, 2014; Ryan & McAllister, 2020; Yang & Chao, 2018). The clinical teacher can remain positive and cope effectively by developing strategies for dealing with these issues. Enjoying the personal satisfaction that develops as the result of being a professionally competent and effective clinical teacher

11. Clinical Teaching in Nursing  ■  213

can also counterbalance these stressors. Faculty mentorship and professional ­development programs can further assist clinical teachers in identifying shared stressors and ­collaborating to form solutions (Ryan & McAllister, 2020).

RELATIONSHIPS WITH STUDENTS AND STAFF The clinical learning environment has a more complex context than the controlled classroom environment yet is essential for socializing students into the profession of nursing. It is important for clinical teachers and students alike to remember that the clinical learning environment is an established healthcare or community setting, and in a traditional clinical teaching model, students and educators are guests in that site. The clinical teacher’s role, in addition to mentoring, guiding, planning for, and teaching students, is also to act as a culture broker or boundary spanner in this clinical setting (Oermann et al., 2018). As a gatekeeper in the clinical setting, it is critical that the clinical faculty ­member keep lines of communication open between students and staff (Oermann et al., 2018). Keeping staff informed and up-to-date about the specific activities in which students will be engaging from week to week helps avoid confusion and frustration on the part of both students and staff. Patient safety is also maintained as a result of clear communication among faculty, students, and staff. Further discussion pertaining to the relationship between clinical teachers and students is woven throughout this chapter.

PROCESS OF CLINICAL TEACHING Clinical teaching includes identifying the outcomes for learning, assessing student learning needs, planning clinical learning activities, guiding students, and evaluating their learning and performance (Oermann et al., 2018). This chapter addresses outcomes for learning, assessing learner needs, planning clinical learning activities, and guiding students. Clinical evaluation is discussed in Chapter 15.

Learning Outcomes Learning outcomes of the clinical experience can be intended as well as unintended. Intended learning outcomes for students relate to three domains of learning. Each of these domains of student learning can be fostered through effective clinical teaching behaviors and strategies, which promote learning and student confidence. Cognitive learning reflects students’ growing knowledge level, ability to engage in clinical reasoning and problem-solving, development of higher-level thinking skills, and ability to relate their knowledge to the care that they are providing for a given patient or population (Oermann et al., 2018; Russell, 2019). Faculty can promote the achievement of cognitive learning outcomes in many ways. These include dialoguing with students in patient-centered discussions; encouraging students to examine patient situations from multiple points of view; engaging students in rigorous yet supportive questioning, thereby teaching them how to think rather than to memorize; and providing frequent and specific feedback about application of their knowledge. A second domain of learning, psychomotor learning, reflects students’ skill acquisition, including the ability to perform skills in a safe, effective, accurate, and

214  ■ III. TEACHING IN LEARNING LABORATORY AND CLINICAL SETTING

fluid manner over time (Oermann et al., 2018; Russell, 2019). Psychomotor learning outcomes can also be fostered by positive role modeling on the part of the clinical teacher and by encouraging students to use clinical resources effectively. Within this domain, students also need to learn organization, priority setting, and time management skills to function effectively in complex healthcare environments. Clinical nurse educators can teach students these skills using tools, group discussions, and role modeling. Within the third domain of learning, the affective domain, students develop professional attitudes, beliefs, and values that form an essential part of nursing practice (Oermann et al., 2018). Faculty can provide clear expectations and directions, role-model professional behaviors, and use other teaching strategies to develop and challenge students within the affective domain of learning. In addition to the intended learning outcomes previously noted, students might also experience unintended learning outcomes as a result of the clinical experience. These unintended learning outcomes can be positive, such as the student considering the specialty area as a potential career choice and developing a passion for that area of nursing. Unintended outcomes, however, can be negative and long lasting, such as students losing self-confidence, becoming disengaged, being “turned off” to the clinical area, or even questioning their own ability to become nurses. All of these unintended learning outcomes hinge directly on the clinical teacher and the teacher’s interactions with students in the clinical setting.

Assessing Learner Needs Today’s clinical teachers have the added challenge of working with multiple groups of students, each with the unique learning needs and diversity that these student groups bring. Faculty working in all types of nursing programs often teach a diverse student population, with differences in culture, ethnicity, gender, age, work experiences, life experience, and previous education. Faculty working with prelicensure students might be working with added layers of diversity: associate degree students who were licensed practical nurses or medics, traditional baccalaureate students as well as accelerated second degree nursing students (those with at least a bachelor’s degree in another field), and others. Similarly, faculty members and other educators teaching in APRN programs may have an equally diverse student population, with differences in prior work, life, and clinical practice experiences. Nurse educators need to explore with their students how each student learns best, gaps in learning and competencies, and how the educator can guide their learning. Creating an effective learning experience with students in the clinical setting also begins with assessing individual learner characteristics and learning needs. Additionally, a carefully planned and orchestrated clinical orientation can help teachers assess students’ learning needs, as well as establish a climate for nursing. Further discussion of learner needs is found in the section concerning clinical orientation in this chapter.

Planning Clinical Activities CREATING AN EFFECTIVE LEARNING ENVIRONMENT

Planning clinical activities for students starts with shaping the clinical environment so that it will be a safe and enjoyable place in which to learn. Creating an effective learning environment for nursing students begins with the clinical teacher

11. Clinical Teaching in Nursing  ■  215

establishing a partnership with the clinical site even before the course begins. By orienting to the clinical agency, the faculty member gains familiarity with the clinical environment and patient population. This familiarity is essential in guiding students (Oermann et al., 2018). The clinical teacher might shadow a seasoned staff nurse, or work alongside staff for several shifts, home visits, or other experiences, before teaching begins in that site. During this time, the faculty member can also communicate clear expectations to staff and managers in the setting about the roles that the clinical teacher, students, and staff will take during the upcoming clinical course and establish collaborative relationships with staff. It is important to remember that in traditional clinical courses, teachers and students are typically guests within a larger, more stable healthcare setting and that interactions with staff reflect this. In partnerships, these roles vary, as discussed in the next chapter. CLINICAL ORIENTATION

A well-thought-out student orientation is a key aspect of the clinical experience. It is essential that the clinical teacher take every opportunity during this critical time to establish a positive climate for learning. Consider, for example, the clinical teacher who arrives late to orientation, does not have their materials ready, talks about the upcoming experience without eliciting students’ input or responses, and makes little effort to learn about the students themselves. Students will likely be given the impression that the teacher is disorganized, is intimidating, and does not care about them as individuals or partners in learning. In turn, these students are likely to become concerned about having to guess what the teacher wants, might “hide” when the teacher is present, or might be afraid to ask questions. Because clinical time is so limited and valuable to student learning, it is important that educators maximize every learning opportunity for students, and those opportunities begin with orientation. The teacher should consider developing a folder for each student, to be distributed electronically to students or as hard copies, at the beginning of clinical orientation. These folders can contain such documents as a clinical schedule; an outline of a typical day on the unit, in the clinic, in the home, and so on; descriptions of clinical assignments; documentation examples; key resources that are site and specialty dependent; and the clinical evaluation tool. A folder (paper or electronic) made individually for each student provides a personal touch. This is a simple but effective way to begin building the student–faculty relationship. Students can be encouraged to add to these folders as they progress through the course, with relevant articles, policies and procedures, clinical assignments, and so forth. Through these actions, students learn the importance of building their own professional portfolio and developing a vehicle for evidence-based practice, professional growth, and lifelong learning. Clinical orientation provides an opportunity to get to know students individually, as well as an opportunity to establish the climate of the clinical group. For inpatient, acute care settings with prelicensure students, clinical teachers can set the expectation that students will learn from and support each other and not compete with one another for learning experiences. This can be accomplished through a straightforward and honest discussion, and is important to establish at the outset, to prevent clinical groups from becoming competitive or polarized. In clinical settings where faculty are not on site, additional discussions during orientation should explain the importance of communication and clarify how, when, and why students need to contact faculty and when to expect site visits. Table 11.1 provides some key questions to ask students during orientation.

216  ■ III. TEACHING IN LEARNING LABORATORY AND CLINICAL SETTING

TABLE 11.1  SAMPLE QUESTIONS TO ASK STUDENTS DURING ORIENTATION Sample Questions

Rationale

What are students excited about as they begin this clinical practicum? What are they nervous about?

These types of questions encourage students to begin sharing and establish that the clinical group and setting is a safe environment in which to learn. This initial dialogue underscores the importance of student engagement and transparency in the clinical teacher–student relationship.

What are the students’ expectations of the clinical teacher or preceptor?

This question also allows for a frank and open discussion about student expectations, enhances group cohesiveness, clears up potential misconceptions, and establishes the learning climate as a partnership where both students and teachers share responsibility.

What are the clinical teacher’s or preceptor’s expectations of students in the clinical setting?

Once student expectations of the educator have been discussed, students are more receptive to hearing the educator’s expectations, and do not have to spend valuable time during the clinical practicum guessing what the educator or preceptor expects. Issues such as clinical preparation, when and under what circumstances supervision is needed, types of learning activities that will take place during the clinical experience, what student activities are appropriate when not providing patient care, specific skills that students cannot engage in, and the progression of activities in the practicum are important topics to address.

What are the ways in which individual students in the clinical setting learn best?

By asking this, teachers communicate that they care about each student individually and students are respected as unique, adult learners. When students are required to articulate how they learn best, they reflect on their own learning styles, consider what has and has not worked well in the past, and take responsibility for themselves as learners.

Are individual students visual, auditory, and/or kinesthetic learners?

This question can help guide clinical teachers provide each student with a method of teaching that best matches individual student learning styles.

What is at least one personal goal that each student has in terms of this clinical experience?

Involving the students in guiding their own learning is critical for their personal and professional growth. Asking students their personal goals—what they want to achieve—helps them become personally invested.

Students cannot be expected to remember all the verbal details shared with them during orientation, as they are likely experiencing some degree of anxiety at the time, and there is often a great deal of information shared in orientation. Because of this, it is helpful for students to be given a written copy of key faculty expectations as a part of the orientation packet. These faculty expectations or clinical guidelines can

11. Clinical Teaching in Nursing  ■  217

include such information as where, when, and under what circumstances to contact the clinical teacher or preceptor outside of the clinical setting, contact information, expected student behaviors, guidelines for assignments, and so forth (Exhibit 11.1). Another topic that should be included in orientation to the clinical setting is the system used by the clinical agency for electronic medical records (EMRs) and ­documentation. In some clinical sites, students are not able to document care in the EMR, and the nurse educator or preceptor should review the process to be used for documentation in that clinical practicum. In many nursing programs, students gain experience documenting care in academic EMR applications. Discussion of ­documentation is a key part of the orientation to the clinical site. CHOOSING CLINICAL ASSIGNMENTS

It is essential for faculty to keep the clinical objectives, or competencies, in mind when choosing patient assignments and other clinical activities. Specific patient assignments should be made purposefully, with the idea that, by caring for the patient and engaging in other types of learning activities, the students will work toward meeting the clinical objectives and developing their competencies. Although students might take a more simplified approach to patient selection, such as desiring the opportunity to engage in a particular psychomotor skill or interact with a parent in the clinic, clinical teachers should keep goals in mind and consider all types of learning opportunities for students. The potential to engage in a particular kind of communication with a patient or family member, chance to explore patient advocacy issues or ethical concepts with patients, and opportunity to be exposed to diversity all represent examples of valuable learning experiences for students. Keeping track of student experiences can assist the clinical teacher in ensuring that each student obtains a variety of learning opportunities during the course. Creating a simple table, reflective of essential learning activities, and tracking each student’s activity over the course is an easy way to stay organized and ensure that students are exposed to a diverse set of learning experiences.

EXHIBIT 11.1 Sample Clinical Guidelines to Share With Students in Orientation Clinical teacher contact information Clinical site contact numbers Clinical site information (short description of the clinical setting where students are practicing, including phone number, typical patient population, types of common patient and family problems, common interventions, typical staffing, etc.) What students should do if absent or late Preparing for clinical practice (process, student and teacher roles, clinical worksheets, preconferences, etc.) Expected student behaviors (important actions if unsure about care, treatments, or have questions; need for communication and sharing pertinent information about patient with educator, preceptor, staff; dress code and why important; new orders and process; documentation; others) Written assignments and submission information A scavenger hunt to orient prelicensure students to acute and long-term care clinical settings

218  ■ III. TEACHING IN LEARNING LABORATORY AND CLINICAL SETTING

It is also helpful to obtain student input about patient selection and other learning experiences. By doing so, clinical teachers again convey that they care about the student as an adult learner and value student input in creating each student’s own learning opportunities. For example, in pediatrics, students might be asked which patient ages they are most or least comfortable with. Faculty can then solicit student input as to whether they would rather be eased into new experiences, depending on their comfort level, or just “jump in” with teacher, preceptor, or clinician support. Each student will respond individually, and by honoring those responses whenever possible, the teacher–student relationship deepens through collaboration and trust. Patient assignments do not always need to take the traditional form, where one student is assigned to one patient. Clinical teachers should be encouraged to think creatively about patient assignments and various configurations for these assignments. For instance, two beginning students can be assigned to one morecomplex patient, or students may work collaboratively with staff nurses, among other ­models. Students can also be offered learning activities in the clinical setting that enhance professional behaviors. For instance, students can learn leadership skills by buddying with a team leader for an experience or learn management skills by working for a short time with a case manager or first-level or middle manager (Oermann et al., 2018). In some clinical settings, teachers might use a form to record students’ assignments for use by students and staff; these forms should be clear, specific, and ­individualized each week. Clarity on the assignment form can help avoid misunderstandings about who is responsible for what patient care when the students are in the setting. The form should include the teacher’s contact information if staff need to contact the faculty member outside of the clinical hours. It should be specific about the starting and finishing times for the students and the activities in which each student will be engaged. In addition, it is important to be clear that the  staff  nurse remains the primary patient caregiver, so miscommunication is avoided. Faculty must be intentional about how much information to give to students about their patients in writing. Patient privacy and confidentiality laws prohibit faculty from posting patient assignment forms in areas that might be visible to visitors and others, and any assignment forms should not include identifying information about patients, such as full names or medical record numbers. It is helpful if staff have access to the student assignments to avoid duplication of care and ensure that all members of the healthcare team are working together. A sample patient assignment form that can be used when teaching in a hospital or long-term care setting is found in Exhibit 11.2. This would be modified for learning activities in the community, home, and other settings. In some states, the State Board of Nursing outlines specific skills that students may not perform under any circumstances. Clinical nurse educators in each state should be aware of this information so as not to put the student, patient, family, staff member, or themselves at risk. Learning objectives should become more complex as students progress through a given clinical course and through the nursing program. Patient assignments and other clinical learning activities should reflect this increasing complexity of learning objectives. The clinical teacher needs to decide whether students will engage in certain activities during a given clinical practicum. This can depend on the comfort

11. Clinical Teaching in Nursing  ■  219

EXHIBIT 11.2 Sample Nursing Student Assignment Sheet for a Prelicensure Program School of Nursing Course Number and Name Clinical Teacher, Credentials Email Address and Contact Phone Number Dates of Care: ____________ Clinical Activities: Nursing students are responsible for the following activities: Basic care of the assigned patient including hygiene, assisting with patient nutrition, vital signs, and so forth. The assigned staff nurse remains the primary caregiver for the patient. Clinical Hours: x–x

and confidence level of teacher and students, the acuity and needs of the patients, and other experiences in the setting at that time. This information should be communicated clearly to students and staff. Clinical experiences for APRN students should focus on meeting the outcomes of the clinical course or practicum and developing their clinical competencies, similar to prelicensure students. At the APRN level, students also need to become proficient in arriving at differential diagnoses, managing patient conditions, and other competencies essential in their area of clinical specialization. Preceptors play a key role in the experiential learning and education of the APRN student. These students enter graduate nursing programs at different learning stages and clinical competencies. Pearson and Hensley (2019) suggested that a modified Benner’s Novice to Expert Model can be applied to APRN students’ clinical experiences in the primary care setting. For students to move through the levels of novice to expert, the preceptor and student need to have clear and open communication about their individual viewpoints, expectations, and responsibilities (Pearson & Hensley, 2019). Through this communication, the preceptor and student establish where the student is on the learning continuum. APRN students at the novice level benefit most from ­preceptor-guided methods. Students at this level are expected to obtain subjective data, complete a physical assessment, identify additional labs and diagnostics, and identify differential diagnosis with guidance from the preceptor (Pearson & Hensley, 2019). As students progress, the method can shift to a student-led discussion of patients and clinical situations (Bazzell & Dains, 2017). Students can present the case or patient situation with their assessment findings and proposed treatment plan for discussion with the preceptor. As students develop their expertise, they can complete an entire patient visit independently and present the patient case with a plan of care based on current guidelines and evidence-based practice (Pearson & Hensley, 2019).

Guiding Students: Key Teaching Strategies There are many teaching strategies that can be used to enhance student learning in the clinical setting. Some of these strategies are described here.

220  ■ III. TEACHING IN LEARNING LABORATORY AND CLINICAL SETTING

ORGANIZATION FOR FACULTY AND STUDENTS

Being organized is paramount to having the clinical experience run smoothly. Clinical teachers and preceptors have a great deal of responsibility: to students, patients, families, staff nurses, other clinicians, and interprofessional team members. Teaching in the clinical environment can be exhausting and stressful. Organization is a key strategy to not just survive, but to flourish as a clinical educator. Organizational strategies for faculty include being well prepared for the clinical practicum, carefully selecting patients and other learning activities for students so that specific learning outcomes are achieved, and learning about the patients to guide the questions asked of students. Clear directions are essential for students and staff as to what students will be doing and not doing and the times that the ­students will be in the setting. Guidance for students in terms of how to access the educator and staff is also helpful to discuss such as using a pager system or texting. In an outpatient setting, it is even more critical that students know how to contact the clinical educator preceptor and when to do so. As simplistic as it sounds, the better organized and more prepared clinical teachers are for the practicum, the more effective they will be as nurse educators. STRUCTURE WITHIN THE CLINICAL PRACTICUM

The clinical teacher and preceptor, or other clinician with whom the student is working, are key in helping students organize their patient care. In clinical practice, students learn patient- and family-centered care and should not focus only on tasks or skills. This can be challenging in the face of the unpredictability of the clinical setting, and the fact that a patient’s status may change during the course of the clinical day, with new nursing actions as a result. Similarly, clinics, homes, and other settings in which students have clinical experience can be equally unpredictable. Teachers should support students as they are learning to organize their patient care. For example, a student performing a task such as a dressing change will often focus only on the dressing change itself. As the teacher accompanies the student to the bedside and guides performance, the teacher can engage the patient in an individualized way. During the dressing change, the educator might talk with the patient about what is important, discuss patient-centered goals, or simply get to know the patient better. In this way, the educator demonstrates the importance of considering the whole person while performing a skill and role models this for the student. At the same time, it is important for the clinical teacher to realize that considering the whole person while simultaneously performing a psychomotor skill is a developmental process for many students, and that the student will improve with time and practice and gain confidence. This same principle is applicable to guiding performance in other types of practice settings. Teachers can provide students with tools to help them organize their patient care. Some clinical teachers provide students with course-specific tools for use in preparing for clinical practice, giving direction to the student as to what information they need to know about their patients prior to engaging in their care. In addition, other tools can be used, such as a time sequence plan, to give students structure with which to organize their day. The Subjective, Objective, Assessment, and Planning (SOAP) note is a useful tool for APRN students for organizing and documenting patients’ history, physical exam, diagnoses, and plan of care. The SOAP note provides a systematic and logical format to document patient encounters.

11. Clinical Teaching in Nursing  ■  221

CLINICAL SITE VISIT

Clinical site visits for precepted experiences are essential to monitor student ­experiences and for evaluative and feedback purposes. These require a close relationship between the faculty member from the nursing program preceptor, and ­student to ensure that course objectives are being met and the student is developing essential competencies. Consistency of site visits is important, not only between students in a clinical course but also among clinical teachers and preceptors. There should be consistency in the time spent, number of visits, and interactions among faculty, students, and preceptors. This triad facilitates application of knowledge and skills to patient care. In a site visit, the faculty member and preceptor together can provide feedback and formative evaluation throughout the clinical practicum. Prior to or during the initial site visit, the faculty member leads the triad to establish a preferred mode of communication among the educator, preceptor, and ­student. The teacher also should review the outcomes of the course and competencies to be developed, course expectations, and clinical evaluation tool. In s­ ubsequent visits, the faculty member, when possible, should attempt to observe the preceptor/ student interaction. The site visit provides an opportunity for students to describe their patient care experiences and for the educator to ask higher level questions to promote students’ application of knowledge and development of critical thinking and clinical judgment skills. Examples of these questions were provided in Chapters 5 and 13. In a site visit, the teacher also helps students identify areas for improvement and personal goals. If needed, a site visit provides time to allow for confidential meetings between the faculty member and student or preceptor. Clinical site visits for APRN students can follow many of these same guidelines. Pericak et al. (2017) studied APRN students’ perspectives of site visits and found that they preferred longer and more frequent visits. Students valued constructive feedback from the teacher as this increased their confidence that they were meeting course expectations and obtaining the knowledge and skills they needed as an APRN. Virtual site visits in APRN programs are being used increasingly in APRN programs (Harris et al., 2020).

CLINICAL CONFERENCES AND SEMINARS Clinical conferences are essential to the learning and support of nursing ­students. They can provide an environment that facilitates learning, offer opportunities for brainstorming and problem-solving, and allow the clinical teacher to gain knowledge about the students’ understanding of the patient or patients for whom they will be caring. When structured carefully and intentionally, clinical conferences can underscore that the clinical environment is a safe place in which to learn. Clinical conferences can also help students derive meaning from and reflect on their clinical experience and develop their clinical judgment skills. From the outset, during orientation, clinical teachers should establish the notion of the group working together as a team and that team members will support and learn from each other. The clinical group should form an environment where students are free to ask questions, challenge each other, and not always have to have the right answer. They should be free to debate a topic without becoming threatened and learn to respect others’ points of view. If the clinical nurse educator emphasizes that questions can be asked freely, that debates and differences of opinions are

222  ■ III. TEACHING IN LEARNING LABORATORY AND CLINICAL SETTING

celebrated, and that faculty are approachable, then students can relax and focus on learning, instead of feeling intimidated. Group conference time is an ideal time to introduce higher level questioning. Done in a safe, nonthreatening, and supportive manner, higher level questioning can stimulate not only individual students, but the clinical group as a whole, where the group is challenged as a team to respond to these questions. If students are struggling in response to higher level questions, it is helpful for the clinical teacher to rephrase questions and sequentially ask a lower level question. When students are able to successfully answer a lower level question, they gain confidence in their own knowledge base and skill level. This, in turn, increases their confidence at responding to higher level questions. Words of encouragement such as, “you can do this” or, “I know you know this” also remind students that faculty have faith in their abilities. This in turn boosts their self-confidence, making many students want to learn more.

Preconference One type of clinical conference is the preconference, which typically takes place prior to the students engaging in patient care, depending on the course and type of agency. Preconferences can have several purposes. One important purpose is to provide an opportunity for the teacher to assess students’ knowledge and understanding about their patients. During preconference, the teacher assesses whether students have the knowledge required to care for patients and in areas in which they need further information and guidance. Another purpose of a preconference is to encourage students to think critically and creatively about their patients. To do this effectively, the educator should feel comfortable and confident with information about the patient and clinical context to ask challenging and stimulating questions. The preconference, therefore, can provide the venue for teachers to ask a variety of lower and higher level questions to develop students’ thinking. For clinical courses in which the teacher has a group of students, a preconference also affords an opportunity for students to ask questions in a group setting, where the environment is safe, group members are supportive, and students learn from each other. It can be helpful for teachers to ask pointed questions of the group. Questions such as “Tell me about your nursing priorities for the day,” “What do you anticipate as expected outcomes for your patient?,” and “What might be the worst case scenario for your patient, how would you recognize it, and what would you do about it?” allow students to develop their thinking skills and apply theory to practice. Additionally, a focused discussion of students’ patients and families enables ­students to compare individuals and situations, encourages them to learn about patients’ experiences in differing stages of an illness, and helps them compare different interventions or treatment modalities. Students are able to compare the impact of family and culture on a patient’s health trajectory and on how patients at different life stages cope. In this way, students learn about important nursing ­concepts across patients and situations. Preconferences can also serve to build relationships among students. For instance, assigning students buddies during preconference sets up a partnership among students. A buddy system allows students to get to know more than one patient, affords students a fallback person who can help them with care, and can also expose students to multiple approaches without having the additional responsibility of

11. Clinical Teaching in Nursing  ■  223

actually caring for that patient. Students can also gain additional learning experiences as they watch out for and interact with each other’s patients. During preconferences, clinical teachers can provide students with an opportunity to briefly present their patient(s) to the rest of the group. This gives them practice at being concise and developing the skills needed later for handoff. In addition, the preconference offers a venue for faculty to discuss certain practical issues, such as any special learning activities planned for that day, reminders of what students can and cannot do, and other information.

Postconference A second type of clinical conference, the postconference, provides different opportunities for student learning. It is important to note that postconferences do not have to take place at the end of the clinical day, although in some cases that can be the most opportune and convenient time for students and teacher to convene. Clinical teachers, however, should consider the best time for students to engage in a postconference without being distracted by patient care and other activities. Postconferences also can be conducted online (Hannans, 2019). Online conferences can be held a few days after the clinical practicum for students to have time to reflect on their experiences. In a study on asynchronous online clinical conferences, Hannans (2019) found that students benefited from this time for reflection. An important component of postconferences is the opportunity for students to debrief (Kelly et al., 2019; Oermann et al., 2018). Some students might have had a challenging experience with a patient, family member, or staff member; may have unanswered questions; or may have witnessed less than ideal care. Strategies such as role-playing, active listening, having other students offer suggestions, and group discussion can make individual students feel supported and can stimulate further learning. Questions from clinical teachers such as, “If you could do anything different, what would it be and why?” or “What was particularly useful that you learned today that might influence your clinical practice next week?” can be useful in helping students develop reflective professional practice. Kelly et al. (2019) recommend that clinical nurse educators follow debriefing standards already established as effective in simulations. Examples include Debriefing for Meaningful Learning and Debriefing with Good Judgment, where critical feedback is shared while safeguarding the feelings of learners. A postconference can also augment student learning in other ways. Students can share perspectives of clinical situations, teach each other, gain self-confidence and appreciation for each other’s contributions, and enhance the sense of teamwork among students. Students can be given an assignment in which they need to present a patient to each other and compare the care they gave based on evidence. Students need preparation time to be successful at this activity. Student peers can be invited to ask higher level thinking questions of each other, thus allowing student presenters to hone their problem-solving skills as well as their confidence in oral skills. Nurses often present and discuss patients with other members of the healthcare team, so being able to articulate themselves successfully and confidently is an essential skill for students to learn. Clinical teachers should be free to use whatever creative strategies they can develop to enhance student learning in postconferences. “Pass the problem” is one such strategy to get other clinical group members involved. In this strategy, one student presents a clinical situation or problem that they encountered that day. The

224  ■ III. TEACHING IN LEARNING LABORATORY AND CLINICAL SETTING

next student offers an analysis of that situation, and a third student then critiques this analysis. When done in a supportive and open manner, this is an excellent strategy to foster critical thinking, and it underscores the importance of having more than one solution to a clinical problem. During a postconference, students can also be asked to write a 1-minute care plan in which they draw an algorithm pertaining to their patient, the nursing priorities they focused on, and where those priorities were at the end of the day (Oermann et al., 2018). Students can be creative and then share their ideas with their peers. Postconferences provide a valuable opportunity for professional reflection, and the use of online tools can foster this skill. For example, websites such as futureme. org© (www.futureme.org) provide free tools for students to write letters to themselves and have them delivered via email at a future date. Using this simple exercise, students can reflect on their own clinical experiences, fears, or aspirations at the time they write the letter, reflect again when they reread the letter at a later date, and use the progression of their thinking to observe their own professional growth. Some faculty members may also use postconferences as an opportunity to enlist guest speakers, who can have their own topic area that they present. Though potentially effective, this type of conference should not be done frequently, as students’ time might be better used in active engagement with each other, rather than listening to a minilecture.

Clinical Seminars A third type of clinical conference is the clinical seminar, which is valuable for students practicing in outpatient or population health settings and in precepted courses such as capstone and transition courses. Mohn-Brown (2017) described how clinical seminars framed in Quality and Safety Education for Nurses competencies encouraged students to think deeply about how they use evidence and how they meet safety standards in their clinical setting. Clinical seminars take place at a different location and time than the students’ usual clinical day and therefore are not impeded by student and faculty fatigue at the end of a long clinical experience. Seminars may involve student assignments, student-led patient discussions, focused hand-off reports and patient presentations, specific learning activities related to course concepts, and/or a seminar guide for faculty. Nurse educators facilitating clinical seminars describe them as an effective tool for encouraging deeper student reflection and application of theory to practice. Challenges associated with the seminars include the amount of time required to develop learning activities and faculty guides, as well as finding suitable times when everyone can meet (Mohn-Brown, 2017).

CASES Cases can be used to assist nursing students to develop a number of cognitive skills, such as clinical judgment, advocacy, and delegation in a safe and nurturing environment (Billings, 2019; Powell, 2011). Students can be given opening case scenarios, and then given additional patient information as they respond to the scenario. These cases can be an excellent platform for enhancing group teamwork and augmenting self-confidence of students. Walking students through a clinical judgment model within a case provides an opportunity to learn to recognize and analyze cues

11. Clinical Teaching in Nursing  ■  225

from the patient, environment, and health record; prioritize hypotheses; generate solutions; take action; and evaluate outcomes (Billings, 2019). Thus, cases provide a context in which students can safely learn clinical judgment skills and receive feedback accordingly. Cases are also discussed in Chapter 13.

NURSING ROUNDS Conducting nursing rounds during the clinical practicum is another teaching strategy that can enhance nursing students’ critical thinking skills and clinical judgment abilities, as well as their confidence in communicating with other healthcare team members. During nursing rounds, one or two students might present their patient and the care they have been engaged in to peers, the clinical teacher, staff nurses, and other healthcare team members. This provides a valuable opportunity for students to learn to present their patients to others in a confident and concise manner, advocate for patients, ask questions of and collaborate with the healthcare team, and consider multiple approaches to care.

STUDENT PRESENTATIONS Providing students with an opportunity to conduct a short presentation within their peer group is an additional teaching strategy that clinical teachers can employ to enhance student learning. Students might be asked to share a few key points about their patient from a previous experience, focusing on one aspect of nursing care that intrigued them. They can then be asked to retrieve a nursing article related to evidence-based practice about that aspect of nursing care and compare the care they observed or engaged in with the article. Other students can be asked to pose critical thinking questions to the presenter, or alternatively, the presenter can ask questions of the group. Opportunities such as these can boost students’ thinking skills and self-confidence in communication.

LAB BLITZES In addition to one-to-one discussions with individual students about their patients, it can be helpful to use an occasional clinical conference for group discussions of key patient data, such as laboratory results that are often poorly understood by students. Teachers should use as many creative strategies as possible when conducting laboratory blitzes. For instance, sample laboratory results from one of the patients can be printed, with all patient identifying information removed. Students can then be asked to analyze these results, determine possible diagnoses for the patient, and identify nursing priorities based on these laboratory results. Alternatively, students can be given pointers, such as Ten Key Questions to Ask Yourself About Your Patient, and laboratory values can be incorporated into these questions. As an example, students might be directed to look up the patient’s potassium level for any patient receiving diuretics. This can, in turn, stimulate a rich discussion about the effects of some diuretics versus others, how these medications relate to their patient’s unique health status, what other laboratory results in addition to potassium level might be affected by diuretics and why, and so forth. Laboratory blitzes are most effective if they are kept short, focused, and fun.

226  ■ III. TEACHING IN LEARNING LABORATORY AND CLINICAL SETTING

WRITTEN CLINICAL ASSIGNMENTS Different types of written clinical assignments can be used, depending on the learning to be achieved in clinical practice. For an affective learning outcome, students might be asked to provide in a journal a short reflection about what went well and what did not go well in their experience with their patient, what they would change for next time, and events that had an impact on them during the experience. Cognitive learning can also be enhanced through short written clinical assignments (Oermann et al., 2018). Ideally, students are given guided questions within the assignment, specific to the clinical objectives. Examples of guided questions might include the following: How were the safety needs of your patient met? What were the developmental needs of your patient based on concepts of growth and development, and how did these developmental needs compare to those of the actual patient today? Did your perceptions about the patient and home environment change between this home visit and the prior one? In addition to encouraging the student to explore a select clinical situation, written assignments can enhance writing skills and the ability to convey ideas in a clear, succinct manner. Clinical assignments are discussed further in Chapter 15.

USE OF FEEDBACK IN THE CLINICAL SETTING Because the student–teacher relationship is critical to the learning and development of the student, feedback from the teacher needs to be consistent, specific, transparent, honest, and encouraging. Students respond well to the feedback sandwich, in which constructive feedback is placed between two pieces of “bread” (i.e., positive feedback). Rather than saying, “You were disorganized during that nursing procedure,” the teacher can explain, “I liked how you were able to find the policy for that nursing procedure in the clinic. It seemed as though your organization needed improvement, because you forgot a few supplies, but you did an excellent job of engaging the patient during the procedure itself.” It is important to remember that teacher observation is a major source of stress for many nursing students, so keeping feedback instructional versus punitive is key. Teachers also should be sensitive to how, where, and when feedback is delivered in the clinical setting. Feedback in front of the patient, peers, staff, or in a public area has potential for the student to feel criticized and should be avoided. Russell (2019) advocates for the use of feedback before, during, and after a learning event and recommends use of an iSoBAR format. The iSoBAR acronym stands for Identify (introducing your role in providing student feedback), Situation (why you are giving feedback), Observations (giving examples from the student’s clinical practice, Background (how the feedback relates to clinical learning objectives or planned learning), Agreed Plan (for continued learning), and Read-Back (confirming that the student has understood the feedback and plan; Russell, 2019). Table 11.2 provides an example of using the iSoBAR format for giving feedback to students. Formative written feedback should also be provided to students on a regular basis during the clinical practicum. The provision of prompt, specific, and regular feedback, both verbal and written, is critical to the learning process, allowing students opportunities to correct mistakes before they become patterns and to feel supported and mentored during the clinical experience. With this feedback, summative evaluations are fair, do not pose surprises for the student, and are less anxiety-producing. Feedback is discussed further in Chapter 15.

11. Clinical Teaching in Nursing  ■  227

TABLE 11.2  EXAMPLE OF ISOBAR FORMAT FOR GIVING FEEDBACK After observing a beginning student perform a bed bath, a clinical educator might provide this feedback: Identify

“As your clinical instructor, I’d like to take a moment to review your care of Mr. X.”

Situation

“As we discussed, providing personal hygiene for a patient is a deeply personal and an important role for the nurse.”

Observations

“I noticed that you were respectful of Mr. X and asked him if this was a good time for his bath. I also saw that you took great care in ensuring his comfort and privacy while you cleaned him.”

Background

“As we discussed in orientation, you need to complete a bed bath on a variety of patients during this practicum, so that you can gain confidence and competence in carrying out this skill.”

Agreed plan

“Next week, let’s plan on you caring for a patient who will be able to help less with care, so that you can keep building on these skills.”

Read-Back

Confirm with the student his/her understanding of the plan.

Clinical experiences where the teacher is not present on-site require additional support and feedback not only from the teacher but from the preceptor as well. The preceptor working directly with the student should provide immediate feedback as observations are made and in a debriefing session at the end of the day. This debriefing session can include overall feedback about the student’s performance, goals accomplished, and goals for the future. Feedback is best provided when there is a trusting relationship between the student and preceptor. In cases where there are conflicting ideas as to who should initiate the feedback, in one study preceptors indicated that students should request feedback, but students deferred this task to the preceptors (Allen & Molloy, 2017). Regardless, with constructive feedback on a student’s critical thinking and clinical performance, students can increase their independence in the provider role (Pearson & Hensley, 2019).

SUMMARY The clinical experience for nursing students is often brief, expensive to operationalize, and dependent on limited resources, and yet it is the environment in which students learn to apply theory to practice and become socialized into the profession. The effectiveness of the clinical teacher is pivotal to student learning. It is essential that clinical teachers in nursing be effective, inspirational, and motivational, and that they engage in best teaching practices. Many clinical teachers in nursing have had little formal education on how to effectively teach students and on best teaching practices in the clinical setting. Other challenges also face clinical teachers, such as advanced technology in the clinical setting, patient acuity, balancing multiple demands, and a heavy workload in the clinical teaching role, among others. These factors can be sources of stress for

228  ■ III. TEACHING IN LEARNING LABORATORY AND CLINICAL SETTING

clinical teachers. For clinical teachers to be effective, they need to have knowledge and clinical judgment, teaching skills, interpersonal skills, personal characteristics, and evaluation skills. Passion for nursing and teaching is paramount as well. The process of clinical teaching includes identifying learning outcomes, assessing learner needs, planning clinical learning activities, guiding students, and evaluating students’ learning and performance. Learning outcomes can be intended or unintended. Intended outcomes reflect cognitive, psychomotor, and affective domains; the clinical teacher can employ a variety of teaching strategies to facilitate learning in each of these areas. Unintended learning outcomes can range from being positive to negative, and they are closely tied to the effectiveness of the clinical teacher. When assessing learner needs, clinical teachers need to recognize and honor the diversity of the student population with whom they are working and use best teaching practices accordingly. They also need to assess individual learner characteristics and learning needs. Planning clinical activities begins with creating an effective learning environment. The clinical teacher can influence the learning environment before the students begin their clinical course, through establishment of a collaborative teacher–staff relationship; becoming comfortable with the clinical practices in that setting; and clarifying teacher, student, and staff expectations and roles. A carefully planned and orchestrated clinical orientation for students also helps to establish a climate conducive to learning. Planning clinical activities involves the careful selection of learning activities that will enhance learning and students’ confidence levels. Patient assignments and selection of other clinical activities should be made thoughtfully and intentionally, and they should provide opportunities for students to achieve learning objectives as well as personal goals. To effectively guide students in the clinical setting, the clinical teacher should use teaching strategies that reflect best practices. Some of these strategies include organizing the clinical experience, providing structure and clearly stated expectations for students, and conducting clinical conferences that are meaningful for students. Other teaching strategies that are helpful in guiding students include nursing rounds, student presentations, and writing assignments. Feedback and guidance in the clinical setting involve sharing feedback with students in a consistent, specific, and encouraging manner; balancing positive and constructive feedback; and providing formative written feedback regularly.

REFERENCES Abraham, S., Cramer, C., & Palleschi, H. (2018). Walking on eggshells: Addressing nursing students’ fear of the psychiatric clinical setting. Psychosocial Nursing & Mental Health Services, 56(9), 5–8. doi:10.3928/02793695-20180322-01 Allen, L., & Molloy, E. (2017). The influence of a preceptor-student “daily feedback tool” on clinical feedback practices in nursing education: A qualitative study. Nurse Education Today, 49, 57–62. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.nedt.2016.11.009 Arkan, B., Ordin, Y., & Yilmaz, D. (2018). Undergraduate nursing students’ experience related to their clinical learning environment and factors affecting to their clinical learning process. Nurse Education Practice, 29, 127–132. doi: 10.1016/j.nepr.2017.12.005 Babenko-Mould, Y., & Laschinger, H. (2014). Effects of incivility in clinical practice settings on nursing student burnout. International Journal of Nursing Education Scholarship, 11(1), 145–154. https://doi.org/10.1515/ijnes-2014-0023

11. Clinical Teaching in Nursing  ■  229

Bazzell, A. F., & Dains, J. E. (2017). Supporting nurse practitioner preceptor development. Journal for Nurse Practitioners, 13(8), e375–e382. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.nurpra .2017.04.013 Billings, D. (2019). Teaching nurses to make clinical judgments that ensure patient safety. The Journal of Continuing Education in Nursing, 50(7), 300–302. https://doi.org/ 10.3928/00220124-20190612-04 Bryan, S. (2018). Switching from practice to teaching opened my eyes. Nursing Standard, 32(24), 35. https://doi.org/10.7748/ns.32.24.35.s29 Ferszt, G., Dugas, J., McGrane, C., & Calderelli, K. (2017). Creative strategies for teaching millennial nursing students. Nurse Educator, 42(6), 275–276. https://doi.org/10.1097/ NNE.0000000000000384 Hannans, J. (2019). Online clinical post conference: Strategies for meaningful discussion using VoiceThread. Nurse Educator, 44(1), 29–33. https://doi.org/10.1097/nne.00000 00000000529 Harris, M., Rhoads, S. J., Rooker, J. S., Kelly, M. A., Lefler, L., Lubin, S., Martel, I. L., & Beverly, C. J. (2020). Using virtual site visits in the clinical evaluation of nurse practitioner students: Student and faculty perspectives. Nurse Educator, 45(1), 17–20. https://doi.org/10.1097/NNE.0000000000000693 Helgesen, A. K., Gregersen, A. G., & Roos, A. K. (2016). Nurse students’ experiences with clinical placement in outpatient unit—a qualitative study. BMC Nursing, 15(49). https:// doi.org/10.1186/s12912-016-0167-1 Hewitt, P., & Lewallen, L. (2010). Ready, set, teach! How to transform the clinical nurse expert into the part-time clinical nurse instructor. Journal of Continuing Education in Nursing, 41(9), 403–407. https://doi.org/10.3928/00220124-20100503-10 Ironside, P., McNelis, A., & Ebright, P. (2014). Clinical education in nursing: Rethinking learning in practice settings. Nursing Outlook, 62(3), 185–191. https://doi.org/10.1016/ j.outlook.2013.12.004 Jeffers, S. (2018). Integration of a hospice clinical experience: Nursing students’ perceptions. Journal of Hospice & Palliative Nursing, 20(3), 266–271. https://doi.org/10.1097/NJH .0000000000000437 Jetha, F., Boschma, G., & Clauson, M. (2016). Professional development needs of novice nursing clinical teachers: A rapid evidence assessment. International Journal of Nursing Education Scholarship, 13(1), 1–10. https://doi.org/10.1515/ijnes-2015-0031 Kelly, S., Henry, R., & Williams, S. (2019). Using debriefing methods in the postclinical conference. American Journal of Nursing, 119(9), 56–60. https://doi-org.libproxy.lib.unc .edu/10.1097/01.NAJ.0000580280.87149.12 Knox, J., & Mogan, J. (1985). Important clinical teacher behaviours as perceived by university nursing faculty, students, and graduates. Journal of Advanced Nursing, 10(1), 25–30. doi: 10.1111/j.1365-2648.1985.tb00488.x Luhanga, F. (2018). The traditional-faculty supervised teaching model: Nursing faculty and clinical instructors’ perspectives. Journal of Nursing Education and Practice, 8(6), 124–137. https://doi.org/10.5430/jnep.v8n6p124 Koharchik, L., & Flavin, P. (2017). Teaching students to administer medications safely. American Journal of Nursing, 117(1), 62–66. https://doi.org/10.1097/01.NAJ.0000511573 .73435.72 Lewis-Pierre, L. (2019). Preparing for the next generation of educators and nurses: Implications for recruitment and educational innovations. The ABNF Journal, 30(2), 35–36. Mohn-Brown, E. (2017). Implementing quality and safety education for nurses in postclinical conferences: Transforming the design of clinical nursing education. Nurse Educator, 42(5S), S18–S21. https://doi.org/10.1097/NNE.0000000000000410 Mosca, C. (2019). The relationship between emotional intelligence and clinical teaching effectiveness. Teaching and Learning in Nursing, 14(2019), 97–102. https://doi.org/ 10.1016/j.teln.2018.12.009

230  ■ III. TEACHING IN LEARNING LABORATORY AND CLINICAL SETTING

Oermann, M. H., Shellenbarger, T., & Gaberson, K. B. (2018). Clinical teaching strategies in nursing (5th ed.). Springer Publishing Company. Owens, R. (2017). Part-time nursing faculty perceptions of their learning needs during their role transition experiences. Teaching and Learning in Nursing, 12(1), 12–16. http://dx.doi .org/10.1016/j.teln.2016.10.002 Pearson, T., & Hensley, T. (2019). Positive precepting: Identifying NP student learning levels and needs. Journal of the American Association of Nurse Practitioners 31(2), 124–130. https://doi.org/10.1097/JXX.0000000000000106 Percy, M., & Richardson, C. (2018). Introducing nursing practice to student nurses: How can we promote care compassion and empathy. Nurse Education in Practice, 29, 200–205. doi: 10.1016/j.nepr.2018.01.008 Pericak, A., Graziano, M., & McNelis, A. (2017). Faculty clinical site visits in nurse practitioner education: Student perspective. Nurse Educator, 42(4), E1–E3. https://doi .org/10.1097/NNE.0000000000000362 Poorman, S., & Mastorovich, M. (2014). Teacher stories of blame when assigning a failing grade. International Journal of Nursing Education Scholarship, 11(1), 1–10. https://doi .org/10.1515/ijnes-2013-0081 Powell, R. (2011). Improving students’ delegation skills. Nurse Educator, 36(1), 9–10. https://doi.org/10.1097/NNE.0b013e3182001e2e Russell, K. (2019). The art of clinical supervision: Strategies to assist with the delivery of student feedback. Australian Journal of Advanced Nursing, 36(3), 6–13. Ryan, C., & McAllister, M. (2020). Professional development in clinical teaching: An action research study. Nurse Education Today, 85, 104306. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.nedt .2020.104590 Slemon, A., Bungay, V., Jenkins, E., & Brown, H. (2018). Power and resistance: Nursing students’ experiences in mental health practicums. ANS. Advances in Nursing Science, 41(4), 359–376. https://doi.org/10.1097/ANS.0000000000000221 Soriano, G., & Aquino, G. (2017). Characteristics of a good clinical teacher as perceived by nursing students and faculty members in a Philippine University College of Nursing. International Journal of Nursing Science, 7(4), 96–101. https://doi.org/10.5923/ j.nursing.20170704.04 Valiee, S., Moridi, G., Khaledi, S., & Garibi, F. (2016). Nursing students’ perspectives on clinical instructors’ effective teaching strategies: A descriptive study. Nurse Education in Practice, 16(1), 258–262. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.nepr.2015.09.009 Williams, C. A. (2019). Nurse educators meet your new students: Generation Z. Nurse Educator, 44(2), 59–60. https://doi.org/10.1097/NNE.0000000000000637 Woodley, L. K., & Lewallen, L. P. (2020). Acculturating into nursing for Hispanic / Latinx baccalaureate nursing students: A secondary data analysis. Nursing Education Perspectives, 41(4), 235–240. doi: 10.1097/01.NEP.0000000000000627 Yang, C., & Chao, S-Y. (2018). Clinical nursing instructors’ perceived challenges in clinical teaching. Japan Journal of Nursing Science, 15(1), 50–55. https://doi.org/10.1111.jjns.12167 Zieber, M., & Williams, B. (2015). The experience of nursing students who make mistakes in clinical. International Journal of Nursing Education Scholarship, 12(1), 1–9. https://doi.org/ 10.1515/ijnes-2014-0070

12 Partnerships With Clinical Settings: Roles and Responsibilities of Nurse Educators Karen L. Gorton

OBJECTIVES 1. Describe historical and current trends in academic–practice partnerships 2. Describe the steps required to establish a sustainable academic–practice partnership using one framework

INTRODUCTION Nursing is a practice discipline. The core of nursing education is the clinical education of nursing students. Academic–practice partnerships exist at several levels for the purpose of preparing the nursing workforce to meet nursing practice realities and contemporary healthcare challenges. Partnerships developed by nurse leaders in a nursing program and a clinical setting are defined as intentional relationships, based on mutual goals, respect, and shared knowledge (American Organization of Nurse Executives [AONE]-American Association of Colleges of Nursing [AACN] Academic–Practice Partnership Steering Committee, 2015). These partnership guidelines continue to support, promote, and acknowledge flourishing academic– practice partnerships. This chapter provides guidelines for establishing meaningful partnerships. Nurse educator roles and responsibilities are explored relevant to school of nursing collaboration with clinical settings. Specific examples are provided to illustrate concepts and strategies to improve the educational preparation of nurses and ultimately the quality and safety of patient care. The purpose of this chapter is to present ideas about establishing and sustaining meaningful partnerships between education and practice to stimulate collaborative, contemporary models of clinical nursing education. The nature of education–­ practice partnerships is explored within the context of quality and safe patient care and excellence in clinical education. The chapter includes a discussion of

232  ■ III. TEACHING IN LEARNING LABORATORY AND CLINICAL SETTING

the importance of academic–practice partnerships, characteristics of meaningful ­partnerships, and roles and responsibilities of the nurse educator in collaboration with practice partners in establishing and sustaining effective partnerships.

EVOLUTION OF ACADEMIC–PRACTICE PARTNERSHIPS Historically, academic–practice partnerships were established for a wide range of purposes relevant to advancing religious missions, delivery of patient care with ­physicians, government programs, and hospital initiatives. Hospitals and ­universities began forming alliances to address the need for nursing care delivery and to prepare the future nursing workforce. The continuing nursing shortage, access to healthcare, and the need for continuous quality care and improved patient safety reflect shared interests among academic and healthcare service organizations. As a result, academic programs, service agencies, and regulatory or policy making ­bodies continue to align and leverage resources to meet the challenges of educating the healthcare workforce and building safer delivery systems (AACN, 2016).

CURRENT STATUS OF ACADEMIC–PRACTICE PARTNERSHIPS Schools of nursing and clinical agencies are challenged to determine capacity for optimizing clinical learning during times of expanding nursing programs and increasing enrollments. The AACN (2016) and others (Bay & Tschannen, 2017; Creech et al., 2018; Iseler et al., 2019; Padilla & Kreider, 2020; Petges et al., 2020; Ridenour, 2009; Roach & Hooke, 2019) highlight the value and significance of partnerships in improving the quality and effectiveness of nursing education and have called for support and collaboration among stakeholders. Collaboration is necessary to maximize use of limited resources and build capacity to educate more nurses. The purpose of formal academic–practice relationships is to advance nursing practice and to improve the health of the public (AONE–AACN Task Force on Academic–Practice Partnerships, 2012). In 2015, AONE and AACN reviewed and modified the guidelines to address the changing environment of academic–practice partnerships (AACN, 2018). These guidelines continue to be used as the framework for these partnerships. Partnerships are evolving in significance, purpose, structure, and expected ­outcomes. Examples of academic–practice partnerships focus on educating nurses, sharing resources, and undertaking projects on nursing student clinical education, evidence-based practice initiatives, interprofessional education (IPE), and professional development or academic progression programs. However, following an extensive review of the literature, the AONE–AACN Task Force concluded that the majority of reports on partnerships were anecdotal, describing examples of specific efforts and providing little databased evidence to support effectiveness or ­generalizability. In 2013, this anecdotal approach began to change, with the AACN conference highlighting successful academic–practice partnerships. Since that conference, the number of resources available to assist programs in forming successful partnerships has grown. It has been demonstrated that different types of partnerships can provide examples of best practices that may be beneficial in developing a mutually beneficial relationship or shared goal.

12. Partnerships With Clinical Settings  ■ 233

In 2016, AACN issued the Manatt Report on healthcare transformation and the opportunities for academic nursing (AACN, 2016). While this report focuses on nursing and academic health centers (AHCs), much can be applied to the ­development of academic–practice partnerships outside of the AHC setting. For academic–­practice partnerships, the implications of this report are: calling for nursing to be a full partner in the practice setting, engaging faculty in practice with the partner and in the development of nurses at all levels, including creating nurse-led care models. In 2018, the AACN and AONE joined forces to address models of care and to strengthen the practice and academic alignment. The new strategic advisory group seeks to advance the earlier work of the AACN and AONE. The committee has two strategic priorities focusing on leveraging practice and academic leaders. The first priority calls for the development and implementation of a nursing leader campaign to influence leaders in practice and academia about the need for partnerships that address workforce shortages using new models for learning and care (AACN, 2018). The second priority focuses on collaboration between academic and practice leaders in the identification of opportunities and challenges when creating effective partnerships (AACN, 2018). In academic–practice partnerships, both members of the partnership benefit. Engagement of faculty not only in practice, but as valuable members of the practice organization, can lead to examination of current trends, issues, and problems experienced within the practice environment from a new perspective. Within the partnership model, students, practice setting nurses, and academic programs benefit. Students who learn from a faculty member in the practice and classroom setting gain insight into current practice experiences and have the opportunity to link their didactic learning with practice. Nurses in the practice environment have the opportunity to shape and change nursing education to address the increasing complexity of patients in a care setting as they interact with the faculty member. The faculty member has the opportunity incorporate their learning and care experiences into curricular development and change in the academic setting.

ESTABLISHING MEANINGFUL PARTNERSHIPS The AACN–AONE Task Force identified current evidence of four partnership themes: principles, types, benefits, and barriers. Understanding the concepts and strategies underlying these themes is critical to increasing effectiveness and the potential positive impact of academic–practice partnerships. Eight guiding principles identified and endorsed by AACN and AONE (AACN–AONE Task Force on Academic–Practice Partnerships, 2012) provide a useful framework for nurse leaders in academic and practice settings for understanding the development of meaningful relationships (Exhibit 12.1). The ability to establish and sustain effective partnerships is based on shared ­mission, values, and trust. Relationships are built through effective, clear communication and commitment to addressing conflicts collaboratively. Opportunities for moving from contractual affiliations to meaningful partnerships exist from carefully planning initial discussions to evaluating outcomes. However, the efforts involved in developing and sustaining strong collaborative relationships are complex and time-consuming, and often are influenced by personal commitments or changes to individual representation within the organization.

234  ■ III. TEACHING IN LEARNING LABORATORY AND CLINICAL SETTING

EXHIBIT 12.1 AACN–AONE Guiding Principles for Academic–Practice Partnerships 1. Collaborative relationships between academia and practice are established and sustained 2. Mutual respect and trust are the cornerstones of the practice/academia relationship 3. Knowledge is shared among partners 4. A commitment is shared by partners to maximize the potential of each RN to reach the highest level within their individual scope of practice 5. A commitment is shared by partners to work together to determine an e­vidence-based ­transition program for students and new graduates that is both sustainable and cost-effective 6. A commitment is shared by partners to develop, implement, and evaluate organizational ­processes and structures that support and recognize academic or educational achievements 7. A commitment is shared by partners to support opportunities for nurses to lead and develop collaborative models that redesign practice environments to improve health outcomes 8. A commitment is shared by partners to establish infrastructures to collect and analyze data on the current and future needs of the RN workforce Source: American Association of Colleges of Nursing and American Organization of Nurse Executives Task Force on Academic–Practice Partnerships. (2012). Guiding principles. https://www.AACNnursing.org/Academic-PracticePartnerships/The-Guiding-Principles.

An interactive toolkit was developed by AACN–AONE in 2012 and revised in 2015 to guide nursing leaders in the development, growth, and evaluation of ­academic–practice partnerships. The toolkit is available at www.aacnnursing.org/ Academic-Practice-Partnerships/Implementation-Tool-Kit. The toolkit includes specific questions for developing and sustaining partnerships, exemplars of strong academic–practice partnerships, and other resources. The successful implementation of an academic–practice partnership to increase educational capacity requires supportive relationships, goodness of fit, flexibility, and communication (Teel et al., 2011). These themes are described in Table 12.1. In a systematic review of the evidence, Nabavi et al. (2012) identified four stages related to the formation and implementation of academic and service partnerships. The stages, outlined in Table 12.2, are applicable to a variety of partnerships and create a framework for identifying structures, processes, procedures, and outcomes. TABLE 12.1  FOUR THEMES CONTRIBUTING TO SUCCESSFUL IMPLEMENTATION OF PARTNERSHIP Theme

Application Strategy

Supportive relationships

Students, faculty, and preceptors (clinical staff) form a core triad Elements of supportive relationships: ■ Pairing of student and preceptor ■ Orientation of preceptors by faculty ■ Faculty role as advocate between student and preceptor ■ Continuity of clinical rotations in a single clinical agency (continued )

12. Partnerships With Clinical Settings  ■ 235

TABLE 12.1  FOUR THEMES CONTRIBUTING TO SUCCESSFUL IMPLEMENTATION OF PARTNERSHIP (CONTINUED) Theme

Application Strategy

Goodness of fit

Planning for and assessing the innovation for an appropriate “fit” This includes: ■ An organizational culture that values and supports innovation ■ Recognition of vital roles of faculty and preceptors, including various forms of financial support ■ Assessment and identification of potential participants (students, preceptors, faculty) and program components for the best “fit”

Flexibility

The partnership stakeholders recognize: Organizational culture, structure, rules, and needs that will influence partnership ■ Willingness to change ■ Value of feedback from students, faculty, preceptors to adapt and change ■

Communication

Multiple modes of communication foster effective use of resources and information to meet the needs of students, faculty, and clinical partners in the partnerships (printed literature; interviews of students, faculty, and preceptors; websites and portals; email and telephone communication; regularly scheduled face-to-face meetings with all stakeholders

Source: Adapted from Teel, C. S., MacIntyre, R. C., Murray, T. A., & Rock, Z. (2011). Common themes in clinical education partnerships. Journal of Nursing Education, 50(7), 365–372. https://doi.org/10.3928/01484834-2011-429-01.

TABLE 12.2  FOUR STAGES OF FORMATION AND IMPLEMENTATION OF ACADEMIC–SERVICE PARTNERSHIPS Four Stages Mutual potential benefits Discovery of interests or issues which could be served by resources of a partnership

Examples ■ ■

■

■

Nursing workforce shortage Insufficient number of clinical placements to support increasing enrollments Insufficient number of qualified/clinically competent faculty Development of evidence-based practice, including translation of nursing research into practice (continued )

236  ■ III. TEACHING IN LEARNING LABORATORY AND CLINICAL SETTING

TABLE 12.2  FOUR STAGES OF FORMATION AND IMPLEMENTATION OF ACADEMIC–SERVICE PARTNERSHIPS (CONTINUED) Four Stages

Examples

Moving from competitor to collaborator Planning and development of cooperative structural framework that includes: Identification and coalition of stakeholders

Senior leadership from each partner (academic, service, legislative, regulatory agencies) or other stakeholders identify mutual interests and set mission, goals, plans, timelines, and deadlines: ■ Executive/management committee or advisory council

Shared decision or policy making Structure that facilitates interaction between partners

■

■ ■

■

■ ■

Joint practice—Process of cooperation between the academic and service organizations to meet mutual goals

Mutually beneficial outcomes Three realms of benefits to an effective academic–service partnership: 1. Service/practice 2. Education 3. Profession

Task force or working groups formed to promote interaction in a partnership. Focus and activities are to implement mission of partnership and develop methods, including supervision or oversight, identification of roles and responsibilities, framework for decision-making, and training needs across organizations in partnership Development of job descriptions Affiliation agreement and contract auditing Regulatory education and compliance monitoring Preceptor development Continuing education/staff development

New structures and procedures in a partnership bring change to roles and responsibilities for employees in each organization and students (e.g., faculty appointments, models of precepting/supervising students, use of service learning, and IPE) ■

■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Career progression path for clinical nurses into education Clinical nurse job satisfaction Increase in number of clinical faculty Increased educational capacity Supportive learning environments Improved employment and recruitment opportunities

IPE, interprofessional education. Source: Adapted from Nabavi, F. H., Vanaki, Z., & Mohammadi, E. (2012). Systematic review: Process of forming academic service partnership to reform clinical education. Western Journal of Nursing Research, 34(1), 118–141. https://doi.org/10.177/0193945910294380.

12. Partnerships With Clinical Settings  ■ 237

STRUCTURAL FOUNDATIONS OF ACADEMIC–SERVICE PARTNERSHIPS Capacity Management Nursing programs are increasingly under pressure to admit and educate more students quickly, given the demand to ease the nursing shortage and to meet the healthcare needs of an aging population. Yet, even though admission to entry level baccalaureate nursing programs increased by 3.7% in 2018, baccalaureate and graduate nursing programs in the United States turned away more than 75,000 qualified applicants in 2018 to 2019 due to an insufficient number of faculty, clinical sites, classroom space, clinical preceptors, and budget constraints (AACN, 2019a). Similarly, 38% of qualified applicants to associate degree nursing programs in 2018 were turned away (National League for Nursing, 2019b). Although there are limited fiscal capital and human resources, nursing leaders recognize the expertise across education and practice that is needed to address complex challenges in improving patient safety, quality care, and cost-effective outcomes. When determining capacity relevant to preparing nurses, nursing administrators consider the organization’s mission and values, as well as the impact on patient care delivery, patient outcomes, and nursing staff resources. For example, hiring policies related to educational preparation required for nursing positions and accreditation such as Magnet™ have begun to provide the framework for the type of academic degree programs the agency will host. Many decisions to host students in the service agency also consider the time, number of resources needed, including personnel, equipment and space, costs associated with those resources, and the overall number of placement requests from nursing programs. Examples of service agency variables in determining clinical capacity are depicted in Table 12.3. TABLE 12.3  EXAMPLES OF SERVICE AGENCY VARIABLES IN DETERMINING CLINICAL CAPACITY Operational Systems

Clinical Services

Determination and monitoring of affiliation agreements/contracts and associated policies that determine role, responsibilities of the partnership Providing The Joint Commission standards required for orientation of nonemployees, which includes students, related to basic life safety and agency operations/resources Electronic medical record access and medication dispensing systems for student use, which includes training, surveillance of proper use, and troubleshooting resources

Hours of agency operation Types of patient services offered and location of services Opening or closing and expansion of patient care units or services Changing staffing, skill mix, patient acuity, and census levels that reflect productivity metrics and patient outcome indicators Existing and anticipated competency-based education, training, and orientation needs of experienced and newly hired staff Supply levels of PPE Safety for nonemployees in the environment

PPE, personal protective equipment.

238  ■ III. TEACHING IN LEARNING LABORATORY AND CLINICAL SETTING

Service agencies also may examine clinical placement requests in terms of their experience and familiarity with the academic curriculum, model of student supervision used for clinical education, and previous experiences with student performance. Requests for preceptorships are carefully considered by agencies in terms of availability of staff with appropriate credentials and educational background, availability and costs associated with preceptor development courses, and preceptor incentives. The distribution of workload and impact on productivity when clinical staff assume a heavy responsibility for clinical education during a preceptorship is an important factor in determining capacity. Assessment and identification of healthy clinical work environments is another critical consideration. Nurse educators from both academic and practice settings should consider the systems, framework, and practices that support nurses in developing competence to deliver safe and quality patient care across settings and the continuum of care. This is the first step in determining if the clinical unit is appropriate and ready for development of clinical learning experiences and student placements. Nursing programs continue to establish partnerships with ambulatory care, primary care clinics, outpatient care settings, and with community-based sites (refugee centers, day treatment centers, respite care centers, walk-in care centers) to augment student learning experiences. Academic and practice partnerships may use centralized computer or web-based programs to standardize student placement processes. Additional purposes and functions of these programs are to monitor student placement numbers at clinical sites and on units, identify sites and units not being used but with the potential for development to support clinical learning and course objectives, and improve information sharing between nursing programs and service agencies for decisionmaking about current and future needs for clinical placements. Burns et al. (2011) described academic partnership strategies to address the faculty shortage through use of a centralized system to provide job postings, create a centralized faculty candidate pool, and clarify nursing faculty requirements and resources. Use of data derived from placement platforms, including efficacy and quality measurement to drive innovations in clinical education, is an opportunity for further research. Financial models for sustainability of centralized clinical placement platforms are also evolving, with costs shared between academic/service partners or covered through student use fees.

Clinical Affiliation Agreements The clinical practice environment for students is defined through written agreements, jointly designed to benefit both academic and practice partners with ongoing evaluation and continuous improvement (AACN, 2008). The clinical affiliation agreement is a tool used by a healthcare agency and an academic program for provision of clinical learning experiences for students. Exhibit 12.2 lists areas often included in a clinical affiliation agreement. Clinical affiliation agreements typically have multiple clauses that serve to protect the healthcare agency and academic program. It is common for the affiliation agreement to be reviewed by legal counsel, risk management, human resources, and agency and nursing program administration to ensure that all interests are represented. The healthcare agency and academic program both have mandates to provide structure to the affiliation agreement. However, the intent of the partnership is to provide a supportive learning environment and associated clinical experiences

12. Partnerships With Clinical Settings  ■ 239

EXHIBIT 12.2 Content Areas of a Clinical Affiliation Agreement Shared purpose of healthcare agency and nursing program Term period of agreement and renewal Scope of clinical placement Responsibilities of the healthcare agency Responsibilities of the academic program Joint responsibilities Employment status Payment status Insurance, and other provisions

for students. The signature authority to establish an affiliation agreement is determined by the leadership structure of each organization. Although the affiliation agreement provides the framework for clinical learning experiences, it is important to recognize that the collaboration between academic program faculty and representatives from the healthcare agency is critical to the selection of appropriate learning environments and experiences to facilitate achievement of specific learning outcomes. The collaborative effort extends to the determination of the type of student supervision required in the clinical environment or model of clinical instruction used. Affiliation agreements and student placements may also be supported by associated internal policies within the healthcare agency. Policies describe the circumstances under which students may have clinical experiences as part of an academic program. Accountability of agency personnel and students are identified in these policies, which include the steps in the process for clinical placement of students, orientation of students to the agency, and process for determination and evaluation of clinical placements in the agency. Recordkeeping of placements and audits of compliance with aspects of the affiliation agreement are also components of an agency’s policy. Course faculty, students, and nurses interfacing with the students need to be aware of the policies related to the presence of students in the practice setting. Revisiting the policies with appropriate individuals each term can create a clear framework of expectations, responsibilities, and rules related to clinical experiences.

ALLIANCE FOR CLINICAL EDUCATION The Alliance for Clinical Education (ACE) is an example of an academic–­practice partnership with representation of more than 70 nursing schools, healthcare organizations, and professional and regulatory entities in the Denver metropolitan area and surrounding region. The purpose of ACE is to promote collaboration between practice and education in preparing a nursing workforce for the future. The ACE group meets quarterly as a forum to share ideas and information and to make ­recommendations surrounding best practices, community standards, and regulatory compliance, in an effort to provide the optimum clinical student learning ­experiences (Article I of the Alliance for Clinical Education, 2015).

240  ■ III. TEACHING IN LEARNING LABORATORY AND CLINICAL SETTING

This alliance between education and healthcare organizations not only addresses clinical nursing education issues as a primary focus, but also serves as a forum to connect and inform members of initiatives and changes affecting nursing workforce development occurring within individual organizations, the State of Colorado Board of Nursing, the Colorado Area Health Education Councils, the Colorado Center for Nursing Excellence, and the Colorado Nurses’ Association. The ACE bylaws, scope of work, meeting minutes, and documents are open-source materials and can be found at www.coloradonursingcenter.org/center-special-initiatives/ alliance-for-clinical-education-ace.

MODELS OF CLINICAL EDUCATION Quality clinical experiences are intended to provide students with time and opportunity to synthesize professional values and roles, and cognitive and psychomotor skills, into emerging practice competencies. Support of practice outcome competencies, along the education continuum that includes transition into professional practice, should be a shared priority for academic and service partnerships. With a changing landscape of healthcare delivery models and reimbursement, academic and service entities are adding process improvement, research and quality improvement methodologies, and outcomes evaluation into examining the success of their partnerships in preparing the future healthcare workforce (AACN, 2019b; AACN, 2019c; Roach & Hooke, 2019). The boundaries of teaching and learning environments in which partnerships function continue to be challenged by paradigm shifts and innovations. As an example, Petges et al. (2020) present their participatory action research (PAR) model as one that engages participants actively to address the gaps identified by the academic and clinical practice partner. Their model used eight steps to explore and create new learning opportunities for students within nine clinical delivery systems. As an outcome of this work, there were six new academic partnerships with programs and two new academic and practice partnerships. Additionally, Letcher and Nelson (2014) presented their Culture of Caring Model as “shared ownership of the nursing educational enterprise and excellence in nursing practice” (p. 177). The model weaves together the cultural boundaries associated with nursing education and practice, incorporates evidence-based practice to create a teaching–learning culture that aligns education processes with nursing practice as a shared endeavor, and uses the concept of intervention bundling to promote learning in the practice environment (Letcher & Nelson, 2014). Traditionally, the nursing education model in the United States consists of an academic faculty member or clinical nurse educator providing direct supervision of a number of students in the application of knowledge and skills acquired in the classroom, laboratory, or simulation setting to assigned patients (Rhodes et al., 2012). The model includes scheduling students in a patient care setting set days per week; scheduling and rotating students in different healthcare agencies to be exposed to varied patient populations (Sullivan, 2010); and requiring students to complete preclinical preparation work and other learning activities such as journaling. Alternatives to traditional models of clinical education have been developed. Five types of academic–practice partnerships reflecting collaboration and innovation are described.

12. Partnerships With Clinical Settings  ■ 241

Interprofessional Education The need for IPE and core competencies for interprofessional collaborative practice were discussed earlier in Chapter 9. Developing well-functioning teams is a priority because of the complexity of care delivery and need for care coordination among the many providers encountered by a single patient. Interprofessional collaboration focuses on activities that promote integrated models of education and practice among health professions students, including the value of each discipline as a full partner in the delivery and determination of quality and safe patient care. Students learn the professional role and scope of practice of their discipline, and through IPE develop an awareness of other health professional roles and convergence of those roles to achieve the common goal of optimal patient outcomes. IPE may occur in the classroom, through simulation, activities in the clinical setting, or a combination of these throughout health professions programs. Teaching strategies and learning opportunities to reframe relationships and use collaboration, negotiation, and communication skills are foundational in developing interprofessional partnerships as a standard in professional practice. During the implementation of IPE initiatives or associated activities, the clinical teacher may be in a position to renegotiate traditional roles and responsibilities among staff and establish new ways of working that promote interprofessional competencies. EXAMPLE OF IPE AT UNIVERSITY OF COLORADO, ANSCHUTZ MEDICAL CAMPUS

Anschutz Medical Campus of the University of Colorado was intentionally designed to facilitate collaborative IPE among the health science programs of Dental Medicine, Pharmacy and Pharmaceutical Sciences, Nursing, Physical Therapy, Public Health, Physician Assistant, and Medicine. The planning of campus design was purposeful in the desire to bring health professions students closer together in classroom, laboratories, and simulation spaces and create common space and facilities to promote student interaction and socialization. Within the context of IPE, the IPE Council has developed a robust longitudinal curriculum integrating preclinical and clinical training for all of the health profession students. The Interprofessional Practice and Education Development (IPED) curriculum guides learners in developing competencies in teamwork, communication, collaborative interprofessional practice, ethics, values, and quality and safety with an additional focus on vulnerable and underserved populations. The IPE curriculum is shared across all professional health programs and spans a time frame adapted to the 2 to 4 years’ length of health professions programs. Health professions students start the IPED with an orientation to IPE on the first day of class. Students begin their IPED through 16 weeks of classroom team-based learning experiences. Students are placed into interprofessional teams of eight to 14 students and complete a series of specific tasks that are designed to explore roles and responsibilities of different professions and to build teamwork and communication skills. Specific skills developed during through the use of scenarios include: teamwork and collaboration, ethics and values, quality care, and safety. The teams meet every week for 8 weeks over the course of two semesters. Clinical Transformations in Quality and Collaborative Care is the second step in the IPE curriculum. This is a simulation experience for students and takes place in the Center for Advancing Professional Excellence (CAPE), which includes a highfidelity simulation center. During the simulation experience, students undergo

242  ■ III. TEACHING IN LEARNING LABORATORY AND CLINICAL SETTING

training in the Strategies and Tools to Enhance Performance and Patient Safety (TeamSTEPPS) curriculum for clinical communications developed by the Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality (AHRQ) and the Department of Defense (AHRQ, 2007). The simulation experience mimics real-life scenarios found in healthcare. The goal of the simulation is to expose students to complex patient situations in which collaborative care is needed to optimize patient outcomes. The focus of the simulation is communication. Students also learn how to react to situations when unsure of actions to take and use reflection to examine individual and team behaviors to promote quality and safety. The third step in the IPE curriculum, Interprofessional Clinical Integrations (IPCI), builds on previous content and experiences, and allows students to achieve the competencies of the program through authentic clinical experiences. The clinical experiences also meet outcomes for each health profession program and comply with accreditation requirements for each program. The experiences are varied and scheduled within students’ existing program and are in alignment with students’ educational level. Although structured learning activities form the foundation for this step, Clinical Integrations, flexibility as to where and when the activities can be completed has been critical to the success of the IPED.

Peer Teaching and Learning Peer-assisted learning is a well-studied collaborative and cooperative teaching strategy, whereby students are active and equal partners. Peers facilitate learning by providing emotional support and feedback through discussions and assisting with physical skills and tasks (Johnson & Johnson, 2009). Typically, peer-assisted learning is done in small groups to foster interaction and support for learning among members, including ability to provide instant formative feedback (Knight & Brame, 2018). Students reported satisfaction and increased self-confidence with peer teaching (Usman & Jamil, 2019). In another study, Pålsson et al. (2017) found that peer learning improved nursing students’ self-efficacy in clinical practice. Additionally, a systematic analysis of peer-assisted learning by Carey et al. (2018) found that it is present in both structured and informal learning environments and can assist in the reduction of stress and anxiety in learning for nursing students. Peer teaching and learning may also increase student access and involvement in planned learning activities and potentially decrease demand on faculty resources, although faculty supervision is required for peer learning to be effective (Coffman et al., 2020; Cole et al., 2018; Stone et al., 2013; Usman & Jamil, 2019). Other important considerations include determining the types of content and skills that can be accomplished by peer-assisted learning, level of involvement and collaboration with faculty or staff in healthcare agencies, and how to address incompatibility of students.

Service Learning The National Service-Learning Clearinghouse (2016) describes service learning as “a teaching and learning strategy that integrates meaningful community service with instruction and reflection to enrich the learning experience, teach civic ­responsibility and strength communities.” In service learning, students participate in mutually identified activities that benefit the community, and they reflect on these

12. Partnerships With Clinical Settings  ■ 243

activities to “gain further understanding of course content, a broader appreciation of the d ­ iscipline, and an enhanced sense of personal values and civic responsibility” (Bringle & Clayton, 2012, p. 105). Service learning requires a relationship between the academic setting and a community-based agency where both partners establish the need for the activity or service, which is rewarding for partners and students (Taylor & Kahlke, 2017). The activities completed by the students must be clearly connected to course and programmatic outcomes. Use of a reflective process is a component of service learning that differentiates service learning from a volunteer experience (Bennett et al., 2016; Bringle & Clayton, 2012; Brown & Schmidt, 2016). Reflective practices include journaling or participation in structured groups for debriefing. Service learning is linked to increases in student knowledge related to social activism and justice, healthcare equity (Keller, 2019; Lee & Kelley-Petersen, 2018; Warren-Gordon & Graff, 2018), cultural diversity (Bartleet et al., 2019; Conner & Erickson, 2017), and development of leadership behaviors (Foli et al., 2014). Garbarino and Lewis (2020) described the use of service learning in an assistive living facility to meet course outcomes in a gerontology nursing course. They found that students had significant positive changes in attitudes toward older adults as a result of this service learning experience. In response to students’ needs to connect with a community, Thomas and Smith (2017) describe how students developed individual learning objectives, parallel to course objectives, to meet via their community experience. The impact on the community agency was evaluated as positive by the agency, and the students also indicated higher levels of preparation to make a meaningful change in caring for individuals who were marginalized. Other types of clinical experiences that could be reframed as a service-learning model to meet community needs include health screening programs, flu vaccine clinics, wellness programs for underserved populations or the elderly, food delivery programs, friendly visitor programs, attending local legislative sessions pertaining to health policy, and faith-based outreach programs serving specific congregations. In a Delphi process focusing on service learning in nursing, Dombrowsky et al. (2019) determined that service learning, supervised by faculty, can facilitate advocacy and development of awareness of policy issues.

Clinical Scholar Model The clinical scholar model (CSM) originated in 1984 as a joint initiative between the University of Colorado-Anschutz Medical Campus, College of Nursing, and University of Colorado Hospital. The model has expanded in the past three decades to include more than 12 service agencies and over 100 clinical scholars. The service agencies include acute care hospitals, county public health, and mental health and rehabilitation facilities. The financial modeling of the CSM is varied among the service agencies, which correlates with overall student progression and placement needs and the curriculum objectives. Clinical scholars are expert nurses in service agencies who plan and coordinate students’ clinical experiences, teach students, and contribute to the evaluation of their clinical competencies. Additionally, these nurses participate in training, offered by their agency, the academic partner, or an external agency, to introduce them to the concepts related to creating successful student learning experiences within the practice arena.

244  ■ III. TEACHING IN LEARNING LABORATORY AND CLINICAL SETTING

Qualifications and attributes of the clinical scholar include: 1. Expert nurse who exemplifies professionalism and relationship-centered care in practice and conveys a passion for teaching and learning, particularly in the clinical setting 2. An employee of the healthcare agency, with time dedicated to planning, coordinating, teaching, and evaluating student clinical experiences 3. Master’s prepared in nursing 4. Minimum of 5 years experience in a nursing specialty practice and 2 years of employment within the healthcare agency 5. Recruited within the healthcare agency based on experience in practice and as a preceptor 6. Jointly interviewed and selected for hire by the college of nursing and the healthcare agency Clinical scholars are a valued and integral part of clinical education. They coordinate placements and learning experiences, provide consistent instruction and supervision, and contribute to evaluation of students’ clinical competencies. Benefits include streamlined communication, liaison to staff for a smoother integration of students into the clinical setting, consistency of involvement, increased relevance of the clinical experience, and curricular modifications (Preheim et al., 2006; Preheim, 2008). The clinical scholar has a responsibility to treat the student with respect and caring in each interaction. To facilitate the role of the clinical scholar within the context of the course, it is important that the clinical scholar pay attention to collaboration, education, and evaluation. COLLABORATION

In the area of collaboration, the clinical scholar and course faculty meet prior to each term to review the course objectives and outcomes, evaluation criteria, and evaluation process that the clinical scholar and faculty member will complete. They may review the content to be covered in the clinical conferences that are held throughout the practicum. Additionally, the clinical scholar may become engaged in teaching through guest lecturing or teaching in skills or simulation areas. If the scholar teaches in these areas, they need appropriate training in simulation and debriefing protocols. Collaboration also occurs in the practice setting as the clinical scholar confirms that the clinical unit is not only aware of the dates and times for the upcoming student learning experience, but the unit has the census to support student learning. The clinical scholar is expected to collaborate with the clinical staff prior to students arriving to select appropriate patients or areas for student learning experiences. Orientation to the clinical setting should be completed on, or prior to, the first clinical day and should be based on clinical setting guidelines, policies, and procedures. EDUCATION

Education encompasses more than just assigning a student to specific patients with conditions that are relative to course content. The clinical scholar is expected to serve as a professional role model for the students and assist in their socialization

12. Partnerships With Clinical Settings  ■ 245

to the profession, professional behaviors, and interprofessional collaboration. Clear and effective communication between the clinical scholar and students, staff, and course faculty allows them to serve as role models with communication for students. As the clinical education occurs, the clinical scholar interacts with students and staff to understand the clinical decision-making, critical thinking skills, clinical skills, knowledge, and application of these to the patient care experience by the student. The clinical scholar bases clinical conferences on the concepts and content being learned in the course as well as uses reflection to discuss and debrief patient care experiences. EVALUATION

Evaluation of the student performance is done in several ways. There may be an assessment of student knowledge and competencies prior to starting the clinical experience, an assessment at a midpoint, and a final assessment. Other assessments may be incorporated on an as-needed basis to provide feedback to the student. Evaluation is done in collaboration with the course faculty and uses the standardized clinical evaluation tools for the specific course. Additionally, the clinical scholar may evaluate the clinical setting and provide feedback and recommendations to the course faculty related to the appropriateness of the setting for students to meet the course objectives, of the clinical evaluation tool related to current practice, and of the clinical conference topics. The clinical scholar is an important partner in the education of nursing students and is engaged as much as possible in the course. Not only does this demonstrate collaboration between the scholar and course faculty, this also allows for the clinical scholar and course faculty to have realistic expectations of current practices and evaluation of students in the clinical setting. DEDICATED EDUCATION UNITS

The dedicated education unit (DEU) model, developed in the late 1990s at Flinders University of South Australia School of Nursing, is another example of an academic– service partnership. The DEU model is a triad of students, clinical nursing staff, and faculty members. The DEU is designed to provide an optimal learning environment through collaboration of clinical nurses, agency management, and academic faculty (Moscato et al., 2007). The key features of the DEU Model are: 1. The clinical unit is an optimal teaching/learning environment. 2. The primary goal is student achievement of learning outcomes. 3. The DEU is used solely by one nursing program. 4. The commitment to attain an optimal practice environment for students and staff is shared through collaborative work efforts and communication. 5. Staff nurses, who indicate a desire to teach, are prepared for the clinical teaching role, and nursing faculty members from the academic program support the staff nurse in the instructor role. 6. Students are paired with staff nurse, who is in the role of clinical teacher (Moscato et al., 2007). Central to the DEU concept is that staff nurses have a key educational role in students’ knowledge and skill acquisition (Moscato et al., 2007). The model facilitates

246  ■ III. TEACHING IN LEARNING LABORATORY AND CLINICAL SETTING

relationship building between academic and practice settings, supports professional nursing development, and enhances student engagement in the practice setting (DeMeester, 2016; DeMeester et al., 2017; Mulready-Shick & Flanagan, 2014; Nishioka et al., 2014; Rhodes et al., 2012). The DEU model also facilitates teaching and learning of quality improvement and safety competencies while decreasing student anxiety, and building trust and student confidence (Masters, 2015; Rusch et al., 2018). Beyond the traditional acute care medical/surgical unit, the DEU model is also found in diverse patient care settings such as long-term care (Melillo et al., 2014), maternal–newborn units (Raines, 2016), and intensive care (Koharchik et al., 2017). DEUs have increased the capacity of clinical agencies, allowing for increased student enrollments and hosting more students in the practice setting compared to the traditional preceptor model (Hill et al., 2015; Moscato et al., 2013); studies report high student and staff satisfaction with the clinical teaching and learning experience (Rusch et al., 2018). Rhodes et al. (2012) examined the impact of the DEU model on the clinical learning environment. The outcomes included high student satisfaction with their clinical experience, building relationships with DEU nurses that resulted in students’ feeling part of the team, and the opportunity for students to witness patient-centered care. Additional outcomes of DEUs included increased staff nurse satisfaction associated with acknowledgment of their clinical practice expertise, the fostering of teamwork to create a supportive learning environment for students, and sparking interest in nurses to return to school (Fusner & Melnyk, 2019; Jeffries et al., 2013; Rhodes et al., 2012). The DEU agency partners, in other studies, reported reduced orientation time for new graduate nurses with DEU clinical experiences (Sharpnack et al., 2014) and “valuing by staff of students they had educated” (Smyer et al., 2015, p. 296). Plemmons et al. (2018) evaluated three educational approaches to clinical learning: DEU, traditional clinical teaching model, and blended experience using the DEU and a traditional model. They found that the DEU experience promoted professional growth, increased clinical self-efficacy, and improved attitude toward team processes in baccalaureate nursing students. Additionally, there is some evidence of no differences on standardized tests, simulation activities, and classroom tests between students who had the faculty-led model of clinical teaching and students in a DEU (Hendricks et al., 2016; Smyer et al., 2015). Mulready-Shick and Flanagan (2014) identified shifting roles, relationship building, mutual respect, and collaboration between partners as key behaviors and actions for sustaining DEUs. At the unit level, their findings further indicated that the key to sustaining unit DEUs depends on the interest and desire of clinical nurses to teach and to provide support for students’ learning. DeMeester (2016) suggested that nursing program faculty have key roles in the evaluation and sustainability of DEUs through their support of clinical nurses, students, and the multiple processes associated with DEUs. A shift in faculty role includes nurturing clinical nurses as teachers, promoting evidence-based nursing practice through mutual sharing of knowledge and expertise, and facilitating a deeper student clinical learning experience, all within the context of a DEU with its own culture and identity (DeMeester, 2016; Jeffries et al., 2013). Academic–service partnerships are also charged with developing an infrastructure, based on a shared mission and vision, to support all partners involved in the functioning of a DEU. This includes having criteria for matching the clinical unit to learning objectives; selecting clinical nurses as clinical instructors on the

12. Partnerships With Clinical Settings  ■ 247

DEU; scheduling students and clinical nurses and orienting them; having tools to facilitate consistent communication and shared decision-making among students, clinical instructor, and academic faculty member; balancing workloads with unit staffing needs; and identifying evaluation metrics and methods (Glynn et al., 2017; Jeffries et al., 2013; Nishioka et al., 2014). It is important to remember that the goal of the clinical learning environment is to promote clinical reasoning skill development and use in response to actual patient situations. This may call for the development of new and innovative clinical partnerships designed to increase capacity and intentionally use the staff nurse in clinical education.

TRANSITION INTO PRACTICE The successful transition of newly graduated, prelicensure nurses into the practice setting has been a focus of interest for nurse educators and employers for decades. Years ago, Kramer (1974) described the role and values conflict experienced by new nurses as reality shock. Perceived lack of preparation for entry into fast-paced, acute care settings leaves nurses questioning their career choice and impacts safe, quality care delivery. Casey et al. (2011) described the difficulty new graduate nurses have transitioning to acute care settings and the lack of perceived support from the organization. Challenges, including managing multiple patient care assignments, communicating with physicians, and caring for dying patients, were identified by new graduates. Nursing faculty awareness and ability to prepare students for entry into practice through competency development are critical to the transition. Schools of nursing can increase the relevancy of clinical education by involving clinical partners in curriculum development and collaborating in teaching and assessment of learning across classroom and clinical settings. Employers recognize the need for structured and specialized orientation, as well as preceptored experiences to coach and advocate for the new graduate nurse. However, the potential impact on quality and safe patient care, nursing turnover of the new graduate nurse, and impact on the healthcare team suggest that routine efforts to support entry into practice are inadequate. The emergence of transition-to-practice models and accreditation of new graduate nurse residency programs with a focus on a clinical specialty area demonstrate a response to promote quality and safe care and professional identity. A review of the literature reveals a wide range of definitions, purpose, length, content, and structure of transition-to-practice models, nursing orientation, and nurse residency programs. Common barriers to the design and implementation of a transition program are limited resources and lack of evidence of effectiveness. Despite variations of approaches, the significance of the transition-to-practice issue and need for ­innovative and comprehensive models are evident. Examples of transition models include the Vizient/AACN Postbaccalaureate Nurse Residency Program. This is a national program in more than 500 hospitals and health systems and 45 states nationally (AACN, 2020). Additional national, regional, and state models exist to address specific state needs of education and practice reflected by the nursing shortage and imperative for quality, safe, and cost-effective care. On the national level, the Robert Wood Johnson Foundation, in partnership with the Tri-Council for Nursing and AONE, developed the Academic Progression in Nursing program in 2012 to address the need to increase the academic

248  ■ III. TEACHING IN LEARNING LABORATORY AND CLINICAL SETTING

preparation of nurses to 80% having earned a bachelor’s degree or higher by 2020. The program developed and funded statewide models in nine states. At the regional level, the Northeast Region VA Nursing Alliance has been effectively functioning as an academic–practice partnership between the Boston VA healthcare system and six area nursing programs. The partnership has been successful and has grown to include over 15 nursing programs (Glynn et al., 2018).

ROLES OF PARTICIPANTS IN PARTNERSHIPS In any partnership, the value of the education mission must be nurtured and demonstrated first and most fundamentally by the chief nurse officer and nursing school dean or director. The challenge is to establish working relationships through awareness of each other’s needs and goals, develop trust and effective communication patterns, and engage to ensure that affiliations move to meaningful partnerships. After the partnership is established, the value of the partnership should be continuously embraced and cultivated by nurse leaders, faculty, and staff responsible for the planning, implementation, and evaluation. Nursing faculty and agency staff activities influence the relationship and contribute to meeting needs and achieving goals. Roles and responsibilities at each level are important determinants of the effectiveness of the partnership. The nurse educator role is multidimensional, with clear expectations and opportunities relevant to academic–practice partnership development and sustenance. Nurse educator competencies include facilitating learning, promoting development and socialization, using assessment and evaluation strategies, participating in curriculum design and evaluation of program outcomes, functioning as a change agent and leader, pursuing continuous quality improvement in the nurse educator role, engaging in scholarship, and functioning within the educational environment (NLN, 2019a). These were discussed in Chapter 1. Nursing faculty and clinical instructors are responsible in their roles to facilitate readiness for transition into practice. Nurse educators’ understandings of the factors that facilitate or are barriers to effective partnerships are relevant to role development. Similarly, understanding strategies for articulating goals within the formal partnership and developing action plans to attain those goals are key responsibilities of the nurse educator. A vast range of opportunities for effective partnerships and collaboration await faculty from the academic program and nurses at the staff or unit leader level at the clinical agency. Mutual respect, valuing, and investment are demonstrated through presence, engagement, and effective communication among faculty and unit staff. Nurse educators and clinical faculty impact the quality of the partnership through planning and preparation for the student learning experiences with unit managers and staff. Students who demonstrate readiness and professionalism contribute to the development of a meaningful and valued role for the team and delivery of quality and safe care. The appropriate level of student engagement, including expectations for patient assessment, nursing interventions, documentation, and supervision, should be clarified to the team members. Team member roles and responsibilities should be explained to the student. Staff nurses who are prepared for the student’s presence and learning needs and are recognized for their expertise feel valued for their contributions to clinical education. Viewing students as unwanted guests or placements as a commodity become barriers to realizing benefits of the partnership. The relationship of faculty

12. Partnerships With Clinical Settings  ■ 249

and clinical teachers with the nursing staff and nurse leaders at the patient care unit or service level is critical to an effective partnership. Additional evidence of the partnership may be in the form of joint appointments, preceptor training, s­ tudent scholarships, and participation in unit-based or nursing education committees ­relevant to quality and safety, and competency development.

SUSTAINING PARTNERSHIPS The principles outlined in the AACN/AONE documents provide an excellent framework for academic and practice partners to use in the creation of their agreement. Multiple resources are available at www.aacnnursing.org/Academic-PracticePartnerships. Important principles for developing and sustaining a trusting and respectful partnership include a shared mission, vision, and goals. The partnership needs to focus on building on these shared strengths and assets while balancing power between the partners. Norms for communication, processes, roles, and policies need to be carefully delineated and followed. Establishment of routine communication that provides feedback in a timely manner allows for quality improvement changes to occur. Additionally, outcome measures that are mutually agreed on are critical to the evaluation of the partnership. Metrics for evaluating the partnership are available at www.aacnnursing.org/Portals/42/AcademicNursing/AcademicPractice-Partnerships/Table-AACN-AONE-Partnership-Metrics.pdf. It is important to remember that the partnership is a collaborative effort. When it succeeds, everyone succeeds, when the partnership struggles, members need to come together to address issues and recognize that it is not just one partner that has not met expectations, but all share responsibility. Partnerships take time to develop and need planned feedback loops to be successful.

FUTURE OF ACADEMIC–PRACTICE PARTNERHSIPS One of the long-term goals of academic and practice partnerships is to transform clinical education, patient outcomes, and clinical care. This includes partnering with nursing faculty and researchers across both environments. Needlemann et al. (2014) identified that academic–practice partnerships can be successfully leveraged to increase, and retain, the number of faculty teaching in nursing programs. To attain the goal of transforming clinical education and addressing the real-world complexities of healthcare encountered by students, education and practice innovations should be coupled with teamwork and collaboration among health professionals in academic and service organizations. The successful partnership between the University of Hawai’i at Manoa School of Nursing and Dental Hygiene and The Queen’s Health System, started in 2006, is an example of the impact that nursing research can have on nursing practice (Davis et al., 2019). This collaboration led to the establishment of a nursing research fellowship, research opportunities for staff nurses in collaboration with faculty, and translation of nursing research outcomes into practice (Davis et al., 2019). Additionally, Harbman et al. (2017) suggest that the culture of inquiry can flourish when time is protected for researchers, who are providers, provided that there is direct, and consistent access to doctorly prepared mentors and researchers. This research then can impact patient care and patient outcomes. In short, the opportunities to create impactful new and innovative academic practice partnerships is growing.

250  ■ III. TEACHING IN LEARNING LABORATORY AND CLINICAL SETTING

SUMMARY Academic and service partnerships continue to forge innovations in clinical education based on experience, contextual knowledge, and data. These partnerships can be drivers of change for nursing education as we seek to engage students, faculty, clinical staff, and nursing administration to create evidence-based education models. The innovations and changes will require further evaluation by educators and administrators as it relates to curriculum development, additional competencies for practice/teaching, value or cost-effectiveness of the model, and readiness for practice of new graduates. Additionally, long-term sustainability of academic–service partnerships should also be examined.

REFERENCES Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality. (2007). Team STEPPS™: Strategies and tools to enhance performance and patient safety. http://www.ahrq.gov/teamstepps/index.html Alliance for Clinical Education. (2015). By-laws. http://www.coloradonursingcenter.org/ documents/ace/bylaws_042015.pdf American Association of Colleges of Nursing. (2008). The essentials of baccalaureate education for professional nursing practice. Retrieved from http://www.aacn.nche.edu/educationresources/BaccEssentials08.pdf American Association of Colleges of Nursing. (2016). Advancing healthcare transformation: A new era for academic nursing. Author. American Association of Colleges of Nursing. (2018). AACN and AONE join forces to address nursing workforce issues. Author. https://www.AACNnursing.org/News-Information/ Press-Releases/View/ArticleId/21536/aacn-aone American Association of Colleges of Nursing. (2019a). Nursing shortage. https://www .AACNnursing.org/News-Information/Fact-Sheets/Nursing-Shortage American Association of Colleges of Nursing. (2019b). AACN's vision for academic nursing white paper. https://www.AACNnursing.org/Portals/42/News/White-Papers/VisionAcademic-Nursing.pdf American Association of Colleges of Nursing. (2019c). Academic progression in nursing: Moving together toward a highly educated nursing workforce. https://www.AACNnursing .org/Portals/42/News/Position-Statements/Academic-Progression.pdf American Association of Colleges of Nursing. (2020). Vizient/AACN nurse residency program. https://www.AACNnursing.org/Portals/42/AcademicNursing/NRP/NurseResidency-Program.pdf American Association of Colleges of Nursing and American Organization of Nurse Executives Task Force on Academic–Practice Partnerships. (2012). Guiding principles. https://www.AACNnursing.org/Academic-Practice-Partnerships/ The-Guiding-Principles American Association of Colleges of Nursing and American Organization of Nurse Executives Task Force on Academic–Practice Partnerships. (2016). Partnership expectation and outcome matrix. https://www.AACNnursing.org/Portals/42/AcademicNursing/ Academic-Practice-Partnerships/Table-AACN-AONE-Partnership-Metrics.pdf American Association of Colleges of Nursing and American Organization of Nurse Executives Academic–Practice Partnership Steering Committee. (2015). Academic practice partnerships toolkit. Retrieved from http://www.aacn.nche.edu/leading-initiatives/ academic-practice-partnerships/tool-kit Bartleet, B.-L., Bennett, D., Power, A., & Sunderland, N. (2019). Service learning with first peoples: A framework to support respectful and reciprocal learning. Intercultural Education, 30(1), 15–30. https://doi.org/10.1080/14675986.2018.1528526

12. Partnerships With Clinical Settings  ■ 251

Bay, E. H., & Tschannen, D. J. (2017). An academic-service partnership: A system-wide approach and case report. Journal of Nursing Education, 56(6), 373–377. https://doi.org/ 10.3928/01484834-20170518-11 Bennett, D., Sunderland, N., Bartleet, B.-L., & Power, A. (2016). Implementing and sustaining higher education service-learning initiatives. Journal of Experiential Education, 39(2), 145–163. https://doi.org/10.1177/1053825916629987 Bringle, R. G., & Clayton, P. H. (2012). Civic education through service learning: What, how, and why? In L. McIlrath, A. Lyons, & R. Munck (Eds.), Education and civic engagement (pp. 101–124). Palgrave Macmillan. https://doi.org/10.1057/9781137074829_7 Brown, J. M., & Schmidt, N. A. (2016). Service-learning in undergraduate nursing education: Where is the reflection? Journal of Professional Nursing, 32(1), 48–53. https:// doi.org/10.1016/j.profnurs.2015.05.001 Burns, P., Williams, S. H., Ard, N., Enright, C., Poster, E., & Ransom, S. A. (2011). Academic partnerships to increase nursing education capacity: Centralized faculty resource and clinical placement centers. Journal of Professional Nursing, 27(6), e14–e19. https://doi .org/10.1016/j.profnurs.2011.07.004 Carey, M. C., Kent, B., & Latour, J. M. (2018). Experiences of undergraduate nursing students in peer assisted learning in clinical practice: A qualitative systematic review. JBI Database of Systematic Reviews and Implementation Reports, 16(5), 1190–1219. https://doi .org/10.11124/JBISRIR-2016-003295 Casey, K., Fink, R., Jaynes, C., Campbell, L., Cook, P., & Wilson, V. (2011). Readiness for practice: The senior practicum experience. Journal of Nursing Education, 50(11), 646–652. https://doi.org/10.3928/01484834-20110817-03 Coffman, J. M., McConkey, M. J., & Colee, J. (2020). Effectiveness of video‐assisted, self‐ directed, and peer‐guided learning in the acquisition of surgical skills by veterinary students. Veterinary Surgery, 49(3), 582–589. https://doi.org/10.1111/vsu.13368 Cole, J. D., Ruble, M. J., Donnelly, J., & Groves, B. (2018). Peer-assisted learning: Clinical skills training for pharmacy students. American Journal of Pharmaceutical Education, 82(6), 644–648. https://doi.org/10.5688/ajpe6511 Conner, J., & Erickson, J. (2017). When does service-learning work? Contact theory and service-learning courses in higher education. Michigan Journal of Community Service Learning, 23(2), 53–65. https://doi.org/10.3998/mjcsloa.3239521.0023.204 Creech, C., Paulson, J., Andrews, M., & Cooper, D. (2018). Academic partnerships: Preparing nurse practitioners for underserved populations. Nursing Education Perspectives, 39(5), 324–326. https://doi.org/10.1097/01.NEP.0000000000000313 Davis, K. F., Harris, M. M., & Boland, M. G. (2019). Ten years and counting: A successful academic-practice partnership to develop nursing research capacity. Journal of Professional Nursing, 35(6), 473–479. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.profnurs.2019.04.013 DeMeester, D. A. (2016). The lived experience of nursing faculty in a dedicated education unit. Journal of Nursing Education, 55(12), 669–674. https://doi.org/10.3928/ 01484834-20161114-02 DeMeester, D. A., Hendricks, S., Stephenson, E., Welch, J. L. (2017). Student, preceptor, and faculty perceptions of three clinical learning models. Journal of Nursing Education, 56(5), 281–286. https://doi.org/10.3928/01484834-20170421-05 Dombrowsky, T., Gustafson, K., & Cauble, D. (2019). Service-learning and clinical nursing education: A Delphi inquiry. Journal of Nursing Education, 58(7), 381–391. https://doi .org/10.3928/01484834-20190614-02 Foli, K. J., Braswell, M., Kirkpatrick, J., & Lim, E. (2014). Development of leadership behaviors in undergraduate nursing students: A service-learning approach. Nursing Education Perspectives, 35(2), 76–82. https://doi.org/10.5480/11-578.1 Fusner, S., & Melnyk, B. M. (2019). Dedicated education units: A unique evaluation. Journal of Doctoral Nursing Practice, 12(1), 102–110. https://doi.org/10.1891/2380-9418.12.1.102 Garbarino, J. T., & Lewis, L. F. (2020). The impact of a gerontology nursing course with a service-learning component on student attitudes towards working with older

252  ■ III. TEACHING IN LEARNING LABORATORY AND CLINICAL SETTING

adults: A mixed methods study. Nurse Education in Practice, 42, 102684. https://doi.org/ 10.1016/j.nepr.2019.102684 Glynn, D. M., McVey, C., Wendt, J., & Russell, B. (2017). Dedicated educational nursing unit: Clinical instructors’ role perceptions and learning needs. Journal of Professional Nursing, 33(2), 108–112. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.profnurs.2016.08.005 Glynn, D. M., Wendt, J., McVey, C., & Vessey, J. A. (2018). Academic-practice partnership: Benefits and sustainability of the Northeast Region VA Nursing Alliance. Journal of Nursing Education, 57(10), 620–623. https://doi.org/10.3928/01484834-20180921-09 Harbman, P., Bryant, L. D., Martin, M. R., Carter, N., Covell, C. L., Donald, F., … Valaitis, R. (2017). Partners in research: Building academic-practice partnerships to educate and mentor advanced practice nurses. Journal of Evaluation in Clinical Practice, 23(2), 382–390. https://doi.org/10.1111/jep.12630 Hendricks, S., DeMeester, D., Stephenson, E., & Welch, J. (2016). Stakeholder perceptions, learning opportunities, and student outcomes in three clinical learning models. Journal of Nursing Education, 55(5), 271–277. https://doi.org/10.3928/01484834-20160414-06 Hill, R. Y., Foster, B., & Oermann, M. H. (2015). Dedicated education unit model for a transition into practice course. Journal of Continuing Education in Nursing, 46(9), 403–408. https://doi.org/10.3928/00220124-20150821-02 Iseler, J., Wehrwein, T., & Jensen, C. (2019). A model of academic and service partnership focused on the clinical nurse specialist. Journal of Nursing Administration, 49(6), 294–296. https://doi.org/10.1097/NNA.0000000000000755 Jeffries, P. R., Rose, L., Belcher, A. E., Dang, D., Hochuli, J. F., Fleischmann, D., & Walrath, J. M. (2013). A clinical academic practice partnership: A clinical education redesign. Journal of Professional Nursing, 29(3), 128–136. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.profnurs.2012.04013 Johnson, D. W., & Johnson, R. T. (2009). An educational psychology success story: Social interdependence theory and cooperative learning. Educational Researcher, 38(5), 365–379. https://doi.org/10.3102/0013189X09339057 Keller, D. B. (2019). Requisite community engagement for teacher education: A different take on service learning. Athens Journal of Education, 6(2), 93–110. https://doi.org/ 10.30958/aje.6-2-1 Knight, J. K., & Brame, C. J. (2018). Peer instruction. CBE - Life Sciences Education, 17(2), 1–4. https://doi.org/10.1187/cbe.18-02-0025 Koharchik, L., Jakub, K., Witsberger, C., Brooks, K., Petras, D., Weideman, Y., & Antonich, M. G. (2017). Staff nurse’s perception of their role in a dedicated education unit within the intensive care unit. Teaching and Learning in Nursing, 12(1), 17–20. https://doi.org/ 10.1016/j.teln.2016.11.001 Kramer, M. (1974). Reality shock: Why nurses leave nursing. C.V. Mosby. Lee, K. A., & Kelley-Petersen, D. J. (2018). Service learning in human development: Promoting social justice perspectives in counseling. Professional Counselor, 8(2), 146–158. https://doi.org/10.15241/kal.8.2.146 Letcher, D. C., & Nelson, M. L. (2014). Creating a culture of caring. A partnership bundle. Journal of Nursing Administration, 44(3), 175–186. https://doi.org/10.1097/NNA .0000000000000047 Masters, K. (2015). Integrating quality and safety education into clinical nursing education through a dedicated education unit. Nurse Education in Practice, 17, 153–160. https:// doi.org/10.1016/j.nepr.2015.12.002 Melillo, K. D., Abdallah, L., Dodge, L., Dowling, J. S., Prendergast, N., Rathbone, A., … Thornton, C. (2014). Developing a dedicated education unit in long-term care: A pilot project. Geriatric Nursing, 35(4), 264–271. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.gerinurse.2014 .02.022 Moscato, S. R., Nishioka, V. M., & Coe, M. T. (2013). Dedicated education unit: implementing an innovation in replication sites. Journal of Nursing Education, 52(5), 259–267. https://doi.org/10.3928/01484834-20130328-01

12. Partnerships With Clinical Settings  ■ 253

Mulready-Shick, J., & Flanagan, K. (2014). Building the evidence for dedicated education unit sustainability and partnership success. Nursing Education Perspectives, 35(5), 287– 293. https://doi.org/10.5480/14-1379 Nabavi, F. H., Vanaki, Z., & Mohammadi, E. (2012). Systematic review: Process of forming academic service partnership to reform clinical education. Western Journal of Nursing Research, 34(1), 118–141. https://doi.org/10.177/0193945910294380 National League for Nursing. (2019a). The scope of practice for academic nurse educators and academic clinical nurse educators (3rd ed.). Wolters Kluwer. National League for Nursing. (2019b). Biennial survey of schools of nursing, academic year 2017-2018. http://www.nln.org/newsroom/nursing-education-statistics/biennialsurvey-of-schools-of-nursing-academic-year-2017-2018 National Service-Learning Clearinghouse. (2016). What is service-learning? https:// gsn-newdemo2.s3.amazonaws.com/documents/456/original/Definition%20of%20 Service%20Learning.pdf?1308690290 Needleman, J., Bowman, C. C., Wyte-Lake, T., & Dobalian, A. (2014). Faculty recruitment and engagement in academic-practice partnerships. Nursing Education Perspectives, 35(6), 372–379. https://doi.org/10.5480/13-1234 Nishioka, V. M., Coe, M. T., Hanita, M., & Moscato, S. R. (2014). Dedicated education unit: Nurse perspectives on their clinical teaching role. Nursing Education Perspectives, 35(5), 294–300. https://doi.org/10.5480/14-1381 Padilla, B. I., & Kreider, K. E. (2020). Communities of practice: An innovative approach to building academic–practice partnerships. Journal for Nurse Practitioners, 16(4), 308–311. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.nurpra.2020.01.017 Pålsson, Y., Mårtensson, G., Swenne, C. L., Ädel, E., & Engström, M. (2017). A peer learning intervention for nursing students in clinical practice education: A quasi-experimental study. Nurse Education Today, 51, 81–87. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.nedt.2017.01.011 Petges, N., Sabio, C., & Hickey, K. (2020). An academic and clinical practice partnership model: Collaboration toward baccalaureate preparation of RNs. Journal of Nursing Education, 59(4), 203–209. https://doi.org/10.3928/01484834-20200323-05 Plemmons, C., Clark, M., & Feng, D. (2018). Comparing student clinical self-efficacy and team process outcomes for a DEU, blended, and traditional clinical setting: A quasiexperimental research study. Nurse Education Today, 62, 107–111. https://doi.org/ 10.1016/j.nedt.2017.12.029 Preheim, G. (2008). The clinical scholar model: Competency development within a caring curriculum. In M. Oermann (Ed.), Annual review of nursing education: Clinical nursing education (Vol. 6, pp. 3–23). Springer Publishing Company. Preheim, G., Casey, K., & Krugman, M. (2006). Clinical scholar model: Providing excellence in clinical supervision of nursing students. Journal for Nurses in Staff Development, 22(1), 15–22. https://doi.org/10.1097/00124645-200601000-00004 Raines, D. A. (2016). A dedicated education unit for maternal-newborn nursing clinical education. Nursing for Women’s Health, 20(1), 21–27. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.nwh .2015.12.005 Rhodes, M. T., Meyers, C. C., & Underhill, M. L. (2012). Evaluation outcomes of a dedicated education unit in a baccalaureate nursing program. Journal of Professional Nursing, 28(4), 223–230. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.prof.2011.11.019 Ridenour, N. (2009). Clinical education reform: Re-envisioning the workforce. Journal of Nursing Education, 48(8), 419–420. https://doi.org/10.3928/01484834-20090717-01 Roach, A., & Hooke, S. (2019). An Academic-Practice partnership: Fostering collaboration and improving care across settings. Nurse Educator, 44(2), 98–101. https://doi.org/ 10.1097/NNE.0000000000000557 Rusch, L. M., McCafferty, K., Schoening, A. M., Hercinger, M., & Manz, J. (2018). Impact of the dedicated education unit teaching model on the perceived competencies and professional attributes of nursing students. Nurse Education in Practice, 33, 90–93. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.nepr.2018.09.002

254  ■ III. TEACHING IN LEARNING LABORATORY AND CLINICAL SETTING

Sharpnack, P. A., Koppelman, C., & Fellows, B. (2014). Using a dedication education unit clinical education model with second-degree accelerated nursing program students. Journal of Nursing Education, 53(12), 685–691. https://doi.org/10.3928/0148483420141120-01 Smyer, T., Gatlin, T., Tan, R., Tejada, M., & Feng, D. (2015). Academic outcome measure of a dedicated education unit over time. Help or hinder? Nurse Educator, 40(6), 294–297. https://doi.org/10.1097/NNE.0000000000000176 Stone, R., Cooper, S., & Cant, R. (2013). The value of peer learning in undergraduate nursing education: A systematic review. ISRN Nursing, 2013, 930901. https://doi.org/ 10.1155/2013/930901 Sullivan, D. T. (2010). Connecting nursing education and practice: A focus on shared goals for quality and safety. Creative Nursing, 16(1), 37–43. https://doi.org/10.1891/ 1078-4535.16.1.37 Taylor, A., & Kahlke, R. (2017). Institutional logics and community service-learning in higher education. Canadian Journal of Higher Education, 47(1), 137–152. https://doi.org/ 10.4324/9781315136042-4 Teel, C. S., MacIntyre, R. C., Murray, T. A., & Rock, Z. (2011). Common themes in clinical education partnerships. Journal of Nursing Education, 50(7), 365–372. https://doi.org/ 10.3928/01484834-2011-429-01 Thomas, M. H., & Smith, R. S. (2017). Building community engagement: Incorporation of service learning in a nursing curriculum. Nurse Education Today, 52, 63–65. https:// doi-org.proxy.library.umkc.edu/10.1016/j.nedt.2017.01.013 Usman, R., & Jamil, B. (2019). Perceptions of undergraduate medical students about peer assisted learning. Professional Medical Journal, 26(8), 1283–1288. https://doi.org/ 10.29309/TPMJ/2019.26.08.3870 Warren-Gordon, K., & Graff, C. S. (2018). Critical service-learning as a vehicle for change in higher education courses. Change, 50(6), 20–23. https://doi-org.proxy.library.umkc.edu/ 10.1080/00091383.2018.1540817

IV Assessment and Evaluation

13 Assessment Methods Marilyn H. Oermann

OBJECTIVES 1. Compare assessment, evaluation, and grading processes 2. Describe methods for assessment and examples of their use in nursing education 3. Plan assessment methods for varied learning outcomes in a course

INTRODUCTION Through the process of assessment, the teacher collects information about student learning and performance. With this information the teacher can determine further learning needs, plan learning activities to meet those needs, and confirm the outcomes and competencies met by the students. Students assess their own learning and performance, and identify areas in which they need more practice and review. Assessment also provides information on the quality of the teaching, courses, ­practice experiences, curriculum, and other aspects of the educational program. This chapter explains assessment, evaluation, and grading in nursing education. Methods are described for assessing learning, and examples are provided for many of these methods. Tests are a common assessment method used in nursing education, and various types of test items are described in Chapter 14. There is a separate chapter (Chapter 15) on clinical evaluation, and methods such as rating scales are presented in that chapter.

ASSESSMENT Assessment is the collection of information about student learning and performance. Assessment that provides information about the student’s progress in the course and further learning needs is diagnostic: this is feedback for the teacher and students to identify gaps in learning and plan relevant instructional strategies. Assessment also is used at designated times in the course such as at midterm and at the end of the course to confirm the outcomes of learning and determine students’ grades. The data collected through assessment provide the basis for students’ grades. Assessment also provides information about the quality of teaching in the course. At the end of a course, students typically evaluate the effectiveness of the teacher and quality of the instructional methods, feedback to students, interactions with them, availability, and other areas. Students, graduates, and alumni assess the nursing program as part of program evaluation. Other uses of assessment are to select

258  ■ IV. Assessment and Evaluation

students for admission to the educational institution and school of nursing, and placement of students in appropriate courses in the nursing program. There are five principles the teacher should use when assessing student learning: 1. Identify the outcomes, objectives, or competencies to be assessed. Another way of thinking about this is: What is being assessed? The goal in assessment is to determine if students are meeting or have met the intended outcomes, objectives, and competencies. 2. Select appropriate assessment methods. The methods for assessing learning, for example, a test or written assignment, should provide information about the particular outcome, objective, or competency being assessed. 3. Meet students’ needs. The assessment should provide feedback to individual students about their progress in meeting the outcomes and further learning needed. The most important role of assessment is identifying where further learning is needed and planning appropriate strategies to help students learn and improve their performance. 4. Use multiple assessment methods. Decisions about learning and performance are often high stakes, having serious consequences for students, and should not be based on one test or assignment. Multiple assessment methods are needed to provide data for determining if the outcomes of a course were met. 5. Recognize the limitations of assessment when making decisions about students. One teacher-made test, for example, may not be a true measure of the student’s learning about that content. The test may have flaws in its design, and other factors may influence the results (Brookhart & Nitko, 2019).

EVALUATION Evaluation is the process of making judgments about student learning and performance. The teacher analyzes test scores, collects other assessment data, and then makes a value judgment about the quality of learning and performance. There are two types of evaluation: formative and summative. Formative evaluation occurs throughout the instructional process and provides feedback to students (Oermann & Gaberson, 2021). In formative evaluation, the teacher assesses learning, gives prompt and specific feedback to students about gaps in learning and performance and how to improve, and plans further instruction to guide their learning. Giving prompt, specific, and instructional feedback is critical to the learning process and a characteristic of quality teaching. Data collected through formative evaluation should not be graded because this feedback is intended to help students learn. Summative evaluation “summarizes” what students have learned. This is evaluation at the end of a point in time, for example, at midterm and the end of a course, for determining grades.

GRADING A grade is a symbol (A through F, pass–fail) that represents the student’s achievement in a course. Grades are for summative evaluation, indicating how well the student performed in individual assignments, clinical practice, the skills laboratory, simulation, and the course as a whole.

13. Assessment Methods  ■ 259

There are different grading systems that can be used. A common grading ­system is with letters (A, B, C, D, E or A, B, C, D, F), sometimes combined with + and −. Grades also can be represented by percentages (100, 99, 98, …), which, in turn, can be used to assign a letter grade, for example, A = 90% to 100%. There are other grading systems such as Honors (exceptional performance in all areas), High Pass (exceptional performance in most areas), Pass (completely satisfactory performance in all areas), and Fail (unsatisfactory performance), and two-dimensional systems such as pass–fail and satisfactory–unsatisfactory, which are used frequently for grading in clinical courses. The grade is based on the data collected through the various assessment methods in the course. Each of these methods should be weighted in the overall course grade based on the emphasis of the outcomes and content evaluated by them in the course. For example, a unit examination in an adult health nursing course should count more in the course grade than a journal assignment completed once in clinical practice.

NORM- AND CRITERION-REFERENCED INTERPRETATION There are two main ways of interpreting test scores and other assessment data. When tests are scored and papers and other assignments are graded, the result is a number. The number itself, however, has no meaning. For example, if the teacher tells students their scores on a test are 20 or 22, what does that mean? Scores need to be referenced or compared to some standard or to other students’ scores. A score of 22 might be the highest score possible on the test or the highest score among the students who took it. To interpret a score, there needs to be a reference to compare the score against. Test scores and the scores resulting from other types of assessment can be interpreted using norm- or criterion-referenced standards. In norm-referenced interpretation, each student’s score is compared to those of a norm group. The norm group is often other students’ test scores: students who perform better than their peers receive higher scores (Brookhart & Nitko, 2019). Grading on a curve is an example of norm-referenced interpretation. Students’ scores are rank-ordered from highest to lowest, with grades based on where a student’s score falls in the ranking. For example, the top 10% of students might receive an A and the lowest 10% an F. In clinical practice, a tool on which student performance is rated on a scale of below to above average is norm-referenced: each student’s clinical performance is compared to the group of learners. Norm-referenced interpretation does not indicate what a student can and cannot do; it reflects instead if the student’s performance is better or worse than other students in the clinical group (Oermann & Gaberson, 2021). In criterion-referenced interpretation, students’ tests and other scores from an assessment are compared to preset criteria, not to how well they performed in relation to other learners. The grades are based on what the student has learned and can do. With criterion-referenced interpretation, the teacher might indicate the percent of items answered correctly on a test, total score received on a term paper, or competencies met (Miller et al., 2013). In clinical evaluation with criterion-referenced tools, students would be evaluated as to whether they could perform the clinical competencies specified on the tool or have met the outcomes of the clinical course. The competencies are used as the standards for evaluation rather than how other students in the group performed in clinical practice (Oermann & Gaberson, 2021).

260  ■ IV. Assessment and Evaluation

OUTCOMES FOR ASSESSMENT Students need to know what they are expected to learn and the clinical competencies they should develop. Oermann and Gaberson (2021) defined learning outcomes as the knowledge, skills, and values students are to achieve at the end of the nursing program or another point in time. Competencies are more specific statements that lead to achievement of these broader learner outcomes (Scheckel, 2016). Some teachers refer to the outcomes of their courses as objectives—the specific knowledge, skills, and values students should exhibit at the end. Regardless of the labels used in a particular nursing program, the outcomes should be clearly stated and measurable, guiding students in their learning and the teacher in developing the instruction and planning the assessment. The teacher selects assessment methods to determine if students have achieved these learning outcomes and developed the competencies. Outcomes, or objectives, may be written in three domains of learning: they can specify knowledge to be gained (cognitive domain), values to be developed (affective domain), and skills to be performed (psychomotor domain). Each of the domains levels its learning outcomes in a taxonomy. The cognitive domain includes knowledge and higher level cognitive skills. The most widely used cognitive taxonomy has six levels of learning, increasing in complexity: remembering, understanding, applying, analyzing, evaluating, and creating (Anderson & Krathwohl, 2001; Bloom et al., 1956). These are defined in Exhibit 13.1 with an example of an objective written at each level. The taxonomy of the cognitive domain is valuable in planning the assessment because it helps the teacher focus the test item or other assessment method on a particular cognitive level (Oermann & Gaberson, 2021). If the outcome relates to application, the assessment should determine if students can apply what they are learning to a new situation or in a new context. By using the taxonomy, the teacher can avoid assessment methods that focus on recall of facts and memorization when the intended outcomes of learning are at a higher level. The affective domain taxonomy levels values, attitudes, and beliefs from knowing them to internalizing them as a basis for decisions. The psychomotor domain focuses on the development of motor skills and the phases that learners progress EXHIBIT 13.1 Cognitive Domain Taxonomy 1. Remembering: Recall of facts and specific information List two symptoms of heart failure. 2. Understanding: Comprehension and ability to explain material Describe classes of heart failure based on functional capacity. 3. Applying: Use of information in a new situation Apply clinical practice guidelines to care of patients with heart failure. 4. Analyzing: Ability to break down material into its parts and identify the relationships among them Compare psychometric properties of instruments for measuring the quality of life of patients with heart failure. 5. Evaluating: Ability to make value judgments based on internal and external criteria Evaluate the strength of the evidence related to follow-up care of patients with heart failure. 6. Creating: Ability to combine elements to develop a new product Develop plan for managing patients with acute decompensated heart failure.

13. Assessment Methods  ■ 261

through as they gain expertise in skill performance. There are also taxonomies for the affective and psychomotor domains.

ASSESSMENT METHODS Tests are a common assessment method for determining students’ learning in a course and certifying nurses’ knowledge in the clinical setting, for example, competency tests during orientation. While tests are used frequently for assessing students’ learning and determining grades, they are not the only assessment method to be used. Other assessment methods are: papers and other types of written assignments (formal papers, reflective journals, short papers, concept maps, writing-to-learn activities, and others); cases and other types of scenarios; multimedia; electronic portfolios; discussions and conferences; group projects; simulations; standardized patients (SPs); Objective Structured Clinical Examination (OSCE); and self-­evaluation. Some of these are used predominantly for assessment in the classroom or online environment, such as papers and group projects, and others are designed for assessing learning and performance in simulation or a laboratory setting, such as SPs and OSCE.

TESTS A test is a set of items to which students respond in written or sometimes oral format. Tests are typically scored based on the number of correct answers, are administered in the same way to all students, and are usually timed. Tests are used for admission to a college or university and to the nursing ­program. Once admitted, students may take tests to place out of courses in the program. For example, they may have had a genetics course and may not need to take a similar course in the nursing program. Tests also can be used to determine the appropriate level of a course, for example, which statistics course would be best for the student in a PhD in nursing program. In many prelicensure nursing programs, students take tests as they progress through each level and at the end of the program to identify gaps in learning and assess their risk for not passing the NCLEX-RN®. These tests provide feedback to students and faculty for developing a learning plan for students to be successful as they continue through the nursing program, improve their test-taking strategies, and prepare for the NCLEX-RN (Brussow & Dunham, 2018; Emory, 2019; Schlairet & Rubenstein, 2019; SimonCampbell & Phelan, 2016). Another use of tests is for evaluating student learning and performance at the end of a nursing program. Tests used in this way are for program evaluation and accreditation rather than indicating what students have learned in a particular course. The NCLEX-RN and National Council Licensure Examination for Practical Nurses are tests used to validate nurses’ knowledge and competencies to engage in safe and effective practice at the entry level. Certification examinations such as nurse ­practitioner certifications offered through the American Nurses Credentialing Center verify nurses’ knowledge and competencies in a specialized area of practice. There are many types of test items that can be used for assessment of learning in nursing courses. Chapter 14 describes different types of test items and principles for writing each of those items on a test.

262  ■ IV. Assessment and Evaluation

PAPERS AND OTHER WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS Papers and other types of written assignments enable students to search for literature and resources, analyze theories and their application to practice, build their higher level thinking skills, analyze issues and clinical scenarios, and improve writing skills (Oermann & Gaberson, 2021). All too often students complete assignments that are not geared to any particular objective or goal of the course; these assignments may have been in a course for years but are no longer relevant for the aims of the current course. Papers and other types of writing assignments should be carefully selected based on the outcomes of the course. If an objective of a course is to identify resources for evidence-based practice, students could prepare a short paper on reputable websites to search for evidence such as the Cochrane Library, using the Clinical Queries tool in PubMed, and other sources of evidence for use in the practice setting. In this way the paper is designed to assess if students can identify relevant resources for evidence-based practice in nursing—the objective of the assignment. Faculty members should periodically review the papers and other written assignments in courses to confirm that they are still relevant, meet specific outcomes of the course, are not “busywork,” and are not too repetitive. While some repetition is important to develop knowledge and cognitive and writing skills, once students have mastered writing certain types of papers, the teacher might transition to a new assignment. Faculty in a school of nursing should periodically review assignments across courses to ensure that they build on one another.

Formal Papers Students at all levels of nursing education need to write effectively, but many students lack these skills. Term papers and other types of formal papers, which include drafts, feedback from the teacher on the substance of the paper and the writing style and quality, and revisions based on that feedback, enable students to develop their writing ability. This process of preparing a draft and then rewriting it is critical to improve writing skill (Oermann et al., 2015; Oermann & Gaberson, 2021). Because formal papers are difficult for students to write, and time consuming for faculty to provide feedback, the paper can be divided into smaller assignments that build on one another. Hampton (2019) studied the use of writing development strategies in a doctor of nursing practice program over a 5-year period. One of the strategies used frequently was a multistep assignment, a paper divided into building block assignments with feedback provided to students on each part. For example, students might be assigned to write a paper on quality improvement as related to the focus of the course. Students might first prepare a short paper on a problem they identified in the clinical setting related to patient safety or quality care and data they examined to support that problem. The next assignment might be a literature review on the problem and related interventions that have been used to improve quality of care. The third assignment might be a proposal for a quality improvement project and how it would be implemented on the unit. With this strategy feedback is given to students on individual sections, which students can revise and resubmit as they go along. Feedback is typically provided in writing on assignments; however, written comments can be enhanced or replaced with audio and interactive video feedback and through other digital technologies such as screencasts (Bradshaw, 2020; Madson, 2017; Seckman, 2018).

13. Assessment Methods  ■ 263

There are many types of formal papers students can write in a course, such as term papers, research proposals, literature and other types of reviews, and papers analyzing theories and their application to patient care, among others. Exhibit 13.2 lists examples of formal papers for assessment in a nursing course.

Reflective Journals Reflective journals encourage students to reflect on their clinical and other experiences and think critically about them. These journals also provide opportunities to better understand patients’ perspectives and the clinical environment, reflect on one’s own responses, develop clinical judgment skills, and cope with the stress of an unexpected clinical situation (Bussard, 2015; Hwang et al., 2018; Nelms Edwards et al., 2019). For assessment, journals allow faculty to provide feedback and respond to possible difficulties students might be encountering in the clinical setting. While some teachers assess journals for summative evaluation and grading, when the aim of the journal is to reflect on experiences and gain meaning from them, journals should be used for feedback purposes only and not graded.

Short Papers Another type of written assignment for assessment is a short paper that focuses on a specific content area or outcome (Oermann et al., 2015; Oermann & Gaberson, 2021). For example, students might write a one-page paper that compares two similar patient problems and how to differentiate them in an assessment; a paragraph that describes using SBAR (Situation, Background, Assessment, and Recommendation) for bedside handoff; and a two-page paper that examines ­nursing interventions and supporting evidence for a patient with a particular health problem. Short assignments provide an opportunity for teachers to give quick feedback on students’ knowledge, higher level thinking skills, and sometimes also writing skills. Short assignments can be completed by students individually or as a small group activity, and can be used for formative and summative evaluation.

EXHIBIT 13.2 Examples of Formal Papers for Assessment Term paper Research paper and development of research proposal Literature, integrative, and other types of reviews Paper in which students critique and synthesize evidence and report on its application to clinical practice Paper analyzing concepts and their use in patient care Paper comparing different interventions and evidence base Concept analysis paper Critical analysis paper in which students analyze issues, compare options, and develop arguments for a position Analysis of a clinical case with written rationale Reflective journal Source: Adapted from Oermann, M. H., & Gaberson, K. B. (2021). Evaluation and testing in nursing education (6th ed., pp. 162–163). Springer Publishing Company. Reprinted with permission of Springer Publishing.

264  ■ IV. Assessment and Evaluation

Concept Maps In a concept map, students illustrate how concepts relate to one another. In clinical practice, concept maps can help students plan their care for a patient, organize information, and visualize how the assessment data, problems, treatments, medications, and other information are interrelated. Students can develop a concept map as part of their planning for clinical practice and then revise the map after caring for the patient. Concept maps also enable students to apply theory to practice, gain new knowledge, and improve critical thinking (Jaafarpour et al., 2016; Kaddoura et al., 2016; Mammen, 2016). A systematic review and meta-analysis suggested that concept maps could improve students’ critical thinking affective dispositions and cognitive skills (Yue et al., 2017). While concept maps are typically assessed for formative purposes, they also can be graded especially if students are asked to explain the relationships among concepts in the map. An example of a concept map is in Figure 13.1. ASSESSMENT DATA Changes seen on 12-lead EKG Smoker, hypertension, obesity, hyperglycemia, hyperlipidemia, high-stress job, sedentary lifestyle

• Vital signs: HR, BP, RR, T, SpO2, continuous ECG to detect dysrhythmias. • Assess for warm or cool skin, color, capillary refill, peripheral pulses. • Auscultate heart for cardiac murmur or new S3 or S4. • Auscultate breath sounds plus crackles and wheezes. • Observe for breathlessness and frothy pink sputum (pulmonary edema). • Ask patient, family, significant others for relevant history.

New murmur may indicate rupture of papillary muscle, severe damage, impending heart failure, and pulmonary edema.

Bradycardia, bundle branch blocks, heart blocks, heart failure, pulmonary edema, and cardiogenic shock

Ri Fac sk tors

ST-segment elevation > 0.1 mV in two contiguous precordial leads, new LBBB with onset of symptoms < 12 hours ago

ACUTE LATERAL WALL ST-SEGMENT ELEVATION (STEMI) MYOCARDIAL INFARCTION

Confirm diagnosis with cardiac biomarkers Physical Assessment

64-year-old David Hunt admitted to ICU; STEMI receiving thrombolytics.

Early detection to

Creatine kinase–muscle/brain (CK-MB) and troponin I or troponin T are elevated.

Reperfusion with IV fibrinolysis within 30 minutes of arr ival

NURSING INTERVENTIONS Increase supply and decrease the demand

Save the Life of the Cardiac Before administration, rule out contraindications including stroke or cognitive defects, facial trauma, uncontrolled HTN.

for to or nit ons Mo licati p com

PRIORITY NURSING DIAGNOSIS

#1

DIAGNOSTIC CONFIRMATION

Decreased cardiac output R/T alterations in preload, afterload, contractility, and/or heart rate

PATIENT OUTCOMES

The patient will: 1) Have cardiac output within normal range to maintain tissue perfusion. 2) Be pain free. 3) Have adequate coping skills to deal with situational crisis. 4) Demonstrate adequate knowledge of disease management.

• Provide O2 to maintain O2 sat > 90%, elevate HOB. • Monitor VS and hemodynamics for ongoing cardiac evaluation. • Fluid management: urine output, I/O, daily weight, IVs. • Continuous cardiac monitoring, antidysrhythmics as needed. • Administer nitroglycerin immediately. • Provide morphine for pain relief. • Monitor for signs of bleeding, especially for fibrinolytic therapy. • Assess for signs of continued ischemic pain. • Positive inotropic meds (dobutamine, dopamine, milrinone). • Early beta-blockade and ACEI therapy. • Bed rest, reposition and frequent skin assessment, bedside commode when stable, stool softeners.

FIGURE 13.1 Example of a concept map. Source: Developed by Deanne A. Blach, MSN, RN, 2017. Reprinted with the permission of Deanne A. Blach, 2020.

13. Assessment Methods  ■ 265

WRITING-TO-LEARN ACTIVITIES Writing activities in which students think about course content, reflect on their learning, and raise questions about the content are often referred to as writingto-learn activities. These are short, informal, and frequently impromptu (WAC Clearinghouse, 2020). They can be used for assessment but should not be graded. For example, at the end of an online session or in-class presentation, the teacher may ask students to list content about which they have questions, summarize a key learning from the class or their readings, define a term they learned in class or an online module, or write a few sentences about how the class compared to their readings. With these short writing activities, students can self-assess where further learning is needed, and teachers can provide feedback to individual students and the class as a whole. These types of writing activities for learning are not intended to improve students’ writing skills.

OTHER WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS There are many other written assignments that can be developed to assess student learning and writing ability. Students can prepare summaries of readings and their implications, analyze scenarios with a rationale supporting their analysis, prepare nursing care plans, develop discharge and follow-up plans, write up assessments, analyze quality and safety issues in the healthcare setting, and evaluate interactions, among others. Depending on the type of assignment, they can be assessed formatively or graded.

ASSESSMENT OF PAPERS AND OTHER WRITTEN ASSIGNMENTS For any written assignment, the teacher needs to have specific criteria for assessment, which should be shared with students prior to beginning the paper. The criteria depend on the type of assignment. For formal papers, the quality and comprehensiveness of the content, use of relevant and current literature, organization of the paper, writing style, and reference style would be considered. For other types of written assignments, some of these criteria would not be appropriate. The teacher should develop a rubric for evaluating the paper. A rubric is a scoring guide, specifying the criteria to be assessed and points allotted to each criterion. Students should have the rubric ahead of time so they can prepare the paper accordingly. A rubric is useful for both instructional purposes and assessment because it guides students in writing the paper and teachers in assessing it (Brookhart & Nitko, 2019). Table 13.1 provides an example of a rubric for scoring a written assignment in a nursing course. Following are principles for assessing papers and other written assignments: 1. Written assignments should be planned to guide students in meeting specific outcomes of the course, and the criteria for assessment should address those outcomes. 2. The number of required papers in a course should be reasonable, based on the outcomes to be met, and consider the number of drafts to be submitted with teacher feedback.

266  ■ IV. Assessment and Evaluation

TABLE 13.1 RUBRIC FOR SCORING WRITTEN ASSIGNMENT Sample Scoring Rubric for Term Papers and Other Written Assignments CONTENT Content relevant to purpose of paper, comprehensive and in depth 10  9  8 Content accurate 10  9  8 Sound background developed from concepts, theories, and literature 20–15 Current research synthesized and integrated effectively in paper 10  9  8

Content relevant to purpose of paper

7  6  5  4 Most of content accurate 7  6  5  4 Background relevant to topic but limited development 14–7 Relevant research summarized in paper

7  6  5  4

Some content not relevant to purpose of paper, lacks depth 3  2  1 Major errors in content 3  2  1 Background not developed, limited support for ideas 6–1 Limited research in paper, not used to support ideas

3  2  1

ORGANIZATION Purpose of paper/thesis well developed and clearly stated 5 Ideas well organized and logically presented, organization supports arguments and development of ideas 10  9  8 Thorough discussion of ideas, includes multiple perspectives and new approaches 10  9  8 Effective conclusion and integration of ideas in summary 5

Purpose/thesis apparent but not developed sufficiently 4  3  2 Clear organization of main points and ideas

7  6  5  4 Adequate discussion of ideas, some alternate perspectives considered 7  6  5  4 Adequate conclusion, summary of main ideas 4  3  2

Purpose/thesis poorly developed, not clear 1 Poorly organized, ideas not developed adequately in paper

3  2  1 Discussion not thorough, lacks detail, no alternate perspectives considered 3  2  1 Poor conclusion, no integration of ideas 1 (continued )

13. Assessment Methods  ■ 267

TABLE 13.1 RUBRIC FOR SCORING WRITTEN ASSIGNMENT (CONTINUED) WRITING STYLE AND FORMAT Sentence structure clear, smooth transitions, correct grammar and punctuation, no spelling errors

Adequate sentence structure and transitions; few grammar, punctuation, and spelling errors

10  9  8

7  6  5  4

Professional appearance of paper, all parts included, length consistent with requirements

Paper legible, some parts missing or too short/ too long considering requirements

5

4  3  2

1

References used appropriately in paper but limited, most references current, some citations or references with errors and/or some errors in APA style for references

Few references and limited breadth, old references (not classic), errors in references, errors in APA style for references

4  3  2

1

References used appropriately in paper, references current, no errors in references, correct use of APA style for references

5

Poor sentence structure and transitions; errors in grammar, punctuation, and spelling 3  2  1 Unprofessional appearance, missing sections, paper too short/ too long considering requirements

Total Points _______ (sum points for total score) APA, American Psychological Association. Source: Adapted from Oermann and Gaberson (2021, pp. 167–168). Reprinted with permission of Springer Publishing.

3. Written assignments should foster students’ higher level thinking about the content rather than summarizing what they read unless summarizing was the objective of the assignment. 4. The directions about the purpose and format of the paper should be clear, students should know the dates when drafts and the final paper are due, and they should have the rubric ahead of time. 5. In evaluating papers in which students analyze issues, the criteria should focus on the rationale for the position, not the specific position. 6. The teacher should read papers anonymously (to avoid potential bias); read each paper twice before scoring (to gain an overview of how students approached the topic, as the rubric may need to be modified if no students addressed a particular content area); and grade papers in random order (to avoid bias, as papers read first may be scored higher than those at the end). 7. If unsure about a grade on a paper or other assignment, the teacher should have a colleague read the paper, also anonymously (Oermann & Gaberson, 2021).

268  ■ IV. Assessment and Evaluation

CASES Cases—clinical and other scenarios that students analyze and answer questions about—allow students to apply concepts and readings to clinical situations, identify patient needs and interventions, and explore varying perspectives. With cases students can think through how they would approach a problem and weigh alternate possible actions. Cases develop students’ clinical judgment, problem-solving, and decision-making skills and help them engage in higher level learning (Cleveland et al., 2015; Hensel & Billings, 2020; Hong & Yu, 2017; Oermann et al., 2018; Vacek & Liesveld, 2020). Cases also are appropriate for assessing those outcomes. Cases typically present a clinical scenario that integrates various concepts, followed by questions about that scenario. Hensel and Billings (2020) recommended including multiple pieces of information in the scenario. Often the scenarios are short to avoid directing students’ thinking in advance. Questions can ask students what they noticed in the situation, to decide what is likely wrong with the patient, to propose actions that are appropriate or if no actions are needed, and to reflect on how patients might respond to those actions. Shellenbarger and Robb (2015) suggested adding podcasts, images, video clips, and other visuals to the scenario. This adds reality to the case and often engages students more in its analysis. Unfolding cases simulate a changing scenario similar to what might occur in actual clinical practice. With this method the case unfolds to reveal new information about the situation. With unfolding cases students can make decisions about the relevance and meaning of the new information added to the case, and as a group or individually decide on actions to take. Case studies are longer and provide background information about the patient, family, community, or other context. In their analysis of a case study, students can cite related literature and provide a rationale for their analysis and any decisions they made. Cases can be analyzed by students individually or in small groups in class, online, or in postclinical conferences. Discussions about the case expose students to other possible approaches and perspectives that they may not have identified themselves. With this method, the teacher can provide feedback on the content and thought process used by students to arrive at their answers. Typically, cases are used for instruction and not for grading. However, if the teacher wanted to grade student responses to cases, they would be evaluated similarly to a written assignment or an essay item (establishing criteria for grading, developing a rubric, scoring answers to the questions using the rubric, and following other principles for scoring essay items). Exhibit 13.3 provides an example of a short integrative case, an unfolding case, and a case study.

MULTIMEDIA FOR ASSESSMENT Short segments of a digital recording, a video from YouTube, and other media clips can also be used for assessment. Rather than describing a case in print form, the scenario can be visualized in a media clip. These can be used in class to explore if students can apply their learning to the scenario in the multimedia, placed online for student analysis individually or in groups, and used in place of a written case or case study. Media clips allow students to visualize the clinical situation and get a sense of what the experience is like for patients, families, and providers. Questions

13. Assessment Methods  ■ 269

EXHIBIT 13.3 Examples of Cases for Assessment CASE Your patient fell at home and was admitted yesterday with a hip fracture. She is scheduled for surgery today. At shift report the nurse says the patient had lab work done on admission, but she does not know the results. Later you find that the patient’s hemoglobin is 5.0 g/dL and hematocrit is 16%. 1. What were unsafe practices in this situation? 2. Which National Patient Safety Goals were not met? What are the implications of this situation for the patient’s care? 3. What should have been done? UNFOLDING CASE Your 93-year-old patient in a long-term care facility has a Stage I pressure ulcer at her sacrum. The patient is also coughing and tells you she is too weak to get out of bed for lunch. 1. Describe what the pressure ulcer would look like. What other data should you collect? Why? 2. Develop a plan of action for this patient, with a rationale. The following day the patient is coughing more, has shortness of breath, and is more fatigued. A nurse tells you in report it looks like the patient has a blister on her sacrum. 1. What does this new information mean? 2. What are possible problems of this patient? List them in priority and provide a rationale for your prioritization. 3. What information will you report to the nurse at handoff using SBAR? The patient’s daughter comes to find you on the unit and tells you she is angry that a nurse moved her mother to a chair. 1. What would you say to her? Why? 2. How can you provide patient-centered care in this situation? 3. If the patient’s pressure ulcer is worsening, what observations would you expect to make? Based on those observations, what interventions should be implemented now? CASE STUDY A patient comes to the ED with severe abdominal pain and diarrhea. The patient has lost 12 pounds in the past 2 weeks and has no appetite. The nurse does not detect any masses, but there is abdominal tenderness and pain. The patient’s wife indicates the patient has been healthy except for this “flu,” which has lasted for 2 weeks. She says the patient travels frequently and was recently in Portugal and Canada. The patient does not smoke or drink alcohol. The wife explains that last year the patient was treated for depression but is fine now and has no prior health ­problems. They have two children, and the grandparents are currently watching them. 1. What are possible problems that the patient might have? What information in this case supports your tentative problem list? 2. List two questions you would ask the wife next and explain why this information is important. 3. What laboratory tests would you expect to be ordered? Why? 4. Add laboratory values to the case and discuss with a peer how that information would influence decisions about the patient’s problems or treatments.

270  ■ IV. Assessment and Evaluation

can be developed by the teacher related to the multimedia for students to answer, either for formative or summative purposes.

ELECTRONIC PORTFOLIO In an electronic portfolio, students collect materials they have developed in the course that provide documentation that they have met the course outcomes. For clinical courses the materials and projects in the portfolio demonstrate students’ clinical knowledge and competencies. Portfolios are valuable for assessment because they contain the evidence for judging if students have met the outcomes of the course. Portfolios also are valuable for program evaluation: students can document their achievement of program outcomes and competencies in a portfolio (Willmarth-Stec & Beery, 2015). Portfolios developed for a course or nursing program can be used later for job applications and career development. Nurses can continue to add materials and documentation of their accomplishments to their portfolios. In this way the portfolio represents the continued development of one’s expertise and accomplishments over a period of time. Portfolios also are used for faculty members to present their accomplishments as educators. The portfolio includes materials or artifacts developed for students and for a course that demonstrate the teacher’s expertise and innovations in teaching, which would not be apparent on a curriculum vitae. A teaching portfolio can be used for formative evaluation (to improve one’s teaching) or summative evaluation (for a promotion or tenure review). There are two types of portfolios: best work and growth (Brookhart & Nitko, 2019). Best-work portfolios contain examples of students’ “best” products of learning; when used for assessment, these products provide evidence that students have met the outcomes of the course. Growth portfolios are portfolios in process for faculty to provide feedback to students (formative evaluation) and for students to reflect on their progress in the course or program. The contents of the portfolio depend on the course outcomes to be assessed. Students can select papers and projects they completed in the course, group projects, self-reflections on clinical and other experiences, and other products they developed that demonstrate their learning and achievement. When portfolios are graded, a rubric should be used for the evaluation. Although portfolios can be prepared and submitted as hard copies, most portfolios are electronic. With an electronic format, they can be updated, stored, and shared more easily with others, and students can include multimedia and links to documents. There are many free software programs that students can use to develop an electronic portfolio

DISCUSSIONS AND CONFERENCES Discussions are an exchange of ideas between two or more people (Oermann et al., 2018). These are often informal but may also be planned discussions about a particular topic. In a discussion the teacher can assess students’ knowledge of a topic, explore decisions made and the reasoning underlying those decisions, and provide feedback to learners. Open-ended questions rather than ones answered

13. Assessment Methods  ■ 271

with a “yes–no” response encourage students’ higher level thinking and promote discussion about alternate perspectives and approaches. Questions are an effective method for assessing students’ thinking and clinical judgment because the teacher can ask them to discuss options they considered and explain how they arrived at their decisions. Socratic questioning, which are guided questions to promote critical thinking about a topic and explore complex ideas, may also improve nursing students’ moral reasoning and ethical decision-making (Torabizadeh et al., 2016). These types of questions in a discussion provide a way for educators to assess how students think through ethical issues particularly in clinical situations. The teacher should recognize, though, that students may answer questions in a discussion focused on ethics and values consistent with what is appropriate professionally, which may not reflect their true feelings and values. Questions should be sequenced from a low to a high level. The teacher can begin with factual questions to assess students’ knowledge and understanding, and then can explore the process used to think through a situation, analyze problems, and arrive at actions to take. The learning environment has to one that values discussion about alternate views so students are comfortable in sharing their thinking. Merisier et al. (2018) emphasized that finding the correct answer is not the most important part of questioning, but instead the focus should be on the rationale. An advantage of using questions for assessment is the teacher can carefully plan them to lead students through the clinical judgment process and share their thinking about the data, significant cues, potential problems, multiple interventions that might be used, and outcomes to evaluate. Conferences are planned discussions on a topic. These include pre- and postclinical conferences, interprofessional conferences, and other types of seminars in which the student participates. In a conference, students can develop their oral communication skills and ability to lead and engage others in a discussion. They can complete written assignments and get peer feedback and can work as a group to plan care of a patient or resolve an issue in clinical practice. Although most clinical conferences are face-to-face with the teacher or preceptor, these conferences can be done online after the clinical practicum. Berkstresser (2016) recommended shifting postconferences to an online format. In an online conference, students may be more willing to discuss issues they encountered in the clinical setting than in a face-to-face conference. Hannans (2019) explored asynchronous online postclinical conferences and found that students benefited from time for reflection and participated more equally in the discussion. Assessment of student participation in a conference is typically best for formative evaluation because the teacher can provide feedback to students as a group and individually during the discussion. This feedback can encourage students to consider other points of views and think more broadly about a topic. The teacher also can clarify any misunderstandings and share how the teacher would analyze a situation and arrive at a decision. However, conferences can be evaluated for summative purposes, including how well a student led a conference and the quality of students’ participation in it. If conferences are assessed for grading purposes, specific criteria need to be established and shared with students prior to their leading or participating in the conference. These criteria include how well the student led the group discussion, presented ideas to the group, and encouraged peers to participate in the discussion. The criteria should also address the leader’s knowledge of the topic and preparation for the conference.

272  ■ IV. Assessment and Evaluation

GROUP PROJECTS Group projects encourage cooperative learning and development of skills in teamwork and collaboration. Monsivais and Robbins (2017) suggested that group projects allowed students to create final products that were more complex than an individual student might develop. Some group projects are short term with students meeting in class, online, or out of class for the time it takes to develop the product, such as a poster or group presentation. Other groups, however, are long term, for example the length of the course for cooperative learning purposes. With either type of group, the group product and individual student participation in the group can be assessed. The difficulty with group projects is grading them, and varied strategies can be used. One strategy is to give a group grade—all students in the group get the same grade for the project regardless of the contributions and quality of the work of individual students in the group. Another strategy is for each student to describe what they did as part of the group project, with the teacher evaluating these individual parts and assigning each student a separate grade. The grade for the group project might be only the individual student’s score, or a group grade can be given in addition. One final strategy is for students to prepare both a group and an individual product, both of which are graded. When group projects are assessed, the teacher needs a rubric developed specifically for evaluating that project (Brookhart & Nitko, 2019). The rubric should include criteria related to the substance of the group project and also to the process of working as a team. The rubric in Exhibit 13.4 was designed to evaluate a group presentation of an assignment in which students explored the literature to answer a selected clinical question. The rubric includes criteria on the substance of the project, for example, the literature review and synthesis of the findings, the quality of the presentation, and how well the students actively engaged the audience in the discussion.

SIMULATIONS Chapter 8 examines the use of simulations in nursing curriculum and teaching. With simulations students can analyze scenarios, make decisions about problems and actions to take, carry out interventions, demonstrate techniques and skills, and ­evaluate the effects of their decisions. In simulations students can engage in the ­ deliberate practice of skills, improving their performance. Simulations provide for  learning and practice both individually and as a team (intra- and interprofessional). Simulations are valuable not only for instructional purposes; they also can be developed for assessment of competencies. They can be used for both formative and summative evaluation. For formative evaluation, in the debriefing s­ession teachers can provide feedback to students to further develop their clinical judgment and reflective thinking skills (Bussard, 2018; Chmil et al., 2015; Fey & Jenkins, 2015; Manetti, 2018; Victor, 2017). The debriefing provides an opportunity to explore different perceptions of what occurred in the simulation, link theory to the experience, examine actions taken or not taken and other possible approaches, and analyze each

13. Assessment Methods  ■ 273

EXHIBIT 13.4 Rubric for Evaluating a Group Presentation of an Assignment Criteria

Failure (0)

Poor (10–15)

Fair (16–17)

Excellent (18–20)

Organization

Presentation is highly disorganized. Some members lack contribution. Presentation is lacking in logical progression. No transitional language is used between presenters.

Presentation is disorganized. Presenters contribute at varying lengths and levels. Some members demonstrate lack of preparedness. Presentation is lacking in logical progression. Poor transitions occur between presenters.

Presentation is fairly organized. Presenters contribute at varying lengths or levels. Most members demonstrate preparedness. Presentation is fairly logical in progression. Fairly smooth transitions occur between presenters.

Presentation is highly organized. Presenters contribute equitably and demonstrate preparedness. Presentation exhibits flow, and material is presented in a logical progression. Smooth transitions occur between presenters.

Failure (0)

Poor (25–39)

Fair (40–44)

Excellent (45–50)

Literature review is weak or incomplete. Content is inaccurate or unclear. No conclusions presented.

Presents a poor review of the literature. Content is inaccurate at times. The area of exploration lacks clarity or key pieces of literature. Conclusions are inaccurate.

Presents a fair review of the literature. Lists findings. Content is mostly accurate. A basic exploration of the area is presented. Conclusions are mostly accurate.

Presents a thorough review of the literature. Accurately synthesizes findings. In-depth exploration of the area is presented with supportive evidence. Conclusions are accurate.

Content: Synthesis of Literature Review

Score

Score

(continued )

274  ■ IV. Assessment and Evaluation

EXHIBIT 13.4 Rubric for Evaluating a Group Presentation of an Assignment (continued)

Creativity and Engagement

References and APA Format

Failure (0)

Poor (10–15)

Fair (16–17)

Excellent (18–20)

Audience is not engaged. No evidence of creativity. Provides no activities, handouts, or supportive materials to educate peers.

Engages audience on rare occasion. Minimal use of creativity exhibited. Provides a somewhat relevant handout to educate peers.

Engages audience on occasion. Demonstrates elements of creativity in the presentation. Provides a relevant activity or handout to educate peers.

Actively engages audience. Provides creative, appealing, and relevant activities, handouts, or other supportive ways of educating peers.

Failure (0)

Poor (5–7)

Fair (8)

Excellent (9–10)

References are not mentioned.

Reference list presented with many errors in APA 7th edition format. In-text citation missing. Uses less than five current references (